GEK-113562N

GEK-113562N
GE
Grid Solutions
339
Motor Protection System
Motor protection and control
Instruction manual
339 revision: 1.7
Manual P/N: 1601-9103-AE
GE publication code: GEK-113562N
E83849
*1601-9103-AE*
LISTED
IND.CONT. EQ.
52TL
© 2015 GE Multilin Incorporated. All rights reserved.
GE Multilin 339 Motor Protection System instruction manual for revision 1.7.
339 Motor Protection System, EnerVista, EnerVista Launchpad, and EnerVista SR3 Setup
are trademarks or registered trademarks of GE Multilin Inc.
The contents of this manual are the property of GE Multilin Inc. This documentation is
furnished on license and may not be reproduced in whole or in part without the permission
of GE Multilin. The content of this manual is for informational use only and is subject to
change without notice.
Part number: 1601-9103-AE (December 2015)
Storage
Store the unit indoors in a cool, dry place. If possible, store in the original packaging. Follow
the storage temperature range outlined in the Specifications.
To avoid deterioration of electrolytic capacitors, power up units that are stored in a deenergized state once per year, for one hour continuously.
This product cannot be disposed of as unsorted municipal waste in the European
Union. For proper recycling return this product to your supplier or a designated
collection point. For more information go to www.recyclethis.info.
Note
GENERAL SAFETY PRECAUTIONS - 339
• Failure to observe and follow the instructions provided in the equipment manual(s)
could cause irreversible damage to the equipment and could lead to property
damage, personal injury and/or death.
• Before attempting to use the equipment, it is important that all danger and
caution indicators are reviewed.
• If the equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer or
functions abnormally, proceed with caution. Otherwise, the protection provided by
the equipment may be impaired and can result in Impaired operation and injury.
• Caution: Hazardous voltages can cause shock, burns or death.
• Installation/service personnel must be familiar with general device test practices,
electrical awareness and safety precautions must be followed.
• Before performing visual inspections, tests, or periodic maintenance on this device
or associated circuits, isolate or disconnect all hazardous live circuits and sources
of electric power.
• Failure to shut equipment off prior to removing the power connections could
expose you to dangerous voltages causing injury or death.
• All recommended equipment that should be grounded and must have a reliable
and un-compromised grounding path for safety purposes, protection against
electromagnetic interference and proper device operation.
• Equipment grounds should be bonded together and connected to the facility’s
main ground system for primary power.
• Keep all ground leads as short as possible.
• At all times, equipment ground terminal must be grounded during device
operation and service.
• In addition to the safety precautions mentioned all electrical connections made
must respect the applicable local jurisdiction electrical code.
• Before working on CTs, they must be short-circuited.
This product cannot be disposed of as unsorted municipal waste in the European
Union. For proper recycling return this product to your supplier or a designated
collection point. For more information go to www.recyclethis.info.
Safety words and definitions
The following symbols used in this document indicate the following conditions
Note
Note
Note
Note
Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious
injury.
Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious
injury.
Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in minor or
moderate injury.
Indicates practices not related to personal injury.
For further assistance
For product support, contact the information and call center as follows:
GE Grid Solutions
650 Markland Street
Markham, Ontario
Canada L6C 0M1
Worldwide telephone: +1 905 927 7070
Europe/Middle East/Africa telephone: +34 94 485 88 54
North America toll-free: 1 800 547 8629
Fax: +1 905 927 5098
Worldwide e-mail: multilin.tech@ge.com
Europe e-mail: multilin.tech.euro@ge.com
Website: http://www.gegridsolutions.com/multilin
Table of Contents
1.INTRODUCTION
Overview ................................................................................................................................1 - 1
Description of the 339 Motor Protection System................................................1 - 1
339 order codes..................................................................................................................1 - 6
Specifications.......................................................................................................................1 - 6
Password security....................................................................................................................1 - 7
Protection.....................................................................................................................................1 - 7
Metering........................................................................................................................................1 - 10
Data capture ..............................................................................................................................1 - 11
Control ...........................................................................................................................................1 - 12
Inputs .............................................................................................................................................1 - 13
Outputs..........................................................................................................................................1 - 14
Power supply ..............................................................................................................................1 - 14
Communications ......................................................................................................................1 - 15
Testing and certification .......................................................................................................1 - 15
Physical .........................................................................................................................................1 - 16
Environmental............................................................................................................................1 - 17
2.INSTALLATION
Mechanical installation ...................................................................................................2 - 1
Dimensions..................................................................................................................................2 - 1
Product identification .............................................................................................................2 - 3
Mounting ......................................................................................................................................2 - 3
Standard panel mount .........................................................................................................2 - 4
Drawout unit withdrawal and insertion.........................................................................2 - 9
IP20 Cover (optional) ...............................................................................................................2 - 9
Electrical installation ........................................................................................................2 - 11
339 terminals .............................................................................................................................2 - 15
Terminal identification - Input/Output “E”...................................................................2 - 17
Terminal identification - Input/Output “R”...................................................................2 - 21
Wire range...................................................................................................................................2 - 22
RMIO module installation......................................................................................................2 - 23
Internal RTD installation........................................................................................................2 - 25
Phase sequence and transformer polarity...................................................................2 - 26
Phase current inputs...............................................................................................................2 - 26
Ground and CBCT inputs.......................................................................................................2 - 26
Zero sequence CBCT installation ......................................................................................2 - 27
Voltage inputs ............................................................................................................................2 - 28
Control power ............................................................................................................................2 - 28
Contact inputs ...........................................................................................................................2 - 29
Trip and Close output relays ...............................................................................................2 - 29
Serial communications ..........................................................................................................2 - 32
IRIG-B .............................................................................................................................................2 - 33
3.INTERFACES
Front control panel interface........................................................................................3 - 2
Description ..................................................................................................................................3 - 2
Display ...........................................................................................................................................3 - 3
Working with the Keypad....................................................................................................3 - 3
LED status indicators..............................................................................................................3 - 4
Relay messages ........................................................................................................................3 - 5
Default message .....................................................................................................................3 - 6
Target messages.....................................................................................................................3 - 6
Self-test errors..........................................................................................................................3 - 7
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
TOC–1
Flash messages .......................................................................................................................3 - 8
Software setup.................................................................................................................... 3 - 9
Quick setup - Software interface...................................................................................... 3 - 9
EnerVista SR3 Setup Software ........................................................................................... 3 - 10
Hardware and software requirements.........................................................................3 - 10
Installing the EnerVista SR3 Setup software ..............................................................3 - 10
Upgrading the software.......................................................................................................3 - 13
Connecting EnerVista SR3 Setup to the relay ............................................................ 3 - 13
Configuring serial communications...............................................................................3 - 13
Using the Quick Connect feature ....................................................................................3 - 14
Configuring Ethernet communications ........................................................................3 - 15
Connecting to the relay........................................................................................................3 - 16
Working with setpoints and setpoint files ....................................................................3 - 17
Engaging a device ..................................................................................................................3 - 17
Entering setpoints...................................................................................................................3 - 18
File support ................................................................................................................................3 - 19
Using setpoints files...............................................................................................................3 - 19
Downloading and saving setpoints files ......................................................................3 - 19
Adding setpoints files to the environment ..................................................................3 - 20
Creating a new setpoint file ...............................................................................................3 - 20
Upgrading setpoint files to a new revision .................................................................3 - 21
Printing setpoints and actual values .............................................................................3 - 22
Printing actual values from a connected device .....................................................3 - 23
Loading setpoints from a file.............................................................................................3 - 24
Uninstalling files and clearing data................................................................................3 - 24
Upgrading relay firmware ................................................................................................... 3 - 24
Loading new relay firmware..............................................................................................3 - 25
Advanced EnerVista SR3 Setup features ...................................................................... 3 - 26
Flexcurve editor .......................................................................................................................3 - 26
Data logger ................................................................................................................................3 - 28
Motor start data logger........................................................................................................3 - 29
Transient recorder (Waveform capture).......................................................................3 - 31
Protection summary..............................................................................................................3 - 34
Password security ..................................................................................................................3 - 36
4.ACTUAL VALUES
Actual values overview ...................................................................................................4 - 1
A1 Status................................................................................................................................ 4 - 3
Motor status ............................................................................................................................... 4 - 4
Clock............................................................................................................................................... 4 - 5
Contact inputs ........................................................................................................................... 4 - 6
Output relays ............................................................................................................................. 4 - 6
Output relays - Breaker........................................................................................................4 - 6
Output relays - Contactor ...................................................................................................4 - 7
Logic elements .......................................................................................................................... 4 - 7
Virtual inputs .............................................................................................................................. 4 - 7
Remote inputs ........................................................................................................................... 4 - 7
Remote outputs ........................................................................................................................ 4 - 7
Contact inputs summary...................................................................................................... 4 - 8
Output relays summary ........................................................................................................ 4 - 8
Logic elements summary..................................................................................................... 4 - 8
GOOSE status............................................................................................................................. 4 - 8
GOOSE HDR status .................................................................................................................. 4 - 9
RTD temp summary................................................................................................................ 4 - 9
A2 Metering .......................................................................................................................... 4 - 9
Current .......................................................................................................................................... 4 - 9
Voltage.......................................................................................................................................... 4 - 10
TOC–2
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Power .............................................................................................................................................4 - 11
Energy............................................................................................................................................4 - 11
RTD temperature ......................................................................................................................4 - 11
Clear energy................................................................................................................................4 - 12
A3 Records ............................................................................................................................4 - 12
Datalogger...................................................................................................................................4 - 12
Motor start data logger .........................................................................................................4 - 12
Event records .............................................................................................................................4 - 12
Transient records .....................................................................................................................4 - 29
Learned data ..............................................................................................................................4 - 29
Learned data recorder...........................................................................................................4 - 31
Clear learned data ...................................................................................................................4 - 31
Clear transient record ............................................................................................................4 - 31
Clear event record ...................................................................................................................4 - 31
A4 Target messages .........................................................................................................4 - 32
5.QUICK SETUP FRONT CONTROL
PANEL
Quick Setup settings.........................................................................................................5 - 3
6.SETPOINTS
Setpoints ................................................................................................................................6 - 1
Setpoint entry methods.........................................................................................................6 - 2
Common setpoints ..................................................................................................................6 - 3
Logic diagrams..........................................................................................................................6 - 4
Settings text abbreviations..................................................................................................6 - 4
S1 Relay setup .....................................................................................................................6 - 6
Clock ...............................................................................................................................................6 - 7
Password security....................................................................................................................6 - 9
Access passwords ..................................................................................................................6 - 10
Communications ......................................................................................................................6 - 12
RS485 interface .......................................................................................................................6 - 12
Ethernet.......................................................................................................................................6 - 13
Modbus........................................................................................................................................6 - 14
IEC60870-5-103 serial communication settings .....................................................6 - 14
IEC60870-5-104 protocol....................................................................................................6 - 29
DNP communication .............................................................................................................6 - 29
SR3 IEC 61850 GOOSE details ...........................................................................................6 - 43
Event recorder ...........................................................................................................................6 - 44
Transient recorder ...................................................................................................................6 - 45
Datalogger...................................................................................................................................6 - 46
Front panel ..................................................................................................................................6 - 47
Installation ...................................................................................................................................6 - 48
Preset statistics .........................................................................................................................6 - 49
S2 System Setup.................................................................................................................6 - 50
Current sensing .........................................................................................................................6 - 50
Voltage sensing.........................................................................................................................6 - 52
Power system.............................................................................................................................6 - 52
Motor..............................................................................................................................................6 - 53
Switching device.......................................................................................................................6 - 54
FlexCurves ...................................................................................................................................6 - 54
VFD ..................................................................................................................................................6 - 55
S3 Protection........................................................................................................................6 - 57
Thermal Model...........................................................................................................................6 - 61
Total Capacity Used register (TCU) .................................................................................6 - 61
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
TOC–3
Start protection........................................................................................................................6 - 62
Thermal overload curves.....................................................................................................6 - 62
Flexcurves...................................................................................................................................6 - 70
Thermal protection setpoints............................................................................................6 - 72
Short circuit................................................................................................................................. 6 - 76
Mechanical Jam ....................................................................................................................... 6 - 79
Undercurrent.............................................................................................................................. 6 - 81
Current unbalance .................................................................................................................. 6 - 84
Load increase alarm............................................................................................................... 6 - 87
Ground fault ............................................................................................................................... 6 - 88
Neutral instantaneous overcurrent................................................................................. 6 - 91
Phase undervoltage................................................................................................................ 6 - 94
Phase overvoltage................................................................................................................... 6 - 98
Underfrequency........................................................................................................................ 6 - 101
Overfrequency........................................................................................................................... 6 - 104
Underpower................................................................................................................................ 6 - 107
Negative sequence overvoltage....................................................................................... 6 - 110
Phase reversal ........................................................................................................................... 6 - 112
VT fuse fail ................................................................................................................................... 6 - 112
Acceleration protection ........................................................................................................ 6 - 113
RTD protection........................................................................................................................... 6 - 115
Two-speed motor .................................................................................................................... 6 - 121
Two-speed motor setup ......................................................................................................6 - 123
High speed thermal protection ........................................................................................6 - 124
High speed short circuit settings.....................................................................................6 - 124
High speed acceleration......................................................................................................6 - 127
High speed undercurrent....................................................................................................6 - 127
Neutral directional overcurrent......................................................................................... 6 - 130
S4 Control.............................................................................................................................. 6 - 134
Virtual inputs .............................................................................................................................. 6 - 135
Logic elements .......................................................................................................................... 6 - 136
Breaker failure / Welded contactor................................................................................. 6 - 152
Start inhibit.................................................................................................................................. 6 - 155
Emergency restart................................................................................................................... 6 - 158
Lockout reset ............................................................................................................................. 6 - 159
Reset .............................................................................................................................................. 6 - 159
Breaker control ......................................................................................................................... 6 - 159
S5 Inputs/Outputs ............................................................................................................. 6 - 161
Contact inputs ........................................................................................................................... 6 - 164
Output relays - Input/Output “E”....................................................................................... 6 - 165
Output Relays - Breaker - Input/Output “E”................................................................6 - 166
Output Relays - Contactor - Input/Output “E” ...........................................................6 - 174
Output relays Input/Output “R” ......................................................................................... 6 - 177
Output Relays - Breaker - Input/Output “R”................................................................6 - 177
Output Relays - Contactor - Input/Output “R”...........................................................6 - 183
Virtual inputs .............................................................................................................................. 6 - 186
7.MAINTENANCE
M1 Relay information....................................................................................................... 7 - 3
M2 Motor maintenance .................................................................................................. 7 - 5
M3 Breaker maintenance .............................................................................................. 7 - 6
Trip coil.......................................................................................................................................... 7 - 6
Close coil ...................................................................................................................................... 7 - 10
Breaker trip counter................................................................................................................ 7 - 13
Reset counters .......................................................................................................................... 7 - 14
M4 Breaker monitor.......................................................................................................... 7 - 15
TOC–4
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
M5 Relay maintenance....................................................................................................7 - 15
Ambient temperature.............................................................................................................7 - 15
M6 Factory service ............................................................................................................7 - 18
General maintenance ......................................................................................................7 - 18
In-service maintenance ........................................................................................................7 - 18
Out-of-service maintenance...............................................................................................7 - 18
Unscheduled maintenance (system interruption).....................................................7 - 18
A.APPENDIX
Warranty ................................................................................................................................A - 1
Repairs ....................................................................................................................................A - 2
Change notes.......................................................................................................................A - 3
Manual Revision history ........................................................................................................A - 3
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
TOC–5
TOC–6
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE
Grid Solutions
339 Motor Protection System
Chapter 1: Introduction
Introduction
Overview
The 339 Motor Protection System is a microprocessor based relay providing suitable
protection of medium voltage motors. The small footprint and the withdrawable option
make the 339 relay ideal for panel mounting on either new or retrofit installations. The
combination of proven hardware, a variety of protection and control features, and
communications, makes the relay ideal for total motor protection and control. Equipped
with serial (RS485), USB, and Ethernet ports, and a wide selection of protocols such as
Modbus, DNP3.0, IEC 60870-5-103, 60870-5-104, GOOSE, the 339 relay is the best-in-class
for MCCs, SCADA and inter-relay communications. The 339 relay provides excellent
transparency with respect to power system conditions and events, through its four-line 20character display, as well as the EnerVista SR3 Setup program. Conveniently located LEDs
provide indication of overall relay operation, as well as alarm, pickup, and motor status.
The 339 relay provides the following key benefits:
•
Withdrawable small footprint – saves on rewiring and space.
•
Fast setup (Quick Setup) menu provided, to guide users through a wide range of motor
management applications.
•
Large four-line LCD display, LEDs, and an easy-to-navigate keypad.
•
Multiple communication protocols for simultaneous access when integrated into
monitoring and control systems.
Description of the 339 Motor Protection System
CPU
Relay functions are controlled by two processors: a Freescale MPC5554 32-bit
microprocessor measures all analog signals and digital inputs and controls all output
relays; a Freescale MPC520B 32-bit microprocessor controls all the Ethernet
communication protocols.
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
1–1
DESCRIPTION OF THE 339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM
CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION
Analog Input Waveform Capture
Magnetic transformers are used to scale-down the incoming analog signals from the
source instrument transformers. The analog signals are then passed through a 960 Hz low
pass anti-aliasing filter. All signals are then simultaneously captured by sample and hold
buffers to ensure there are no phase shifts. The signals are converted to digital values by a
12-bit A/D converter before finally being passed on to the CPU for analysis.
Both current and voltage are sampled thirty-two times per power frequency cycle. These
‘raw’ samples are scaled in software, then placed into the waveform capture buffer, thus
emulating a fault recorder. The waveforms can be retrieved from the relay via the EnerVista
SR3 Setup software for display and diagnostics.
Frequency
Frequency measurement is accomplished by measuring the time between zero crossings
of the Bus VT phase A voltage . The signals are passed through a low pass filter to prevent
false zero crossings. Sampling is synchronized to the Va-x voltage zero crossing which
results in better co-ordination for multiple 339 relays on the same bus.
Phasors, Transients, and Harmonics
Current waveforms are processed twice every cycle with a DC Offset Filter and a Discrete
Fourier Transform (DFT). The resulting phasors have fault current transients and all
harmonics removed. This results in a motor that is extremely secure and reliable; one that
will not overreach.
Processing of AC Current Inputs
The DC Offset Filter is an infinite impulse response (IIR) digital filter, which removes the DC
component from the asymmetrical current present at the moment a fault occurs. This is
done for all current signals used for overcurrent protection; voltage signals bypass the DC
Offset Filter. This filter ensures no overreach of the overcurrent protection.
The Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT) uses exactly one sample cycle to calculate a phasor
quantity which represents the signal at the fundamental frequency; all harmonic
components are removed. All subsequent calculations (e.g. RMS, power, etc.) are based
upon the current and voltage phasors, such that the resulting values have no harmonic
components.
Protection Elements
All protection elements are processed twice every cycle to determine if a pickup has
occurred or a timer has expired. The protection elements use RMS current/voltage, based
on the magnitude of the phasor. Hence, protection is impervious to both harmonics and DC
transients.
1–2
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION
DESCRIPTION OF THE 339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM
Figure 1-1: Line Diagram
BUS
52
27P 59P
47 59_2 81O 81U
37
49
46
50P 50BF 51 50N 67N
Phase CT 3
50G 67G
Ambient air
Ground CT 1
Stator RTDs
TRIP
49
CLOSE
RTD
Bearing RTDs
38
START
Optional RTD
START INHIBIT
LOAD
86
MOTOR
339
MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM
896814A2.CDR
Table 1-1: 339 Protection functions
ANSI device
Description
27P
Phase UV
37
Undercurrent
38
Bearing RTD
Underpower
Stator/Ambient/Other
RTD Trouble Alarm
46
Current Unbalance
47
Voltage Phase Reversal
48
Acceleration Time
49
Thermal Protection/Stall Protection
50BF
Breaker Failure / Welded Contactor
50G
Ground Fault
50P
Short Circuit
51R
Mechanical Jam
50N
Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent
59_2
Negative Sequence OV
59P
Phase OV
66
Starts per Hour & Time Between Starts
Restart Block
Thermal Inhibit
67G
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Ground Directional Element
1–3
DESCRIPTION OF THE 339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM
1–4
CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION
ANSI device
Description
67N
Neutral Directional Element
81O
Overfrequency
81U
Underfrequency
86
Lockout
VTFF
VT Fuse Failure
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION
DESCRIPTION OF THE 339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM
Figure 1-2: Main Menu structure
ACTUAL VALUES
ACTUAL VALUES
QUICK SETUP
A1 STATUS
SETPOINTS
A2 METERING
MAINTENANCE
A3 RECORDS
▼
A4 TARGET MESSAGES
THERMAL PROTECTION
START PROTECTION
▼
LOCKED ROTOR CURR
SAFE STALL T COLD
THERMAL O/L PKP
QUICK SETUP
RELAY STATUS
▼
NOMINAL FREQUENCY
PHASE CT PRIMARY
GROUND CT TYPE
VT CONNECTION
VT SECONDARY
UNBALANCE K FACTOR
COOL TIME RUNNING
COOL TIME STOPPED
HOT/COLD RATIO
SHORT CIRCUIT
S/C PKP
▼
S/C DELAY
VT RATIO
MOTOR FLA
SWITCHING DEVICE
52a CONTACT
52b CONTACT
THERMAL O/L FUNC
S/C FUNC
MECH JAM FUNC
U/CURR TRIP FUNC
MECHANICAL JAM
MECH JAM PKP
▼
MECH JAM DELAY
UNDERCURRENT
U/CURR TRIP PKP
▼
UCURR TRIP DELAY
GND TRIP FUNC
PH UV FUNC
GROUND FAULT
GND TRIP PKP
SETPOINTS
S1 RELAY SETUP
S2 SYSTEM SETUP
▼
GND TRIP ON RUN
GND TRIP ON START
S3 PROTECTION
▼
S4 CONTROLS
S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
PHASE UV
PH UV PKP
▼
PH UV DELAY
MAINTENANCE
M1 RELAY INFO
M2 MOTOR MAINTEN
M3 BKR MAINTENANCE
▼
M4 BKR MONITOR
896756.cdr
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
M6 FACTORY SERVICE
1–5
339 ORDER CODES
CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION
339 order codes
The information to specify a 339 relay is provided in the following order code table.
Figure 1-3: Order Codes
Interface
Language
339
339
– *
|
C
E
Phase Currents
Ground Currents
* *
| |
| |
| |
P1 |
P5 |
G1
G5
*
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
L
H
Power Supply
Input/Outputa
*
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
E
S
N
R
Other Options
*
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
*
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
*
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
*
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
*
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
339 Motor Protection System
339 Motor Protection System- Chinese
339 Motor Protection System - English
1 A 3-phase current inputs
5 A 3-phase current inputs
1 A ground current input
5 A ground current input
24 to 48 V DC
110 to 250 V DC/110 to 230 V AC
|
|
|
|
|
10 Contact Inputs, 7 Outputs (2 Form A, 5 Form C)
|
|
N
M
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
S
N
1
E
2
E
3
E
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
D
N
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
N
H
10 Contact Inputs, 4 Outputs (1 Form A, 3 Form C),
3 100 Ohm Platinum RTD Inputs
No Selection
Voltage Metering
Voltage Protection: 27P(1), 27P(2), VTFF(1), 59P(2), 81O(2),
81U(2), 59_2(1), 67N(1)
Standard: Front USB, Rear RS485: Modbus RTU, DNP3.0,
IEC60870-5-103
Standard + Ethernet (10/100 RJ45 Copper + MTRJ Fiber),
Modbus TCP/IP, DNP3.0, IEC 60870-5-104
Standard + Ethernet (10/100 RJ45 Copper + MTRJ Fiber),
Modbus TCP/IP, DNP3.0, IEC 60870-5-104, IEC 61850 GOOSE
Standard + Ethernet (10/100 RJ45 Copper + MTRJ Fiber),
Modbus TCP/IP, DNP3.0, IEC 60870-5-104, IEC 61850
Protection Relay with drawout design
Protection Relay with non-drawout design
None
Harsh Environment Conformal Coating
P
Communications
Case Design
Harsh Environment
a. Input/Output option “R” is only available with Power Supply option “H”.
896800A4.fm
Features related to each order number are subject to change without notice.
NOTE:
NOTE
Accessories
•
18L0-0075 SR3 Depth reducing collar - 1.375”
•
18L0-0076 SR3 Depth reducing collar - 3.00”
•
18L0-0080 SR3 IP20 Kit
Specifications
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
NOTE:
NOTE
1–6
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION
SPECIFICATIONS
To obtain the total element operating time, i.e. from the presence of a trip condition to
initiation of a trip, add 8 ms output relay time to the operate times listed below.
NOTE:
NOTE
Specifications are subject to the VFD function being disabled or bypassed.
NOTE:
NOTE
Password security
PASSWORD SECURITY
Master Reset Password: .................................. 8 to 10 alpha-numeric characters
Settings Password:............................................. 3 to 10 alpha-numeric characters for local and remote
access
Control Password:............................................... 3 to 10 alpha-numeric characters for local and remote
access
Protection
NEUTRAL INSTANTANEOUS OVERCURRENT
Pickup Level:.......................................................... 0.05 to 20 x CT in steps of 0.01 x CT
Dropout Level: ...................................................... 96 to 99% of Pickup @ I > 1 x CT
Pickup - 0.02 x CT @ I <1 x CT
Time Delay: ............................................................ 0.00 to 300.00 sec in steps of 0.01
Operate Time:....................................................... <30 ms @ 60Hz (I > 2.0 x PKP), 0 ms time delay
<35 ms @ 50Hz (I > 2.0 x PKP), 0 ms time delay
Timer Accuracy:................................................... 0 to 1 cycle
Level Accuracy:.................................................... per CT input
Elements: ................................................................ Trip or Alarm
NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL OVERCURRENT
Directionality:........................................................ Co-existing forward and reverse
Polarizing: ............................................................... Voltage, Current, Dual
Polarizing Voltage:.............................................. -V0 calculated using phase voltages (VTs must be connected
in "Wye")
Polarizing Current: .............................................. IG
MTA:........................................................................... From 0o to 359o in steps of 1o
Angle Accuracy:...................................................±4o
Operation Delay: ................................................. 20 to 30 ms
NOTE:
NOTE
The selection of “P” option from “339 OTHER OPTIONS” in the Order Code table, will enable
the Neutral Directional element with voltage polarizing V0 computed from the measured
phase voltage inputs.
UNDERCURRENT
Pickup Level:.......................................................... 0.1 to 0.95 x FLA in steps of 0.01 x FLA
Dropout Level: ...................................................... 101 to 104% of Pickup
Time Delay: ............................................................ 1.00 to 60.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Block from Start:.................................................. 0 to 600 s in steps of 1 s
Pickup Accuracy:................................................. as per phase current inputs
Timing Accuracy: ................................................±0.5 s or ± 0.5% of total time
Elements: ................................................................ Trip and Alarm
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
1–7
SPECIFICATIONS
CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION
CURRENT UNBALANCE
Unbalance: ............................................................
Unbalance Pickup Level: .................................
Unbalance Time Delay:....................................
Single Phasing Pickup Level: .........................
See table below
4 to 40% in steps of 1%
1.00 to 60.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
unbalance level > 40% or when Iavg ≥25%FLA and current
in any phase is less than the cutoff current
Single Phasing Time Delay:............................ 2 sec
Dropout Level:...................................................... 96 to 99% of pickup
Pickup Accuracy:................................................. ±2%
Timing Accuracy:................................................ ±0.5 s or ± 0.5% of total time
Unbalance Elements:........................................ Trip and Alarm
Single Phasing Elements:................................ Trip
Table 1-2: Current Unbalance equations
RTD
Pickup:......................................................................
Pickup Hysteresis:...............................................
Time Delay:............................................................
Elements:................................................................
1 to 250oC in steps of 1oC
2 oC
3 sec
Trip and Alarm
RTD TROUBLE ALARM
RTD Trouble Alarm: ............................................ <-50oC or >250oC
LOAD INCREASE ALARM
Pickup Level: .........................................................
Dropout Level:......................................................
Alarm Time Delay:..............................................
Pickup Accuracy:.................................................
Timing Accuracy:................................................
50 to 150%FLA in steps of 1%FLA
96 to 99% of Pickup
1.00 to 60.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
as per phase current inputs
±0.5 s or ±0.5% of total time
SHORT CIRCUIT
Pickup Level: ......................................................... 1.00 to 20.00 x CT in steps of 0.01 x CT
Dropout Level:...................................................... 96 to 99% of Pickup @ I > 1 x CT
Pickup - 0.02 x CT @ I < 1 x CT
Alarm Time Delay:.............................................. 0.00 to 60.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Pickup Accuracy:................................................. as per phase current inputs
Operate Time: ...................................................... <30 ms @ 60Hz (I > 2.0 x PKP), 0 ms time delay
<35 ms @ 50Hz (I > 2.0 x PKP), 0 ms time delay
Timer Accuracy: .................................................. 0 to 1 cycle
Elements:................................................................ Trip or Alarm
MECHANICAL JAM TRIP
Pickup Level: .........................................................
Dropout Level:......................................................
Trip Time Delay:...................................................
Pickup Accuracy:.................................................
Timing Accuracy:................................................
1–8
1.01 to 4.50 x FLA in steps of 0.01 x FLA, blocked from start
96 to 99% of Pickup
0.10 to 30.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
as per phase current inputs
±0.5 s or ±0.5% of total time
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION
SPECIFICATIONS
GROUND FAULT
Pickup Level:.......................................................... 0.03 to 1.00 x CT in steps of 0.01 x CT
0.50 to 15.00 A in steps of 0.01 A (CBCT)
Dropout Level: ...................................................... Pickup - 0.02 x CT
96 to 99% of Pickup (CBCT)
Alarm Time Delay on Run: .............................. 0.00 to 60.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Alarm Time Delay on Start: ............................ 0.00 to 60.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Trip Time Delay on Run:................................... 0.00 to 5.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Trip Time Delay on Start:................................. 0.00 to 10.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Pickup Accuracy:................................................. as per ground current inputs
Operate Time:....................................................... <30 ms @ 60Hz (I > 2.0 x PKP), 0 ms time delay
<35 ms @ 50Hz (I > 2.0 x PKP), 0 ms time delay
Timing Accuracy: ................................................ 0 to 1 cycle
Elements: ................................................................ Trip and Alarm
THERMAL PROTECTION
Locked Rotor Current:....................................... 2.0 to 11.0 x FLA in steps of 0.1 x FLA
Safe Stall Time:..................................................... 1.0 to 600.0 s in steps of 0.1 s
Curve Multiplier:................................................... 1 to 15 in steps of 1
Pickup Level:.......................................................... 1.01 to 1.25 x FLA in steps of 0.01 x FLA
Curve Biasing:....................................................... Phase unbalance
Hot/cold biasing
Stator RTD biasing
Exponential Running and Stopped Cooling Rates
TCU Update Rate: ............................................... 3 cycles
Pickup Accuracy:................................................. per phase current inputs
Timing Accuracy: ................................................ ±200 ms or ±2% of total time
Elements: ................................................................ Trip and Alarm
PHASE/AUXILIARY UNDERVOLTAGE
Minimum Voltage:............................................... Programmable from 0.00 to 1.25 x VT in steps of 0.01
Pickup Level:.......................................................... 0.00 to 1.25 x VT in steps of 0.01
Dropout Level: ...................................................... 101 to 104% of pickup
Curve: ....................................................................... Definite Time, Inverse Time
Time Delay: ............................................................ 0.1 to 600.0 s in steps of 0.1
Operate Time:....................................................... Time delay ±30 ms @ 60 Hz (V < 0.85 x PKP)
Time delay ±40 ms @ 50 Hz (V < 0.85 x PKP)
Time Delay Accuracy: ....................................... ±3% of expected time, or 1 cycle, whichever is greater
Level Accuracy:.................................................... Per voltage input
UNDERPOWER
Pickup Level:.......................................................... 1 to 100% Hz MNR 1%
Dropout Level: ...................................................... 101% to 104% of Pickup
Time Delay: ............................................................ 1.0 to 60.0 s in steps of 0.1
Pickup Accuracy:................................................. as per power monitoring specification
Timing Accuracy: ................................................ ±0.5 s or ±0.5% of total time
Elements: ................................................................ Trip and Alarm
NEGATIVE SEQUENCE/PHASE OVERVOLTAGE
Pickup Level:.......................................................... 0.00 to 1.25 x VT in steps of 0.01
Dropout Level: ...................................................... 96 to 99% of pickup
Time Delay: ............................................................ 0.1 to 600.0 s in steps of 0.1
Operate Time:....................................................... Time delay ±30 ms @ 60 Hz (V >1.1 x PKP)
Time delay ±40 ms @ 50 Hz (V > 1.1 x PKP)
Timing Accuracy: ................................................ ±0.5 s or ±0.3% of total time
Level Accuracy:.................................................... Per voltage input
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
1–9
SPECIFICATIONS
CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION
PHASE REVERSAL
Configuration: ......................................................
Time Delay:............................................................
Timing Accuracy:................................................
Elements:................................................................
ABC or ACB phase rotation
100 ms
±0.5 s
Trip or Alarm
UNDERFREQUENCY
Minimum Voltage: ..............................................
Pickup Level: .........................................................
Dropout Level:......................................................
Time Delay:............................................................
Timing Accuracy:................................................
Level Accuracy:....................................................
Elements:................................................................
0.00 to 1.25 x VT in steps of 0.01
40.00 to 70.00 Hz in steps of 0.01
Pickup +0.05 Hz
0.1 to 600.0 s in steps of 0.1
±0.5 s or ±0.5% of total time
±0.03 Hz
Trip and Alarm
OVERFREQUENCY
Minimum Voltage: ..............................................
Pickup Level: .........................................................
Dropout Level:......................................................
Time Delay:............................................................
Timing Accuracy:................................................
Level Accuracy:....................................................
Elements:................................................................
0.3 x VT
40.00 to 70.00 Hz in steps of 0.01
Pickup - 0.05 Hz
0.1 to 600.0 s in steps of 0.1
±0.5 s or ±0.5% of total time
±0.03 Hz
Trip and Alarm
FUSE FAIL
Time Delay:............................................................ 1 s
Timing Accuracy:................................................ ±0.5 s
Elements:................................................................ Trip or Alarm
ACCELERATION TIME TRIP
Pickup Level: .........................................................
Dropout Level:......................................................
Timers for single-speed:..................................
Timers for two-speed:......................................
Motor start condition
Motor run, trip, or stop condition
Stopped to running
Stopped to high speed, stopped to low speed, low to high
speed
Time Delay:............................................................ 1.0 to 250.0 s in steps of 0.1
Timing Accuracy:................................................ ±200 ms or ±1% of total time
Metering
PARAMETER
ACCURACY
RESOLUTION
RANGE
3-Phase Real Power (kW)
±1% of full scale
0.1 kW
±100000.0 kW
3-Phase Reactive Power (kvar)
±1% of full scale
0.1 kvar
±100000.0 kvar
3-Phase Apparent Power (kVA)
±1% of full scale
0.1 kVA
100000.0 kVA
3-Phase Positive Watthour (MWh)
±1% of full scale
±0.001 MWh
50000.0 MWh
3-Phase Negative Watthour (MWh) ±1% of full scale
±0.001 MWh
50000.0 MWh
±1% of full scale
±0.001 Mvarh 50000.0 Mvarh
3-Phase Negative Varhour (Mvarh) ±1% of full scale
±0.001 Mvarh 50000.0 Mvarh
3-Phase Positive Varhour (Mvarh)
Power Factor
±0.05
0.01
-0.99 to 1.00
Frequency
±0.05 Hz
0.01 Hz
40.00 to 70.00 Hz
Full scale for CT Input is 3 x CT
NOTE:
NOTE
1–10
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION
SPECIFICATIONS
Data capture
DATA LOGGER
Number of Channels: ........................................ 10
Parameters:........................................................... Any available analog actual value
Sampling Rate:..................................................... 1 cycle, 1 second, 1 minute, 1 hour
Trigger Source:..................................................... All logic elements, Logic operand: Any Trip PKP/OP/DPO, Any
Alarm PKP/OP/DPO
Mode:........................................................................ Continuous or triggered
MOTOR START DATA LOGGER
Length: ..................................................................... 6 buffers, containing a total of 30 seconds of motor starting
data
Trigger:..................................................................... Motor start status
Trigger Position:................................................... 1-second pre-trigger duration
Logging Rate:........................................................ 1 sample/200 ms
TRANSIENT RECORDER
Buffer size:.............................................................. 3 s
No. of buffers: ....................................................... 1x192 cycles, 3x64 cycles, 6x32 cycles
Sampling rate:...................................................... 32 samples per cycle
Triggers:................................................................... Manual Command
Contact Input
Virtual Input
Logic Element
Element Pickup/Trip/Dropout/Alarm
Data:.......................................................................... AC input channels
Contact input state
Contact output state
Virtual input state
Logic element state
Data storage:........................................................ RAM - battery backed-up
EVENT RECORDER
Number of events:.............................................. 256
Content:................................................................... event number, date of event, cause of event, per-phase
current, ground current, sensitive ground current, neutral
current, per-phase voltage (VTs connected in “Wye”), or
phase-phase voltages (VTs connected in “Delta”), system
frequency, power, power factor, thermal capacity, motor
load, current unbalance
Data Storage:........................................................ Non-volatile memory
LEARNED DATA RECORDER
Number of events:.............................................. 250
Header: .................................................................... Date, number of records
Content:................................................................... learned acceleration time , learned starting current, learned
starting capacity, last starting current, last starting capacity,
last acceleration time , average motor load learned, average
run time after start (days), average run time after start
(minutes)
Data Storage:........................................................ Non-volatile memory
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
1–11
SPECIFICATIONS
CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION
CLOCK
Setup: ....................................................................... Date and time
Daylight Saving Time
RTC Accuracy: ± 1 min / month at 25°C
IRIG-B: ...................................................................... Auto-detect (DC shift or Amplitude Modulated)
Amplitude modulated: 1 to 10 V pk-pk
DC shift: 1 to 10 V DC
Input impedance: 40 kOhm ± 10% at 25°C
Accuracy with IRIG-B: ....................................... ± 1 ms
Accuracy without IRIG-B:................................ ± 1 minute/month
Control
LOGIC ELEMENTS
Number of logic elements:.............................
Trigger source inputs per element: ............
Block inputs per element: ...............................
Supported operations: .....................................
Pickup timer: .........................................................
Dropout timer:......................................................
16
3
3
OR, AND, NOT, Pickup / Dropout timers
0 to 60000 ms in steps of 1 ms
0 to 60000 ms in steps of 1 ms
BREAKER CONTROL
Operation: .............................................................. Asserted Contact Input, Logic Element, Virtual Input,
Manual Command, Remote Input
Function:................................................................. Opens/closes the motor breaker
START INHIBIT
Thermal Start Inhibit: ........................................
Starts per Hour Inhibit:.....................................
Time Between Starts Inhibit: .........................
Restart Inhibit:......................................................
Thermal Inhibit Margin: 0 to 25 % in steps of 1%
Maximum: 1 to 5 starts in steps of 1
Time Between Starts: 1 to 3600 s in steps of 1 s
Restart Inhibit Delay: 1 to 50000 s in steps of 1 s
BREAKER FAILURE/WELDED CONTACTOR
Current Supervision:..........................................
Current Supervision Pickup:...........................
Time Delay 1:........................................................
Time Delay 2:........................................................
Current Supervision Dropout: .......................
Current Supervision Accuracy:.....................
Timing Accuracy:................................................
Reset Time: ............................................................
Phase Current
0.05 to 20.00 x CT in steps of 0.01 x CT
0.03 to 1.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
0.00 to 1.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
97 to 98% of pickup
per CT input
0 to 1 cycle (Timer 1, Timer 2)
<14 ms typical at 2 x pickup at 60 Hz
<16 ms typical at 2 x pickup at 50 Hz
BREAKER TRIP COUNTER
Trip Counter Limit (Pickup):............................. 1 to 10000 in steps of 1
EMERGENCY RESTART
Function:................................................................. Defeats all motor start inhibit features, resets all trips and
alarms, and discharges the thermal capacity to zero so that
a hot motor can be restarted in the event of an emergency
Operation: .............................................................. Contact Input 1 to 10, Virtual Input 1 to 32, Logic Element 1
to 16, Remote Input 1 to 32
LOCKOUT RESET
Function:................................................................. Reset any lockout trips when this feature is configured.
Operation: .............................................................. Contact Input 1 to 10, Virtual Input 1 to 32, Logic Element 1
to 16, Remote Input 1 to 32
1–12
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION
SPECIFICATIONS
RESET
Function: ................................................................. Resets any alarms and non-lockout trips when LOCKOUT
RESET is configured, or resets any alarms and trips (lockout
and non-lockout trips) when LOCKOUT RESET is not
configured.
Operation:............................................................... Contact Input 1 to 10, Virtual Input 1 to 32, Logic Element 1
to 16, Remote Input 1 to 32
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
High Temperature Pickup: .............................. 20°C to 80°C in steps of 1°C
Low Temperature Pickup: ............................... -40°C to 20°C in steps of 1°C
Time Delay: ............................................................ 1 to 60 min in steps of 1 mins
Temperature Dropout:...................................... Configurable 90 to 98% of pickup
Temperature Accuracy: ................................... ±10°C
Timing Accuracy: ................................................ ±1 second
Inputs
CONTACT INPUTS
Inputs:....................................................................... 10
Selectable thresholds: ...................................... 17, 33, 84, 166 VDC
Tolerance:............................................................... ±10%
Recognition time: ................................................ 1/2 cycle
Debounce time: ................................................... 1 to 64 ms, selectable, in steps of 1 ms
Maximum input voltage & continuous
current draw:................................................... 300 VDC, 2 mA, connected to Class 2 source
Type:.......................................................................... opto-isolated inputs
External switch: ................................................... wet contact
PHASE & GROUND CURRENT INPUTS
CT Primary:............................................................. 30 to 1500 A
Range: ...................................................................... 0.02 to 20 × CT
Input type: .............................................................. 1 A or 5 A (must be specified with order)
Nominal frequency: ........................................... 50/60 Hz
Burden: .................................................................... <0.1 VA at rated load
Accuracy: ................................................................ ±1% of reading at 1× CT
±3% of reading from 0.2 to 20 × CT
±20% of reading from 0.05 to 0.19 × CT
CT withstand: ........................................................ 1 second at 100 × rated current
2 seconds at 40 × rated current
continuous at 3 × rated current
CBCT INPUT (50:0.025)
CT Primary:............................................................. 0.5 to 15.0 A
Nominal frequency: ........................................... 50 or 60 Hz
Accuracy (CBCT):.................................................. ±0.1 A (0.5 to 3.99 A)
±0.2 A (4.0 A to 15 A)
FREQUENCY
Accuracy: ................................................................ ±0.05 Hz
Resolution:.............................................................. 0.01 Hz
Range: ...................................................................... 40.00 to 70.00 Hz
PHASE VOLTAGE INPUTS
Source VT:............................................................... 100 to 20000 V
VT secondary range: ......................................... 50 to 240 V
VT ratio:.................................................................... 1 to 300 in steps of 1
Nominal frequency: ........................................... 50/60 Hz
Relay burden:........................................................ <0.25 VA at 120 V
Accuracy: ................................................................ ±1.0% throughout range
Voltage withstand: ............................................. 260 VAC continuous
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
1–13
SPECIFICATIONS
CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION
RTD INPUTS
RTD Type:................................................................
RTD Sensing Current: ........................................
Isolation: .................................................................
Distance:.................................................................
Range:......................................................................
Accuracy:................................................................
Lead Resistance:.................................................
RTD Trouble Alarm: ............................................
RTD Inputs Available: ........................................
100 Ohm platinum (DIN.43760)
5 mA
2 kV from base unit (RMIO only)
250 m maximum
-50 to +250oC
±3oC
25 Ohm max per lead
<-50 or >250oC
3 with INPUT/OUTPUT option ‘R’ installed OR
12 maximum with the RMIO option connected
Outputs
FORM-A RELAYS
Configuration: ......................................................
Contact material:................................................
Operate time:........................................................
Continuous current:...........................................
Make and carry for 0.2s:..................................
Break (DC inductive, L/R=40 ms):.................
Break (DC resistive): ...........................................
Break (AC inductive):..........................................
Break (AC resistive):............................................
2 (two) electromechanical
silver-alloy
<8 ms
10 A
30 A per ANSI C37.90
24 V / 1 A 48 V / 0.5 A 125 V / 0.3 A 250 V / 0.2 A
24 V / 10 A 48 V / 6 A 125 V / 0.5 A 250 V / 0.3 A
720 VA @ 250 VAC Pilot duty A300
277 VAC / 10 A
FORM-A VOLTAGE MONITOR
Applicable voltage: ............................................ 20 to 250 VDC
Trickle current: ..................................................... 1 to 2.5 mA
FORM-C RELAYS
Configuration: ......................................................
Contact material:................................................
Operate time:........................................................
Continuous current:...........................................
Make and carry for 0.2s:..................................
Break (DC inductive, L/R=40 ms):.................
Break (DC resistive): ...........................................
Break (AC inductive):..........................................
Break (AC resistive):............................................
5 (five) electromechanical
silver-alloy
<8 ms
10 A
30 A per ANSI C37.90
24 V / 1 A 48 V / 0.5 A 125 V / 0.3 A 250 V / 0.2 A
24 V / 10 A 48 V / 6 A 125 V / 0.5 A 250 V / 0.3 A
720 VA @ 250 VAC Pilot duty A300
277 VAC / 10 A
TRIP / CLOSE SEAL-IN
Relay 1 trip seal-in: ............................................ 0.00 to 9.99 s in steps of 0.01
Relay 2 close seal-in:......................................... 0.00 to 9.99 s in steps of 0.01
Power supply
HIGH RANGE POWER SUPPLY
Nominal:.................................................................. 120 to 240 VAC
125 to 250 VDC
Range:...................................................................... 60 to 300 VAC (50 and 60 Hz)
84 to 250 VDC
Ride-through time:............................................. 35 ms
LOW RANGE POWER SUPPLY
Nominal:.................................................................. 24 to 48 VDC
Range:...................................................................... 20 to 60 VDC
1–14
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION
SPECIFICATIONS
ALL RANGES
Voltage withstand: ............................................. 2 × highest nominal voltage for 10 ms
Power consumption: ......................................... 15 W nominal, 20 W maximum
20 VA nominal, 28 VA maximum
Fuse rating: ............................................................ 5A fuse; time lag, slow blow, 350V 4.5 O.D. X 14.5mm
Communications
SERIAL
RS485 port: ............................................................ Opto-coupled
Baud rates:............................................................. up to 115 kbps
Response time:..................................................... 1 ms typical
Parity:........................................................................ None, Odd, Even
Protocol: .................................................................. Modbus RTU, DNP 3.0, IEC 60870-5-103
Maximum distance: ........................................... 1200 m (4000 feet)
Isolation:.................................................................. 2 kV
ETHERNET (COPPER)
Modes:...................................................................... 10/100 MB (auto-detect)
Connector:.............................................................. RJ-45
Protocol: .................................................................. Modbus TCP, DNP3.0, IEC 60870-5-104, IEC 61850 GOOSE,
IEC 61850
ETHERNET (FIBER)
Fiber type:............................................................... 100 MB Multi-mode
Wavelength: .......................................................... 1300 nm
Connector:.............................................................. MTRJ
Protocol: .................................................................. Modbus TCP, DNP3.0, IEC 60870-5-104, IEC 61850 GOOSE,
IEC 61850
Transmit power:................................................... -20 dBm
Receiver sensitivity:............................................ -31 dBm
Power budget: ...................................................... 9 dB
Maximum input power:.................................... -11.8 dBm
Typical distance:.................................................. 2 km (1.25 miles)
Duplex: ..................................................................... half/full
USB
Standard specification:.................................... Compliant with USB 2.0
Data transfer rate:.............................................. 115 kbps
CAN (RMIO)
Maximum distance: ........................................... 250 m (820 feet)
Cable type: ............................................................. Shielded or unshielded twisted pair
Cable gauge: ......................................................... Belden 9841 or similar 24 AWG for distances up to 100 m; 22
AWG for distances up to 250 m
Testing and certification
TYPE TESTS
TEST
REFERENCE STANDARD
TEST LEVEL
Dielectric voltage withstand IEC60255-5
(high voltage power supply)
2200 VAC for one second
(low voltage power supply)
550 VAC for one second
Impulse voltage withstand
IEC60255-5
Insulation resistance
Damped Oscillatory
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5KV
500VDC >100mohm
IEC61000-4-18/IEC60255-22-1
2.5KV CM, 1KV DM
1–15
SPECIFICATIONS
CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION
TEST
REFERENCE STANDARD
TEST LEVEL
Electrostatic Discharge
EN61000-4-2/IEC60255-22-2
Level 4
Radiated RF immunity
EN61000-4-3/IEC60255-22-3
Level 3
Fast Transient Disturbance
EN61000-4-4/IEC60255-22-4
Level 4
Surge Immunity
EN61000-4-5/IEC60255-22-5
Level 3 & 4
Conducted RF Immunity
EN61000-4-6/IEC60255-22-6
Level 3
Power Frequency Magnetic
Field Immunity
IEC61000-4-8
Level 4
Voltage Dip & Interruption
IEC61000-4-11
0,40,70% dips, 250/300cycle
interrupts
Radiated & Conducted
Emissions
CISPR11 /CISPR22/ IEC60255-25
Class A
Sinusoidal Vibration
IEC60255-21-1
Class 1
Shock & Bump
IEC60255-21-2
Class 1
Ingress Protection
IEC60529
IP40 (front) , IP10 (back)
Environmental (Cold)
IEC60068-2-1
-20oC 16 hrs
Environmental (Dry heat)
IEC60068-2-2
85oC 16hrs
Relative Humidity Cyclic
IEC60068-2-30
6 day variant 2
Fast Transient Disturbance
IEEE C37.90.1
4KV CM & DM
SWC Damped Oscillatory
IEEE C37.90.1
2.5KV CM & DM
RF Immunity
IEEE C37.90.2
20V/m 80-1Ghz
35V/m max at 80% modulation
Electrostatic Discharge
IEEE C37.90.3
8KV CD, 15KV AD
CERTIFICATION
Applicable Council Directive
According to:
Low voltage directive
EN60255-5, EN60947-1,
EN60947-6-1
CE compliance
EMC Directive
EN61000-6-2, EN610006-4
EAC
Machines and Equipment
TR CU 010/2011
ISO
Manufactured under a registered
quality program
ISO9001
EAC
The EAC Technical Regulations (TR) for Machines and Equipment apply to the Customs
Union (CU) of the Russian Federation, Belarus, and Kazakhstan
Item
Description
Country of origin
Spain or Canada; see label on the unit
Date of manufacture
See label on the side of the 339 unit
Declaration of Conformity and/or Certificate of
Conformity
Available upon request
Physical
DIMENSIONS
Size: ........................................................................... Refer to Chapter 2
Weight: .................................................................... 4.1 kg [9.0 lb]
1–16
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION
SPECIFICATIONS
Environmental
OPERATING ENVIRONMENT
Ambient temperatures:
Storage/Shipping:
- 40oC to 85oC
Operating:
-40oC to 60oC
Humidity:
Operating up to 95% (non condensing) @ 55oC (As
per IEC60068-2-30 Variant 2, 6 days)
Altitude:
2000 m (max)
Pollution Degree:
II
Overvoltage Category:
III
Ingress Protection:
IP40 Front, IP10 Back, IP20 cover (optional)
Noise:
0 dB
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
1–17
SPECIFICATIONS
1–18
CHAPTER 1: INTRODUCTION
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE
Grid Solutions
339 Motor Protection System
Chapter 2: Installation
Installation
Mechanical installation
This section describes the mechanical installation of the 339 system, including dimensions
for mounting and information on module withdrawal and insertion.
Dimensions
The dimensions of the 339 are shown below. Additional dimensions for mounting and
panel cutouts are shown in the following sections.
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
2–1
MECHANICAL INSTALLATION
CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION
Figure 2-1: 339 dimensions - Drawout unit
>PP@
107
>76PP@
>PP@
>PP@
+$1'/(1(('672%(527$7('
:+,/(6/,',1*7+('5$:287
81,7,172&$37,9(81,7
>PP@
>PP@
>PP@
2–2
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION
MECHANICAL INSTALLATION
Figure 2-2: 339 339 dimensions - Non-drawout unit
Product identification
The product identification label is located on the side panel of the 339 . This label indicates
the product model, serial number, and date of manufacture.
Figure 2-3: 339 Product Identification label
Mounting
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
2–3
MECHANICAL INSTALLATION
Standard panel mount
CAUTION:
CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION
The standard panel mount and cutout dimensions are illustrated below.
To avoid the potential for personal injury due to fire hazards, ensure the unit is
mounted in a safe location and/or within an appropriate enclosure.
Figure 2-4: Standard Panel mounting - Drawout
2–4
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION
MECHANICAL INSTALLATION
Figure 2-5: Standard Panel mounting - Non-drawout
8-32 X 3/8” P/HD PHIL BLK
GE P/N 1408-0306
QTY=8
TIGHTENING TORQUE: 15 IN-LB (1.7N-M)
PANEL WITH CUTOUT FOR SR3
Sr3 NON-DRAWOUT UNIT
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
2–5
MECHANICAL INSTALLATION
CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION
Figure 2-6: Depth Reducing collar (optional)
Panel mounting with depth reducing collar:
1.
Mount the collar of required depth (1.375” or 3”) to the unit (captive or non-drawout)
using 4 screws (see above).
2.
Mount the combination of unit and collar to the panel using 4 screws as shown above.
Figure 2-7: Mounting tabs (optional)
“V” TABS
BOTTOM TAB
2–6
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION
MECHANICAL INSTALLATION
1.
From the front of the panel, slide the empty case into the cutout until the bottom tab
clicks into place (see above).
2.
From the rear of the panel screw the case into the panel at the 8 screw positions
shown above.
3.
If added security is required, bend the retaining "V"tabs outward, to about 90°. These
tabs are located on the sides of the case and appear as shown above.
The relay can now be inserted and can be panel wired.
Figure 2-8: Panel cutout dimensions
5.350” ±0.010”
(135.9 mm ±0.25mm)
4.100” ±0.010”
(104.1 mm ±0.25 mm)
L
C
Φ 0.200”
(5.1 mm)
6.900” ±0.010”
(175.3 mm ±0.25 mm)
L
C
6.000” ±0.010”
(152.4 mm ±0.25 mm)
4.000” ±0.010”
(101.6 mm ±0.25 mm)
Figure 2-9: RMIO - DIN rail mounting - Base & Expansion units
SNAP-IN THE DIN CLIPS (QTY: 4)
FOR DIN RAIL MOUNTING
0.30”
(7,6 mm)
1.38”
(35,1 mm)
DIN 3 RAIL
853726A1.CDR
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
2–7
MECHANICAL INSTALLATION
CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION
Figure 2-10: RMIO - Base Unit screw mounting
MEETS VIBRATION REQUIREMENT OF
IEC 60255 SEC 21.1, 21.2, & 21.3
2.250”
(57,15 mm)
#6 -32 THREADED HOLE
QTY: 2
4.100”
(104,14 mm)
853727A1.CDR
Figure 2-11: RMIO - Expansion Unit screw mounting
0.356”
[9.03 mm]
2.285”
[58.04 mm]
0.672”
[17.06 mm]
EXPANSION UNIT
OUTLINE
#6-32 THREADED HOLE
QTY: 2
#6-32X1/2 FT FLAT HEAD PHIL ZINC
QTY: 2; (SUPPLIED); GE PART # 1406-0117
TIGHTENING TORQUE: 10 lb. in.
2–8
1.500”
[38.10 mm]
853755A1.cdr
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION
MECHANICAL INSTALLATION
Drawout unit withdrawal and insertion
Figure 2-12: Standard unit withdrawal and insertion diagram
8 - 32X3/8IN P/HD PHIL BLK
GE PART # 1408-0306; (QTY:8)
TIGHTENING TORQUE: 15 IN LB
THE HANDLE MUST BE ROTATED 90⁰
WHILE SLIDING THE 339 DRAW-OUT
UNIT INTO THE CAPTIVE UNIT
KEEP THE HANDLE IN ITS ROTATED
POSITION UNTIL THE DRAW-OUT UNIT
IS INSERTED COMPLETELY
PUSH THE HANDLE DOWN AND TIGHTEN
THE SCREW UNTIL THE HANDLE IS PARALLEL
WITH THE FRONT PANEL SURFACE
IP20 Cover (optional)
The IP20 cover minimizes potential dangers to users by preventing finger contact with
electrical connections at the back of the 339 drawout units.
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
2–9
MECHANICAL INSTALLATION
CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION
The IP20 cover is used only with the 339 drawout units.
NOTE:
NOTE
Attaching the cover
The steps for attaching the IP20 cover (optional) to the drawout unit are as follows:
Figure 2-13: IP20 Cover mounting - Drawout unit only
5
4
1
2
3
1.
Place 4 custom standoffs (item#1) using the suggested tightening torque of 8lb-in in
the following order:
1.
Remove the 2 mounting screws near letters A and C, of label ABC (item#2), and mount
2 standoffs.
1.
Remove the 2 mounting screws near the letters B and E, of label ABCDE (item#3), and
mount 2 standoffs.
2.
Place the IP20 cover (item#4) and secure it with 4 screws (item#5) using the suggested
tightening torque of 8lb-in.
Make sure the device terminals are wired before placing the cover. Use the 5 slots located
on each side of the cover to guide the wires outside of the cover.
NOTE:
NOTE
Retrofit kit for IP20
Before attaching the cover, remove the old labels from the device (see item#2 and item#3)
and replace them with the new labels from the retrofit kit. Attach the cover as described in
the previous section.
2–10
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
Electrical installation
Figure 2-14: Typical Wiring Diagram - Drawout - Input/Output Option “E”
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
2–11
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
C
CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION
A
B
C
A
B
MOTOR
WYE VT
CONNECTION
CONTROL
POWER
+
E9 D9 E10D10E11D11
E5 D5 E6 D6 E7 D7 E8 D8 E12 D12
V A VA VB VB VC VC
1A/5A COM 1A/5A COM 1A/5A COM 1A/5A COM 50:0.025 COM
B1 A1
+
B2
-
chassis
gnd
POWER SUPPLY
PHASE A PHASE B PHASE C GROUND SENS GROUND
CURRENT INPUTS
VOLTAGE INPUTS
GND STUD
BREAKER CONTROL CIRCUIT
STOP
Breaker Aux Contacts
52b
H
L
1 TRIP
C1
52a
C2
C3
52b
C4
INPUT 4
INPUT 3
C5
INPUT 5
C6 INPUT 6
C7
INPUT 7
339
Motor Protection System
V
A3
START
B4
2 CLOSE
52b
CLOSE
COIL
A4
V
B5
A5
B6
A6
B7
4 AUXILIARY
A7
C11 COMMON
C12 CHASSIS GND
DC
TRIP
COIL
B3
3 START
INHIBIT
C8 INPUT 8
C9 INPUT 9
C10 INPUT 10
+
52a
A2
DIGITAL INPUTS
52a
B8
A8
Front Panel
5 AUXILIARY
B9
6 AUXILIARY
B10
A10
A9
USB
TYPE B
USB
B11
4 WIRE USB
Rear Panel
ETHERNET
RJ45
MTRJ
4 WIRE ETHERNET
10/100 BASE-T 100 BASE-FX
OPTIONAL
7 CRITICAL
FAILURE
COMMUNICATIONS
RMIO
- +
RS485
A11
B12
A12
IRIG-B
SELF TEST ANNUNCIATOR
- + - +
F8 F7 F6 F5 F4 F3 F2 F1
CONTACTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT
CONTROL
POWER
A2
1 NOT USED
+
B3
V
A3
B4
2 NOT USED
A4
V
3 START
INHIBIT
OPEN DELTA VT CONNECTION
B5
A5
B6
A6
B7
4 TRIP
STOP
START
CONTACTOR
COIL
A7
B8
A8
5 AUXILIARY
B9
6 AUXILIARY
B10
A10
CC
A9
B11
896729A1.CDR
E9 D9 E10D10 E11 D11
2–12
7 CRITICAL
FAILURE
A11
B12
A12
SELF TEST ANNUNCIATOR
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
Figure 2-15: Typical Wiring Diagram - Non-drawout - Input/Output Option “E”
C
A
B
C
A
B
MOTOR
WYE VT
CONNECTION
CONTROL
POWER
+
E9 D9 E10D10E11D11
E5 D5 E6 D6 E7 D7 E8 D8 E12 D12
V A VA VB VB VC VC
1A/5A COM 1A/5A COM 1A/5A COM 1A/5A COM 50:0.025 COM
L
N
+
-
chassis
gnd
POWER SUPPLY
PHASE A PHASE B PHASE C GROUND SENS GROUND
CURRENT INPUTS
VOLTAGE INPUTS
GND STUD
BREAKER CONTROL CIRCUIT
STOP
Breaker Aux Contacts
52b
H
L
52a
B2
B3
52b
B4
INPUT 4
B5
B6
INPUT 5
INPUT 6
B7
INPUT 7
B8
B9
INPUT 8
INPUT 9
INPUT 3
339
Motor Protection System
V
START
52b
TRIP
COIL
CLOSE
COIL
A5
V
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
4 AUXILIARY
A11
A12
B12 CHASSIS GND
DC
A3
A4
2 CLOSE
3 START
INHIBIT
B10 INPUT 10
B11 COMMON
+
52a
A1
A2
1 TRIP
B1
DIGITAL INPUTS
52a
A13
Front Panel
5 AUXILIARY
A14
6 AUXILIARY
A16
A17
A15
USB
TYPE B
USB
A18
4 WIRE USB
Rear Panel
ETHERNET
RJ45
MTRJ
4 WIRE ETHERNET
10/100 BASE-T 100 BASE-FX
OPTIONAL
COMMUNICATIONS
RMIO
- +
RS485
A19
7 CRITICAL
FAILURE
A20
A21
IRIG-B
SELF TEST ANNUNCIATOR
- + - +
C8 C7 C6 C5 C4 C3 C2 C1
CONTACTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT
CONTROL
POWER
A1
1 NOT USED
+
A2
V
A3
A4
2 NOT USED
A5
V
3 START
INHIBIT
OPEN DELTA VT CONNECTION
A6
A7
A8
A9
A10
4 TRIP
STOP
START
CONTACTOR
COIL
A11
A12
A13
5 AUXILIARY
CC
A14
A15
6 AUXILIARY
A16
A17
A18
896704A1.CDR
E9 D9 E10D10 E11 D11
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
7 CRITICAL
FAILURE
A19
A20
A21
SELF TEST ANNUNCIATOR
2–13
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION
Figure 2-16: Typical Wiring Diagram - Input/Output Option “R”
C
A
B
C
A
B
MOTOR
WYE VT
CONNECTION
CONTROL
POWER
+
E9 D9 E10D10E11D11
E5 D5 E6 D6 E7 D7 E8 D8 E12 D12
V A VA VB VB VC VC
1A/5A COM 1A/5A COM 1A/5A COM 1A/5A COM 50:0.025 COM
B1 A1
+
B2
-
chassis
gnd
POWER SUPPLY
PHASE A PHASE B PHASE C GROUND SENS GROUND
CURRENT INPUTS
VOLTAGE INPUTS
GND STUD
Breaker Aux Contacts
H
L
BREAKER CONTROL CIRCUIT
C1
52a
C2
C3
52b
C4
INPUT 4
STOP
INPUT 3
C5
INPUT 5
C6 INPUT 6
C7
INPUT 7
DIGITAL INPUTS
52a
52b
339
Motor Protection System
Front Panel
USB
TYPE B
USB
4 WIRE USB
Rear Panel
ETHERNET
RJ45
MTRJ
4 WIRE ETHERNET
10/100 BASE-T 100 BASE-FX
OPTIONAL
A4
COMMUNICATIONS
RS485
RTD 1
RTD 2
RTD 3
START
TRIP
COIL
CLOSE
COIL
B5
A5
B6
A6
4 CRITICAL
FAILURE
RTD TEMP SENSING
DC
52b
B4
3 START
INHIBIT
C11 COMMON
C12 CHASSIS GND
+
B3
2 CLOSE
C8 INPUT 8
C9 INPUT 9
C10 INPUT 10
52a
A3
1 TRIP
B7
SELF TEST ANNUNCIATOR
A7
HOT
B8
COMP A8
HOT
B9
COMP A9
HOT B10
COMP A10
RETURN
B11
SHIELD
A11
USE SHIELDED WIRE
IRIG-B
- + - +
F6 F5 F4 F3 F2 F1
CONTACTOR CONTROL CIRCUIT
CONTROL
POWER
+
A2
STOP
START
CONTACTOR
COIL
B3
1 TRIP
A3
B4
2 ALARM
GENERAL ALARM
CC
A4
B5
3 AUXILIARY
OPEN DELTA VT CONNECTION
A5
B6
A6
896703A1.CDR
E9 D9 E10D10 E11 D11
2–14
RTD TEMP SENSING
4 CRITICAL
FAILURE
RTD 1
RTD 2
RTD 3
B7
SELF TEST ANNUNCIATOR
A7
HOT
B8
COMP A8
HOT
B9
COMP A9
HOT B10
COMP A10
RETURN
B11
SHIELD
A11
USE SHIELDED WIRE
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
339 terminals
NOTE:
NOTE
When installing two lugs on one terminal, both lugs should be "right side up" as shown in
the pictures below. This is to ensure the adjacent lower terminal block does not interfere
with the lug body.
Figure 2-17: Orient the Lugs correctly...
1
2
3
SCREW
WASHER
TERMINAL
BLOCK
LOWER
TERMINAL
DIVIDER
Figure 2-18: CORRECT INSTALLATION METHOD
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
2–15
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION
Figure 2-19: INCORRECT INSTALLATION METHOD (lower lug reversed)
2–16
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION
Terminal
identification - Input/
Output “E”
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
Figure 2-20: 339 Terminal identification with switching device as BREAKER - Drawout
F
1 POWER SUPPLY 2
TRIP N/O
3
TRIP OPTV
4
CLOSE COM
5 START INHIBIT N/C
6 START INHIBIT N/O
7
AUX 4 COM
8
AUX 5 N/C
9
AUX 5 N/O
10
AUX 6 COM
11
CRIT FAIL N/C
12
CRIT FAIL N/O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
POWER SUPPLY +
1
INPUT 1
CHASSIS GND
2
INPUT 2
TRIP COMM
3
INPUT 3
CLOSE N/O
4
INPUT 4
CLOSE OPTV
5
INPUT 5
START INHIBIT COM 6
AUX 4 N/C
7
PHASE A CT
INPUT 6
PHASE B CT
INPUT 7
AUX 4 N/O
8
PHASE C CT
INPUT 8
AUX 5 COM
9
GND CT
INPUT 9
PHASE A VT
AUX 6 N/C
10
INPUT 10
AUX 6 N/O
11
PHASE B VT
INPUT COM
CRIT FAIL COM
12
PHASE C VT
CHASSIS GND
A B
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
C
IRIG-B +
IRIG-B RS485 +
RS485 RS485 COM
CHASSIS GND
RMIO+
RMIO-
PHASE A CT
■5
PHASE B CT
■6
PHASE C CT ■ 7
GND CT
■8
PHASE A VT
■9
PHASE B VT
■10
PHASE C VT ■ 11
CBCT
CBCT
■ 12
D E
2–17
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION
Figure 2-21: Terminal identification with switching device as BREAKER - Non-drawout
POWER SUPPLY +
CHASSIS GND
TRIP N/O 1
2
TRIP OPTV 3
4
CLOSE COM 5
6
START INHIBIT N/C 7
8
START INHIBIT N/O 9
10
AUX 4 COM 11
12
AUX 5 N/C 13
14
AUX 5 N/O 15
16
AUX 6 COM 17
18
CRIT FAIL N/C 19
20
CRIT FAIL N/O 21
POWER SUPPLY -
TRIP COM
CLOSE N/O
CLOSE OPTV
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
INPUT 1
INPUT 2
INPUT 3
INPUT 4
INPUT 5
INPUT 6
INPUT 7
INPUT 8
INPUT 9
INPUT 10
INPUT COM
CHASSIS GND
START INHIBIT COM
AUX 4 N/C
AUX 4 N/O
AUX 5 COM
AUX 6 N/C
AUX 6 N/O
CRIT FAIL COM
5
PHASE A CT
6 PHASE B CT
7 PHASE C CT
8
GND CT
9
PHASE A VT
10 PHASE B VT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2–18
IRIG-B +
IRIG-B RS485 +
RS485 RS485 COM
CHASSIS GND
RMIO+
RMIO-
11 PHASE C VT
12
CBCT
PHASE A CT
■ 5
PHASE B CT
■ 6
PHASE C CT ■ 7
GND CT
■ 8
PHASE A VT
■ 9
PHASE B VT
■ 10
PHASE C VT ■ 11
CBCT
■ 12
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
Figure 2-22: Terminal identification with switching device as CONTACTOR - Drawout
F
1 POWER SUPPLY 2
1
INPUT 1
CHASSIS GND
2
INPUT 2
3
INPUT 3
4
INPUT 4
5
INPUT 5
START INHIBIT COM 6
TRIP N/C
7
PHASE A CT
INPUT 6
PHASE B CT
INPUT 7
TRIP N/O
PHASE C CT
INPUT 8
GND CT
3
4
5 START INHIBIT N/C
6 START INHIBIT N/O
7
TRIP COM
8
AUX 5 N/C
9
AUX 5 N/O
10
AUX 6 COM
11
CRIT FAIL N/C
12
CRIT FAIL N/O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
POWER SUPPLY +
AUX 5 COM
8
9
INPUT 9
AUX 6 N/C
10
PHASE A VT
INPUT 10
AUX 6 N/O
11
PHASE B VT
INPUT COM
CRIT FAIL COM
12
PHASE C VT
CHASSIS GND
A B
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
C
IRIG-B +
IRIG-B RS485 +
RS485 RS485 COM
CHASSIS GND
RMIO+
RMIO-
PHASE A CT
■5
PHASE B CT
■6
PHASE C CT ■ 7
GND CT
■8
PHASE A VT
■9
PHASE B VT
■10
PHASE C VT ■ 11
CBCT
CBCT
■ 12
D E
2–19
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION
Figure 2-23: Terminal identification with switching device as CONTACTOR - Nondrawout
POWER SUPPLY +
CHASSIS GND
START INHIBIT N/C
START INHIBIT N/O
TRIP COM
AUX 5 N/C
AUX 5 N/O
AUX 6 COM
CRIT FAIL N/C
CRIT FAIL N/O
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
POWER SUPPLY -
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
INPUT 1
INPUT 2
INPUT 3
INPUT 4
INPUT 5
INPUT 6
INPUT 7
INPUT 8
INPUT 9
INPUT 10
INPUT COM
CHASSIS GND
START INHIBIT COM
TRIP N/C
TRIP N/O
5
AUX 5 COM
6 PHASE B CT
AUX 6 N/C
AUX 6 N/O
CRIT FAIL COM
PHASE A CT
7 PHASE C CT
8
GND CT
9
PHASE A VT
10 PHASE B VT
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
2–20
IRIG-B +
IRIG-B RS485 +
RS485 RS485 COM
CHASSIS GND
RMIO+
RMIO-
11 PHASE C VT
12
CBCT
PHASE A CT
■ 5
PHASE B CT
■ 6
PHASE C CT ■ 7
GND CT
■ 8
PHASE A VT
■ 9
PHASE B VT
■ 10
PHASE C VT ■ 11
CBCT
12
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION
Terminal
identification - Input/
Output “R”
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
Figure 2-24: 339 Terminal identification with switching device as BREAKER
F
1
POWER SUPPLY -
2
NOT USED
3
TRIP N/O
4
CLOSE N/O
5 START INHIBIT COM
6
CRIT FAIL N/C
7
CRIT FAIL N/O
8
RTD 1 COMP
9
RTD 2 COMP
10
RTD 3 COMP
11
RTD SHIELD
12
NOT USED
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
POWER SUPPLY +
1
INPUT 1
CHASSIS GND
2
INPUT 2
TRIP COM
3
INPUT 3
CLOSE COM
4
INPUT 4
START INHIBIT N/C
5
INPUT 5
START INHIBIT N/O
6
PHASE A CT
INPUT 6
CRIT FAIL COM
7
PHASE B CT
INPUT 7
RTD 1 HOT
8
PHASE C CT
INPUT 8
GND CT
RTD 2 HOT
9
INPUT 9
RTD 3 HOT
10
PHASE A VT
INPUT 10
RTD RETURN
11
PHASE B VT
INPUT COM
NOT USED
12
PHASE C VT
CHASSIS GND
A B
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
C
IRIG-B +
IRIG-B RS485 +
RS485 RS485 COM
CHASSIS GND
NOT CONNECTED
NOT CONNECTED
PHASE A CT
■5
PHASE B CT
■6
PHASE C CT ■ 7
GND CT
■8
PHASE A VT
■9
PHASE B VT
■10
PHASE C VT ■ 11
CBCT
CBCT
■ 12
D E
2–21
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION
Figure 2-25: Terminal identification with switching device as CONTACTOR
F
1 POWER SUPPLY 2
TRIP N/C
3
TRIP N/O
4
ALARM N/O
5
AUX COM
6
CRIT FAIL N/C
7
CRIT FAIL N/O
8
RTD 1 COMP
9
RTD 2 COMP
10
RTD 3 COMP
11
RTD SHIELD
12
NOT USED
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
POWER SUPPLY +
1
INPUT 1
CHASSIS GND
2
INPUT 2
TRIP COM
3
INPUT 3
ALARM COM
4
INPUT 4
AUX N/C
5
INPUT 5
AUX N/O
6
PHASE A CT
INPUT 6
PHASE B CT
CRIT FAIL COM
7
INPUT 7
RTD 1 HOT
8
PHASE C CT
INPUT 8
RTD 2 HOT
9
GND CT
INPUT 9
RTD 3 HOT
10
PHASE A VT
INPUT 10
RTD RETURN
11
PHASE B VT
INPUT COM
NOT USED
12
PHASE C VT
CHASSIS GND
A B
C
IRIG-B +
IRIG-B RS485 +
RS485 RS485 COM
CHASSIS GND
NOT CONNECTED
NOT CONNECTED
PHASE A CT
■5
PHASE B CT
■6
PHASE C CT ■ 7
GND CT
■8
PHASE A VT
■9
PHASE B VT
■10
PHASE C VT ■ 11
CBCT
CBCT
■ 12
D E
Wire range
Use the following guideline when selecting wires or lugs to connect to terminal blocks A, B,
C, D, E (Drawout case design), and terminal blocks D, E (Non-drawout case design):
•
2–22
12 AWG to 22 AWG (3.3 mm2 to 0.3 mm2): Single wire termination with/without
9.53 mm (0.375”) maximum diameter ring terminals.
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
•
14 AWG to 22 AWG (2.1 mm2 to 0.3 mm2): Multiple wire termination with matching
wire sizes and stranding. Two wires maximum per circuit.
•
14 AWG to 22 AWG (2.1 mm2 to 0.3 mm2): Multiple wire termination with 9.53 mm
(0.375”) maximum diameter ring terminals. Two ring terminals maximum per circuit.
•
Suggested wiring screw tightening torque, tighten to 12 in-lb (1.35 N-m).
RMIO module installation
The optional remote module (RMIO) is designed to be mounted near the motor. This
eliminates the need for multiple RTD cables to run back from the motor, which may be in a
remote location, to the switchgear. Although the RMIO is internally shielded to minimize
noise pickup and interference, it should be mounted away from high current conductors or
sources of strong magnetic fields.
Figure 2-26: RMIO unit showing 2 IO_G modules
Figure 2-27: RMIO terminal identification with 4 IO_G modules
P S U
PSU
IO_G
RCU
L
N
G
Tx
Com Port
Rx
+
Common
B1
B2
B3
IO_G
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
IO_G
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
IO_G
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
896750.cdr
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
2–23
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION
Figure 2-28: RMIO wiring diagram
To switchgear
ground bus
339 IED
F7: RMIO+
OPTOCOUPLER
Z T (*)
SHIELD
F8: RMIO-
TWISTED PAIR
RMIO
B1
RMIO +
B2
RMIO -
OPTOCOUPLER
–
+
N
L
Control power
DATA
DATA
F5: COM
SCADA, PLC, OR
PERSONAL COMPUTER
B3
COMMON
GROUND THE SHIELD AT THE
SCADA/PLC/COMPUTER ONLY
OR THE MM300 ONLY
896740.CDR
(*) TERMINATING IMPEDANCE AT EACH END
(typically 120 ohms and 1 nF)
F5, F7, and F8 refer to terminals shown on the above 339 Terminal Identification diagrams.
NOTE:
NOTE
Figure 2-29: RTD wiring
339 Motor Protection System
N/C
~14
Surge ground
~13
RTD1
RTD2
RTD3
Shield
~12
Compensation ~11
Return
~10
Hot
~9
Shield
~8
Compensation
~7
Return
~6
Hot
~5
Shield
~4
Compensation
~3
Return
~2
Hot
~1
Three-wire shielded cable
Route cable in separate conduit from
current carrying conductors
RTD terminals
at motor
Motor
RTD in motor
stator or
bearing
Maximum total lead resistance:
25 ohms for Platinum RTDs
896739A1.CDR
2–24
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
339 Motor Protection System
N/C
~14
Surge ground
~13
RTD1
RTD2
RTD3
Shield
~12
Compensation ~11
Return
~10
Hot
~9
Shield
~8
Compensation
~7
Return
~6
Hot
~5
Shield
~4
Compensation
~3
Return
~2
Hot
~1
Motor
starter
Three-wire shielded cable
Route cable in separate conduit from
current carrying conductors
RTD terminals
at motor
Motor
RTD in motor
stator or
bearing
RTD
terminals in
motor starter
Maximum total lead resistance:
25 ohms for Platinum RTDs
896739.CDR
Internal RTD installation
Three resistance temperature detectors (RTDs) can be supplied internally with the 339 if
the INPUT/OUTPUT option ‘R’ is installed (refer to Order Code). With the internal RTD option,
the 100 ohm platinum DIN 43760 type is supported. Up to 3 RTDs may be used for motor
stator and bearing temperature monitoring. All 3 RTDs share a common Return and Shield
terminal.
The RTD circuitry compensates for lead resistance, provided that each of the three leads is
the same length. Lead resistance should not exceed 25 ohms per lead. Shielded cable
should be used to prevent noise pickup in the industrial environment. RTD cables should be
kept close to grounded metal casings and away from areas of high electromagnetic or
radio interference. RTD leads should not be run adjacent to or in the same conduit as high
current carrying wires.
The shield connection terminal of the RTDs is grounded in the 339 and should not be
connected to ground at the motor or anywhere else to prevent noise pickup from
circulating currents.
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
2–25
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION
RTD1
RTD2
RTD SENSING
339 Motor Protection System
Safety Ground
B2
Shield
A11
Return
B11
Compensation
A8
Hot
B8
Compensation
A9
Hot
B9
Three-wire shielded cable
Route cable in separate conduit from
current carrying conductors
RTD terminals
at motor
Motor
RTD in motor
stator or
bearing
Maximum total lead resistance:
25 ohms for Platinum RTDs
RTD3
896846A1.CDR
Compensation
A10
Hot
B10
Phase sequence and transformer polarity
For correct operation of the relay features, the user must follow the instrument
transformer polarities, shown in the Typical Wiring Diagram. Note the solid square
markings shown with all instrument transformer connections. When the connections
adhere to this drawing, the arrow shows the direction of power flow for positive watts and
the positive direction of lagging vars. The phase sequence is user programmable for either
ABC or ACB rotation.
Phase current inputs
The 339 relay has three (3) channels for phase current inputs, each with an isolating
transformer. There are no internal ground connections on the current inputs. Current
transformers with 10 to 1500 A primaries may be used.
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
Verify that the relay’s nominal input current of 1 A or 5 A matches the secondary rating
of the connected CTs. Unmatched CTs may result in equipment damage or inadequate
protection.
Before working on CTs, they MUST be short circuited.
Ground and CBCT inputs
The 339 has two isolating transformers with separate terminals for the 1A/5A secondary
and the CBCT (50:0.025). Only one ground terminal type can be used at a time. There are no
internal ground connections on the ground current inputs.
The maximum ground CT primary for the 1 A and 5 A taps is 1500 A. Alternatively the
sensitive ground input, 50:0.025, can be used to detect ground current on high resistance
grounded systems.
The ground CT connection can either be a zero sequence (core balance) installation or a
residual connection. Note that only 1 A and 5 A secondary CTs may be used for the residual
connection. A typical residual connection is illustrated below. The zero-sequence
2–26
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
connection is shown in the typical wiring diagram. The zero-sequence connection is
recommended. Unequal saturation of CTs, CT mismatch, size and location of motor,
resistance of the power system, motor core saturation density, etc. may cause false
readings in the residually connected ground fault circuit.
Figure 2-30: Residual ground CT connection
PHASE A CT
A
PHASE B CT
B
PHASE C CT
C
E5
D5
E6
D6
E7
D7
E8
D8
1A/5A COM 1A/5A COM 1A/5A COM 1A/5A COM
PHASE A
PHASE B
PHASE C
CURRENT INPUTS
GROUND
896827.cdr
Zero sequence CBCT installation
The exact placement of a zero sequence CT to properly detect ground fault current is
shown below. If the CT is placed over a shielded cable, capacitive coupling of phase current
into the cable shield during motor starts may be detected as ground current unless the
shield wire is also passed through the CT window. Twisted pair cabling on the zero
sequence CT is recommended
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
2–27
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION
Figure 2-31: Zero sequence core balance (CT) installation
UNSHIELDED CABLE
A
Source
B
C
SHIELDED CABLE
Ground connection to neutral
must be on the source side
N
G
A
Source
B
C
Stress cone
shields
Ground
outside CT
SHIELDED TWISTED PAIR
SHIELDED TWISTED PAIR
LOAD
LOAD
To ground;
must be on
load side
896791.CDR
Voltage inputs
The 339 relay has three channels for AC voltage inputs, each with an isolating transformer.
Voltage transformers up to a maximum 300:1 ratio may be used. The nominal secondary
voltage must be in the 50 to 240 V range. The three phase inputs are designated as the
“bus voltage”. The Bus VT connections most commonly used, wye and delta (or open delta),
are shown in the typical wiring diagram.
If Delta VTs are used, the zero sequence voltage (V0) will be zero. Also, with the Delta VT
connection, the phase-neutral voltage cannot be measured and will not be displayed.
NOTE:
NOTE
NOTE:
NOTE
The 339 relay can be applied to both metering and protection feeders with up to 20000 V
phase-to-phase voltage. Please ensure that the selected VT ratio and VT secondary do not
result in a primary voltage exceeding 20000 V.
Control power
CAUTION:
Control power supplied to the relay must match the installed power supply range. If the
applied voltage does not match, damage to the unit may occur. All grounds MUST be
connected for safe, normal operation regardless of control power supply type.
The label found on the relay specifies its order code or model number. The installed power
supply’s operating range will be one of the following:
LO: 24 to 48 V DC (Nominal Range: 20 to 60 V DC)
HI: 125 to 250 V DC/120 to 240 V AC (Nominal Range: 84 to 250 V DC/60 to 300 V AC)
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
2–28
The relay chassis ground terminals should be connected directly to the ground bus,
using the shortest practical path. A tinned copper, braided, shielding and bonding
cable should be used. As a minimum, 96 strands of number 34 AWG should be used.
Belden catalog number 8660 is suitable.
Isolate power prior to servicing.
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
An external switch, circuit breaker, or other protective device must be connected close to
the equipment.
NOTE:
NOTE
Figure 2-32: Control power connection
CONTROL
POWER
+
-
HEAVY COPPER CONDUCTOR
OR BRAIDED WIRE
B2
A1
B1
CHASSIS
GROUND
SWITCHGEAR
GROUND BUS
-
+
CONTROL
POWER
RELAY
898735.CDR
Contact inputs
External contacts can be connected to the relay’s ten (10) digital inputs. These contacts are
wet only.
The inputs can be programmed to different thresholds depending on the DC voltage (17,
33, 84, 166).
CAUTION:
Ensure correct polarity on contact input connections and do not connect any contact
input circuits to ground or else relay hardware may be damaged.
A wet contact has one side connected to the positive terminal of an external DC power
supply. The other side of this contact is connected to the required contact input terminal. In
addition, the negative side of the external source must be connected to the relay’s DC
negative rail at Terminal C11. The maximum external source voltage for this arrangement
is 300 V DC.
Figure 2-33: Wet contact connections
Wet Contact Connection
339 RELAY
Contact Input 1
C1
V DC Power
Supply
Contact Input Common C11
LOGICIN.CDR
Trip and Close output relays
The 339 relay is equipped with seven electromechanical output relays: 2 Form A (Relay 1,
Relay 2), and 5 Form C (Relays 3 to 7).
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
2–29
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION
When SWITCHING DEVICE is selected as BREAKER:
Output Relays:
•
•
For special purpose:
–
Output Relay 1 (non-failsafe, seal-in): Breaker Trip
–
Output Relay 2 (non-failsafe, seal-in): Breaker Close
–
Output Relay 3 (non-failsafe, self-reset): Start Inhibit
–
Output Relay 7 (fail-safe, self-reset): Critical Failure
For general purpose:
–
Output Relays 4 to 6 - non-failsafe; can be programmed as self-reset or latched.
Operation of the Trip and Close output relays is designed to be controlled by the state of
the circuit breaker as monitored by a 52a or 52b contact.
•
The Trip and Close relays reset after the breaker is detected in a state corresponding
to the command. When a relay feature sends a command to one of these special
relays, it will remain operational until the requested change of breaker state is
confirmed by a breaker auxiliary contact and the initiating condition has reset.
•
If the initiating feature resets, but the breaker does not change state, the output relay
will be reset after a default interval of 2 seconds.
•
If neither of the breaker auxiliary contacts, 52a nor 52b, is programmed to a contact
input, the Trip Relay is de-energized after either the delay programmed in the Breaker
Failure feature, or a default interval of 100 ms after the initiating input resets. The
Close Relay is de-energized after 200 ms.
•
If a delay is programmed for the Trip or Close contact seal-in time, then this delay is
added to the reset time. Note that the default setting for the seal-in time is 40 ms.
52a Contact
Configured
52b Contact
Configured
Relay Operation
Yes
Yes
Trip Relay remains operational until 52b indicates an
open breaker. Close Relay remains operational until 52a
indicates a closed breaker.
Yes
No
Trip Relay remains operational until 52a indicates an
open breaker. Close Relay remains operational until 52a
indicates a closed breaker.
No
Yes
Trip Relay remains operational until 52b indicates an
open breaker. Close Relay remains operational until 52b
indicates a closed breaker.
No
No
Trip Relay operates until either the Breaker Failure delay
expires (if the Breaker Failure element is enabled), or 100
ms after the feature causing the trip resets. Close Relay
operates for 200 ms.
Breaker monitoring (Trip and Close coil monitoring) is performed by a built-in voltage
monitor on Form A output relays: #1 Trip, and #2 Close. The voltage monitor is connected
across each of the two Form A contacts, and the relay effectively detects healthy current
through the circuit. In order to do this, an external jumper must be connected between
terminals A2 and A3 for Trip coil monitoring, or/and B4, and B5 for Close coil monitoring.
As long as the current through the Voltage Monitor is above the threshold of the trickle
currents (see Technical Specification for Form A output relays), the circuit integrity for the
Trip (Close) coil is effectively normal. If the Trip (Close) coil circuit gets disconnected, or if in
general a high resistance is detected in the circuitry, a Trip (Close) alarm will be set and the
“ALARM” and “MAINTENANCE” LEDs will be on provided the corresponding Coil Monitor
feature is enabled.
Example: The figures below show the two different connections of the breaker trip (close)
coil to the relay’s trip output #1 terminals (close output #2 terminals) for both no voltage
monitoring and voltage monitoring of the trip (close) circuit integrity.
2–30
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
To monitor the trip coil circuit integrity, use the relay terminals A2 and B3 to connect the
Trip coil, and provide a jumper between terminals A2 and A3 (optional voltage).
NOTE:
NOTE
To monitor the close coil circuit integrity, use the relay terminals B4 and A4 to connect the
Close coil, and provide a jumper between terminals B4 and B5 (optional voltage).
NOTE:
NOTE
Figure 2-34: Trip and Close Coil circuits with no voltage monitoring
DC +
DC +
Output Relay 1 (TRIP)
Output Relay 2 (CLOSE)
A2
B4
B3
A4
V
V
A3
B5
52a
contact
52b
contact
Trip
Coil
896730.cdr
Close
Coil
DC -
DC -
All AUX contacts are shown when the breaker is open.
NOTE:
NOTE
Figure 2-35: Trip and Close Coil circuits with voltage monitoring
DC +
Output Relay 1 (TRIP)
DC +
Output Relay 2 (CLOSE)
External
jumper
A2
External
jumper
B4
B3
A4
V
V
A3
B5
52a
contact
52b
contact
Trip
Coil
Close
Coil
896731.cdr
DC -
DC -
When SWITCHING DEVICE is selected as CONTACTOR
Output Relays:
•
•
Not Used:
–
Output Relay 1
–
Output Relay 2
For special purpose:
–
Output Relay 3 (self-reset): Start Inhibit
–
Output Relay 4 (fail-safe, non-fail-safe): Trip
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
2–31
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION
–
•
Output Relay 7 (fail-safe, self-reset): Critical Failure
For general purpose:
–
Output Relays 5 to 6: Can be programmed as fail-safe or non-failsafe, as well as
self-reset or latched.
Serial communications
Figure 2-36: RS485 wiring diagram
ZT (*)
SHIELD
339 IED
TWISTED PAIR
F3
RS485 +
F4
RS485 -
OPTOCOUPLER
OPTOCOUPLER
DATA
DATA
COM
SCADA, PLC, OR
PERSONAL COMPUTER
F5
COMMON
GROUND THE SHIELD AT THE
SCADA/PLC/COMPUTER ONLY
OR THE 339 ONLY
RS485 +
(*) TERMINATING IMPEDANCE AT EACH END
(typically 120 ohms and 1 nF)
IED
RS485 -
COMMON
UP TO 32 339
OR OTHER IEDs,
MAXIMUM CABLE
LENGTH OF
1200 m (4000 ft.)
IED
ZT (*)
RS485 +
RS485 COMMON
LAST
DEVICE
896732A1.CDR
One two-wire RS485 port is provided. Up to 32 339 IEDs can be daisy-chained together on
a communication channel without exceeding the driver capability. For larger systems,
additional serial channels must be added. Commercially available repeaters can also be
used to add more than 32 relays on a single channel. Suitable cable should have a
characteristic impedance of 120 ohms (for example, Belden #9841) and total wire length
should not exceed 1200 meters (4000 ft.). Commercially available repeaters will allow for
transmission distances greater than 1200 meters.
Voltage differences between remote ends of the communication link are not uncommon.
For this reason, surge protection devices are internally installed across all RS485 terminals.
Internally, an isolated power supply with an optocoupled data interface is used to prevent
noise coupling.
CAUTION:
To ensure that all devices in a daisy-chain are at the same potential, it is imperative
that the common terminals of each RS485 port are tied together and grounded only
once, at the master or at the slave339 . Failure to do so may result in intermittent or
failed communications.
The source computer/PLC/SCADA system should have similar transient protection devices
installed, either internally or externally. Ground the shield at one point only, as shown in the
figure above, to avoid ground loops.
2–32
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
Correct polarity is also essential. The 339 IEDs must be wired with all the positive (+)
terminals connected together and all the negative (–) terminals connected together. Each
relay must be daisy-chained to the next one. Avoid star or stub connected configurations.
The last device at each end of the daisy-chain should be terminated with a 120 ohm ¼
watt resistor in series with a 1 nF capacitor across the positive and negative terminals.
Observing these guidelines will ensure a reliable communication system immune to
system transients.
IRIG-B
IRIG-B is a standard time code format that allows time stamping of events to be
synchronized among connected devices within 1 millisecond. The IRIG time code formats
are serial, width-modulated codes which can be either DC level shift or amplitude
modulated (AM) form. The type of form is auto-detected by the 339 relay. Third party
equipment is available for generating the IRIG-B signal; this equipment may use a GPS
satellite system to obtain the time reference so that devices at different geographic
locations can also be synchronized.
Figure 2-37: IRIG-B connection
GPS SATELLITE SYSTEM
GPS CONNECTION
OPTIONAL
IRIG-B
TIME CODE
GENERATOR
(DC SHIFT OR
AMPLITUDE MODULATED
SIGNAL CAN BE USED)
RG58/59 COAXIAL CABLE
GE MULTILIN
339 RELAY
+
F1
IRIG-B(+)
–
F2
IRIG-B(-)
RECEIVER
896741.CDR
TO OTHER DEVICES
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
2–33
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
2–34
CHAPTER 2: INSTALLATION
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE
Grid Solutions
339 Motor Protection System
Chapter 3: Interfaces
Interfaces
There are two methods of interfacing with the 339 Motor Protection System .
•
Interfacing via the relay keypad and display.
•
Interfacing via the EnerVista SR3 Setup software.
This section provides an overview of the interfacing methods available with the 339 using
the relay control panel and EnerVista SR3 Setup software. For additional details on
interface parameters (for example, settings, actual values, etc.), refer to the individual
chapters.
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3–1
FRONT CONTROL PANEL INTERFACE
CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES
Front control panel interface
Figure 3-1: 339 Motor Protection System front panel
GE Multilin
339 Motor
Protection System
IN SERVICE
STOPPED
TRIP
TROUBLE
ALARM
STARTING
LOCKOUT
PICKUP
RUNNING
START
INHIBIT
MAINTENANCE
HOT RTD
△
◁
▷
▽
▲
MENU
ENTER
▼
ESCAPE
RESET
USB
896351A1.cdr
Description
The relay front panel provides an interface with a liquid crystal display, LED status
indicators, control keys, and a USB program port. The display and status indicators show
the relay information automatically. The control keys are used to select the appropriate
message for entering setpoints or displaying measured values. The USB program port is
also provided for connection with a computer running the EnerVista SR3 Setup software.
3–2
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES
FRONT CONTROL PANEL INTERFACE
Display
The 80-character liquid crystal display (LCD) allows visibility under varied lighting
conditions. When the keypad and display are not being used, system information is
displayed after a user-defined period of inactivity. Pressing the Menu key during the
display of the default message returns the display to the last message shown before the
default message appeared. Any trip, alarm, or pickup is displayed immediately,
automatically overriding the default message.
Working with the
Keypad
The 339 display messages are organized into a Main Menu, pages, and sub-pages. There
are four main menus labeled Actual Values, Quick Setup, Setpoints, and Maintenance.
Pressing the MENU key followed by the MESSAGE key scrolls through the four Main Menu
headers, which appear in sequence as follows:
Figure 3-2: The four Main Menu headers
█ ACTUAL VALUES
QUICK SETUP
SETPOINTS
MAINTENANCE
Pressing the MESSAGE ► key or the ENTER key from these Main Menu pages will display
the corresponding menu Page. Use the MESSAGE ▲ and MESSAGE ▼ keys to scroll through
the Page headers.
Figure 3-3: Typical paging operation from Main Menu selection
△
Back
▶
ACTUAL VALUES
█ A1 STATUS
A2 METERING
A3 RECORDS
▶
▽
1 click
A1 STATUS
█ MOTOR STATUS
CLOCK
CONTACT INPUTS
Back
▼
◁
▷
▼
2 clicks
A1 STATUS
MOTOR STATUS
CLOCK
█ CONTACT INPUTS
Back
▼
◁
▷
▼
Click to end
A1 STATUS
..
.
█ RTD TEMP SUMMARY
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3–3
FRONT CONTROL PANEL INTERFACE
CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES
When the display shows SETPOINTS, pressing the MESSAGE ► key or the ENTER key will
display the page headers of programmable parameters (referred to as setpoints in the
manual). When the display shows ACTUAL VALUES, pressing the MESSAGE ► key or the
ENTER key displays the page headers of measured parameters (referred to as actual
values in the manual).
Each page is broken down further into logical sub-pages of messages. The MESSAGE ▲
and MESSAGE ▼ keys are used to navigate through the sub-pages. A summary of the
setpoints and actual values pages can be found in the Chapters : Setpoints and Actual
Values, respectively.
The ENTER key is dual purpose. It is used to enter the sub-pages and to store altered
setpoint values into memory to complete the change. The MESSAGE ► key can also be
used to enter sub-pages but not to store altered setpoints.
The ESCAPE key or the MESSAGE key can be used to exit the sub-pages.
The VALUE keys are used to scroll through the possible choices of an enumerated setpoint.
They also decrement and increment numerical setpoints.
The RESET key resets any latched conditions that are not currently active. This includes
resetting latched output relays, latched Trip LEDs, breaker operation failure, and trip / close
coil failures.
The MESSAGE ▲ and MESSAGE ▼ keys scroll through any active conditions in the relay.
Diagnostic messages are displayed indicating the state of protection and monitoring
elements that are picked up, operating, or latched.
LED status indicators
•
•
•
•
•
IN SERVICE: Green
–
Turns "ON" when the relay does not have any major self-test error.
–
Minor self-test targets will not de-activate the LED.
TROUBLE: Amber
–
Turns "ON" when either a major or minor self-test error has occurred.
–
Will be latched "ON" for major self-test errors, except for "RELAY NOT READY".
–
Will be self-resetting for minor self-test errors.
TRIP: Red
–
Turns "ON" when a protection element has been assigned to trip and the element
has been activated.
–
Will be latched "ON" until a reset command occurs.
–
Turns "OFF" when a reset has been initiated through the front panel,
communications, or digital inputs, and the fault has been cleared.
ALARM: Amber
–
Flashes "ON" and "OFF" when a protection, control, or maintenance element has
been assigned to alarm and the element has been activated.
–
Will be latched "ON" if "Latched Alarm" is set and the fault has been cleared.
–
Will be self-resetting if "Alarm" is set and the fault has been cleared.
–
Turns "OFF" when a reset has been initiated through the front panel or
communications, and the fault has been cleared, if "Latched Alarm" is set.
PICKUP: Amber
–
•
MAINTENANCE: Amber
–
3–4
Turns "ON" when a protection element setting threshold has been exceeded. LED
will turn "OFF" when the values go below the threshold.
Turns "ON" when either the Trip or the Close Coil Monitor element is activated, or
the Trip Counter has exceeded the programmed value.
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES
FRONT CONTROL PANEL INTERFACE
•
LOCKOUT: Red
–
Turns "ON" when the following elements are activated:
Thermal Overload
Short Circuit
Mechanical Jam
Ground Fault.
•
•
–
Can be reset only by emergency restart or lockout reset, if they are enabled.
–
If the above are not enabled, a normal reset will turn the LED "OFF".
START INHIBIT: Red
–
Turns "ON" when the Start Inhibit element is activated.
–
Self-resetting when the inhibit is no longer present.
STOPPED: Default to Red
–
•
STARTING: Default to Amber
–
•
LED color is programmable. Turns "ON" when the motor status is "Starting".
RUNNING: Default to Green
–
•
LED color is programmable. Turns "ON" when the motor status is "Stopped".
LED color is programmable. Turns "ON" when the motor status is "Running".
HOT RTD: Amber
–
Turns "ON" when either a RTD Alarm or Trip has been activated.
–
Self-resetting when the fault is no longer present.
Relay messages
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3–5
FRONT CONTROL PANEL INTERFACE
CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES
Default message
Figure 3-4: Relay default messages
Target messages
Target messages are automatically displayed for any active condition on the relay such as
pickups, trips, or alarms.
The relay displays and rolls up target messages until the conditions clear and/or the RESET
command is initiated. The Target Messages can be reviewed by pressing either the
MESSAGE UP or MESSAGE DOWN key. If a RESET command is not performed but any of the
other faceplate pushbuttons is pressed, the display will not show the target messages
unless the user navigates to ACTUAL VALUES > A4 TARGET MESSAGES, where they can be
reviewed. If the target messages have not been cleared before the user presses a
pushbutton different from “RESET”, they will reappear on the screen after the time specified
under the SETPOINTS > S1 RELAY SETUP > S1 FRONT PANEL > MESSAGE TIMEOUT setting,
that will start timing out from the last pressed pushbutton. The following shows the format
of a typical Target Message:
Figure 3-5: Typical target message
A4 TARGET MESSAGES
Cause <function>
State: Operate
Phase:
3–6
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES
FRONT CONTROL PANEL INTERFACE
Figure 3-6: Example of Trip on Phase A
A4 TARGET MESSAGES
Ph IOC1 Trip
State: Operate
▼ Phase:A
Cause <Function>
This line contains information of the cause of operation (the name of the operated
element), and the element function.
State: Operate
This line from the display shows the state of the element: Pickup, Operate, Alarm.
Phase: A
The last line from the display shows the phase that picked up or operated.
Self-test errors
CAUTION:
The relay performs self diagnostics at initialization (after power up), and continuously as a
background task to ensure that the hardware and software are functioning correctly.
There are two types of self-test warnings indicating either a minor or major problem. Minor
problems indicate a problem with the relay that does not compromise protection of the
power system. Major errors indicate a problem with the relay which takes it out of service.
Self-Test Warnings may indicate a serious problem with the relay hardware!
Upon detection of a minor problem, the relay will:
•
Turn on the "TROUBLE" LED at the same time as the "IN SERVICE" LED is on.
•
Display the error on the relay display.
•
Record the minor self-test error in the Event Recorder.
Upon detection of a major problem, the relay will:
•
De-energize critical failure relay (Output Relay 7).
•
Inhibit operation of all other output relays (1 to 6).
•
Turn off the "IN SERVICE" LED.
•
Turn on the "TROUBLE" LED.
•
Flash the "ALARM" LED.
•
Display the cause of major self-test failure.
•
Record the major self-test failure in the Event Recorder.
Figure 3-7: Typical Self-test warning
A4 TARGET MESSAGES
UNIT FAILURE:
Contact Factory:
Error code:1
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3–7
FRONT CONTROL PANEL INTERFACE
CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES
Table 3-1: Minor Self-test Errors
Self-test Error Latched Description of
Message
Target
Problem
Message?
How Often the Test
is Performed
What to do
MAINTENANCE No
ALERT: IRIG-B
Failure
A bad IRIG-B input
signal has been
detected.
Every 5 seconds*
Ensure IRIG-B cable is
connected, check cable
functionality (i.e. physical
damage or perform
continuity test), ensure
IRIG-B receiver is
functioning, and check
input signal level (it may
be less than specification).
If none of these apply,
contact the factory.
MAINTENANCE No
ALERT: Clock
Not Set
Clock time is the
same as the default
time.
Every 5 seconds*
Set the date and time in
S1 RELAY SETUP.
MAINTENANCE No
ALERT: Comm
Alert 1, 2, or 3
Communication
error between CPU
and Comms board.
Every 5 seconds*
If alert doesn’t self-reset,
then contact factory.
Otherwise monitor
recurrences as errors are
detected and self-reset.
MAINTENANCE No
ALERT :
Ethernet Link
Fail
Communication
error between
339 and Network.
Detected
Instantaneously
Check Ethernet cable and
Ethernet connection.
Check health of the
network. Check status of
external routers and
switches.
MAINTENANCE No
ALERT: High
Ethernet
Traffic
Every 5 seconds*
MAINTENANCE No
ALERT: High
Ambient
Temperature
The ambient
temperature is
above 80oC.
Every 1 hour
Increase ventillation to the
surroundings.
MAINTENANCE No
ALERT : RMIO
Mismatch
RMIO Module is not
validated;
communications
with the RMIO
module are lost or
interrupted.
Every 5 seconds*
Validate the RMIO Module;
check CANBUS
communication.
How Often the Test
is Performed
What to do
Table 3-2: Major Self-test Errors
Description of
Self-test Error Latched
Message
Target
Problem
Message?
UNIT FAILURE:
Contact
Factory
(XXXX)
Yes
This warning is
Every 5 seconds1
caused by a unit
hardware failure.
Failure code (XXXX) is
shown.
Contact the factory and
provide the failure code.
RELAY NOT
READY: Check
Settings
No
S1 RELAY SETUP >
INSTALLATION >
RELAY STATUS is set
to "Not Ready".
Program all required
settings then set the S1
RELAY SETUP >
INSTALLATION > RELAY
STATUS setting to "Ready".
On power up and
whenever the RELAY
STATUS setting is
altered.
1.Failure is logged after the detection of 5 consecutive failures - that is, after 25 seconds.
Flash messages
3–8
Flash messages are warning, error, or general information messages displayed in response
to pressing certain keys.
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES
SOFTWARE SETUP
Figure 3-8: Typical Flash message
S3 SHORT CIRCUIT
BLOCK 1
Logic Element 8
<SETPOINT STORED>
SETPOINT STORED
This flash message is displayed in response to the ENTER key while on any setpoint
message (see example above). The edited value was stored as entered.
COMMAND EXECUTED
This flash message is displayed in response to executing a command: ON, OFF, YES, NO,
etc.
INVALID PASSWORD
This flash message appears upon an attempt to enter an incorrect password, as part of
password security.
Software setup
Quick setup - Software interface
•
The Quick Setup window allows you to configure important settings from different
screens in the relay by adding them to a common window.
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3–9
SOFTWARE SETUP
CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES
•
The Quick Setup window options are available for online devices or setpoint files.
•
The Quick Setup Window option is accessed from the "Tree" which launches on
clicking.
EnerVista SR3 Setup Software
Although settings can be entered manually using the control panel keys, a PC can be used
to download setpoints through the communications port. The EnerVista SR3
Setup software makes this as convenient as possible. With theEnerVista SR3 Setup
339 relay running, it is possible to:
•
Program and modify settings
•
Load and save setting files to and from a disk
•
Read actual values
•
Monitor status
•
Read pre-trip data and event records
•
Get help on any topic
•
Upgrade the 339 firmware
The EnerVista SR3 Setup software allows immediate access to all 339 features with easy to
use pull down menus in the familiar Windows environment. This section provides the
necessary information to install the 339 EnerVista SR3 Setup , upgrade the relay firmware,
and write and edit setting files.
The EnerVista SR3 Setup software can run without a 339 connected to the computer. In
this case, settings may be saved to a file for future use. If a 339 is connected to a PC and
communications are enabled, the 339 can be programmed from the setting screens. In
addition, measured values, status and trip messages can be displayed with the actual
value screens.
Hardware and
software
requirements
Installing the
EnerVista SR3 Setup
software
3–10
The following requirements must be met for the EnerVista SR3 Setup software.
•
Windows 7 (32-bit or 64-bit) or Windows 8.1 (32-bit or 64-bit)
The EnerVista SR3 Setup software can be installed from either the GE EnerVista CD or the
GE Multilin website at http://www.gegridsolutions.com/multilin.
After ensuring the minimum requirements indicated earlier, use the following procedure to
install the EnerVista SR3 Setup software from the enclosed GE EnerVista CD.
1.
Insert the GE EnerVista CD into your CD-ROM drive.
2.
Follow the installation instructions to install the no-charge EnerVista software on the
local PC.
3.
When installation is complete, start the EnerVista Launchpad application.
4.
Click the IED Setup section of the LaunchPad toolbar.
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES
SOFTWARE SETUP
5.
In the EnerVista Launchpad window, click the Add Product button and select the
339 Feeder Protection System as shown below. Select the Web option to ensure the
most recent software release, or select CD if you do not have a web connection, then
click the Add Now button to list software items for the relay339 .
6.
EnerVista Launchpad will obtain the latest installation software from the Web or CD
and automatically start the installation process. A status window with a progress bar
will be shown during the downloading process.
7.
Select the complete path, including the new directory name, where the EnerVista SR3
Setup software will be installed.
8.
Click on Next to begin the installation. The files will be installed in the directory
indicated, the USB driver will be loaded into the computer, and the installation
program will automatically create icons and add EnerVista SR3 Setup software to the
Windows start menu.
9.
The 339 device will be added to the list of installed IEDs in the EnerVista Launchpad
window, as shown below.
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3–11
SOFTWARE SETUP
CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES
If you are going to communicate from your computer to the 339 Relay using the USB
port:
10. Plug the USB cable into the USB port on the 339 Relay then into the USB port on your
computer.
11. Launch EnerVista SR3 Setup from LaunchPad.
12. In EnerVista > Device Setup:
3–12
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES
SOFTWARE SETUP
13. Select USB as the Interface type.
14. Select 339 Relay as the USB device.
Upgrading the
software
The latest EnerVista software and firmware can be downloaded from:
https://www.gegridsolutions.com/app/ViewFiles.aspx?prod=345&type=7
After upgrading, check the version number under Help > About. If the new version does
not display, try uninstalling the software and reinstalling the new versions.
Connecting EnerVista SR3 Setup to the relay
Configuring serial
communications
Before starting, verify that the cable is properly connected to either the USB port on the
front panel of the device (for USB communications) or to the RS485 terminals on the back
of the device (for RS485 communications). This example demonstrates an USB connection.
For RS485 communications, the GE Grid Solutions F485 converter will be required. Refer to
the F485 manual for additional details. To configure the relay for Ethernet
communications, see Configuring Ethernet Communications below.
1.
Install and start the latest version of the EnerVista SR3 Setup software (available from
the GE Grid Solutions web site). See the previous section for the installation procedure.
2.
Click on the Device Setup button to open the Device Setup window and click the Add
Site button to define a new site.
3.
Enter the desired site name in the "Site Name" field. If desired, a short description of
the site can also be entered. In this example, we will use “Substation 1” as the site
name.
4.
The new site will appear in the upper-left list in the EnerVista SR3 Setup window.
5.
Click the Add Device button to define the new device.
6.
Enter the desired name in the "Device Name" field and a description (optional) of the
device.
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3–13
SOFTWARE SETUP
CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES
7.
Select “Serial” from the Interface drop-down list.
8.
Click the Read Order Code button to connect to the 339 device and upload the order
code.
9.
Click OK when the relay order code has been received. The new device will be added
to the Site List window (or Online window) located in the top left corner of the main
EnerVista SR3 Setup window.
The 339 Site Device has now been configured for USB communications. Proceed to
Connecting to the Relay below, to begin communications.
Using the Quick
Connect feature
3–14
The Quick Connect button can be used to establish a fast connection through the front
panel USB port of a 339 relay, or through the Ethernet port. The following window will
appear when the QuickConnect button is pressed:
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES
SOFTWARE SETUP
As indicated by the window, the "Quick Connect" feature can quickly connect the EnerVista
SR3 Setup software to a 339 front port if the USB is selected in the interface drop-down list.
Select "339 Relay" and press the Connect button. Ethernet can also be used as the
interface for Quick Connect as shown above.
When connected, a new Site called “Quick Connect” will appear in the Site List window.
The 339 Site Device has now been configured via the Quick Connect feature for either USB
or Ethernet communications. Proceed to Connecting to the Relay below, to begin
communications.
Configuring Ethernet
communications
Before starting, verify that the Ethernet cable is properly connected to the RJ-45 Ethernet
port.
339 The 339 relay supports a maximum of 3 TCP/IP sessions.
NOTE:
NOTE
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3–15
SOFTWARE SETUP
CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES
1.
Install and start the latest version of the EnerVista SR3 Setup Setup software (available
from the GE EnerVista CD). See the previous section for the installation procedure.
2.
Click on the Device Setup button to open the Device Setup window and click the Add
Site button to define a new site.
3.
Enter the desired site name in the "Site Name" field. If desired, a short description of
the site can also be entered. In this example, we will use “Substation 1” as the site
name.
4.
The new site will appear in the upper-left list.
5.
Click the Add Device button to define the new device.
6.
Enter the desired name in the "Device Name" field, and a description (optional).
7.
Select “Ethernet” from the Interface drop-down list. This will display a number of
interface parameters that must be entered for proper Ethernet functionality.
8.
Enter the IP address, slave address, and Modbus port values assigned to the 339 relay
(from the S1 RELAY SETUP > COMMUNICATIONS > ETHERNET menu).
9.
Click the Read Order Code button to connect to the 339 and upload the order code. If
a communications error occurs, ensure that the Ethernet communication values
correspond to the relay setting values.
10. Click OK when the relay order code has been received. The new device will be added
to the Site List window (or Online window) located in the top left corner of the main
EnerVista SR3 Setup window.
The 339 Site Device has now been configured for Ethernet communications. Proceed to
the following section to begin communications.
Connecting to the
relay
Now that the communications parameters have been properly configured, the user can
easily communicate with the relay.
1.
3–16
Expand the Site list by double clicking on the site name or clicking on the «+» box to
list the available devices for the given site.
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES
SOFTWARE SETUP
2.
Desired device trees can be expanded by clicking the «+» box. The following list of
headers is shown for each device:
Device Definition
Actual Values
Quick Setup
Setpoints
Maintenance.
3.
Expand the SETTINGS > RELAY SETUP list item and double click on Front Panel to open
the "Front Panel" settings window as shown below:
4.
The "Front Panel" settings window will open with a corresponding status indicator on
the lower left of the EnerVista SR3 Setup window.
5.
If the status indicator is red, verify that the serial, USB, or Ethernet cable is properly
connected to the relay, and that the relay has been properly configured for
communications (steps described earlier).
The "Front Panel" settings can now be edited, printed, or changed. Other setpoint and
command windows can be displayed and edited in a similar manner. "Actual Values"
windows are also available for display. These windows can be arranged, and resized at will.
Working with setpoints and setpoint files
Engaging a device
The EnerVista SR3 Setup software may be used in on-line mode (relay connected) to
directly communicate with a relay. Communicating relays are organized and grouped by
communication interfaces and into sites. Sites may contain any number of relays selected
from the product series.
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3–17
SOFTWARE SETUP
Entering setpoints
3–18
CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES
The System Setup page will be used as an example to illustrate the entering of setpoints. In
this example, we will be changing the voltage sensing setpoints.
1.
Establish communications with the relay.
2.
Select the Setpoint > System Setup > Voltage Sensing menu item.
3.
Select the Bus VT Secondary setpoint by clicking anywhere in the parameter box. This
will display three arrows: two to increment/decrement the value and another to
launch the numerical keypad.
4.
Clicking the arrow at the end of the box displays a numerical keypad interface that
allows the user to enter a value within the setpoint range displayed near the top of the
keypad: Click = to exit from the keypad and keep the new value. Click on X to exit from
the keypad and retain the old value.
5.
For setpoints requiring non-numerical pre-set values (e.g. 3-Phase voltage
connection below), clicking anywhere within the setpoint value box displays a dropdown selection menu arrow. Select the desired value from this list.
6.
For setpoints requiring an alphanumeric text string (e.g. "relay name"), the value may
be entered directly within the setpoint value box.
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES
SOFTWARE SETUP
7.
File support
Using setpoints files
In the Setpoint > System Setup > Voltage Sensing dialog box, click on Save to save
the values into the relay339 . Click YES to accept any changes and exit the window.
Click Restore to retain previous values. Click Default to restore Default values.
Opening any EnerVista SR3 Setup file will automatically launch the application or provide
focus to the already opened application. If the file is a settings file (has a ‘SR3’ extension)
which had been removed from the Settings List tree menu, it will be added back to the
Settings List tree.
New files will be automatically added to the tree.
The EnerVista SR3 Setup software interface supports three ways of handling changes to
relay settings:
•
In off-line mode (relay disconnected) to create or edit relay settings files for later
download to communicating relays.
•
Directly modifying relay settings while connected to a communicating relay, then
saving the settings when complete.
•
Creating/editing settings files while connected to a communicating relay, then saving
them to the relay when complete.
Settings files are organized on the basis of file names assigned by the user. A settings file
contains data pertaining to the following types of relay settings:
•
Device Definition
•
Relay Setup
•
System Setup
•
Protection
•
Control
•
Inputs/Outputs
Factory default values are supplied and can be restored after any changes.
The EnerVista SR3 Setup displays relay setpoints with the same hierarchy as the front
panel display.
Downloading and
saving setpoints files
Back up a copy of the in-service settings for each commissioned 339 unit, so as to revert
to the commissioned settings after inadvertent, unauthorized, or temporary setting
changes are made, after the settings default due to firmware upgrade, or when the unit
has to be replaced. This section describes how to backup settings to a file and how to use
that file to restore settings to the original relay or to a replacement relay
Setpoints must be saved to a file on the local PC before performing any firmware
upgrades. Saving setpoints is also highly recommended before making any setpoint
changes or creating new setpoint files.
The setpoint files in the EnerVista SR3 Setup window are accessed in the Files Window. Use
the following procedure to download and save setpoint files to a local PC.
1.
Ensure that the site and corresponding device(s) have been properly defined and
configured as shown in Connecting EnerVista SR3 Setup to the Relay, above.
2.
Select the desired device from the site list.
3.
Select the Online > Read Device Settings from Device menu item, or right-click on the
device and select Read Device Settings to obtain settings information from the
device.
4.
After a few seconds of data retrieval, the software will request the name and
destination path of the setpoint file. The corresponding file extension will be
automatically assigned. Press Receive to complete the process. A new entry will be
added to the tree, in the File pane, showing path and file name for the setpoint file.
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3–19
SOFTWARE SETUP
Adding setpoints files
to the environment
Creating a new
setpoint file
3–20
CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES
The EnerVista SR3 Setup software provides the capability to review and manage a large
group of setpoint files. Use the following procedure to add an existing file to the list.
1.
In the files pane, right-click on Files and select the Add Existing Setting File item as
shown:
2.
The Open dialog box will appear, prompting the user to select a previously saved
setpoint file. As for any other MS Windows® application, browse for the file to be
added then click Open. The new file and complete path will be added to the file list.
The EnerVista SR3 Setup software allows the user to create new setpoint files independent
of a connected device. These can be uploaded to a relay at a later date. The following
procedure illustrates how to create new setpoint files.
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES
Upgrading setpoint
files to a new revision
SOFTWARE SETUP
1.
In the File pane, right click on File and select the New Settings File item. The following
box will appear, allowing for the configuration of the setpoint file for the correct
firmware version. It is important to define the correct firmware version to ensure that
setpoints not available in a particular version are not downloaded into the relay.
2.
Select the Firmware Version, and Order Code options for the new setpoint file.
3.
For future reference, enter some useful information in the Description box to facilitate
the identification of the device and the purpose of the file.
4.
To select a file name and path for the new file, click the button beside the File Name
box.
5.
Select the file name and path to store the file, or select any displayed file name to
replace an existing file. All 339 setpoint files should have the extension ‘SR3’ (for
example, ‘feeder1.SR3’).
6.
Click OK to complete the process. Once this step is completed, the new file, with a
complete path, will be added to the EnerVista SR3 Setup software environment.
It is often necessary to upgrade the revision for a previously saved setpoint file after the
339 firmware has been upgraded. This is illustrated in the following procedure:
1.
Establish communications with the 339 relay.
2.
Select the Maintenance > M1 Relay Info menu item and record the Firmware
Revision.
3.
Load the setpoint file to be upgraded into the EnerVista SR3 Setup environment as
described in the section, Adding Setpoints Files to the Environment.
4.
In the File pane, select the saved setpoint file.
5.
From the main window menu bar, select the Offline > Edit Settings File Properties
menu item and note the File Version of the setpoint file. If this version is different from
the Firmware Revision noted in step 2, select a New File Version that matches the
Firmware Revision from the pull-down menu.
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3–21
SOFTWARE SETUP
Printing setpoints and
actual values
3–22
CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES
6.
For example, if the firmware revision is L2L01MA120.000 (Firmware Revision 1.20) and
the current setpoint file revision is 1.10, change the setpoint file revision to “1.2x”.
7.
Enter any special comments about the setpoint file in the "Description" field.
8.
Select the desired firmware version from the "New File Version" field.
9.
When complete, click OK to convert the setpoint file to the desired revision. See
Loading Setpoints from a File below, for instructions on loading this setpoint file into
the 339 .
The EnerVista SR3 Setup software allows the user to print partial or complete lists of
setpoints and actual values. Use the following procedure to print a list of setpoints:
1.
Select a previously saved setpoints file in the File pane or establish communications
with a 339 device.
2.
From the main window, select the Offline > Export Settings File menu item.
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES
Printing actual values
from a connected
device
SOFTWARE SETUP
3.
The Print/Export Options dialog box will appear. Select Settings in the upper section
and select either Include All Features (for a complete list) or Include Only Enabled
Features (for a list of only those features which are currently used) in the filtering
section and click OK.
4.
The process for Offline > Print Preview Settings File is identical to the steps above.
5.
Setpoint lists can be printed in the same manner by right clicking on the desired file (in
the file list) or device (in the device list) and selecting the Print Device Information or
Print Settings File options.
A complete list of actual values can also be printed from a connected device with the
following procedure:
1.
Establish communications with the desired 339 device.
2.
From the main window, select the Online > Print Device Information menu item
3.
The Print/Export Options dialog box will appear. Select Actual Values in the upper
section and select either Include All Features (for a complete list) or Include Only
Enabled Features (for a list of only those features which are currently used) in the
filtering section and click OK.
Actual values lists can be printed in the same manner by right clicking on the desired
device (in the device list) and selecting the Print Device Information option
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3–23
SOFTWARE SETUP
CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES
Loading setpoints
from a file
An error message will occur when attempting to download a setpoint file with a
revision number that does not match the relay firmware. If the firmware has been
upgraded since saving the setpoint file, see Upgrading Setpoint Files to a New Revision,
above, for instructions on changing the revision number of a setpoint file.
CAUTION:
The following procedure illustrates how to load setpoints from a file. Before loading a
setpoints file, it must first be added to the EnerVista SR3 Setup environment as described
in the section, Adding Setpoints Files to the Environment.
1.
Select the previously saved setpoints file from the File pane of the EnerVista SR3 Setup
software main window.
2.
Select the Offline > Edit Settings File Properties menu item and verify that the
corresponding file is fully compatible with the hardware and firmware version of the
target relay. If the versions are not identical, see Upgrading Setpoint Files to a New
Revision, above, for details on changing the setpoints file version.
3.
Right-click on the selected file and select the Write Settings File to Device item.
4.
Select the target relay from the list of devices shown and click Send. If there is an
incompatibility, an "Incompatible Device" error message will occur:
If there are no incompatibilities between the target device and the settings file, the data
will be transferred to the relay. An indication of the percentage completed will be shown in
the bottom of the main window.
Uninstalling files and
clearing data
The unit can be decommissioned by turning off the power to the unit and disconnecting
the wires to it. Files can be cleared after uninstalling the EnerVista software or 339 device,
for example to comply with data security regulations. On the computer, settings files can
be identified by the .sr3 extension.
To clear the current settings file do the following:
1.
Create a default settings file.
2.
Write the default settings file to the relay.
3.
Delete all other files with the .sr3 extension.
4.
Delete any other data files , which can be in standard formats, such as COMTRADE or
.csv.
You cannot directly erase the flash memory, but all records and settings in that memory
can be deleted. Do this using these commands:
ACTUAL VALUES > RECORDS
•
EVENT RECORDS > CLEAR
•
TRANSIENT RECORDS > CLEAR
Upgrading relay firmware
To upgrade the 339 firmware, follow the procedures listed in this section. Upon successful
completion of this procedure, the 339 will have new firmware installed with the factory
default setpoints.The latest firmware files are available from the GE Grid Solutions website
at http://www.gegridsolutions.com.
EnerVista SR3 Setup software prevents incompatible firmware from being loaded into a
339 relay.
NOTE:
NOTE
3–24
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES
NOTE:
NOTE
Loading new relay
firmware
SOFTWARE SETUP
Before upgrading firmware, it is very important to save the current 339 settings to a file on
your PC. After the firmware has been upgraded, it will be necessary to load this file back
into the 339. Refer to Downloading and Saving Setpoints Files for details on saving relay
setpoints to a file.
Loading new firmware into the 339 flash memory is accomplished as follows:
1.
Connect the relay to the local PC and save the setpoints to a file as shown in
Downloading and Saving Setpoints Files.
2.
Select the Maintenance > Update Firmware menu item.
3.
The EnerVista SR3 Setup software will request the new firmware file. Locate the folder
that contains the firmware files to load into the 339 relay. The firmware filename has
the following format:
SR3_.SFD
Firmware Rev #
4.
EnerVista SR3 Setup software now prepares the 339 to receive the new firmware file.
The 339 front panel will momentarily display "SR BOOT PROGRAM Waiting for
Message,” indicating that it is in upload mode.
5.
While the file is being loaded into the 339 relay, a status box appears showing how
much of the new firmware file has been transferred and the upgrade status. The
entire transfer process takes approximately 10 minutes.
6.
The EnerVista SR3 Setup software will notify the user when the 339 has finished
loading the file. Carefully read any displayed messages and click OK to return the
main screen. Cycling power to the relay is recommended after a firmware upgrade.
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3–25
SOFTWARE SETUP
CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES
After successfully updating the 339 firmware, the relay will not be operational and will
require setpoint programming. To communicate with the relay, the communication
settings may have to be manually reprogrammed.
When communications are established, the saved setpoints must be reloaded back into
the relay. See Loading Setpoints from a File for details.
Modbus addresses assigned to firmware modules, features, settings, and corresponding
data items (i.e. default values, min/max values, data type, and item size) may change
slightly from version to version of the firmware. Addresses are rearranged when new
features are added or existing features are enhanced or modified.
Advanced EnerVista SR3 Setup features
Flexcurve editor
3–26
The FlexCurve Editor is designed to allow the user to graphically view and edit the
FlexCurve. The Flexcurve Editor screen is shown below:
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES
SOFTWARE SETUP
•
The Operate Curves are displayed, which can be edited by dragging the tips of the
curves
•
A Base curve can be plotted for reference, to customize the operating curve. The Blue
colored curve in the picture (in both curves) is a reference curve. It can be Standard
Curve, FlexCurve A, or FlexCurve B.
•
The Trip Times in the tables and curves work interactively i.e., changing the table value
will affect the curve shape and vice versa.
•
The user can save Configured Trip Times.
•
The user can export Configured Trip Times to a CSV file
•
The user can load Trip Times from a CSV File
•
The screen above shows the model followed by 339 for viewing Flexcurves. Select
Initialize to copy the trip times from the selected curve to the FlexCurve.
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3–27
SOFTWARE SETUP
Data logger
CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES
The data logger feature is used to sample and record up to ten actual values at a
selectable interval. The datalogger can be run with Continuous mode Enabled, which will
continuously record samples until stopped by the user; or with Continuous mode Disabled,
which will trigger the datalog once without overwriting previous data.
Select the Setpoints > S1RelaySetup > Datalogger menu item to open the Datalogger
Setup window.
Viewing and saving of the Datalogger is performed as follows:
3–28
1.
With EnerVista SR3 Setup running and communications established, select the A3
Records > Datalogger menu item to open the Datalogger Actual Values window:
2.
If Continuous mode is enabled, click on Stop to stop the datalog
3.
Click on the Save to File button to save the datalog to the local PC. A new window will
appear requesting for file name and path.
4.
One file is saved as a COMTRADE file, with the extension ‘CFG’. The other file is a DAT
file, required by the COMTRADE file for proper display of data.
5.
To view a previously saved COMTRADE file, click the Open button and select the
corresponding COMTRADE file.
6.
To view the datalog, click the Launch Viewer button. A detailed Datalog window will
appear as shown below.
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES
SOFTWARE SETUP
CURSOR LINE POSITION
Indicate the cursor line position
in time with respect to the
DELTA
trigger time
Indicates time difference
between the two cursor lines
TRIGGER TIME & DATE
Display the time & date of the
Trigger
Display graph values
at the corresponding
cursor line. Cursor
lines are identified by
their colors.
Motor start data
logger
FILE NAME
Indicates the
file name and
complete path
(if saved)
TRIGGER LINE
Indicates the
point in time for
the trigger
CURSOR
LINES
To move lines locate the mouse pointer
over the cursor line then click and drag
the cursor to the new location.
7.
The method of customizing the datalog view is the same as the Waveform Capture
described below.
8.
The datalog can be set to capture another buffer by clicking on Run (when Continuous
mode is enabled), or by clicking on Release (when Continuous mode is disabled).
When a motor start status is detected by the 339 relay, a start data logger is triggered and
begins to sample and record the following parameters at a rate of 1 sample every 200ms:
•
True RMS values of the Phase A, B and C Currents (Ia, Ib, and Ic).
•
True RMS value of the Ground current (Ig).
•
Current Unbalance (%).
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3–29
SOFTWARE SETUP
CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES
•
True RMS values of the Phase A-N, B-N, and C-N voltages (Van, Vbn, and Vcn) if VT
CONNECTION TYPE is set to Wye.
•
True RMS values of the Phase A-B, B-C and C-A voltages (Vab, Vbc, and Vca) if VT
CONNECTION TYPE is set to Delta.
•
Thermal Capacity Used (%).
•
Frequency.
•
Breaker/Contactor Contact Input Status.
1-second pre-trigger data and 29-second post-trigger data are recorded. The data logger
ignores all subsequent triggers and continues to record data until the active record is
finished.
A total of 6 logs are stored in the relay. Log # 1 is the baseline log; it is written to only by the
first start that occurs after the user clears the motor start data logger. Logs #2 to 6 are a
rolling buffer of the last 5 motor starts. A new log automatically shifts the rolling buffer and
overwrites the oldest log, #2.
The log files are formatted using CSV (comma delimited values) and the COMTRADE file
format per IEEE PC37.111 Draft 7C (02 September 1997). [Please see the details in the user
interfaces section.] The files can be downloaded and displayed via EnerVista SR3 Setup
software. All the files are stored in non-volatile memory, so that information is retained
when power to the relay is lost.
Viewing and saving of the Motor Start Datalogger is performed as follows:
3–30
1.
With EnerVista SR3 Setup running and communications established, select the A3
Records > Motor Start Data Logger menu item to open the Motor Start datalog setup
window:
2.
Click on the Save to File button to save the datalog to the local PC. A new window will
appear requesting for file name and path.
3.
One file is saved as a COMTRADE file, with the extension ‘CFG’. The other file is a DAT
file, required by the COMTRADE file for proper display of data.
4.
To view a previously saved COMTRADE file, click the Open button and select the
corresponding COMTRADE file.
5.
To view the datalog, click the Launch Viewer button. A detailed Datalog window will
appear as shown below. For an explanation of the components of this screen, please
refer to the Data Logger section above.
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES
SOFTWARE SETUP
6.
Transient recorder
(Waveform capture)
The method of customizing the datalog view is the same as the Waveform Capture
described below.
The EnerVista SR3 Setup software can be used to capture waveforms (or view trace
memory) from the relay at the instance of a pickup, trip, alarm, or other condition.
•
With EnerVista SR3 Setup software running and communications established, select
the Actual Values > A3 Records > Transient Records menu item to open the
Transient Recorder Viewer window.
•
Click on Trigger Waveform to trigger a waveform capture. Waveform file numbering
starts with the number zero in the 339 , so that the maximum trigger number will
always be one less than the total number of triggers available.
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3–31
SOFTWARE SETUP
CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES
•
Click on the Save to File button to save the selected waveform to the local PC. A new
window will appear, requesting the file name and path. One file is saved as a
COMTRADE file, with the extension "CFG." The other file is a "DAT" file, required by the
COMTRADE file for proper display of waveforms.
•
To view a previously saved COMTRADE file, click the Open button and select the
corresponding COMTRADE file.
•
To view the captured waveforms, click on the Launch Viewer button. A detailed
Waveform Capture window will appear as shown below.
TRIGGER TIME & DATE
Displays the time and date
of the Trigger.
VECTOR DISPLAY SELECT
Click here to open a new graph
to display vectors.
Display graph values
at the corresponding
cursor line. Cursor
lines are identified
by their colors.
3–32
FILE NAME
Indicates the
file name and
complete path
(if saved).
CURSOR LINE POSITION
Indicates the cursor line position
in time with respect to the
beginning of the buffer.
DELTA
Indicates time difference
between the two cursor
lines.
CURSOR LINES
To move lines, locate the mouse
pointer over the cursor line, then
click and drag the cursor to the
new position.
TRIGGER LINE
Indicates the point
in time for the
trigger.
•
The red vertical line indicates the trigger point.
•
The date and time of the trigger are displayed at the top left corner of the window. To
match the captured waveform with the event that triggered it, make note of the time
and date shown in the graph, then find the event that matches the same time in the
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES
SOFTWARE SETUP
event recorder. The event record will provide additional information on the cause and
system conditions at the time of the event.
•
From the window main menu bar, press the Preference button to open the COMTRADE
Setup page, in order to change the graph attributes.
Preference Button
The following window will appear:
Change the color of each graph as desired, and select other options as required, by
checking the appropriate boxes. Click OK to store these graph attributes, and to close the
window. The Waveform Capture window will reappear based on the selected graph
attributes.
To view a vector graph of the quantities contained in the waveform capture, press the
Vector Display button to display the following window:
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3–33
SOFTWARE SETUP
Protection summary
CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES
Protection Summary is a single screen which holds the summarized information of
different settings from Grouped Elements, Control Elements and Maintenance screens.
Protection Summary Screen allows the User to:
•
view the output relay assignments for the elements
•
modify the output relay assignments for the elements
•
view the enable/disable status of Control Elements
•
navigate to the respected Protection Element screen on a button click.
The Protection Summary screen is as follows:
3–34
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
SOFTWARE SETUP
3–35
SOFTWARE SETUP
Password security
3–36
CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES
Password security is an optional feature of the 339 which can be setup using the SR3
EnerVista Setup software. The password system has been designed to facilitate a
hierarchy for centralized management. This is accomplished through a Master level
access password which can be used for resetting lower level access passwords and higher
level privileged operations. In cases where operational security is required as well as a
central administrative authority then the use of the password system is highly encouraged.
The feature robustness of this system requires it to be managed exclusively through the
EnerVista setup software. This section describes how to perform the initial setup. For more
details on the password security feature, refer to Chapter 6 - Password Security.
1.
339 devices shipped from the factory are initially set with security disabled. If the
password security feature is to be used, the user must first change the Master Reset
Password from the initial Null setting, this can only be done over communications, not
from the front panel keypad. The new Master Reset Password must be 8 to 10
characters in length, and must have minimum 2 letters and 2 numbers. The letters are
case sensitive. After entering a valid Master Reset Password, enter the new Master
Reset Password again to confirm, then select Change Password.
2.
Now that the Master Reset Password has been programmed, enter it again to log in to
the Master Access level. The Master Level permits setup of the Remote and Local
Passwords. If the Master Reset Password has been lost, record the Encrypted Key and
contact the factory to have it decrypted.
3.
With Master Level access, the user may disable password security altogether, or
change the Master Reset Password.
4.
The Master Access level allows programming of the Remote Setpoint and Remote
Control passwords. These passwords are initially set to a Null value, and can only be
set or changed from a remote user over RS485 or Ethernet communications. Remote
Passwords must be 3 to 10 characters in length.
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES
SOFTWARE SETUP
5.
Initial setup of the Local Setpoint and Local Control passwords requires the Master
Access level. If Overwrite Local Passwords is set to YES, Local passwords can be
changed remotely only (over RS485 or Ethernet). If Overwrite Local Passwords is set to
NO, Local passwords can be changed locally only (over USB or keypad). If changing
Local Passwords is permitted locally, the keypad user can only change the Local
Passwords if they have been changed from the initial NULL value to a valid one. Local
Passwords must be 3 to 10 characters in length.
6.
If any Remote password has never been set, that level will not be attainable except
when logged in as the Master Level. The same logic applies to the Local passwords.
7.
When passwords have been set, the user will be prompted to enter the appropriate
password depending on the interface being used (remote or local), and the nature of
the change being made (setpoint or control). If the correct password is entered, the
user is now logged into that access level over that interface only. The access level
turns off after a period of 5 minutes of inactivity, if control power is cycled, or if the
user enters an incorrect password.
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
3–37
SOFTWARE SETUP
3–38
CHAPTER 3: INTERFACES
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE
Grid Solutions
339 Motor Protection System
Chapter 4: Actual values
Actual values
Actual values overview
All measured values, the status of digital inputs and outputs, and fault analysis information
are accessed in Actual Values mode. Actual value messages are organized into logical
groups for easy reference as shown below.
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4–1
ACTUAL VALUES OVERVIEW
CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES
Figure 4-1: Main Actual Values menu
A2 ENERGY
ACTUAL VALUES
A1 STATUS
POSITIVE WATTHOUR
A1 STATUS
▼
A2 METERING
MOTOR STATUS
A3 RECORDS
CLOCK
NEGATIVE WATTHOUR
CONTACT INPUTS
POSITIVE VARHOUR
▼
A4 TARGET MESSAGES
NEGATIVE VARHOUR
▼
OUTPUT RELAYS
A2 RTD TEMPERATURE
LOGIC ELEMENTS
RTD1 TEMPERATURE
VIRTUAL INPUTS
▼
REMOTE INPUTS
RTD2 TEMPERATURE
REMOTE OUTPUTS
C. INPUTS SUMMARY
OUT RELAYS SUMMARY
LOGIC ELEM SUMMARY
GOOSE STATUS
GOOSE HDR STATUS
RTD TEMP SUMMARY
A2 CURRENT
PH A CURRENT
▼
PH B CURRENT
PH C CURRENT
AVG PHASE CURRENT
GND / SENS GND CURRENT
A2 METERING
NTRL CURRENT
CURRENT
VOLTAGE
POWER
▼
A2 VOLTAGE
AN VOLTAGE
▼
ENERGY
BN VOLTAGE
RTD TEMP
CN VOLTAGE
CLEAR ENERGY
AVG PHASE VOLTAGE
AB VOLTAGE
BC VOLTAGE
A3 RECORDS
CA VOLTAGE
EVENT RECORDS
AVG LINE VOLTAGE
TRANSIENT RECORDS
NEG SEQ VOLTAGE
LEARNED DATA
FREQUENCY
▼
LEARNED DATA REC
CLEAR EVENT REC
CLEAR TRANST REC
CLEAR LEARNED DATA
...
RTD12 TEMPERATURE
A3 TRANSIENT RECORDS
FORCE TRIGGER?
▼
TOTAL RECORDS
AVAILABLE RECORDS
LAST CLEARED
A3 LEARNED DATA
LEARNED ACCEL TIME
▼
LEARNED START CURR
LEARNED START TCU
LAST ACCEL TIME
LAST START CURR
LAST START TCU
LEARNED AVG LOAD
AVG RUN TIME
RTD #1 MAX TEMP
RTD #2 MAX TEMP
...
A2 POWER
RTD #12 MAX TEMP
3PH REAL POWER
▼
3PH REACTIVE POWER
3PH APPARENT PWR
896760A1.cdr
4–2
A4 TARGET MESSAGES
POWER FACTOR
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES
A1 STATUS
A1 Status
Figure 4-2: Status menu
A1 STATUS
MOTOR STATUS
CLOCK
CONTACT INPUTS
▼
OUTPUT RELAYS
LOGIC ELEMENTS
VIRTUAL INPUTS
REMOTE INPUTS
REMOTE OUTPUTS
C. INPUTS SUMMARY
OUT RELAYS SUMMARY
LOGIC ELEM SUMMARY
GOOSE STATUS
GOOSE HDR STATUS
A1 CLOCK
CURRENT DATE
▼
A1 MOTOR STATUS
MOTOR STATUS
CURRENT TIME
▼
MOTOR LOAD
A1 CONTACT INPUTS
CONTACT INPUT 1
BIASED MOTOR LOAD
MOTOR TCU
MOTOR SPEED
▼
CONTACT INPUT 2
...
CONTACT INPUT 10
O/L TIME TO TRIP
MOTOR LOCKOUT TIME
THERMAL O/L LKT
THERMAL INHIBIT
RTD TEMP SUMMARY
A1 OUTPUT RELAYS
OUTPUT RELAY 1
▼
OUTPUT RELAY 2
...
OUTPUT RELAY 6
OUTPUT RELAY 7
STARTS/HR INHIBIT
TIME-BTWN-STARTS
RESTART INHIBIT
CURRENT UNBALANCE
HOTTEST STATOR RTD
HOTTEST RTD NO
MOTOR RUNNING HOUR
MOTOR STARTS NUM
EMERG RESTARTS NUM
A1 LOGIC ELEMENTS
LOGIC ELEMENT 1
▼
LOGIC ELEMENT 2
...
LOGIC ELEMENT 16
A1 VIRTUAL INPUTS
VIRTUAL INPUT 1
▼
VIRTUAL INPUT 2
...
VIRTUAL INPUT 32
A1 REMOTE INPUTS
REMOTE INPUT 1
▼
REMOTE INPUT 2
...
REMOTE INPUT 32
A1 REMOTE OUTPUTS
REMOTE OUTPUTS 1
▼
REMOTE OUTPUTS 2
896748A1.cdr
...
REMOTE OUTPUTS 32
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4–3
A1 STATUS
CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES
Motor status
MOTOR STATUS
Range: Tripped, Stopped, Starting, Running, Overload
The motor status is tripped following any protection trip operation or lockout. After all
protection trips and lockout have cleared, the tripped motor status can be reset from the
front panel reset key, by closure of the reset or lockout reset contact input, or via
communications. The emergency restart function also resets tripped status.
When the motor status is stopped, detection of phase current above the FLA changes
the status to starting. Running status follows starting when the current then drops below
FLA. Running status continues as long as phase current greater than 5% of CT is
detected. To accommodate applications where current does not rise above the thermal
overload pickup setting on start, running status is also declared when the contact inputs
indicate the motor is online. When phase current falls below 5% of CT the status
changes to stopped. To accommodate applications where motor idle current is less than
5% CT, a further requirement to change status to stopped is that the contact inputs do
not indicate the motor is online.
For single speed applications, an enabled 52a contact input closed or an enabled 52b
contact input open is taken as indication of motor online. If both are enabled, the relay
assumes the motor is online if the 52a contact is closed and the 52b contact is open.
For two speed applications, closure either of the High Speed Switch contact input or of
the Low Speed Switch contact input is indication of motor online. If either 52a or 52b
contact input is enabled, a further requirement is that these indicate the breaker is
closed.
Use of these contact inputs (52a Contact, 52b Contact, High Speed Switch, Low Speed
Switch) for motor online detection is optional, but is recommended to ensure proper
detection of motor running, especially in cases where the starting current is less than the
thermal overload pickup setting or motor idle current is less than 5% of CT.
MOTOR LOAD
Displays the average 3-phase motor current (Iavg) per-unit on an FLA base.
BIASED MOTOR LOAD
Displays the equivalent motor heating current (Ieq) per-unit on an FLA base. Refer to
Thermal Protection section.
MOTOR TCU
Displays the Thermal Capacity Used.
MOTOR SPEED
Indicates the motor running speed per the speed switch input. This value is seen only
when the setting "Enable 2-SPD Motor" is enabled.
O/L TIME TO TRIP
Displays the remainder of the thermal overload trip time when the current is above the
thermal overload pick-up setting.
THERMAL INHIBIT
Time in seconds left until the Thermal Start Inhibit expires. Has a value of zero if this
feature is set to OFF, or if the time has expired.
STARTS/HR INHIBIT
Time in seconds left until the Starts per Hour feature’s inhibit expires. Has a value of zero
if this feature is set to OFF, or if the time has expired.
4–4
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES
A1 STATUS
TIME-BTWN-START
Time in seconds left until the Time Between Starts feature’s inhibit expires. Has a value
of zero if this feature is set to OFF, or if the time has expired.
RESTART INHIBIT
Time in seconds left until the Restart Timer feature’s inhibit expires. Has a value of zero if
this feature is set to OFF, or if the time has expired.
MOTOR LOCKOUT TIME
Displays the longest lockout time among the following 5 timers: THERMAL INHIBIT,
STARTS/HOUR INHIBIT, TIME-BETWEEN-STARTS INHIBIT, RESTART INHIBIT and THREMAL
O/L LOCKOUT.
THERMAL O/L LKT
A thermal overload lockout will occur after a thermal overload trip so that the user
cannot start the motor until the TCU drops to 15%. Following a thermal overload trip, this
value indicates how long it will take for the 339 relay TCU to decrease from the current
value to 15%.
CURRENT UNBALANCE
Displays the current unbalance level as a percentage. Refer to the Current Unbalance
section.
HOTTEST STATOR RTD
Displays the temperature of the hottest Stator RTD.
HOTTEST RTD NO.
Indicates the hottest Stator RTD.
MOTOR RUNNING HOUR
Displays the actual motor running time in hours.
MOTOR STARTS NUM
Displays the actual number of motor starts.
EMERG RESTARTS NUM
Displays the actual number of motor Emergency Restarts.
Figure 4-3: Motor Status logic diagram
SETTING
Enable Two Speed
= Enabled
CONTACT INPUT
52a Contact Input
52b Contact Input
AND
SETTINGS
52a Contact
AND
AND
OR
= Enabled
52 b Contact
= Enabled
OPERAND
AND
AND
OR
Motor Online
OR
AND
AND
CONTACT INPUT
High Speed Switch
Low Speed Switch
OR
896839.cdr
Clock
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A1 STATUS > CLOCK
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4–5
A1 STATUS
CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES
CURRENT DATE
Feb 12 2009
Range: Date in format shown
Indicates today’s date.
CURRENT TIME
09:17:12
Range: Time in format shown
Indicates the current time of day.
Contact inputs
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A1 STATUS > CONTACT INPUTS
52a (CI #1)
OFF
Range: Off, On
Shows the input status when connected to a 52a breaker auxiliary contact.
52b (CI #2)
OFF
Range: Off, On
Shows the breaker status when connected to a 52b breaker auxiliary contact.
CONTACT INPUT 3 to 10
OFF
Range: Off, On
Message displays the state of the contact input. The message “ON” indicates that the
contact input is energized, and message “OFF” indicates a de-energized contact.
Output relays
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A1 STATUS > OUTPUT RELAYS
Output relays Breaker
Output Relay #1 (TRIP)
OFF
Range: Off, On
The “ON” state of Output Relay #1 (Breaker TRIP) shows that a TRIP command has been
sent to the breaker.
Output Relay #2 (CLOSE)
OFF
Range: Off, On
The “ON” state of Output Relay #2 (Breaker CLOSE) shows that a CLOSE command has
been sent to the breaker.
Output Relay #3 (START INHIBIT)
OFF
Range: Off, On
Output Relay #4 to #6 (AUXILIARY OUTPUT RELAYS)
OFF
Range: Off, On
Output Relay #7 (CRITICAL FAILURE)
Range: Off, On
The "ON" state indicates that the relay is in-service.
4–6
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES
Output relays Contactor
A1 STATUS
Output Relay #1 (Not Used)
Output Relay #2 (Not Used)
Output Relay #3 (START INHIBIT)
OFF
Range: Off, On
The "ON" state of Output Relay #3 (Start Inhibit) shows that a "block motor start"
command has been sent to the contactor.
Output Relay #4 (Contactor TRIP)
Range: Off, On
The "OFF" state of Output Relay #4 (Contactor TRIP) shows that a "TRIP" command has
been sent to the contactor.
Output Relay #5 to #6 (AUXILIARY OUTPUT RELAYS)
Range: Off, On
Output Relay #7 (CRITICAL FAILURE RELAY)
Range: Off, On
The "ON" state indicates that the relay is in service.
Logic elements
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A1 STATUS > LOGIC ELEMENTS
LOGIC ELEMENT 1 to 16
OFF
Range: Off, On
The state “ON” or “OFF” for each logic element depends on its programmed logic:
triggering inputs, blocking inputs, plus any pickup, and/or reset time delay.
Virtual inputs
The state of all virtual inputs is displayed here.
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A1 STATUS > VIRTUAL INPUTS
VIRTUAL INPUTS 1 to 32
OFF
Range: Off, On
Remote inputs
The state of all remote inputs is displayed here.
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A1 STATUS > REMOTE INPUTS
REMOTE INPUTS 1 to 32
OFF
Range: Off, On
Remote outputs
The state of all active remote outputs is displayed here.
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A1 STATUS > REMOTE OUTPUTS
REMOTE OUTPUTS 1 to 32
OFF
Range: Off, On
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4–7
A1 STATUS
CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES
Contact inputs summary
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A1 STATUS > C. INPUTS SUMMARY
C. INPUTS SUMMARY
52a
OFF
CI#5
52b
OFF
CI#6
OFF
OFF
CI#3
OFF
CI#7
OFF
CI#4
OFF
CI#8
OFF
CI#9
OFF
CI#10
OFF
The display shows a summary of the states of all contact inputs.
Output relays summary
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A1 STATUS > OUT RELAYS SUMMARY
OUTPUT RELAYS SUMMARY
RLY #1
OFF
RLY#5
OFF
RLY #2
OFF
RLY#6
OFF
RLY#3
OFF
RLY#7
ON
RLY#4
OFF
This display shows a summary of the states of all output relays.
NOTE:
NOTE
Output relay #7 is the Critical Failure relay, used to indicate the correct functioning of the
339 relay. This output relay shows the status "ON" when the 339 relay is powered up and
set to "Ready" under SETPOINTS > S1 RELAY SETUP > S1 INSTALLATION > RELAY STATUS and
no self-test alarms are active.
Logic elements summary
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A1 STATUS > LOGIC ELEM SUMMARY
LOGIC ELEM SUMMARY
LE#1
OFF
LE#9
OFF
LE#2
OFF
LE#10
OFF
LE#3
OFF
LE#11
OFF
LE#4
OFF
LE#12
OFF
LE#5
OFF
LE#13
OFF
LE#6
OFF
LE#14
OFF
LE#7
OFF
LE#15
OFF
LE#8
OFF
LE#16
OFF
This display shows a summary of the states of all logic elements.
GOOSE status
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A1 STATUS > GOOSE STATUS
4–8
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES
A2 METERING
GOOSE 1 to 8 STATUS
Range: OFF, ON
Default: OFF
GOOSE HDR status
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A1 STATUS > GOOSE HDR STATUS
GOOSE 1 to 8 H.STATUS
Range: OFF, ON
Default: OFF
RTD temp summary
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A1 STATUS > RTD TEMP SUMMARY
RTD TEMP SUMMARY
#1
40oC
#7
40oC
#2
40oC
#8
40oC
#3
o
40 C
#9
40oC
#4
o
40 C
#10
40oC
#5
40oC
#11
40oC
#6
o
#12
40oC
40 C
This display shows a summary of the states of all RTDs.
A2 Metering
The relay measures all RMS currents and voltages, frequency, and RTD inputs. Other values
like neutral current, symmetrical components, power factor, power (real, reactive,
apparent), are derived. All quantities are recalculated every power system cycle and
perform protection and monitoring functions. Displayed metered quantities are updated
approximately three (3) times a second for readability. All phasors and symmetrical
components are referenced to the A-N voltage phasor for wye-connected VTs; to the A-B
voltage phasor for delta connected VTs; or to the phase A current phasor when no voltage
signals are present.
By scrolling the Message Up/Down keys the relay shows the following metered values:
•
Current
•
Voltage
•
Power
•
Energy
•
RTD Temperature
Current
PH A CURRENT
0.0 A 0o lag
Range: 0.0 to 30000 A, 0 to 359o lag
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4–9
A2 METERING
CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES
PH B CURRENT
0.0 A 0o lag
Range: 0.0 to 30000 A, 0 to 359o lag
PH C CURRENT
0.0 A 0o lag
Range: 0.0 to 30000 A, 0 to 359o lag
NTRL CURRENT
0.0 A 0o lag
Range: 0.0 to 30000 A, 0 to 359o lag
GND CURRENT
0.0 A 0o lag
Range: 0.0 to 30000 A, 0 to 359o lag
GND CURRENT is shown when the GROUND CT TYPE is set to "1A Secondary" or "5A
Secondary".
SENS GND CURRENT
0.00 A 0o lag
Range: 0.00 to 15.00 A, 0 to 359o lag
SENS GND CURRENT is shown when the GROUND CT TYPE is set to "50:0.025".
NEG SEQ CURRENT
0.0 A 0o lag
Range: 0.0 to 30000 A, 0 to 359o lag
Voltage
AN VOLTAGE
0 V 0o lag
Range: 0 to 65535 V
BN VOLTAGE
0 V 0o lag
Range: 0 to 65535 V
CN VOLTAGE
0 V 0o lag
Range: 0 to 65535 V
AVG VOLTAGE
0 V 0o lag
Range: 0 to 65535 V
AB VOLTAGE
0 V 0o lag
Range: 0 to 65535 V
BC VOLTAGE
0 V 0o lag
Range: 0 to 65535 V
CA VOLTAGE
0 V 0o lag
Range: 0 to 65535 V
NTRL VOLTAGE
0 V 0o lag
Range: 0 to 65535 V
4–10
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES
A2 METERING
NEG SEQ VOLTAGE
0 V 0o lag
Range: 0 to 65535 V
ZERO SEQ VOLTAGE
0 V 0o lag
Range: 0 to 65535 V
AUX VOLTAGE
0 V 0o lag
Range: 0 to 65535 V
FREQUENCY
0.00 Hz
Range: 40 to 70 Hz
Power
3 ph REAL POWER
0.0 kV
Range: -100000.0 to 100000.0 kW
3 ph REACTIVE POWER
0.0 kVAR
Range: -100000.0 to 100000.0 kVAR
3 ph APPARENT POWER
0.0 kVA
Range: 0 to 3000 kVA
POWER FACTOR
0.00
Range: -0.99 to 1.00
Energy
POSITIVE WATTHOUR
0.000 MWh
Range: 0.000 to 50000.000 MWh
NEGATIVE WATTHOUR
0.000 MWh
Range: 0.000 to 50000.000 MWh
POSITIVE VARHOUR
0.000 MVarh
Range: 0.000 to 50000.000 MVarh
NEGATIVE VARHOUR
0.000 MVarh
Range: 0.000 to 50000.000 MVarh
RTD temperature
RTD1 TEMPERATURE
0 oC
Range: -50oC to 250oC
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4–11
A3 RECORDS
CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES
RTD2 TEMPERATURE
0 oC
Range: -50oC to 250oC
...
RTD12 TEMPERATURE
0 oC
Range: -50oC to 250oC
Clear energy
CLEAR ENERGY
NO
Range: No, Yes
When set to "YES," pressing the ENTER key will clear all energy data.
A3 Records
Datalogger
Refer to Advanced EnerVista SR3 Setup features in Chapter 3.
Motor start data logger
Refer to Advanced EnerVista SR3 Setup features in Chapter 3.
Event records
The 339 has an event recorder which runs continuously. All event records are stored in
memory such that information is maintained for up to 3 days even after losing relay
control power. The events are displayed from newest to oldest event. Each event has a
header message containing a summary of the event that occurred, and is assigned an
event number equal to the number of events that have occured since the recorder was
cleared. The event number is incremented for each new event.
The Event Recorder captures and stores the last 256 events. All events are stored in nonvolatile memory where the information is maintained, even in the case where relay control
power is lost.
Shown below is an example of an event record caused by a Breaker Open operation, and
the recorded information at the time of this record.
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A3 RECORDS > EVENT RECORDS
Table 4-1: Example of Event Record
A3 EVENT REC T:778 E778 Jan 30,2009
BKR Stat Open 16:30:23.324
▶
E778, CONTROL BKR Stat Open PHASE A
CURRENT: 0.0 A 0° Lag
▼
E778, CONTROL BKR Stat Open PHASE B
CURRENT: 0.0 A 0° Lag
▼
E778, CONTROL BKR Stat Open PHASE C
CURRENT: 0.0 A 0° Lag
4–12
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES
A3 RECORDS
▼
E778, CONTROL BKR Stat Open
GROUND CURRENT: 0.0 A 0° Lag
▼
E778, CONTROL BKR Stat Open NTRL
GND CURRENT: 0.0 A
▼
E778, CONTROL BKR Stat Open PHASE
A-B VOLTAGE 0 V 0°
▼
E778, CONTROL BKR Stat Open PHASE
B-C VOLTAGE 0 V 0°
▼
E778, CONTROL BKR Stat Open PHASE
C-A VOLTAGE 0 V 0°
▼
E778, CONTROL BKR Stat Open
FREQUENCY 0.00 Hz
▼
E778, CONTROL BKR Stat Open 3ph
REAL POWER 0.0 kW
▼
E778, CONTROL BKR Stat Open 3ph
REACTIVE POWER 0.0 kvar
▼
E778, CONTROL BKR Stat Open 3ph
APPARENT POWER 0.0 kVA
▼
E778, CONTROL BKR Stat Open POWER
FACTOR 0.00
▼
E778, CONTROL BKR Stat Open THERM
CAP PH A 0.0%
▼
E778, CONTROL BKR Stat Open THERM
CAP PH B 0.0%
▼
E778, CONTROL BKR Stat Open THERM
CAP PH C 0.0%
Each event is saved with event number, date and time, and contains information such as
per phase current, ground current, either phase-phase voltages (VTs connected in Delta),
or phase-neutral voltages (VTs connected in Wye), and system frequency. The Event
Recorder can be cleared from ACTUAL VALUES > A3 RECORDS > CLEAR EVENT REC setpoint.
The following tables provide lists of the event types and event causes:
Table 4-2: Event type
Event Type
Display
Description
General Events
None
Events that occur when specific
operation takes place
Pickup Events
PICKUP:
These are events that occur when a
protection element picks up
Trip Events
TRIP:
These are events that occur when a
breaker trip is initiated
Alarm and Latched Alarm Events
ALARM:
These are events that occur when an
alarm is initiated
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4–13
A3 RECORDS
CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES
Event Type
Display
Description
Control Events
CONTROL:
These are events that occur when a
control element is activated
Dropout Events
DROPOUT:
These are events that occur when a
protection element drops out after a
corresponding pickup event
Contact Input Events
C. INPUT:
These are events that occur when a
contact input changes its state
Virtual Input Events
V. INPUT
These are events that occur when a
virtual input changes its state
Remote Input Events
R. INPUT
These are events that occur when a
remote input changes its state
Logic Element Events
L. ELEMENT
These are events that occur when a logic
element changes its state
Self-Test Warning Events
SELF-TEST WARNING
These are events that occur when a selftest warning is detected.
The following table, from the 339 339 Communications Guide, shows the list of Event
Causes.
4–14
Code
Type
Definition
FC134
unsigned 16 bits
Cause of Event
0
No Evnt/Trp ToDate
1
Ctrl. Pwr Lost
2
Ctrl. Pwr Applied
3
Date or Time Set
4
Reset
5
Lockout Rst Closed
6
Factory Reload
7
Clock Not Set
8
IRIG-B Failure
9
Reset Trip Counter
10
BKR Status Unknown
11
Clear Event Rec
12
Clear Transt Rec
14
Comm. Alert 1
15
Comm. Alert 2
16
Comm. Alert 3
17
Ethernet Link Fail
18
High ENET Traffic
19
Ambient Temp. >80C
20
RMIO Mismatch
22
Emergency Restart
23
Trace Mem. Trigger
24
Rx Goose 1 ON
25
Rx Goose 1 OFF
26
Rx Goose 2 ON
27
Rx Goose 2 OFF
28
Rx Goose 3 ON
29
Rx Goose 3 OFF
30
Rx Goose 4 ON
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES
A3 RECORDS
Code
Type
Definition
31
Rx Goose 4 OFF
32
Rx Goose 5 ON
33
Rx Goose 5 OFF
34
Rx Goose 6 ON
35
Rx Goose 6 OFF
36
Rx Goose 7 ON
37
Rx Goose 7 OFF
38
Rx Goose 8 ON
39
Rx Goose 8 OFF
0x0040
Contact IN 1 On
0x0041
Contact IN 2 On
0x0042
Contact IN 3 On
0x0043
Contact IN 4 On
0x0044
Contact IN 5 On
0x0045
Contact IN 6 On
0x0046
Contact IN 7 On
0x0047
Contact IN 8 On
0x0048
Contact IN 9 On
0x0049
Contact IN 10 On
0x0060
Contact IN 1 Off
0x0061
Contact IN 2 Off
0x0062
Contact IN 3 Off
0x0063
Contact IN 4 Off
0x0064
Contact IN 5 Off
0x0065
Contact IN 6 Off
0x0066
Contact IN 7 Off
0x0067
Contact IN 8 Off
0x0068
Contact IN 9 Off
0x0069
Contact IN 10 Off
0x0080
Virtual IN 1 On
0x0081
Virtual IN 2 On
0x0082
Virtual IN 3 On
0x0083
Virtual IN 4 On
0x0084
Virtual IN 5 On
0x0085
Virtual IN 6 On
0x0086
Virtual IN 7 On
0x0087
Virtual IN 8 On
0x0088
Virtual IN 9 On
0x0089
Virtual IN 10 On
0x008A
Virtual IN 11 On
0x008B
Virtual IN 12 On
0x008C
Virtual IN 13 On
0x008D
Virtual IN 14 On
0x008E
Virtual IN 15 On
0x008F
Virtual IN 16 On
0x0090
Virtual IN 17 On
0x0091
Virtual IN 18 On
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4–15
A3 RECORDS
CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES
Code
4–16
Type
Definition
0x0092
Virtual IN 19 On
0x0093
Virtual IN 20 On
0x0094
Virtual IN 21 On
0x0095
Virtual IN 22 On
0x0096
Virtual IN 23 On
0x0097
Virtual IN 24 On
0x0098
Virtual IN 25 On
0x0099
Virtual IN 26 On
0x009A
Virtual IN 27 On
0x009B
Virtual IN 28 On
0x009C
Virtual IN 29 On
0x009D
Virtual IN 30 On
0x009E
Virtual IN 31 On
0x009F
Virtual IN 32 On
0x00A0
Virtual IN 1 Off
0x00A1
Virtual IN 2 Off
0x00A2
Virtual IN 3 Off
0x00A3
Virtual IN 4 Off
0x00A4
Virtual IN 5 Off
0x00A5
Virtual IN 6 Off
0x00A6
Virtual IN 7 Off
0x00A7
Virtual IN 8 Off
0x00A8
Virtual IN 9 Off
0x00A9
Virtual IN 10 Off
0x00AA
Virtual IN 11 Off
0x00AB
Virtual IN 12 Off
0x00AC
Virtual IN 13 Off
0x00AD
Virtual IN 14 Off
0x00AE
Virtual IN 15 Off
0x00AF
Virtual IN 16 Off
0x00B0
Virtual IN 17 Off
0x00B1
Virtual IN 18 Off
0x00B2
Virtual IN 19 Off
0x00B3
Virtual IN 20 Off
0x00B4
Virtual IN 21 Off
0x00B5
Virtual IN 22 Off
0x00B6
Virtual IN 23 Off
0x00B7
Virtual IN 24 Off
0x00B8
Virtual IN 25 Off
0x00B9
Virtual IN 26 Off
0x00BA
Virtual IN 27 Off
0x00BB
Virtual IN 28 Off
0x00BC
Virtual IN 29 Off
0x00BD
Virtual IN 30 Off
0x00BE
Virtual IN 31 Off
0x00BF
Virtual IN 32 Off
0x01C0
Remote IN 1 On
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES
A3 RECORDS
Code
Type
Definition
0x01C1
Remote IN 2 On
0x01C2
Remote IN 3 On
0x01C3
Remote IN 4 On
0x01C4
Remote IN 5 On
0x01C5
Remote IN 6 On
0x01C6
Remote IN 7 On
0x01C7
Remote IN 8 On
0x01C8
Remote IN 9 On
0x01C9
Remote IN 10 On
0x01CA
Remote IN 11 On
0x01CB
Remote IN 12 On
0x01CC
Remote IN 13 On
0x01CD
Remote IN 14 On
0x01CE
Remote IN 15 On
0x01CF
Remote IN 16 On
0x01D0
Remote IN 17 On
0x01D1
Remote IN 18 On
0x01D2
Remote IN 19 On
0x01D3
Remote IN 20 On
0x01D4
Remote IN 21 On
0x01D5
Remote IN 22 On
0x01D6
Remote IN 23 On
0x01D7
Remote IN 24 On
0x01D8
Remote IN 25 On
0x01D9
Remote IN 26 On
0x01DA
Remote IN 27 On
0x01DB
Remote IN 28 On
0x01DC
Remote IN 29 On
0x01DD
Remote IN 30 On
0x01DE
Remote IN 31 On
0x01DF
Remote IN 32 On
0x01E0
Remote IN 1 Off
0x01E1
Remote IN 2 Off
0x01E2
Remote IN 3 Off
0x01E3
Remote IN 4 Off
0x01E4
Remote IN 5 Off
0x01E5
Remote IN 6 Off
0x01E6
Remote IN 7 Off
0x01E7
Remote IN 8 Off
0x01E8
Remote IN 9 Off
0x01E9
Remote IN 10 Off
0x01EA
Remote IN 11 Off
0x01EB
Remote IN 12 Off
0x01EC
Remote IN 13 Off
0x01ED
Remote IN 14 Off
0x01EE
Remote IN 15 Off
0x01EF
Remote IN 16 Off
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4–17
A3 RECORDS
CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES
Code
4–18
Type
Definition
0x01F0
Remote IN 17 Off
0x01F1
Remote IN 18 Off
0x01F2
Remote IN 19 Off
0x01F3
Remote IN 20 Off
0x01F4
Remote IN 21 Off
0x01F5
Remote IN 22 Off
0x01F6
Remote IN 23 Off
0x01F7
Remote IN 24 Off
0x01F8
Remote IN 25 Off
0x01F9
Remote IN 26 Off
0x01FA
Remote IN 27 Off
0x01FB
Remote IN 28 Off
0x01FC
Remote IN 29 Off
0x01FD
Remote IN 30 Off
0x01FE
Remote IN 31 Off
0x01FF
Remote IN 32 Off
0x8041
Therm O/L Trip PKP
0x8042
Therm O/L Trip OP
0x8044
Therm O/L Trip DPO
0x8081
GF Trip PKP
0x8082
GF Trip OP
0x8084
GF Trip DPO
0x80C2
Accel Trip OP
0x8102
Phase Rev. Trp OP
0x8141
Under Pwr Trip PKP
0x8142
Under Pwr Trip OP
0x8144
Under Pwr Trip DPO
0x8181
Single PH Trip PKP
0x8182
Single PH Trip OP
0x8184
Single PH Trip DPO
0x8201
Mech Jam Trip PKP
0x8202
Mech Jam Trip OP
0x8204
Mech Jam Trip DPO
0x8241
U/CURR Trip PKP
0x8242
U/CURR Trip OP
0x8244
U/CURR Trip DPO
0x8281
UNBAL Trip PKP
0x8282
UNBAL Trip OP
0x8284
UNBAL Trip DPO
0x82C2
RTD 1 Trip OP
0x82C4
RTD 1 Trip DPO
0x8302
RTD 2 Trip OP
0x8304
RTD 2 Trip DPO
0x8342
RTD 3 Trip OP
0x8344
RTD 3 Trip DPO
0x8382
RTD 4 Trip OP
0x8384
RTD 4 Trip DPO
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES
A3 RECORDS
Code
Type
Definition
0x83C2
RTD 5 Trip OP
0x83C4
RTD 5 Trip DPO
0x8402
RTD 6 Trip OP
0x8404
RTD 6 Trip DPO
0x84C1
LE 1 Trip PKP
0x84C2
LE 1 Trip OP
0x84C4
LE 1 Trip DPO
0x8501
LE 2 Trip PKP
0x8502
LE 2 Trip OP
0x8504
LE 2 Trip DPO
0x8541
LE 3 Trip PKP
0x8542
LE 3 Trip OP
0x8544
LE 3 Trip DPO
0x8581
LE 4 Trip PKP
0x8582
LE 4 Trip OP
0x8584
LE 4 Trip DPO
0x85C1
LE 5 Trip PKP
0x85C2
LE 5 Trip OP
0x85C4
LE 5 Trip DPO
0x8601
LE 6 Trip PKP
0x8602
LE 6 Trip OP
0x8604
LE 6 Trip DPO
0x8641
LE 7 Trip PKP
0x8642
LE 7 Trip OP
0x8644
LE 7 Trip DPO
0x8681
LE 8 Trip PKP
0x8682
LE 8 Trip OP
0x8684
LE 8 Trip DPO
0x86C2
RTD 7 Trip OP
0x86C4
RTD 7 Trip DPO
0x8702
RTD 8 Trip OP
0x8704
RTD 8 Trip DPO
0x8742
RTD 9 Trip OP
0x8744
RTD 9 Trip DPO
0x8782
RTD 10 Trip OP
0x8784
RTD 10 Trip DPO
0x87C2
RTD 11 Trip OP
0x87C4
RTD 11 Trip DPO
0x8802
RTD 12 Trip OP
0x8804
RTD 12 Trip DPO
0x8F81
Fuse Fail Trip PKP
0x8F82
Fuse Fail Trip OP
0x8F84
Fuse Fail Trip DPO
0x8FC2
Ph Revrsl Trip OP
0x8FC4
Ph Revrsl Trip DPO
0x9041
Ntrl IOC1 Trip PKP
0x9042
Ntrl IOC1 Trip OP
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4–19
A3 RECORDS
CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES
Code
4–20
Type
Definition
0x9044
Ntrl IOC1 Trip DPO
0x93C1
NegSeq OV Trp PKP
0x93C2
NegSeq OV Trp OP
0x93C4
NegSeq OV Trp DPO
0x9441
Ph OV1 Trip PKP
0x9442
Ph OV1 Trip OP
0x9444
Ph OV1 Trip DPO
0x9449
Ph A OV1 Trip PKP
0x944A
Ph A OV1 Trip OP
0x944C
Ph A OV1 Trip DPO
0x9451
Ph B OV1 Trip PKP
0x9452
Ph B OV1 Trip OP
0x9454
Ph B OV1 Trip DPO
0x9461
Ph C OV1 Trip PKP
0x9462
Ph C OV1 Trip OP
0x9464
Ph C OV1 Trip DPO
0x9481
Ph UV1 Trip PKP
0x9482
Ph UV1 Trip OP
0x9484
Ph UV1 Trip DPO
0x9489
Ph A UV1 Trip PKP
0x948A
Ph A UV1 Trip OP
0x948C
Ph A UV1 Trip DPO
0x9491
Ph B UV1 Trip PKP
0x9492
Ph B UV1 Trip OP
0x9494
Ph B UV1 Trip DPO
0x94A1
Ph C UV1 Trip PKP
0x94A2
Ph C UV1 Trip OP
0x94A4
Ph C UV1 Trip DPO
0x9541
UndrFreq1 Trip PKP
0x9542
UndrFreq1 Trip OP
0x9544
UndrFreq1 Trip DPO
0x9581
UndrFreq2 Trip PKP
0x9582
UndrFreq2 Trip OP
0x9584
UndrFreq2 Trip DPO
0x95C1
OverFreq1 Trip PKP
0x95C2
OverFreq1 Trip OP
0x95C4
OverFreq1 Trip DPO
0x9601
OverFreq2 Trip PKP
0x9602
OverFreq2 Trip OP
0x9604
OverFreq2 Trip DPO
0x9881
Ph OV2 Trip PKP
0x9882
Ph OV2 Trip OP
0x9884
Ph OV2 Trip DPO
0x9889
Ph A OV2 Trip PKP
0x988A
Ph A OV2 Trip OP
0x988C
Ph A OV2 Trip DPO
0x9891
Ph B OV2 Trip PKP
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES
A3 RECORDS
Code
Type
Definition
0x9892
Ph B OV2 Trip OP
0x9894
Ph B OV2 Trip DPO
0x98A1
Ph C OV2 Trip PKP
0x98A2
Ph C OV2 Trip OP
0x98A4
Ph C OV2 Trip DPO
0x98C1
Ph UV2 Trip PKP
0x98C2
Ph UV2 Trip OP
0x98C4
Ph UV2 Trip DPO
0x98C9
Ph A UV2 Trip PKP
0x98CA
Ph A UV2 Trip Op
0x98CC
Ph A UV2 Trip DPO
0x98D1
Ph B UV2 Trip PKP
0x98D2
Ph B UV2 Trip Op
0x98D4
Ph B UV2 Trip DPO
0x98E1
Ph C UV2 Trip PKP
0x98E2
Ph C UV2 Trip Op
0x98E4
Ph C UV2 Trip DPO
0x9901
S/C Trip PKP
0x9902
S/C Trip OP
0x9904
S/C Trip DPO
0x9941
SPD2 S/C Trip PKP
0x9942
SPD2 S/C Trip OP
0x9944
SPD2 S/C Trip DPO
0x9981
SPD2 U/C Trip PKP
0x9982
SPD2 U/C Trip OP
0x9984
SPD2 U/C Trip DPO
0x9C01
LE 9 Trip PKP
0x9C02
LE 9 Trip OP
0x9C04
LE 9 Trip DPO
0x9C41
LE 10 Trip PKP
0x9C42
LE 10 Trip OP
0x9C44
LE 10 Trip DPO
0x9C81
LE 11 Trip PKP
0x9C82
LE 11 Trip OP
0x9C84
LE 11 Trip DPO
0x9CC1
LE 12 Trip PKP
0x9CC2
LE 12 Trip OP
0x9CC4
LE 12 Trip DPO
0x9D01
LE 13 Trip PKP
0x9D02
LE 13 Trip OP
0x9D04
LE 13 Trip DPO
0x9D41
LE 14 Trip PKP
0x9D42
LE 14 Trip OP
0x9D44
LE 14 Trip DPO
0x9D81
LE 15 Trip PKP
0x9D82
LE 15 Trip OP
0x9D84
LE 15 Trip DPO
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4–21
A3 RECORDS
CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES
Code
4–22
Type
Definition
0x9DC1
LE 16 Trip PKP
0x9DC2
LE 16 Trip OP
0x9DC4
LE 16 Trip DPO
0xA042
Therm Lvl Alrm OP
0xA044
Therm Lvl Alrm DPO
0xA081
Gnd Fault Alrm PKP
0xA082
Gnd Fault Alrm OP
0xA084
Gnd Fault Alrm DPO
0xA102
Phase Rev. Alm OP
0xA141
Under Pwr Alrm PKP
0xA142
Under Pwr Alrm OP
0xA144
Under Pwr Alrm DPO
0xA241
U/CURR Alarm PKP
0xA242
U/CURR Alarm OP
0xA244
U/CURR Alarm DPO
0xA281
UNBAL Alarm PKP
0xA282
UNBAL Alarm OP
0xA284
UNBAL Alarm DPO
0xA2C2
RTD 1 Alarm OP
0xA2C4
RTD 1 Alarm DPO
0xA302
RTD 2 Alarm OP
0xA304
RTD 2 Alarm DPO
0xA342
RTD 3 Alarm OP
0xA344
RTD 3 Alarm DPO
0xA382
RTD 4 Alarm OP
0xA384
RTD 4 Alarm DPO
0xA3C2
RTD 5 Alarm OP
0xA3C4
RTD 5 Alarm DPO
0xA402
RTD 6 Alarm OP
0xA404
RTD 6 Alarm DPO
0xA442
RTD Trouble OP
0xA482
Relay Not Ready
0xA4C1
LE 1 Alarm PKP
0xA4C2
LE 1 Alarm OP
0xA4C4
LE 1 Alarm DPO
0xA501
LE 2 Alarm PKP
0xA502
LE 2 Alarm OP
0xA504
LE 2 Alarm DPO
0xA541
LE 3 Alarm PKP
0xA542
LE 3 Alarm OP
0xA544
LE 3 Alarm DPO
0xA581
LE 4 Alarm PKP
0xA582
LE 4 Alarm OP
0xA584
LE 4 Alarm DPO
0xA5C1
LE 5 Alarm PKP
0xA5C2
LE 5 Alarm OP
0xA5C4
LE 5 Alarm DPO
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES
A3 RECORDS
Code
Type
Definition
0xA601
LE 6 Alarm PKP
0xA602
LE 6 Alarm OP
0xA604
LE 6 Alarm DPO
0xA641
LE 7 Alarm PKP
0xA642
LE 7 Alarm OP
0xA644
LE 7 Alarm DPO
0xA681
LE 8 Alarm PKP
0xA682
LE 8 Alarm OP
0xA684
LE 8 Alarm DPO
0xA6C2
RTD 7 Alarm OP
0xA6C4
RTD 7 Alarm DPO
0xA702
RTD 8 Alarm OP
0xA704
RTD 8 Alarm DPO
0xA742
RTD 9 Alarm OP
0xA744
RTD 9 Alarm DPO
0xA782
RTD 10 Alarm OP
0xA784
RTD 10 Alarm DPO
0xA7C2
RTD 11 Alarm OP
0xA7C4
RTD 11 Alarm DPO
0xA802
RTD 12 Alarm OP
0xA804
RTD 12 Alarm DPO
0xA982
Motor Run Hrs OP
0xA984
Motor Run Hrs DPO
0xAA01
Welded ContactrPKP
0xAA02
Welded Contactr OP
0xAA04
Welded ContactrDPO
0xAA42
SPD SW Not Cnfg OP
0xAA82
SPD SW Fail OP
0xAB01
Load Incr Alrm PKP
0xAB02
Load Incr Alrm OP
0xAB04
Load Incr Alrm DPO
0xABC1
HI Amb Temp PKP
0xABC2
HI Amb Temp OP
0xABC4
HI Amb Temp DPO
0xAC01
LO Amb Temp PKP
0xAC02
LO Amb Temp OP
0xAC04
LO Amb Temp DPO
0xAC42
Self Test Alarm OP
0xACC2
BKRTrpCntrAlrm OP
0xAD01
R1 CoilMonAlrm PKP
0xAD02
R1 CoilMonAlrm OP
0xAD04
R1 CoilMonAlrm DPO
0xAD41
R2 CoilMonAlrm PKP
0xAD42
R2 CoilMonAlrm OP
0xAD44
R2 CoilMonAlrm DPO
0xAD81
BKR1 Fail Alrm PKP
0xAD82
BKR1 Fail Alrm OP
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4–23
A3 RECORDS
CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES
Code
4–24
Type
Definition
0xADC2
BKR Stat Fail OP
0xAF81
Fuse Fail Alrm PKP
0xAF82
Fuse Fail Alrm OP
0xAF84
Fuse Fail Alrm DPO
0xAFC2
Ph Revrsl Alarm OP
0xAFC4
Ph Revrsl Alarm DPO
0xB041
Ntrl IOC1 Alrm PKP
0xB042
Ntrl IOC1 Alrm OP
0xB044
Ntrl IOC1 Alrm DPO
0xB3C1
NegSeq OV Alrm PKP
0xB3C2
NegSeq OV Alrm OP
0xB3C4
NegSeq OV Alrm DPO
0xB441
Ph OV1 Alarm PKP
0xB442
Ph OV1 Alarm OP
0xB444
Ph OV1 Alarm DPO
0xB449
Ph A OV1 Alarm PKP
0xB44A
Ph A OV1 Alarm OP
0xB44C
Ph A OV1 Alarm DPO
0xB451
Ph B OV1 Alarm PKP
0xB452
Ph B OV1 Alarm OP
0xB454
Ph B OV1 Alarm DPO
0xB461
Ph C OV1 Alarm PKP
0xB462
Ph C OV1 Alarm OP
0xB464
Ph C OV1 Alarm DPO
0xB481
Ph UV1 Alarm PKP
0xB482
Ph UV1 Alarm OP
0xB484
Ph UV1 Alarm DPO
0xB489
Ph A UV1 Alarm PKP
0xB48A
Ph A UV1 Alarm OP
0xB48C
Ph A UV1 Alarm DPO
0xB491
Ph B UV1 Alarm PKP
0xB492
Ph B UV1 Alarm OP
0xB494
Ph B UV1 Alarm DPO
0xB4A1
Ph C UV1 Alarm PKP
0xB4A2
Ph C UV1 Alarm OP
0xB4A4
Ph C UV1 Alarm DPO
0xB541
UndrFreq1 Alrm PKP
0xB542
UndrFreq1 Alrm OP
0xB544
UndrFreq1 Alrm DPO
0xB581
UndrFreq2 Alrm PKP
0xB582
UndrFreq2 Alrm OP
0xB584
UndrFreq2 Alrm DPO
0xB5C1
OverFreq1 Alrm PKP
0xB5C2
OverFreq1 Alrm OP
0xB5C4
OverFreq1 Alrm DPO
0xB601
OverFreq2 Alrm PKP
0xB602
OverFreq2 Alrm OP
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES
A3 RECORDS
Code
Type
Definition
0xB604
OverFreq2 Alrm DPO
0xB881
Ph OV2 Alarm PKP
0xB882
Ph OV2 Alarm OP
0xB884
Ph OV2 Alarm DPO
0xB889
Ph A OV2 Alarm PKP
0xB88A
Ph A OV2 Alarm OP
0xB88C
Ph A OV2 Alarm DPO
0xB891
Ph B OV2 Alarm PKP
0xB892
Ph B OV2 Alarm OP
0xB894
Ph B OV2 Alarm DPO
0xB8A1
Ph C OV2 Alarm PKP
0xB8A2
Ph C OV2 Alarm OP
0xB8A4
Ph C OV2 Alarm DPO
0xB8C1
Ph UV2 Alarm PKP
0xB8C2
Ph UV2 Alarm OP
0xB8C4
Ph UV2 Alarm DPO
0xB8C9
Ph A UV2 Alarm PKP
0xB8CA
Ph A UV2 Alarm OP
0xB8CC
Ph A UV2 Alarm DPO
0xB8D1
Ph B UV2 Alarm PKP
0xB8D2
Ph B UV2 Alarm OP
0xB8D4
Ph B UV2 Alarm DPO
0xB8E1
Ph C UV2 Alarm PKP
0xB8E2
Ph C UV2 Alarm OP
0xB8E4
Ph C UV2 Alarm DPO
0xB901
S/C Alarm PKP
0xB902
S/C Alarm OP
0xB904
S/C Alarm DPO
0xB941
SPD2 S/C Alarm PKP
0xB942
SPD2 S/C Alarm OP
0xB944
SPD2 S/C Alarm DPO
0xB981
SPD2 U/C Alarm PKP
0xB982
SPD2 U/C Alarm OP
0xB984
SPD2 U/C Alarm DPO
0xBC01
LE 9 Alarm PKP
0xBC02
LE 9 Alarm OP
0xBC04
LE 9 Alarm DPO
0xBC41
LE 10 Alarm PKP
0xBC42
LE 10 Alarm OP
0xBC44
LE 10 Alarm DPO
0xBC81
LE 11 Alarm PKP
0xBC82
LE 11 Alarm OP
0xBC84
LE 11 Alarm DPO
0xBCC1
LE 12 Alarm PKP
0xBCC2
LE 12 Alarm OP
0xBCC4
LE 12 Alarm DPO
0xBD01
LE 13 Alarm PKP
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4–25
A3 RECORDS
CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES
Code
4–26
Type
Definition
0xBD02
LE 13 Alarm OP
0xBD04
LE 13 Alarm DPO
0xBD41
LE 14 Alarm PKP
0xBD42
LE 14 Alarm OP
0xBD44
LE 14 Alarm DPO
0xBD81
LE 15 Alarm PKP
0xBD82
LE 15 Alarm OP
0xBD84
LE 15 Alarm DPO
0xBDC1
LE 16 Alarm PKP
0xBDC2
LE 16 Alarm OP
0xBDC4
LE 16 Alarm DPO
0xC042
Output Relay 3 On
0xC082
Output Relay 4 On
0xC0C2
Output Relay 5 On
0xC102
Output Relay 6 On
0xC142
Self-Test Rly 7 On
0xC182
Output Relay 1 On
0xC184
Output Relay 1 Off
0xC1C2
Output Relay 2 On
0xC1C4
Output Relay 2 Off
0xC242
High Speed OP
0xC282
Low Speed OP
0xC3C2
Motor Online
0xC402
Emergency Restart
0xC442
Hot RTD OP
0xC444
Hot RTD DPO
0xC481
Lockout PKP
0xC482
Lockout OP
0xC484
Lockout DPO
0xC4C1
LE 1 PKP
0xC4C2
LE 1 OP
0xC4C4
LE 1 DPO
0xC501
LE 2 PKP
0xC502
LE 2 OP
0xC504
LE 2 DPO
0xC541
LE 3 PKP
0xC542
LE 3 OP
0xC544
LE 3 DPO
0xC581
LE 4 PKP
0xC582
LE 4 OP
0xC584
LE 4 DPO
0xC5C1
LE 5 PKP
0xC5C2
LE 5 OP
0xC5C4
LE 5 DPO
0xC601
LE 6 PKP
0xC602
LE 6 OP
0xC604
LE 6 DPO
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES
A3 RECORDS
Code
Type
Definition
0xC641
LE 7 PKP
0xC642
LE 7 OP
0xC644
LE 7 DPO
0xC681
LE 8 PKP
0xC682
LE 8 OP
0xC684
LE 8 DPO
0xC902
Open Breaker
0xC942
Close Breaker
0xC742
VFD Bypassed
0xC744
VFD Not Bypassed
0xCA02
52a Contact OP
0xCA42
52b Contact OP
0xCA82
Reset OK
0xCAC2
L/O Rst Closed
0xCCC2
BKR Stat Open
0xCD02
BKR Stat Clsd
0xCE82
Therm Inhibit OP
0xCEC2
Rstrt Inhibit OP
0xCF02
Start/Hr Inhib OP
0xCF42
T-BT-Strt Inhib OP
0xCF81
Fuse Fail InhibPKP
0xCF82
Fuse Fail Inhib OP
0xCFC2
Ph Rev Inhibit OP
0xCFC4
Ph Rev Inhibit DPO
0xD984
SPD2 U/C DPO
0xDC01
LE 9 PKP
0xDC02
LE 9 OP
0xDC04
LE 9 DPO
0xDC41
LE 10 PKP
0xDC42
LE 10 OP
0xDC44
LE 10 DPO
0xDC81
LE 11 PKP
0xDC82
LE 11 OP
0xDC84
LE 11 DPO
0xDCC1
LE 12 PKP
0xDCC2
LE 12 OP
0xDCC4
LE 12 DPO
0xDD01
LE 13 PKP
0xDD02
LE 13 OP
0xDD04
LE 13 DPO
0xDD41
LE 14 PKP
0xDD42
LE 14 OP
0xDD44
LE 14 DPO
0xDD81
LE 15 PKP
0xDD82
LE 15 OP
0xDD84
LE 15 DPO
0xDDC1
LE 16 PKP
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4–27
A3 RECORDS
CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES
Code
4–28
Type
Definition
0xDDC2
LE 16 OP
0xDDC4
LE 16 DPO
0xE042
Therm O/L Blck OP
0xE044
Therm O/L Blck Off
0xE082
Gnd Fault BLK
0xE084
Gnd Fault BLK DPO
0xE0C2
Accel BLK
0xE0C4
Accel Block DPO
0xE142
UndrPower BLK
0xE144
UndrPower BLK DPO
0xE182
Output Relay 1 BLK
0xE184
Relay 1 BLK Off
0xE1C2
Output Relay 2 BLK
0xE1C4
Relay 2 BLK Off
0xE202
Mech Jam BLK
0xE204
Mech Jam BLK DPO
0xE242
U/CURR BLK
0xE244
U/CURR BLK DPO
0xE282
UNBAL BLK
0xE284
UNBAL BLK DPO
0xE2C2
RTD1 BLK OP
0xE2C4
RTD1 BLK DPO
0xE302
RTD2 BLK OP
0xE304
RTD2 BLK DPO
0xE342
RTD3 BLK OP
0xE344
RTD3 BLK DPO
0xE382
RTD4 BLK OP
0xE384
RTD4 BLK DPO
0xE3C2
RTD5 BLK OP
0xE3C4
RTD5 BLK DPO
0xE402
RTD6 BLK OP
0xE404
RTD6 BLK DPO
0xE442
RTDTrouble BLK OP
0xE6C2
RTD7 BLK OP
0xE6C4
RTD7 BLK DPO
0xE702
RTD8 BLK OP
0xE704
RTD8 BLK DPO
0xE742
RTD9 BLK OP
0xE744
RTD9 BLK DPO
0xE782
RTD10 BLK OP
0xE784
RTD10 BLK DPO
0xE7C2
RTD11 BLK OP
0xE7C4
RTD11 BLK DPO
0xE802
RTD12 BLK OP
0xE804
RTD12 BLK DPO
0xF042
Ntrl IOC1 Block
0xF044
Ntrl IOC1 Blk DPO
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES
A3 RECORDS
Code
Type
Definition
0xF3C2
NegSeq OV Block
0xF3C4
NSeq OV Blk DPO
0xF442
Ph OV1 Block
0xF444
Ph OV1 Block DPO
0xF482
Ph UV1 Block
0xF484
Ph UV1 Block DPO
0xF542
UndrFreq1 Block
0xF544
UndrFreq1 BlockDPO
0xF582
UndrFreq2 Block
0xF584
UndrFreq2 BlockDPO
0xF5C2
OverFreq1 Block
0xF5C4
OverFreq1 Blk DPO
0xF602
OverFreq2 Block
0xF604
OverFreq2 BlockDPO
0xF882
Ph OV2 Block
0xF884
Ph OV2 Block DPO
0xF8C2
Ph UV2 Block
0xF8C4
Ph UV2 Block DPO
0xF902
S/C BLK
0xF904
S/C BLK DPO
0xF942
SPD2 S/C BLK
0xF944
SPD2 S/C BLK DPO
0xF982
SPD2 U/C OP
0xF984
SPD2 U/C BLK DPO
Transient records
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A3 RECORDS > TRANSIENT RECORDS
FORCE TRIGGER?
No
Range: No, Yes
TOTAL RECORDS
1
Range: N/A
AVAILABLE RECORDS
1
Range: N/A
LAST CLEARED
Feb 08 2009
Range: N/A
Learned data
The 339 measures and records individual data records, as indicated below, all from actual
motor operation. The latest individual data record "set" can be viewed using the Learned
Data feature on the relay. The data, when input cumulatively to the Learned Data Recorder
(see below) can be used to evaluate changes/trends over time. Note that learned values
are calculated even when features requiring them are turned off.
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4–29
A3 RECORDS
CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES
Clearing motor data (ACTUAL VALUES > A3 RECORDS > CLEAR LEARNED DATA) resets all
these values to their default settings.
Each of the learned features discussed below should not be used until at least five (5)
successful motor starts and stops have occurred.
NOTE:
NOTE
LEARNED ACCEL TIME
Range: 0.0 to 250.0 s in steps of 0.1 s
The learned acceleration time is the Learned Acceleration Time measured at the time
the record was saved. Acceleration time is the amount of time the motor takes to reach
the running state from stopped. A successful motor start is one in which the motor
reaches the running state.
If acceleration time is relatively consistent, the learned acceleration time plus suitable
margin may be used to manually fine-tune the acceleration protection setting.
LEARNED START CURR
Range: 0.0 to 10000.0 A in steps of 0.1 A
The learned starting current is the Learned Starting Current measured at the time the
record was saved. Starting current is measured 200 ms after the transition of motor
status from stopped to starting, which should ensure that the measured current is
symmetrical. A successful motor start is one in which the motor reaches the running
state.
LEARNED START TCU
Range: 0 to 100% in steps of 1
The learned start thermal capacity is the Learned Thermal Capacity Used at the time the
record was saved. Start thermal capacity used is the amount of thermal capacity used
during starting. A successful motor start is one in which the motor reaches the running
state.
If the thermal capacity used during starting is relatively consistent, the learned start
thermal capacity used value plus suitable margin may be used to manually fine-tune the
thermal start inhibit margin. See the Start Inhibit section of this manual for a description
of how the learned start thermal capacity used is calculated.
LAST ACCEL TIME
Range: 0.0 to 250.0 s in steps of 0.1 s
The last acceleration time is the Last Acceleration Time measured at the time the record
was saved.
LAST START CURR
Range: 0.0 to 10000.0 A in steps of 0.1 A
The last starting current is the Last Starting Current measured at the time the record was
saved.
LAST START TCU
Range: 0 to 100% in steps of 1
The last start thermal capacity used is the Last Thermal Capacity Used at the time the
record was saved.
LEARNED AVG LOAD
Range: 0.00 to 20.00 x FLA in steps of 0.01 x FLA
Learned average load is the Average Motor Current, expressed as a multiple of FLA,
experienced over the last 15 running minutes. Samples are taken once a second. In the
case of two-speed motors with different FLA values for the two speeds, the FLA used for
each current sample is the one in effect at the time that sample was taken.
4–30
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES
A3 RECORDS
AVG RUN TIME
Range: Hours, Minutes
The average Run Time of the last five starts at the time the record was saved.
RTD 1 to 12 MAX TEMPERATURE
Range: -50 to 250°C
The maximum temperature experienced by each of the RTDs.
Once a second each of the RTD temperature values is captured. For each RTD, if the
captured RTD temperature value is greater than the RDT maximum temperature already
stored, the RDT maximum temperature is set to this latest captured RTD temperature
value. The RTD maximum temperature values are maintained in non-volatile memory to
carry over a relay power interruption.
Learned data recorder
The Learned Data Recorder measures and records up to 250 data record "sets," as
indicated in the Learned Data section above, all from actual motor operation. This data
can be used to evaluate changes/trends over time. Note that learned values are calculated
even when features requiring them are turned off.
Clearing motor data (ACTUAL VALUES > A3 RECORDS > CLEAR LEARNED DATA) resets all
these values to their default settings.
LEARNED DATA REC
Range: #xxxx1 of xx250 in steps of 1
This value indicates the number of learned data records saved to date. Only the latest
250 records can be viewed.
DATE OF RECORD
Range: Month, Day, Year
This value is the date on which the record was saved.
Clear learned data
CLEAR LEARNED DATA
No
Range: No, Yes
When set to "Yes," pressing the ENTER key will clear all learned data.
Clear transient record
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A3 RECORDS > CLEAR TRANST REC
CLEAR TRANST RECORD
No
Range: No, Yes
When set to "Yes," pressing the ENTER key will clear all transient records.
Clear event record
PATH: ACTUAL VALUES > A3 RECORDS > CLEAR EVENT REC
CLEAR EVENT RECORD
No
Range: No, Yes
When set to "Yes," pressing the ENTER key will clear all event records.
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4–31
A4 TARGET MESSAGES
CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES
A4 Target messages
Target messages are automatically displayed for any active condition on the relay such as
pickups, trips, alarms, or asserted input. The target messages shown in the table below are
displayed as required.
The relay displays the most recent event first, and after 5 seconds starts rolling up the
other target messages, until the Reset command is initiated. If the Reset command is not
performed, but any of the other faceplate pushbuttons is pressed, the display will not show
the target messages, unless the user navigates to ACTUAL VALUES > A4 TARGET MESSAGES,
where they can be reviewed.
The target messages can be reviewed by pressing Up and Down message pushbuttons
from the relay keypad.
The following table from the 339 Communication Guide shows the list of Target Messages.
4–32
Code
Type
Definition
FC134A
unsigned 16 bits
Active Targets
0
No Active Targets
7
Clock Not Set
8
IRIG-B Failure
14
Comm. Alert 1
15
Comm. Alert 2
16
Comm. Alert 3
17
Ethernet Link Fail
18
High ENET Traffic
19
Ambient Temp. >80C
20
RMIO Mismatch
0x8040
Therm O/L Trip
0x8080
Gnd Fault Trip
0x80C0
Accel Trip
0x8100
Ph Revrsl Trip
0x8140
UndrPower Trip
0x8180
Single Ph Trip
0x8200
Mech Jam Trip
0x8240
U/Curr Trip
0x8280
UNBAL Trip
0x82C0
RTD 1 Trip
0x8300
RTD 2 Trip
0x8340
RTD 3 Trip
0x8380
RTD 4 Trip
0x83C0
RTD 5 Trip
0x8400
RTD 6 Trip
0x8480
Relay Not Config
0x84C0
LE 1 Trip
0x8500
LE 2 Trip
0x8540
LE 3 Trip
0x8580
LE 4 Trip
0x85C0
LE 5 Trip
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES
A4 TARGET MESSAGES
Code
Type
Definition
0x8600
LE 6 Trip
0x8640
LE 7 Trip
0x8680
LE 8 Trip
0x86C0
RTD 7 Trip
0x8700
RTD 8 Trip
0x8740
RTD 9 Trip
0x8780
RTD 10 Trip
0x87C0
RTD 11 Trip
0x8800
RTD 12 Trip
0x8F80
Fuse Fail Trip
0x8FC0
Ph Revrsl Trip
0x9040
Ntrl IOC1 Trip
0x93C0
NegSeq OV Trip
0x9440
Ph OV1 Trip
0x9480
Ph UV1 Trip
0x9540
UndrFreq1 Trip
0x9580
UndrFreq2 Trip
0x95C0
OverFreq1 Trip
0x9600
OverFreq2 Trip
0x9880
Ph OV2 Trip
0x98C0
Ph UV2 Trip
0x9900
S/C Trip
0x9940
SPD2 S/C Trip
0x9980
SPD2 U/C Trip
0x9C00
LE 9 Trip
0x9C40
LE 10 Trip
0x9C80
LE 11 Trip
0x9CC0
LE 12 Trip
0x9D00
LE 13 Trip
0x9D40
LE 14 Trip
0x9D80
LE 15 Trip
0x9DC0
LE 16 Trip
0xA040
Therm Lvl Alrm
0xA080
Gnd Fault Alarm
0xA140
UndrPower Alarm
0xA240
U/Curr Alarm
0xA280
UNBAL Alarm
0xA2C0
RTD 1 Alarm
0xA300
RTD 2 Alarm
0xA340
RTD 3 Alarm
0xA380
RTD 4 Alarm
0xA3C0
RTD 5 Alarm
0xA400
RTD 6 Alarm
0xA440
RTD Trouble
0xA480
Not Configured
0xA4C0
LE 1 Alarm
0xA500
LE 2 Alarm
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4–33
A4 TARGET MESSAGES
CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES
Code
4–34
Type
Definition
0xA540
LE 3 Alarm
0xA580
LE 4 Alarm
0xA5C0
LE 5 Alarm
0xA600
LE 6 Alarm
0xA640
LE 7 Alarm
0xA680
LE 8 Alarm
0xA6C0
RTD 7 Alarm
0xA700
RTD 8 Alarm
0xA740
RTD 9 Alarm
0xA780
RTD 10 Alarm
0xA7C0
RTD 11 Alarm
0xA800
RTD 12 Alarm
0xA980
Motor Running Hrs
0xAA00
Welded Contactr
0xAA40
SPD SW Not Config
0xAA80
SPD SW Fail
0xAB00
Load Incr Alarm
0xABC0
HI Ambient Temp
0xAC00
LO Ambient Temp
0xAC40
Self Test Alarm
0xACC0
BKRTrpCntrAlrm
0xAD00
Rly1 Coil Mn Alrm
0xAD40
Rly2 Coil Mn Alrm
0xAD80
BKR Fail Alrm
0xADC0
BKRStatus Fail
0xAF80
Fuse Fail Alrm
0xAFC0
Ph Revrsl Alrm
0xB040
Ntrl IOC1 Alarm
0xB3C0
NegSeq OV Alarm
0xB440
Ph OV1 Alarm
0xB480
Ph UV1 Alarm
0xB540
UndrFreq1 Alarm
0xB580
UndrFreq2 Alarm
0xB5C0
OverFreq1 Alrm
0xB600
OverFreq2 Alrm
0xB880
Ph OV2 Alarm
0xB8C0
Ph UV2 Alarm
0xB900
S/C Alarm
0xB940
SPD2 S/C Alarm
0xB980
SPD2 U/C Alarm
0xBC00
LE 9 Alarm
0xBC40
LE 10 Alarm
0xBC80
LE 11 Alarm
0xBCC0
LE 12 Alarm
0xBD00
LE 13 Alarm
0xBD40
LE 14 Alarm
0xBD80
LE 15 Alarm
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES
A4 TARGET MESSAGES
Code
Type
Definition
0xBDC0
LE 16 Alarm
0xC240
High Speed
0xC280
Low Speed
0xC3C0
Motor Online
0xC400
Emergency Restart
0xC440
Hot RTD
0xC480
Lockout
0xC4C0
LE 1
0xC500
LE 2
0xC540
LE 3
0xC580
LE 4
0xC5C0
LE 5
0xC600
LE 6
0xC640
LE 7
0xC680
LE 8
0xC900
Open Breaker
0xC940
Close Breaker
0xC740
VFD Bypassed
0xCCC0
BKR Stat Open
0xCD00
BKR Stat Clsd
0xCE80
Therm Inhibit
0xCEC0
Rstrt Inhibit
0xCF00
Start/Hr Inhib
0xCF40
T-BT-Strt Inhib
0xCF80
Fuse Fail Inhib
0xCFC0
Ph Revrsl Inhib
0xD340
Ntrl Dir Rev
0xDC00
LE 9
0xDC40
LE 10
0xDC80
LE 11
0xDCC0
LE 12
0xDD00
LE 13
0xDD40
LE 14
0xDD80
LE 15
0xDDC0
LE 16
0xE040
Therm O/L Blck
0xE080
Gnd Fault BLK
0xE0C0
Accel Block
0xE140
UndrPower BLK
0xE180
Output Relay 1 BLK
0xE1C0
Output Relay 2 BLK
0xE200
Mech Jam Block
0xE240
U/Curr Block
0xE280
UNBAL Block
0xE2C0
RTD1 BLK
0xE300
RTD2 BLK
0xE340
RTD3 BLK
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4–35
A4 TARGET MESSAGES
CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES
Code
Type
Definition
0xE380
RTD4 BLK
0xE3C0
RTD5 BLK
0xE400
RTD6 BLK
0xE440
RTD Trouble BLK
0xE6C0
RTD7 BLK
0xE700
RTD8 BLK
0xE740
RTD9 BLK
0xE780
RTD10 BLK
0xE7C0
RTD11 BLK
0xE800
RTD12 BLK
0xF040
Ntrl IOC1 Block
0xF340
NTRL DIR Rev Block
0xF3C0
NegSeq OV Block
0xF440
Ph OV1 Block
0xF480
Ph UV1 Block
0xF540
UndrFreq1 Block
0xF580
UndrFreq2 Block
0xF5C0
OverFreq1 Block
0xF600
OverFreq2 Block
0xF880
Ph OV2 Block
0xF8C0
Ph UV2 Block
0xF900
S/C BLK
0xF940
SPD2 S/C BLK
0xF980
SPD2 U/C Block
•
The PKP messages will appear on the relay display as long as their respective flags are
active. The messages will disappear from the display, when either the protection
element drops out before operation, such as when the condition clears before
reaching operation, or when the protection element operates.
•
The OP and BKR Status messages will appear on the relay display, when the respective
element operates, with the element function set to “TRIP”, or “LATCHED ALARM”. The
message will stay on the display after the condition clears, and will disappear upon
Reset command. If the element function is selected to “ALARM”, or “CONTROL”, the
message will disappear from the display, when the condition causing operation clears.
•
The Breaker Open and Breaker Close messages will appear on the display and stay for
5 seconds only, unless the reset command is initiated, or the element changes its
state. For example, if the breaker is detected “Open”, the message “Breaker Open OK”
will appear on the display and will stay for 5 seconds, unless the breaker status
changes to “Close”. If the breaker status changes to "Close" within 5 seconds after the
breaker has been detected open, the message “Breaker Open OK” will disappear, and
the message “Breaker Close OK” will appear and stay for 5 seconds.
•
The Contact Input ON/OFF, Virtual Input ON/OFF, and Remote Input ON/OFF messages
will not appear as target messages upon change of state. The state change, however,
will be logged in the Event recorder.
Examples of how the messages appear on the display:
Example 1:
Short Circuit Settings:
4–36
•
SHORT CIRCUIT FUNCTION = Trip
•
SHORT CIRCUIT PICKUP = 1.00 x CT
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES
A4 TARGET MESSAGES
•
SHORT CIRCUIT DELAY = 0.20 s
When current greater than the SHORT CIRCUIT pickup level is applied, the 3339 50 display
shows the following target message:
A4 TARGET MESSAGES
Short Circuit Trip
STATE: PKP
After the 200 ms time delay expires, the display shows the following message only:
A4 TARGET MESSAGES
Short Circuit Trip
STATE: OP
Example 2:
Phase Short Circuit Settings:
•
SHORT CIRCUIT FUNCTION = Latched Alarm
•
SHORT CIRCUIT PICKUP = 1.00 x CT
•
SHORT CIRCUIT DELAY = 0.20 s
When current greater than the Short Circuit pickup level is applied, the 339 display shows
the following target message:
A4 TARGET MESSAGES
Ph Short Circuit Alarm
STATE: PKP
After the 200 ms time delay expires, the display shows the following message only:
A4 TARGET MESSAGES
Ph Short Circuit Alarm
STATE: OP
Example 3:
Phase Short Circuit Settings:
•
SHORT CIRCUIT FUNCTION = Alarm
•
SHORT CIRCUIT PICKUP = 1.00 x CT
•
SHORT CIRCUIT DELAY = 0.20 s
When current greater than the Short Circuit pickup level is applied, the 339 display shows
the following target message:
A4 TARGET MESSAGES
Ph Short Circuit Alarm
STATE: PKP
After the 200 ms time delay expires, the display shows the following message only:
A4 TARGET MESSAGES
Ph Short Circuit Alarm
STATE: OP
Once the condition clears, the target message will disappear.
NOTE:
NOTE
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
4–37
A4 TARGET MESSAGES
4–38
CHAPTER 4: ACTUAL VALUES
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE
Grid Solutions
339 Motor Protection System
Chapter 5: Quick setup - Front control
panel
Quick setup - Front control panel
The “Quick Setup” utility is part of the 339 relay main menu, and can be used for quick and
easy programming. Power system parameters, and settings for some simple over-current
elements can be easily set. Use the “Quick Setup” utility to program the following:
Relay Status
•
Relay Status
Power System Data:
•
Nominal Frequency
•
Phase CT Primary
•
Ground CT Type
•
VT Connection
•
VT Secondary
•
VT Ratio
Protection:
•
Thermal Overload
•
Short Circuit
•
Mechanical Jam
•
Undercurrent
•
Ground Fault
•
Phase Undervoltage
Motor Data:
•
Motor FLA
•
Switching Device
•
52a Contact
•
52b Contact
Ensure the relay is in "Relay Ready" state before using Quick Setup.
NOTE:
NOTE
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5–1
CHAPTER 5: QUICK SETUP - FRONT CONTROL PANEL
Figure 5-1: Quick Setup menu
ACTUAL VALUES
QUICK SETUP
SETPOINTS
MAINTENANCE
QUICK SETUP
RELAY STATUS
▼
NOMINAL FREQUENCY
PH CT PRIMARY
PH CT SECONDARY
GROUND CT TYPE
GROUND CT PRIMARY
THERMAL PROTECTION
START PROTECTION
▼
VT CONNECTION
LOCKED ROTOR CURR
VT SECONDARY
SAFE STALL T COLD
VT RATIO
THERMAL O/L PKP
MOTOR FLA
UNBALANCE K FACTOR
SWITCHING DEVICE
COOL TIME RUNNING
52a CONTACT
52b CONTACT
COOL TIME STOPPED
HOT/COLD RATIO
THERMAL O/L FUNC
S/C FUNC
MECH JAM FUNC
U/CURR TRIP FUNC
GND TRIP FUNC
SHORT CIRCUIT
S/C PKP
▼
S/C DELAY
PH UV 1 FUNCTION
MECHANICAL JAM
MECH JAM PKP
▼
MECH JAM DELAY
UNDERCURRENT
U/CURR TRIP PKP
▼
U/CURR TRIP DELAY
GROUND FAULT
GND TRIP PKP
▼
GND TRIP ON RUN
GND TRIP ON START
896742A1.cdr
PHASE UV 1
PH UV 1 PKP
▼
PH UV 1 DELAY
5–2
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 5: QUICK SETUP - FRONT CONTROL PANEL
QUICK SETUP SETTINGS
Quick Setup settings
The setpoints below can be programmed under the "Quick Setup" menu.
Note that monitoring of Breaker Status via 52a, 52b, or both of these contacts, should be
programmed under SETPOINTS > SYSTEM SETUP > BREAKER.
PATH: QUICK SETUP >
RELAY STATUS
Range: Ready, Not Ready
Default: Not Ready
NOMINAL FREQUENCY
Range: 50 Hz, 60 Hz
Default: 60 Hz
PH CT PRIMARY
Range: 1 A to 6000 A in steps of 1
Default: 500 A
GND CT TYPE
Range: None, 1 A Secondary, 5A Secondary, 50:0.025
Default: 50:0.025
VT CONNECTION
Range: Wye, Delta
Default: Wye
VT SECONDARY
Range: 50 V to 240 V in steps of 1
Default: 120 V
VT RATIO
Range: 1:1 to 300:1 in steps of 1
Default: 1:1
THERMAL O/L FUNC
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
SHORT CIRCUIT FUNC
Range: Disabled, Trip, Latched Alarm, Alarm
Default: Disabled
MECHANICAL JAM FUNC
Range: Disabled, Trip, Latched Alarm, Alarm
Default: Disabled
U/CURR TRIP FUNC
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
GROUND TRIP FUNC
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
PH UV1 FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
5–3
QUICK SETUP SETTINGS
CHAPTER 5: QUICK SETUP - FRONT CONTROL PANEL
NOTE:
NOTE
5–4
The settings changed using the Quick Setup menu, are available for review and
modification by navigating through S1 RELAY SETUP, S2 SYSTEM SETUP, and S3
PROTECTION in the SETPOINTS main menu.
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE
Grid Solutions
339 Motor Protection System
Chapter 6: Setpoints
Setpoints
Setpoints
The 339 has a considerable number of programmable setpoints, all of which make the
relay extremely flexible. These setpoints have been grouped into a variety of pages and
subpages as shown below. Each Setpoints menu has a section that describes in detail the
setpoints found on that menu.
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6–1
SETPOINTS
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
Figure 6-1: Main Setpoints menu
SETPOINTS
S1 RELAY SETUP
S1 RELAY SETUP
S2 SYSTEM SETUP
CLOCK
S3 PROTECTION
PASSWORD SECURITY
▼
COMMUNICATIONS
S4 CONTROLS
▼
S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
EVENT RECORDER
TRANSIENT RECDR
DATA LOGGER
FRONT PANEL
INSTALLATION
PRESET STATISTICS
S2 SYSTEM SETUP
CURRENT SENSING
VOLTAGE SENSING
POWER SYSTEM
▼
MOTOR
SWITCHING DEVICE
S3 PROTECTION
THERMAL PROTECTION
S4 CONTROLS
VIRTUAL INPUTS
LOGIC ELEMENTS
BREAKER CONTROL
▼
SHORT CIRCUIT
MECHANICAL JAM
▼
UNDERCURRENT
CURRENT UNBAL
BREAKER FAIL
LOAD INCR ALARM
START INHIBIT
GROUND FAULT
EMERGENCY RESTART
NEUTRAL IOC1
LOCKOUT RESET
PHASE UV 1
RESET
PHASE UV 2
PHASE OV 1
S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
PHASE OV 2
CONTACT INPUTS
UNDERFREQUENCY1
OUTPUT RELAYS
UNDERFREQUENCY2
VIRTUAL INPUTS
OVERFREQUENCY1
OVERFREQUENCY2
UNDERPOWER
NEGATIVE SEQ OV
PHASE REVERSAL
VT FUSE FAILURE
896757A1.cdr
ACCELERATION
RTD PROTECTION
TWO SPEED MOTOR
NTRL DIR
Setpoint entry methods
Before placing the relay into “IN SERVICE” mode, setpoints defining system characteristics,
inputs, relay outputs, and protection settings must be entered using one of the following
methods:
6–2
•
Front panel, using the keypad and the display.
•
Front USB port, or rear RS485, Ethernet 100 FX, Ethernet 10/100 BaseT (optional) port,
and a computer running the EnerVista SR3 Setup software supplied with the relay.
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
SETPOINTS
•
Rear serial RS485, and a SCADA system running user-written software.
Any of these methods can be used to enter the same information. A computer, however,
makes entry much easier. Files can be stored and downloaded for fast, error free entry
when a computer is used. To facilitate this process, the GE EnerVista CD with the EnerVista
SR3 Setup software is supplied with the relay.
The relay leaves the factory with setpoints programmed to default values, and these
values are shown throughout the setpoint message illustrations. Some of these factory
default values can be left unchanged whenever they satisfy the application.
At a minimum, the S2 SYSTEM SETUP setpoints must be entered for the system to function
correctly. To safeguard against the installation of a relay into which setpoints have not
been entered, the Relay Not Ready self-test warning is displayed. In addition, the critical
failure relay will be de-energized. Once the relay has been programmed for the intended
application, the S1 RELAY SETUP/ INSTALLATION/ RELAY STATUS setpoint should be changed
from “Not Ready” (the default) to “Ready”.
Common setpoints
To make the application of this device as simple as possible, similar methods of operation
and similar types of setpoints are incorporated in various features. Rather than repeat
operation descriptions for this class of setpoint throughout the manual, a general
description is presented in this overview. Details that are specific to a particular feature are
included in the discussion of the feature. The form and nature of these setpoints is
described below.
•
FUNCTION setpoint: The <ELEMENT_NAME> FUNCTION setpoint determines the
operational characteristic of each feature. The range for these setpoints is two or
more of: “Disabled”, “Enabled”, “Trip”, “Alarm”, “Latched Alarm”, and “Control”.
If <ELEMENT_NAME > FUNCTION: “Disabled”, the feature is not operational.
If <ELEMENT_NAME > FUNCTION: “Enabled”, the feature is operational.
If <ELEMENT_NAME > FUNCTION: “Trip”, then the feature is operational. When an
output is generated, the feature declares a Trip condition, and operates the Trip relay
(output relay 1), any other selected aux. output relays, and displays the appropriate
trip message.
If <ELEMENT_NAME> FUNCTION: “Alarm” or “Latched Alarm”, then the feature is
operational. When an output is generated, the feature declares an “Alarm” condition
which operates any selected aux.output relays and displays the appropriate alarm
message. Not every Alarm function with the “Alarm” or “Latched Alarm” feature has
the condition available to select an auxiliary output; in some cases a Logic Element
has to be used for this purpose
•
Output Relay * setpoint: The <ELEMENT_NAME> OUTPUT RELAY * setpoint selects the
relays required to operate when the feature generates an output. The range is any
combination of the assignable Auxiliary relays.
•
PICKUP setpoint: The <ELEMENT_NAME> PICKUP setpoint selects the threshold above
which the measured parameter causes an output from the measuring element.
•
DELAY setpoint: The <ELEMENT_NAME> DELAY setpoint selects a fixed time interval to
delay an input signal from appearing at the output. The time from a contact input
change of state or an AC parameter input level change to a contact closure of the 1
Trip relay, is the time selected as time delay in this setpoint plus approximately up to 2
power frequency periods.
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6–3
SETPOINTS
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
Logic diagrams
The logic diagrams provide a complete comprehensive understanding of the operation of
each feature. These sequential logic diagrams illustrate how each setpoint, input
parameter, and internal logic is used in the feature to obtain an output. In addition to these
logic diagrams, written descriptions are provided in the setpoints chapter which includes
each feature.
•
Settings: Shown as a block with a heading labeled ‘SETTING’. The exact wording of the
displayed setpoint message identifies the setpoint. Major functional setpoint
selections are listed below the name and are incorporated in the logic.
•
Compensator Blocks: Shown as a block with an inset box labeled ‘RUN’ with the
associated pickup/dropout setpoint shown directly above. Element operation of the
detector is controlled by the signal entering the ‘RUN’ inset. The measurement/
comparison can only be performed if a logic ‘1’ is provided at the ‘RUN’ input. The
relationship between setpoint and input parameter is indicated by the following
symbols: “<” (less than) " >” (greater than), etc.
•
Time Delays: Shown as a block with either pickup, drop-out, or both; times in
milliseconds or seconds. If the delay is adjustable, associated delay setpoint is shown
with block SETPOINT on the top of the delay block.
•
LED Indicators: Shown as the following schematic symbol, □. The exact wording of
the front panel label identifies the indicator.
•
Logic: Described with basic logic gates (AND, OR, XOR, NAND, NOR). The inverter
(logical NOT), is shown as a circle: ○.
Settings text abbreviations
The following abbreviations are used in the setpoints pages.
6–4
•
Acceleration time: ACCEL TIME; ACCEL T
•
Alarm: ALM, ALRM
•
ASDU: ASD
•
Auxiliary: AUX
•
Average: AVG
•
Average Line Voltage: Vav
•
Block: BLK, BLCK
•
Contactor: CONT
•
Control: Ctrl
•
CT Secondary: CT SEC
•
Current: CURR
•
Current Unbalance: CURR UNBAL
•
Delay: DLY
•
Emergency Restarts: EMERG RESTARTS
•
Function: FUNC, FUNCTN
•
Ground: GND
•
High Speed: SPD2
•
Hour: Hr
•
Initiate: INILoad Increase: LOAD INCRLogic Element: LE; LOGIC E
•
Maintenance: MAINTEN, MAINT
•
Mechanical Jam: MECH JAM
•
Neutral: NTRL
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
SETPOINTS
•
O/L: overload
•
Password: PSWD, PSW
•
Preset: PRST
•
Protection: PROT
•
POWER: PWR
•
Primary: PRIM
•
Protection: PROT
•
Recorder: RECDR
•
Relay: RLY
•
Reset: RST
•
Short Circuit: S/C
•
High Speed: HIGH SPD
•
Speed2: SPD2
•
START: STAT
•
Temperature: TEMP
•
Thermal Capacity Used: TCU
•
Thermal Overload: THERMAL O/L
•
Time Constant: TIME CONS
•
Transient Recorder: TRANSIENT RECDR
•
Two-speed Motor: 2-SPD MOTOR
•
Undercurrent: U/CURR; U/C
•
Underfrequency: UNDRFREQ
•
Undervoltage: UV
•
Overvoltage: OV
•
Underpower: U/POWER; U/P
•
Voltage: VOLT
•
Welded Contactor: WELDED CONT
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6–5
S1 RELAY SETUP
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S1 Relay setup
Figure 6-2: Relay Setup menu
S1 RELAY SETUP
CLOCK
S1 CLOCK
PASSWORD SECURITY
DATE (MM/DD/YYYY)
▼
COMMUNICATIONS
▼
TIME (HH:MM:SS)
EVENT RECORDER
S1 EVENT RECORDER
TRANSIENT RECDR
DATA LOGGER
PICKUP EVENTS
▼
DLS ENABLE
DLS START MONTH
DLS START WEEK
FRONT PANEL
DROPOUT EVENTS
DLS START WEEKDAY
INSTALLATION
TRIP EVENTS
DLS END MONTH
PRESET STATISTICS
ALARM EVENTS
DLS END WEEK
CONTROL EVENTS
DLS END WEEKDAY
CONTACT INPUTS
IRIG-B
LOGIC ELEMENTS
SNTP MODE
VIRTUAL INPUTS
SNTP PORT
REMOTE INPUTS
SNTP SERVER IP ADR
SETTING DATE/TIME
UTC OFFSET
S1 TRANSIENT RECDR
BUFFER SETUP
▼
S1 PASSWORD SECURITY
LOC SETPOINTS PSWD
TRIGGER MODE
LOC CONTROLS PSWD
TRIGGER POSITION
TRIGGER ON PKP
TRIGGER ON DPO
S1 COMMUNICATIONS
TRIGGER ON TRIP
RS485
TRIGGER ON ALARM
ETHERNET
TRIGGER ON INPUT 1
TRIGGER ON INPUT 2
TRIGGER ON INPUT 3
MODBUS PROTOCOL
▼
IEC60870-5-103
IEC60870-5-104
A3 DATALOGGER
SAMPLE RATE
DNP PROTOCOL
61850 PROTOCOL
▼
CONTINUOUS MODE
DATA LOG TRIGGER
DATA LOG TRGR SRC
CHANNEL 1
...
CHANNEL 10
S1 FRONT PANEL
FLASH MESSAGE TIME
S1 INSTALLATION
RELAY NAME
▼
RELAY STATUS
VALIDATE RMIO
▼
MESSAGE TIMEOUT
SCREEN SAVER
LED STOPPED COLOR
S1 PRST STATISTICS
SET MOTOR STARTS
▼
LED STARTING COLOR
SET EMERG RESTARTS
LED RUNNING COLOR
SET RUNNING HOURS
896764.cdr
6–6
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S1 RELAY SETUP
Clock
The 339 relay has an internal real time clock that performs time stamping via IRIG-B for
various features such as the event and transient recorders. This time stamping is available
with the IRIG-B signal connected to the relay terminals and set to “Enabled”. When an IRIGB device is connected to the relay terminals, the relay detects the DC shift or the Amplitude
Modulated signal automatically. Time stamping on multiple relays can be synchronized to
± 1.0 ms with the use of IRIG-B input. Time stamping is also optionally available using SNTP.
Time synchronization priority uses the IRIG-B and SNTP protocols - via Modbus, IEC608705-103, IEC60870-5-104, or DNP commands - as follows:
IRIG-B has the highest priority, so any other source of synchronization should be rejected if
IRIG-B is the synchronization source and an IRIG-B signal is available.
SNTP has the second highest priority, so if IRIG-B is not the synchronization source but
SNTP is, then any other source of synchronization should be rejected.
Synchronization commands are all eventually translated into a MODBUS function, and as
such are blocked from the MODBUS layer as required.
Any synchronization commands other than Modbus, IEC60870-5-103, IEC60870-5-104, or
DNP will be accepted only if IRIG-B and SNTP are not the synchronization sources. There is
no prioritization amongst synchronization commands. A synchronization command issued
from DNP for example, can be directly followed by another from MODBUS, for example.
The following path is available using the keypad. For instructions on how to use the
keypad, please refer to Chapter 3 - Working with the Keypad.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S1 RELAY SETUP > CLOCK
DATE: (MM/DD/YYYY)
Range: Month: Jan, Feb, Mar, Apr, May, Jun, Jul, Aug, Sep, Oct, Nov, Dec Day: 1 to 31 Year:
2009 to 2099
Default: Jan 15 2009
This setting sets the date in the specified format.
TIME: (HH:MM:SS)
Range: 0 to 23: 0 to 59: 0 to59
Default: 03:15:50
This setting sets the time in the specified format.
DLS ENABLE
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
With DLS Enabled, the main CPU has to maintain the information regarding
AV.m_DaylightSavingsActive, because it is necessary in the comms CPU to translate
from localtime to UTC in 61850 protocol. In addition, if SNTP is enabled, the main CPU will
receive UTC time from comms CPU and it needs to apply this in order to pass it to
localtime.
Without any other synchronization, DLS correction is applied only at 0200 hours on
daylight saving months.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S1 RELAY SETUP > CLOCK > DLS ENABLE [ENABLED]
DLS START MONTH:
Range: Not Set, January, February, March, April, May, June, July, August, September,
October, November, December
Default: Not Set
This setting sets the month for the DLS start time.
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6–7
S1 RELAY SETUP
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
DLS START WEEK:
Range: Not Set, 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, Last
Default: Not Set
This setting sets the week of the month for the DLS start time.
DLS START WEEKDAY:
Range: Not Set, Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat, Sun
Default: Not Set
This setting sets the weekday for the DLS start time.
DLS END MONTH:
Range: Not Set, January, February, March, April, May, June, July, August, September,
October, November, December
Default: Not Set
This setting sets the month for the end of the DLS time.
DLS END WEEK:
Range: Not Set, 1st, 2nd, 3rd, 4th, Last
Default: Not Set
This setting sets the week of the month for the end of the DLS time.
DLS END WEEKDAY:
Range: Not Set, Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat, Sun
Default: Not Set
This setting sets the weekday for the end of the DLS time.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S1 RELAY SETUP > CLOCK
IRIG-B:
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
This setting enables the IRIG-B signal for time stamp synchronization.
When the IRIG-B setting is enabled, the time received is directly stamped as local date
and time. If there is no signal, one event and alarm is generated. Any other attempted
synchronization commands should be ignored in the main CPU. Since the user has the
capability to enable both SNTP and IRIG-B via the HMI, the system will synchronize to
SNTP, provided SNTP packets are received, when an IRIG-B signal is unavailable.
1.
Set the IRIG-B to “Enabled” if the IRIG-B device is connected to the relay IRIG-B
terminals. The relay will display the message “IRIG-B failure” in the case of either no
IRIG-B signal from the connected IRIG-B device, or when the signal cannot be
decoded.
2.
Set the date and time per the specified date and time format.
3.
Set the start time of the Daylight Saving (DLS) time, by selecting the Month, the Week
of the month, and the Weekday defining the beginning of the Daylight Saving time.
4.
Set the end of the Daylight Saving time, by selecting the Month, the Week of the
month, and the Weekday defining the end of the Daylight Saving time.
The clock has a super-capacitor back-up, so that time, date, and events will be kept for
up to 3 days in cases of loss of relay control power.
SNTP MODE
Range: Disabled, Broadcast, Anycast, Unicast
Default: Disabled
SNTP PORT
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
Default: Disabled
6–8
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S1 RELAY SETUP
SNTP SERVER IP ADR
Range: Standard IP Address Format
Default: 000.000.000.000
UTC OFFSET
Range: -24.00 hours to 24.00 hours in steps of 0.01 hours
Default: 00.00 hours
Refer to the 339 Communications Guide for details on SNTP MODE, SNTP PORT, and SNTP
SERVER IP ADR.
NOTE:
NOTE
Password security
Password security features are designed into the relay to provide protection against
unauthorized setpoint changes and control. The relay has programmable passwords for
both Local and Remote access, which can be used to allow setpoint changes and
command execution from both the front panel and the communications ports. These
passwords consist of 3 to 10 alphanumeric characters. The Local and the Remote
passwords are initially set after entering in a Master Reset Password (MRP). The Master
Reset Password (MRP) is set to “NULL” when the relay is shipped from the factory. When the
MRP is programmed to “NULL” all password security is disabled.. The remote user may
choose to allow the local user to change the local passwords.
Each interface (RS485, Ethernet, USB, and front panel keypad) is independent of one
another, meaning that enabling setpoint access on one interface does not enable access
for any of the other interfaces (i.e., the password must be explicitly entered via the
interface from which access is desired).
The EnerVista SR3 Setup software incorporates a facility for programming the relay’s
passwords as well as enabling/disabling setpoint access. For example, when an attempt is
made to modify a setpoint but access is restricted, the program will prompt the user to
enter the password and send it to the relay before the setpoint can actually be written to
the relay. If a SCADA system is used for relay programming, it is up to the programmer to
incorporate appropriate security for the application.
Aside from being logged out of security, which allows the user to read setpoints and actual
values only, three levels of security access are provided: Setpoint Level, Control Level, and
Master Level. The Setpoint and Control Levels can be attained either locally using the Local
passwords (USB port and keypad), or remotely using the Remote passwords (RS485 and
Ethernet ports). The user can have either Setpoint or Control Level active, but not both
simultaneously from the same interface. The Master Level is used for setting and resetting
of passwords, and includes all Setpoint and Control Level access rights. The Master Level
cannot be attained from the keypad. The Master Reset Password must be 8 to 10
characters in length, and must contain at least 2 letters and 2 numbers. The Master Level
can define whether the local user is permitted to change Local Passwords without having
to enter the Master Level. The Master Reset Password is encrypted, and is not viewable
from the keypad. If the Master Reset Password is lost, the user should contact the factory
to decrypt the Master Reset Password.
After password entry, the access level is maintained until a period of 5 minutes of inactivity
has elapsed, after which the password must be re-entered. A power-loss or entering in the
wrong password will log the user out of security.
Further definition of the access levels is described as follows:
SETPOINT LEVEL
•
Changing settings under QUICK SETUP menu
•
Changing settings under the SETPOINTS menu except the features requiring control
access listed below
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6–9
S1 RELAY SETUP
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
•
Changing any setting under MAINTENANCE such as trip and close coil monitoring and
breaker maintenance settings, except the features requiring control access listed
below
•
Changing the Local or Remote Setpoint Password, depending on the interface being
accessed
CONTROL LEVEL
•
Reset command
•
Open and Close Breaker commands
•
Virtual Input commands
•
Clearing of event records, transient records, and other data
•
Uploading new firmware
•
Changing the Local or Remote Control Password, depending on the interface being
accessed
MASTER LEVEL
•
Setting and changing of all passwords including the Master Reset Password
•
Disabling password security
•
All Setpoint and Control Level access rights
For details on Password Security setup and handling using the EnerVista Setup software,
refer to Chapter 3.
Access passwords
This section allows the user to change the Local Setpoint and Local Control Passwords. The
local user may change a local password from the keypad if all of the following are true:
•
Security is enabled
•
A valid local setpoint (or local control) password has initially been set
•
The remote user has the Overwrite Local Passwords setpoint set to NO
•
The local user knows the current local password.
For more details on the Password Security feature, refer to Chapter 3.
Figure 6-3: Menu for handling password security using 339 keypad
S1 LOCAL PASSWORDS
LOC SETPOINTS PSWD
LOC CONTROLS PSWD
S1 LOC SETPOINTS PSWD
ENTER OLD PASSWORD
▼
ENTER NEW PASSWORD
CONFIRM NEW PASSWORD
S1 LOC CONTROLS PSWD
ENTER OLD PASSWORD
▼
ENTER NEW PASSWORD
896747.cdr
CONFIRM NEW PASSWORD
The following steps describe how to change the Local Setpoints Password from the
keypad. Similar steps are followed to change the Local Control Password.
ENTER OLD PASSWORD
The user is prompted to enter the current Local Setpoints Password. User the value up/
down keys to select characters, and use the message left/right keys to move the cursor.
Press the Enter key when done. An INVALID PASSWORD message will appear if a wrong
password is entered, security is disabled, the password has not been originally set, or the
local user does not have the rights to change the password. In addition, the user will be
6–10
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S1 RELAY SETUP
automatically logged out of security from the keypad. If the correct password was entered,
the user is now logged in to the Setpoints Level from the keypad, and will be prompted to
enter a new password.
ENTER NEW PASSWORD
The user is prompted to enter a new Local Setpoints Password. A valid password is
alphanumeric, and is 3 to 10 characters in length. An INVALID PASSWORD message will
appear if the new password does not meet the password requirements. If a valid password
was entered, the user will be prompted to re-enter the new password.
CONFIRM PASSWORD
The user is prompted to re-enter the new Local Setpoints Password. If the passwords do
not match, an ENTRY MISMATCH message will appear, the password will remain
unchanged, and the user will be returned to the Enter New Password page. If the
passwords match, a PASSWORD CHANGED message will appear indicating the Local
Setpoints Password has successfully been updated.
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6–11
S1 RELAY SETUP
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
Communications
Figure 6-4: Main Communications menu
S1 COMMUNICATIONS
RS485
S1 RS485
ETHERNET
MODBUS PROTOCOL
▼
RS485 BAUD RATE
▼
RS485 COMM PARITY
IEC 60870-5-103
REAR 485 PROTOCOL
IEC 60870-5-104*
DNP PROTOCOL
61850**
S1 ETHERNET
* Available with comms Order Code 1
** Available with comms Order Code 2
IP ADDRESS
▼
SUBNET IP MASK
GATEWAY IP ADDRESS
CONNECTION TYPE
S1 MODBUS PROTOCOL
MODBUS SLAVE ADR
▼
MODBUS TCP PORT
S1 60870-5-103
GENERAL
BINARY INPUTS
MEASURANDS
▼
COMMANDS
S1 60870-5-104
GENERAL
CLIENT ADDRESS
POINT LIST
S1 DNP
DNP GENERAL
DNP UNSOL RESPONSE
DEFAULT VARIATION
▼
DNP CLIENT ADDRESS
DNP POINTS LIST
S1 61850
ENABLE GOOSE
ENABLE GOOSE Tx
TCP CONN TIMEOUT
896746A2.cdr
RS485 interface
6–12
GOOSE TYPE
The 339 is equipped with one serial RS485 communication port. The RS485 port has
settings for baud rate and parity. It is important that these parameters agree with the
settings used on the computer or other equipment that is connected to these ports. This
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S1 RELAY SETUP
port may be connected to a computer running the EnerVista SR3 Setup software. This
software can download and upload setting files, view measured parameters, and upgrade
the device firmware. A maximum of 32 339 -series devices can be daisy-chained and
connected to a DCS, PLC, or PC using the RS485 port.
Select the Settings > Communications > Serial Ports menu item in the EnerVista SR3
Setup program, or the SETPOINTS > S1 RELAY SETUP > COMMUNICATIONS > RS485 path on
the display, to configure the serial port.
Figure 6-5: Serial port configuration settings
The following settings are available to configure the RS485 port.
BAUD RATE
Range: 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200
Default: 115200
This setting specifies the baud rate (bits per second) for the RS485 port.
PARITY
Range: None, Odd, Even
Default: None
This setting specifies the parity for the RS485 port.
Ethernet
Select the Setpoints > S1 Relay Setup > Communications > Ethernet menu item in the
EnerVista SR3 Setup program, or the SETPOINTS > S1 RELAY SETUP > COMMUNICATIONS >
ETHERNET path on the display, to configure the Ethernet port.
The following settings are available to configure the Ethernet port.
IP Address
Range: Standard IP Address format
Default: 000.000.000.000
This setting specifies the IP Address for the Ethernet port.
Subnet IP Mask
Range: Standard IP Address format
Default: 255.255.252.0
This setting specifies the Subnet IP Mask setting for the Ethernet port.
Gateway IP Address
Range: Standard IP Address format
Default: 000.000.000.000
This setting specifies the Gateway IP Address for the Ethernet port.
Connection Type
Range: Copper, fiber
Default: Copper
This setting specifies the connection type (Copper or Fiber) used for Ethernet
communication.
When changing Ethernet settings, power to the relay must be cycled in order for the new
settings to become active.
NOTE:
NOTE
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6–13
S1 RELAY SETUP
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
Modbus
The Modicon Modbus protocol is supported by the 339 . Modbus is available via the RS485
serial link (Modbus RTU). The 339 always acts as a slave device, meaning that it never
initiates communications; it only listens and responds to requests issued by a master
device. A subset of the Modbus protocol format is supported that allows extensive
monitoring, programming, and control functions using read and write register
commands.Refer to the 339 Feeder Protection System Communications Guide for
additional details on the Modbus protocol and the Modbus memory map.
The Modbus server can simultaneously support two clients over serial RS485. The server is
capable of reporting any indication or measurement and operating any output present in
the device. A user-configurable input and output map is also implemented.
The 339 operates as a Modbus slave device only
Select the Settings > Communications > Modbus > Protocol menu item in EnerVista SR3
Setup software, or the SETPOINTS > S1 RELAY SETUP > COMMUNICATIONS > MODBUS
PROTOCOL path to set up the modbus protocol as shown below.
Figure 6-6: Modbus protocol configuration settings
The following Modbus settings are available:
MODBUS SLAVE ADDRESS
Range: 1 to 254 in steps of 1
Default: 254
This setting specifies the Modbus slave address . Each device must have a unique
address from 1 to 254. Address 0 is the broadcast address to which all Modbus slave
devices listen. Addresses do not have to be sequential, but no two devices can have the
same address or conflicts resulting in errors will occur. Generally, each device added to
the link should use the next higher address starting at 1.
Please refer to the 339 Communications Guide for details on how to set up the Modbus
communications protocol.
IEC60870-5-103 serial
communication
settings
6–14
PATH: SETPOINTS > S1 RELAY SETUP > COMMUNICATIONS > IEC61870-5-103
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S1 RELAY SETUP
Figure 6-7: IEC 60870-5-103 communication settings menu
S1 60870-5-103
GENERAL
S1 103 GENERAL
BINARY INPUTS
SLAVE ADDRESS
▼
MEASURANDS
▼
SYNCH TIMEOUT
COMMANDS
S1 103 FIRST ASDU
S1 103 B INPUTS
ID TYPE
▼
POINT 0
▼
FUNCTION TYPE
POINT 0 FUNC TYPE
INFORMATION NO
POINT 0 INFO NO
SCAN TIMEOUT
...
FIRST ANLG ENTRY
POINT 63
FIRST ANLG FACTOR
POINT 63 FUNC TYPE
FIRST ANLG OFFSET
POINT 63 INFO NO
...
NINTH ANLG ENTRY
NINTH ANLG FACTOR
S1 103 MEASURANDS
NINTH ANLG OFFSET
FIRST ASDU
.
.
.
.
SECOND ASDU
THIRD ASDU
▼
FOURTH ASDU
S1 103 FOURTH ASDU
ID TYPE
▼
FUNCTION TYPE
S1 103 COMMANDS
INFORMATION NO
CMD 0 FUNC TYPE
▼
SCAN TIMEOUT
CMD 0 INFO NO
FIRST ANLG ENTRY
CMD 0 ON OPER
FIRST ANLG FACTOR
CMD 0 OFF OPER
FIRST ANLG OFFSET
...
...
CMD 15 FUNC TYPE
NINTH ANLG ENTRY
CMD 15 INFO NO
NINTH ANLG FACTOR
CMD 15 ON OPER
NINTH ANLG OFFSET
CMD 15 OFF OPER
896745.cdr
The following table, from the 339 Communications Guide, shows the list of Binary Inputs.
Code
Type
FC134B
unsigned 16 bits
Definition
DNP Binary Inputs
0
Off
0x0040
Contact IN 1 On
0x0041
Contact IN 2 On
0x0042
Contact IN 3 On
0x0043
Contact IN 4 On
0x0044
Contact IN 5 On
0x0045
Contact IN 6 On
0x0046
Contact IN 7 On
0x0047
Contact IN 8 On
0x0048
Contact IN 9 On
0x0049
Contact IN 10 On
0x0060
Contact IN 1 Off
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6–15
S1 RELAY SETUP
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
Code
6–16
Type
Definition
0x0061
Contact IN 2 Off
0x0062
Contact IN 3 Off
0x0063
Contact IN 4 Off
0x0064
Contact IN 5 Off
0x0065
Contact IN 6 Off
0x0066
Contact IN 7 Off
0x0067
Contact IN 8 Off
0x0068
Contact IN 9 Off
0x0069
Contact IN 10 Off
0x0080
Virtual IN 1 On
0x0081
Virtual IN 2 On
0x0082
Virtual IN 3 On
0x0083
Virtual IN 4 On
0x0084
Virtual IN 5 On
0x0085
Virtual IN 6 On
0x0086
Virtual IN 7 On
0x0087
Virtual IN 8 On
0x0088
Virtual IN 9 On
0x0089
Virtual IN 10 On
0x008A
Virtual IN 11 On
0x008B
Virtual IN 12 On
0x008C
Virtual IN 13 On
0x008D
Virtual IN 14 On
0x008E
Virtual IN 15 On
0x008F
Virtual IN 16 On
0x0090
Virtual IN 17 On
0x0091
Virtual IN 18 On
0x0092
Virtual IN 19 On
0x0093
Virtual IN 20 On
0x0094
Virtual IN 21 On
0x0095
Virtual IN 22 On
0x0096
Virtual IN 23 On
0x0097
Virtual IN 24 On
0x0098
Virtual IN 25 On
0x0099
Virtual IN 26 On
0x009A
Virtual IN 27 On
0x009B
Virtual IN 28 On
0x009C
Virtual IN 29 On
0x009D
Virtual IN 30 On
0x009E
Virtual IN 31 On
0x009F
Virtual IN 32 On
0x01C0
Remote IN 1 On
0x01C1
Remote IN 2 On
0x01C2
Remote IN 3 On
0x01C3
Remote IN 4 On
0x01C4
Remote IN 5 On
0x01C5
Remote IN 6 On
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S1 RELAY SETUP
Code
Type
Definition
0x01C6
Remote IN 7 On
0x01C7
Remote IN 8 On
0x01C8
Remote IN 9 On
0x01C9
Remote IN 10 On
0x01CA
Remote IN 11 On
0x01CB
Remote IN 12 On
0x01CC
Remote IN 13 On
0x01CD
Remote IN 14 On
0x01CE
Remote IN 15 On
0x01CF
Remote IN 16 On
0x01D0
Remote IN 17 On
0x01D1
Remote IN 18 On
0x01D2
Remote IN 19 On
0x01D3
Remote IN 20 On
0x01D4
Remote IN 21 On
0x01D5
Remote IN 22 On
0x01D6
Remote IN 23 On
0x01D7
Remote IN 24 On
0x01D8
Remote IN 25 On
0x01D9
Remote IN 26 On
0x01DA
Remote IN 27 On
0x01DB
Remote IN 28 On
0x01DC
Remote IN 29 On
0x01DD
Remote IN 30 On
0x01DE
Remote IN 31 On
0x01DF
Remote IN 32 On
0x01E0
Remote IN 1 Off
0x01E1
Remote IN 2 Off
0x01E2
Remote IN 3 Off
0x01E3
Remote IN 4 Off
0x01E4
Remote IN 5 Off
0x01E5
Remote IN 6 Off
0x01E6
Remote IN 7 Off
0x01E7
Remote IN 8 Off
0x01E8
Remote IN 9 Off
0x01E9
Remote IN 10 Off
0x01EA
Remote IN 11 Off
0x01EB
Remote IN 12 Off
0x01EC
Remote IN 13 Off
0x01ED
Remote IN 14 Off
0x01EE
Remote IN 15 Off
0x01EF
Remote IN 16 Off
0x01F0
Remote IN 17 Off
0x01F1
Remote IN 18 Off
0x01F2
Remote IN 19 Off
0x01F3
Remote IN 20 Off
0x01F4
Remote IN 21 Off
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6–17
S1 RELAY SETUP
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
Code
6–18
Type
Definition
0x01F5
Remote IN 22 Off
0x01F6
Remote IN 23 Off
0x01F7
Remote IN 24 Off
0x01F8
Remote IN 25 Off
0x01F9
Remote IN 26 Off
0x01FA
Remote IN 27 Off
0x01FB
Remote IN 28 Off
0x01FC
Remote IN 29 Off
0x01FD
Remote IN 30 Off
0x01FE
Remote IN 31 Off
0x01FF
Remote IN 32 Off
0x8002
Any Trip
0x8041
Therm O/L Trip PKP
0x8042
Therm O/L Trip OP
0x8044
Therm O/L Trip DPO
0x8081
GF Trip PKP
0x8082
GF Trip OP
0x8084
GF Trip DPO
0x80C2
Accel Trip OP
0x8102
Phase Rev. Trp OP
0x8141
Under Pwr Trip PKP
0x8142
Under Pwr Trip OP
0x8144
Under Pwr Trip DPO
0x8181
Single PH Trip PKP
0x8182
Single PH Trip OP
0x8184
Single PH Trip DPO
0x8201
Mech Jam Trip PKP
0x8202
Mech Jam Trip OP
0x8204
Mech Jam Trip DPO
0x8241
U/CURR Trip PKP
0x8242
U/CURR Trip OP
0x8244
U/CURR Trip DPO
0x8281
UNBAL Trip PKP
0x8282
UNBAL Trip OP
0x8284
UNBAL Trip DPO
0x82C2
RTD 1 Trip OP
0x82C4
RTD 1 Trip DPO
0x8302
RTD 2 Trip OP
0x8304
RTD 2 Trip DPO
0x8342
RTD 3 Trip OP
0x8344
RTD 3 Trip DPO
0x8382
RTD 4 Trip OP
0x8384
RTD 4 Trip DPO
0x83C2
RTD 5 Trip OP
0x83C4
RTD 5 Trip DPO
0x8402
RTD 6 Trip OP
0x8404
RTD 6 Trip DPO
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S1 RELAY SETUP
Code
Type
Definition
0x84C1
LE 1 Trip PKP
0x84C2
LE 1 Trip OP
0x84C4
LE 1 Trip DPO
0x8501
LE 2 Trip PKP
0x8502
LE 2 Trip OP
0x8504
LE 2 Trip DPO
0x8541
LE 3 Trip PKP
0x8542
LE 3 Trip OP
0x8544
LE 3 Trip DPO
0x8581
LE 4 Trip PKP
0x8582
LE 4 Trip OP
0x8584
LE 4 Trip DPO
0x85C1
LE 5 Trip PKP
0x85C2
LE 5 Trip OP
0x85C4
LE 5 Trip DPO
0x8601
LE 6 Trip PKP
0x8602
LE 6 Trip OP
0x8604
LE 6 Trip DPO
0x8641
LE 7 Trip PKP
0x8642
LE 7 Trip OP
0x8644
LE 7 Trip DPO
0x8681
LE 8 Trip PKP
0x8682
LE 8 Trip OP
0x8684
LE 8 Trip DPO
0x86C2
RTD 7 Trip OP
0x86C4
RTD 7 Trip DPO
0x8702
RTD 8 Trip OP
0x8704
RTD 8 Trip DPO
0x8742
RTD 9 Trip OP
0x8744
RTD 9 Trip DPO
0x8782
RTD 10 Trip OP
0x8784
RTD 10 Trip DPO
0x87C2
RTD 11 Trip OP
0x87C4
RTD 11 Trip DPO
0x8802
RTD 12 Trip OP
0x8804
RTD 12 Trip DPO
0x8F82
Fuse Fail Trip OP
0x8F84
Fuse Fail Trip DPO
0x8FC2
Ph Revrsl Trip OP
0x8FC4
Ph Revrsl Trip DPO
0x9041
Ntrl IOC1 Trip PKP
0x9042
Ntrl IOC1 Trip OP
0x9044
Ntrl IOC1 Trip DPO
0x93C1
NegSeq OV Trp PKP
0x93C2
NegSeq OV Trp OP
0x93C4
NegSeq OV Trp DPO
0x9441
Ph OV1 Trip PKP
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6–19
S1 RELAY SETUP
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
Code
6–20
Type
Definition
0x9442
Ph OV1 Trip OP
0x9444
Ph OV1 Trip DPO
0x9449
Ph A OV1 Trip PKP
0x944A
Ph A OV1 Trip OP
0x944C
Ph A OV1 Trip DPO
0x9451
Ph B OV1 Trip PKP
0x9452
Ph B OV1 Trip OP
0x9454
Ph B OV1 Trip DPO
0x9461
Ph C OV1 Trip PKP
0x9462
Ph C OV1 Trip OP
0x9464
Ph C OV1 Trip DPO
0x9481
Ph UV1 Trip PKP
0x9482
Ph UV1 Trip OP
0x9484
Ph UV1 Trip DPO
0x9489
Ph A UV1 Trip PKP
0x948A
Ph A UV1 Trip OP
0x948C
Ph A UV1 Trip DPO
0x9491
Ph B UV1 Trip PKP
0x9492
Ph B UV1 Trip OP
0x9494
Ph B UV1 Trip DPO
0x94A1
Ph C UV1 Trip PKP
0x94A2
Ph C UV1 Trip OP
0x94A4
Ph C UV1 Trip DPO
0x9541
UndrFreq1 Trip PKP
0x9542
UndrFreq1 Trip OP
0x9544
UndrFreq1 Trip DPO
0x9581
UndrFreq2 Trip PKP
0x9582
UndrFreq2 Trip OP
0x9584
UndrFreq2 Trip DPO
0x95C1
OverFreq1 Trip PKP
0x95C2
OverFreq1 Trip OP
0x95C4
OverFreq1 Trip DPO
0x9601
OverFreq2 Trip PKP
0x9602
OverFreq2 Trip OP
0x9604
OverFreq2 Trip DPO
0x9881
Ph OV2 Trip PKP
0x9882
Ph OV2 Trip OP
0x9884
Ph OV2 Trip DPO
0x9889
Ph A OV2 Trip PKP
0x988A
Ph A OV2 Trip OP
0x988C
Ph A OV2 Trip DPO
0x9891
Ph B OV2 Trip PKP
0x9892
Ph B OV2 Trip OP
0x9894
Ph B OV2 Trip DPO
0x98A1
Ph C OV2 Trip PKP
0x98A2
Ph C OV2 Trip OP
0x98A4
Ph C OV2 Trip DPO
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S1 RELAY SETUP
Code
Type
Definition
0x98C1
Ph UV2 Trip PKP
0x98C2
Ph UV2 Trip OP
0x98C4
Ph UV2 Trip DPO
0x98C9
Ph A UV2 Trip PKP
0x98CA
Ph A UV2 Trip OP
0x98CC
Ph A UV2 Trip DPO
0x98D1
Ph B UV2 Trip PKP
0x98D2
Ph B UV2 Trip OP
0x98D4
Ph B UV2 Trip DPO
0x98E1
Ph C UV2 Trip PKP
0x98E2
Ph C UV2 Trip OP
0x98E4
Ph C UV2 Trip DPO
0x9901
S/C Trip PKP
0x9902
S/C Trip OP
0x9904
S/C Trip DPO
0x9941
SPD2 S/C Trip PKP
0x9942
SPD2 S/C Trip OP
0x9944
SPD2 S/C Trip DPO
0x9981
SPD2 U/C Trip PKP
0x9982
SPD2 U/C Trip OP
0x9984
SPD2 U/C Trip DPO
0x9C01
LE 9 Trip PKP
0x9C02
LE 9 Trip OP
0x9C04
LE 9 Trip DPO
0x9C41
LE 10 Trip PKP
0x9C42
LE 10 Trip OP
0x9C44
LE 10 Trip DPO
0x9C81
LE 11 Trip PKP
0x9C82
LE 11 Trip OP
0x9C84
LE 11 Trip DPO
0x9CC1
LE 12 Trip PKP
0x9CC2
LE 12 Trip OP
0x9CC4
LE 12 Trip DPO
0x9D01
LE 13 Trip PKP
0x9D02
LE 13 Trip OP
0x9D04
LE 13 Trip DPO
0x9D41
LE 14 Trip PKP
0x9D42
LE 14 Trip OP
0x9D44
LE 14 Trip DPO
0x9D81
LE 15 Trip PKP
0x9D82
LE 15 Trip OP
0x9D84
LE 15 Trip DPO
0x9DC1
LE 16 Trip PKP
0x9DC2
LE 16 Trip OP
0x9DC4
LE 16 Trip DPO
0xA002
Any Alarm
0xA042
Therm Lvl Alrm OP
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6–21
S1 RELAY SETUP
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
Code
6–22
Type
Definition
0xA044
Therm Lvl Alrm DPO
0xA081
Gnd Fault Alrm PKP
0xA082
Gnd Fault Alrm OP
0xA084
Gnd Fault Alrm DPO
0xA141
Under Pwr Alrm PKP
0xA142
Under Pwr Alrm OP
0xA144
Under Pwr Alrm DPO
0xA241
U/CURR Alarm PKP
0xA242
U/CURR Alarm OP
0xA244
U/CURR Alarm DPO
0xA281
UNBAL Alarm PKP
0xA282
UNBAL Alarm OP
0xA284
UNBAL Alarm DPO
0xA2C2
RTD 1 Alarm OP
0xA2C4
RTD 1 Alarm DPO
0xA302
RTD 2 Alarm OP
0xA304
RTD 2 Alarm DPO
0xA342
RTD 3 Alarm OP
0xA344
RTD 3 Alarm DPO
0xA382
RTD 4 Alarm OP
0xA384
RTD 4 Alarm DPO
0xA3C2
RTD 5 Alarm OP
0xA3C4
RTD 5 Alarm DPO
0xA402
RTD 6 Alarm OP
0xA404
RTD 6 Alarm DPO
0xA442
RTD Trouble OP
0xA4C1
LE 1 Alarm PKP
0xA4C2
LE 1 Alarm OP
0xA4C4
LE 1 Alarm DPO
0xA501
LE 2 Alarm PKP
0xA502
LE 2 Alarm OP
0xA504
LE 2 Alarm DPO
0xA541
LE 3 Alarm PKP
0xA542
LE 3 Alarm OP
0xA544
LE 3 Alarm DPO
0xA581
LE 4 Alarm PKP
0xA582
LE 4 Alarm OP
0xA584
LE 4 Alarm DPO
0xA5C1
LE 5 Alarm PKP
0xA5C2
LE 5 Alarm OP
0xA5C4
LE 5 Alarm DPO
0xA601
LE 6 Alarm PKP
0xA602
LE 6 Alarm OP
0xA604
LE 6 Alarm DPO
0xA641
LE 7 Alarm PKP
0xA642
LE 7 Alarm OP
0xA644
LE 7 Alarm DPO
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S1 RELAY SETUP
Code
Type
Definition
0xA681
LE 8 Alarm PKP
0xA682
LE 8 Alarm OP
0xA684
LE 8 Alarm DPO
0xA6C2
RTD 7 Alarm OP
0xA6C4
RTD 7 Alarm DPO
0xA702
RTD 8 Alarm OP
0xA704
RTD 8 Alarm DPO
0xA742
RTD 9 Alarm OP
0xA744
RTD 9 Alarm DPO
0xA782
RTD 10 Alarm OP
0xA784
RTD 10 Alarm DPO
0xA7C2
RTD 11 Alarm OP
0xA7C4
RTD 11 Alarm DPO
0xA802
RTD 12 Alarm OP
0xA804
RTD 12 Alarm DPO
0xA982
Motor Run Hrs OP
0xAA01
Welded ContactrPKP
0xAA02
Welded Contactr OP
0xAA04
Welded ContactrDPO
0xAA42
SPD SW Not Cnfg OP
0xAA82
SPD SW Fail OP
0xAB01
Load Incr AlarmPKP
0xAB02
Load Incr Alarm OP
0xAB04
Load Incr Alrm DPO
0xABC1
HI Amb Temp PKP
0xABC2
HI Amb Temp OP
0xABC4
HI Amb Temp DPO
0xAC01
LO Amb Temp PKP
0xAC02
LO Amb Temp OP
0xAC04
LO Amb Temp DPO
0xAC42
Self Test Alarm OP
0xACC2
BKRTrpCntrAlrm OP
0xAD02
R1 CoilMonAlrm OP
0xAD42
R2 CoilMonAlrm OP
0xAD81
BKR1 Fail Alrm PKP
0xAD82
BKR1 Fail Alrm OP
0xADC2
BKR Stat Fail OP
0xAF81
Fuse Fail Alrm PKP
0xAF82
Fuse Fail Alrm OP
0xAF84
Fuse Fail Alrm DPO
0xAFC2
Ph Revrsl Alarm OP
0xAFC4
Ph Revrsl Alarm DPO
0xB041
Ntrl IOC1 Alrm PKP
0xB042
Ntrl IOC1 Alrm OP
0xB044
Ntrl IOC1 Alrm DPO
0xB342
NtrlDir RevAlm OP
0xB344
NtrlDir RevAlmDPO
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6–23
S1 RELAY SETUP
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
Code
6–24
Type
Definition
0xB3C1
NegSeq OV Alrm PKP
0xB3C2
NegSeq OV Alrm OP
0xB3C4
NegSeq OV Alrm DPO
0xB441
Ph OV1 Alarm PKP
0xB442
Ph OV1 Alarm OP
0xB444
Ph OV1 Alarm DPO
0xB449
Ph A OV1 Alarm PKP
0xB44A
Ph A OV1 Alarm OP
0xB44C
Ph A OV1 Alarm DPO
0xB451
Ph B OV1 Alarm PKP
0xB452
Ph B OV1 Alarm OP
0xB454
Ph B OV1 Alarm DPO
0xB461
Ph C OV1 Alarm PKP
0xB462
Ph C OV1 Alarm OP
0xB464
Ph C OV1 Alarm DPO
0xB481
Ph UV1 Alarm PKP
0xB482
Ph UV1 Alarm OP
0xB484
Ph UV1 Alarm DPO
0xB489
Ph A UV1 Alarm PKP
0xB48A
Ph A UV1 Alarm OP
0xB48C
Ph A UV1 Alarm DPO
0xB491
Ph B UV1 Alarm PKP
0xB492
Ph B UV1 Alarm OP
0xB494
Ph B UV1 Alarm DPO
0xB4A1
Ph C UV1 Alarm PKP
0xB4A2
Ph C UV1 Alarm OP
0xB4A4
Ph C UV1 Alarm DPO
0xB541
UndrFreq1 Alrm PKP
0xB542
UndrFreq1 Alrm OP
0xB544
UndrFreq1 Alrm DPO
0xB581
UndrFreq2 Alrm PKP
0xB582
UndrFreq2 Alrm OP
0xB584
UndrFreq2 Alrm DPO
0xB5C1
OverFreq1 Alrm PKP
0xB5C2
OverFreq1 Alrm OP
0xB5C4
OverFreq1 Alrm DPO
0xB601
OverFreq2 Alrm PKP
0xB602
OverFreq2 Alrm OP
0xB604
OverFreq2 Alrm DPO
0xB881
Ph OV2 Alarm PKP
0xB882
Ph OV2 Alarm OP
0xB884
Ph OV2 Alarm DPO
0xB889
Ph A OV2 Alarm PKP
0xB88A
Ph A OV2 Alarm OP
0xB88C
Ph A OV2 Alarm DPO
0xB891
Ph B OV2 Alarm PKP
0xB892
Ph B OV2 Alarm OP
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S1 RELAY SETUP
Code
Type
Definition
0xB894
Ph B OV2 Alarm DPO
0xB8A1
Ph C OV2 Alarm PKP
0xB8A2
Ph C OV2 Alarm OP
0xB8A4
Ph C OV2 Alarm DPO
0xB8C1
Ph UV2 Alarm PKP
0xB8C2
Ph UV2 Alarm OP
0xB8C4
Ph UV2 Alarm DPO
0xB8C9
Ph A UV2 Alarm PKP
0xB8CA
Ph A UV2 Alarm OP
0xB8CC
Ph A UV2 Alarm DPO
0xB8D1
Ph B UV2 Alarm PKP
0xB8D2
Ph B UV2 Alarm OP
0xB8D4
Ph B UV2 Alarm DPO
0xB8E1
Ph C UV2 Alarm PKP
0xB8E2
Ph C UV2 Alarm OP
0xB8E4
Ph C UV2 Alarm DPO
0xB901
S/C Alarm PKP
0xB902
S/C Alarm OP
0xB904
S/C Alarm DPO
0xB941
SPD2 S/C Alarm PKP
0xB942
SPD2 S/C Alarm OP
0xB944
SPD2 S/C Alarm DPO
0xB981
SPD2 U/C Alarm PKP
0xB982
SPD2 U/C Alarm OP
0xB984
SPD2 U/C Alarm DPO
0xBC01
LE 9 Alarm PKP
0xBC02
LE 9 Alarm OP
0xBC04
LE 9 Alarm DPO
0xBC41
LE 10 Alarm PKP
0xBC42
LE 10 Alarm OP
0xBC44
LE 10 Alarm DPO
0xBC81
LE 11 Alarm PKP
0xBC82
LE 11 Alarm OP
0xBC84
LE 11 Alarm DPO
0xBCC1
LE 12 Alarm PKP
0xBCC2
LE 12 Alarm OP
0xBCC4
LE 12 Alarm DPO
0xBD01
LE 13 Alarm PKP
0xBD02
LE 13 Alarm OP
0xBD04
LE 13 Alarm DPO
0xBD41
LE 14 Alarm PKP
0xBD42
LE 14 Alarm OP
0xBD44
LE 14 Alarm DPO
0xBD81
LE 15 Alarm PKP
0xBD82
LE 15 Alarm OP
0xBD84
LE 15 Alarm DPO
0xBDC1
LE 16 Alarm PKP
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6–25
S1 RELAY SETUP
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
Code
6–26
Type
Definition
0xBDC2
LE 16 Alarm OP
0xBDC4
LE 16 Alarm DPO
0xC002
Any Inhibit
0xC042
Output Relay 3 On
0xC082
Output Relay 4 On
0xC0C2
Output Relay 5 On
0xC102
Output Relay 6 On
0xC142
Self-Test Rly 7 On
0xC182
Output Relay 1 On
0xC1C2
Output Relay 2 On
0xC242
High Speed OP
0xC282
Low Speed OP
0xC3C2
Motor Online
0xC402
Emergency Restart
0xC442
Hot RTD OP
0xC444
Hot RTD DPO
0xC482
Lockout OP
0xC484
Lockout DPO
0xC4C1
LE 1 PKP
0xC4C2
LE 1 OP
0xC4C4
LE 1 DPO
0xC501
LE 2 PKP
0xC502
LE 2 OP
0xC504
LE 2 DPO
0xC541
LE 3 PKP
0xC542
LE 3 OP
0xC544
LE 3 DPO
0xC581
LE 4 PKP
0xC582
LE 4 OP
0xC584
LE 4 DPO
0xC5C1
LE 5 PKP
0xC5C2
LE 5 OP
0xC5C4
LE 5 DPO
0xC601
LE 6 PKP
0xC602
LE 6 OP
0xC604
LE 6 DPO
0xC641
LE 7 PKP
0xC642
LE 7 OP
0xC644
LE 7 DPO
0xC681
LE 8 PKP
0xC682
LE 8 OP
0xC684
LE 8 DPO
0xC902
Open Breaker
0xC942
Close Breaker
0xC742
VFD Bypassed
0xC744
VFD Not Bypassed
0xCA02
52a Contact OP
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S1 RELAY SETUP
Code
Type
Definition
0xCA42
52b Contact OP
0xCAC2
L/O Rst Closed
0xCCC2
BKR Stat Open
0xCD02
BKR Stat Clsd
0xCE82
Therm Inhibit OP
0xCEC2
Rstrt Inhibit OP
0xCF02
Start/Hr Inhib OP
0xCF42
T-BT-Strt Inhib OP
0xCF81
Fuse Fail InhibPKP
0xCF82
Fuse Fail Inhib OP
0xCFC2
Ph Rev Inhibit OP
0xCFC4
Ph Rev Inhibit DPO
0xD342
Ntrl Dir Rev OP
0xD344
Ntrl Dir Rev DPO
0xDC01
LE 9 PKP
0xDC02
LE 9 OP
0xDC04
LE 9 DPO
0xDC41
LE 10 PKP
0xDC42
LE 10 OP
0xDC44
LE 10 DPO
0xDC81
LE 11 PKP
0xDC82
LE 11 OP
0xDC84
LE 11 DPO
0xDCC1
LE 12 PKP
0xDCC2
LE 12 OP
0xDCC4
LE 12 DPO
0xDD01
LE 13 PKP
0xDD02
LE 13 OP
0xDD04
LE 13 DPO
0xDD41
LE 14 PKP
0xDD42
LE 14 OP
0xDD44
LE 14 DPO
0xDD81
LE 15 PKP
0xDD82
LE 15 OP
0xDD84
LE 15 DPO
0xDDC1
LE 16 PKP
0xDDC2
LE 16 OP
0xDDC4
LE 16 DPO
0xE002
Any Block
0xE042
Therm O/L Blck
0xE082
Gnd Fault BLK
0xE0C2
Accel BLK
0xE142
UndrPower BLK
0xE182
Output Relay 1 BLK
0xE1C2
Output Relay 2 BLK
0xE202
Mech Jam BLK
0xE242
U/CURR BLK
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6–27
S1 RELAY SETUP
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
Code
6–28
Type
Definition
0xE282
UNBAL BLK
0xE2C2
RTD1 BLK OP
0xE302
RTD2 BLK OP
0xE342
RTD3 BLK OP
0xE382
RTD4 BLK OP
0xE3C2
RTD5 BLK OP
0xE402
RTD6 BLK OP
0xE442
RTDTrouble BLK OP
0xE6C2
RTD7 BLK OP
0xE702
RTD8 BLK OP
0xE742
RTD9 BLK OP
0xE782
RTD10 BLK OP
0xE7C2
RTD11 BLK OP
0xE802
RTD12 BLK OP
0xF042
Ntrl IOC1 Block
0xF342
NTRL DIR Rev Block
0xF3C2
NegSeq OV Block
0xF442
Ph OV1 Block
0xF482
Ph UV1 Block
0xF542
UndrFreq1 Block
0xF582
UndrFreq2 Block
0xF5C2
OverFreq1 Block
0xF602
OverFreq2 Block
0xF882
Ph OV2 Block
0xF8C2
Ph UV2 Block
0xF902
S/C BLK
0xF942
SPD2 S/C BLK
0xF982
SPD2 U/C OP
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
IEC60870-5-104
protocol
S1 RELAY SETUP
Figure 6-8: IEC 60870-5-104 protocol settings menu
S1 60870-5-104
GENERAL
S1 104 GENERAL
CLIENT ADDRESS
FUNCTION
POINT LIST
▼
TCP PORT
SLAVE ADDRESS
CYCLIC DATA PERIOD
TCP CONN TIMEOUT
OBJ INFO ADDR BIN
104 BINARY INPUTS
POINT 0
▼
OBJ INFO ADDR ALOG
POINT 1
OBJ INFO ADDR CNTR
...
OBJ INFO ADDR CMD
POINT 63
S1 104 CLIENT ADDRESS
CLIENT ADDRESS 1
▼
104 ANALOG INPUTS
POINT 0 ENTRY
▼
CLIENT ADDRESS 2
POINT 0 SCALE FCTR
...
POINT 0 DEADBAND
.
.
...
.
POINT 31 ENTRY
.
POINT 31 SCALE FCTR
CLIENT ADDRESS 5
S1 104 POINT LIST
POINT 31 DEADBAND
BINARY INPUTS
ANALOG INPUTS
BINARY OUTPUTS
104 BINARY OUTPUTS
POINT 0 ON
▼
POINT 0 OFF
...
.
.
POINT 15 ON
.
POINT 15 OFF
.
896744.cdr
DNP communication
The menu structure for the DNP protocol is shown below.
PATH: SETPOINTS > RELAY SETUP > COMMUNICATIONS > DNP PROTOCOL
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6–29
S1 RELAY SETUP
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
Figure 6-9: DNP communication settings menu
S1 DNP
DNP GENERAL
S1 DNP GENERAL
DNP UNSOL RESPONSE*
DEFAULT VARIATION
DNP ADDRESS
▼
DNP CLIENT ADDRESS*
DNP TCP/UDP PORT
DNP POINTS LIST
CHANNEL 1 PORT
CHANNEL 2 PORT
TME SYNC IIN PER.
* Ethernet only
DNP MSG FRAG SIZE
DNP TCP CONN T/O
DNP UNSOL RESPONSE*
FUNCTION
▼
TIMEOUT
MAX RETRIES
DEST ADDRESS
POINT 0
POINT 1
▼
DEFAULT VARIATION
POINT 2
DNP OBJECT 1
...
DNP OBJECT 2
POINT 63
DNP OBJECT 20
DNP OBJECT 21
POINT 0 ON
DNP OBJECT 22
POINT 0 OFF
DNP OBJECT 23
▼
DNP OBJECT 30
POINT 1 ON
DNP OBJECT 32
POINT 1 OFF
...
DNP CLIENT ADDRESS*
POINT 15 ON
CLIENT ADDRESS 1
POINT 15 OFF
CLIENT ADDRESS 2
CLIENT ADDRESS 3
POINT 0 ENTRY
CLIENT ADDRESS 4
POINT 0 SCALE FCTR
CLIENT ADDRESS 5
▼
POINT 0 DEADBAND
...
S1 DNP POINTS LIST
POINT 31 ENTRY
BINARY INPUTS
896743A1.cdr
POINT 31 SCALE FCTR
BINARY OUTPUT
POINT 31 DEADBAND
ANALOG INPUTS
The following path is available using the keypad. For instructions on how to use the
keypad, please refer to the Chapter 3 - Working with the Keypad.
The following table, from the 339 Communications Guide, shows the list of DNP Binary
Inputs.
6–30
Code
Type
Definition
FC134B
unsigned 16 bits
DNP Binary Inputs
0
Off
0x0040
Contact IN 1 On
0x0041
Contact IN 2 On
0x0042
Contact IN 3 On
0x0043
Contact IN 4 On
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S1 RELAY SETUP
Code
Type
Definition
0x0044
Contact IN 5 On
0x0045
Contact IN 6 On
0x0046
Contact IN 7 On
0x0047
Contact IN 8 On
0x0048
Contact IN 9 On
0x0049
Contact IN 10 On
0x0060
Contact IN 1 Off
0x0061
Contact IN 2 Off
0x0062
Contact IN 3 Off
0x0063
Contact IN 4 Off
0x0064
Contact IN 5 Off
0x0065
Contact IN 6 Off
0x0066
Contact IN 7 Off
0x0067
Contact IN 8 Off
0x0068
Contact IN 9 Off
0x0069
Contact IN 10 Off
0x0080
Virtual IN 1 On
0x0081
Virtual IN 2 On
0x0082
Virtual IN 3 On
0x0083
Virtual IN 4 On
0x0084
Virtual IN 5 On
0x0085
Virtual IN 6 On
0x0086
Virtual IN 7 On
0x0087
Virtual IN 8 On
0x0088
Virtual IN 9 On
0x0089
Virtual IN 10 On
0x008A
Virtual IN 11 On
0x008B
Virtual IN 12 On
0x008C
Virtual IN 13 On
0x008D
Virtual IN 14 On
0x008E
Virtual IN 15 On
0x008F
Virtual IN 16 On
0x0090
Virtual IN 17 On
0x0091
Virtual IN 18 On
0x0092
Virtual IN 19 On
0x0093
Virtual IN 20 On
0x0094
Virtual IN 21 On
0x0095
Virtual IN 22 On
0x0096
Virtual IN 23 On
0x0097
Virtual IN 24 On
0x0098
Virtual IN 25 On
0x0099
Virtual IN 26 On
0x009A
Virtual IN 27 On
0x009B
Virtual IN 28 On
0x009C
Virtual IN 29 On
0x009D
Virtual IN 30 On
0x009E
Virtual IN 31 On
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6–31
S1 RELAY SETUP
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
Code
6–32
Type
Definition
0x009F
Virtual IN 32 On
0x01C0
Remote IN 1 On
0x01C1
Remote IN 2 On
0x01C2
Remote IN 3 On
0x01C3
Remote IN 4 On
0x01C4
Remote IN 5 On
0x01C5
Remote IN 6 On
0x01C6
Remote IN 7 On
0x01C7
Remote IN 8 On
0x01C8
Remote IN 9 On
0x01C9
Remote IN 10 On
0x01CA
Remote IN 11 On
0x01CB
Remote IN 12 On
0x01CC
Remote IN 13 On
0x01CD
Remote IN 14 On
0x01CE
Remote IN 15 On
0x01CF
Remote IN 16 On
0x01D0
Remote IN 17 On
0x01D1
Remote IN 18 On
0x01D2
Remote IN 19 On
0x01D3
Remote IN 20 On
0x01D4
Remote IN 21 On
0x01D5
Remote IN 22 On
0x01D6
Remote IN 23 On
0x01D7
Remote IN 24 On
0x01D8
Remote IN 25 On
0x01D9
Remote IN 26 On
0x01DA
Remote IN 27 On
0x01DB
Remote IN 28 On
0x01DC
Remote IN 29 On
0x01DD
Remote IN 30 On
0x01DE
Remote IN 31 On
0x01DF
Remote IN 32 On
0x01E0
Remote IN 1 Off
0x01E1
Remote IN 2 Off
0x01E2
Remote IN 3 Off
0x01E3
Remote IN 4 Off
0x01E4
Remote IN 5 Off
0x01E5
Remote IN 6 Off
0x01E6
Remote IN 7 Off
0x01E7
Remote IN 8 Off
0x01E8
Remote IN 9 Off
0x01E9
Remote IN 10 Off
0x01EA
Remote IN 11 Off
0x01EB
Remote IN 12 Off
0x01EC
Remote IN 13 Off
0x01ED
Remote IN 14 Off
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S1 RELAY SETUP
Code
Type
Definition
0x01EE
Remote IN 15 Off
0x01EF
Remote IN 16 Off
0x01F0
Remote IN 17 Off
0x01F1
Remote IN 18 Off
0x01F2
Remote IN 19 Off
0x01F3
Remote IN 20 Off
0x01F4
Remote IN 21 Off
0x01F5
Remote IN 22 Off
0x01F6
Remote IN 23 Off
0x01F7
Remote IN 24 Off
0x01F8
Remote IN 25 Off
0x01F9
Remote IN 26 Off
0x01FA
Remote IN 27 Off
0x01FB
Remote IN 28 Off
0x01FC
Remote IN 29 Off
0x01FD
Remote IN 30 Off
0x01FE
Remote IN 31 Off
0x01FF
Remote IN 32 Off
0x8002
Any Trip
0x8041
Therm O/L Trip PKP
0x8042
Therm O/L Trip OP
0x8044
Therm O/L Trip DPO
0x8081
GF Trip PKP
0x8082
GF Trip OP
0x8084
GF Trip DPO
0x80C2
Accel Trip OP
0x8102
Phase Rev. Trp OP
0x8141
Under Pwr Trip PKP
0x8142
Under Pwr Trip OP
0x8144
Under Pwr Trip DPO
0x8181
Single PH Trip PKP
0x8182
Single PH Trip OP
0x8184
Single PH Trip DPO
0x8201
Mech Jam Trip PKP
0x8202
Mech Jam Trip OP
0x8204
Mech Jam Trip DPO
0x8241
U/CURR Trip PKP
0x8242
U/CURR Trip OP
0x8244
U/CURR Trip DPO
0x8281
UNBAL Trip PKP
0x8282
UNBAL Trip OP
0x8284
UNBAL Trip DPO
0x82C2
RTD 1 Trip OP
0x82C4
RTD 1 Trip DPO
0x8302
RTD 2 Trip OP
0x8304
RTD 2 Trip DPO
0x8342
RTD 3 Trip OP
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6–33
S1 RELAY SETUP
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
Code
6–34
Type
Definition
0x8344
RTD 3 Trip DPO
0x8382
RTD 4 Trip OP
0x8384
RTD 4 Trip DPO
0x83C2
RTD 5 Trip OP
0x83C4
RTD 5 Trip DPO
0x8402
RTD 6 Trip OP
0x8404
RTD 6 Trip DPO
0x84C1
LE 1 Trip PKP
0x84C2
LE 1 Trip OP
0x84C4
LE 1 Trip DPO
0x8501
LE 2 Trip PKP
0x8502
LE 2 Trip OP
0x8504
LE 2 Trip DPO
0x8541
LE 3 Trip PKP
0x8542
LE 3 Trip OP
0x8544
LE 3 Trip DPO
0x8581
LE 4 Trip PKP
0x8582
LE 4 Trip OP
0x8584
LE 4 Trip DPO
0x85C1
LE 5 Trip PKP
0x85C2
LE 5 Trip OP
0x85C4
LE 5 Trip DPO
0x8601
LE 6 Trip PKP
0x8602
LE 6 Trip OP
0x8604
LE 6 Trip DPO
0x8641
LE 7 Trip PKP
0x8642
LE 7 Trip OP
0x8644
LE 7 Trip DPO
0x8681
LE 8 Trip PKP
0x8682
LE 8 Trip OP
0x8684
LE 8 Trip DPO
0x86C2
RTD 7 Trip OP
0x86C4
RTD 7 Trip DPO
0x8702
RTD 8 Trip OP
0x8704
RTD 8 Trip DPO
0x8742
RTD 9 Trip OP
0x8744
RTD 9 Trip DPO
0x8782
RTD 10 Trip OP
0x8784
RTD 10 Trip DPO
0x87C2
RTD 11 Trip OP
0x87C4
RTD 11 Trip DPO
0x8802
RTD 12 Trip OP
0x8804
RTD 12 Trip DPO
0x8F82
Fuse Fail Trip OP
0x8F84
Fuse Fail Trip DPO
0x8FC2
Ph Revrsl Trip OP
0x8FC4
Ph Revrsl Trip DPO
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S1 RELAY SETUP
Code
Type
Definition
0x9041
Ntrl IOC1 Trip PKP
0x9042
Ntrl IOC1 Trip OP
0x9044
Ntrl IOC1 Trip DPO
0x93C1
NegSeq OV Trp PKP
0x93C2
NegSeq OV Trp OP
0x93C4
NegSeq OV Trp DPO
0x9441
Ph OV1 Trip PKP
0x9442
Ph OV1 Trip OP
0x9444
Ph OV1 Trip DPO
0x9449
Ph A OV1 Trip PKP
0x944A
Ph A OV1 Trip OP
0x944C
Ph A OV1 Trip DPO
0x9451
Ph B OV1 Trip PKP
0x9452
Ph B OV1 Trip OP
0x9454
Ph B OV1 Trip DPO
0x9461
Ph C OV1 Trip PKP
0x9462
Ph C OV1 Trip OP
0x9464
Ph C OV1 Trip DPO
0x9481
Ph UV1 Trip PKP
0x9482
Ph UV1 Trip OP
0x9484
Ph UV1 Trip DPO
0x9489
Ph A UV1 Trip PKP
0x948A
Ph A UV1 Trip OP
0x948C
Ph A UV1 Trip DPO
0x9491
Ph B UV1 Trip PKP
0x9492
Ph B UV1 Trip OP
0x9494
Ph B UV1 Trip DPO
0x94A1
Ph C UV1 Trip PKP
0x94A2
Ph C UV1 Trip OP
0x94A4
Ph C UV1 Trip DPO
0x9541
UndrFreq1 Trip PKP
0x9542
UndrFreq1 Trip OP
0x9544
UndrFreq1 Trip DPO
0x9581
UndrFreq2 Trip PKP
0x9582
UndrFreq2 Trip OP
0x9584
UndrFreq2 Trip DPO
0x95C1
OverFreq1 Trip PKP
0x95C2
OverFreq1 Trip OP
0x95C4
OverFreq1 Trip DPO
0x9601
OverFreq2 Trip PKP
0x9602
OverFreq2 Trip OP
0x9604
OverFreq2 Trip DPO
0x9881
Ph OV2 Trip PKP
0x9882
Ph OV2 Trip OP
0x9884
Ph OV2 Trip DPO
0x9889
Ph A OV2 Trip PKP
0x988A
Ph A OV2 Trip OP
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6–35
S1 RELAY SETUP
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
Code
6–36
Type
Definition
0x988C
Ph A OV2 Trip DPO
0x9891
Ph B OV2 Trip PKP
0x9892
Ph B OV2 Trip OP
0x9894
Ph B OV2 Trip DPO
0x98A1
Ph C OV2 Trip PKP
0x98A2
Ph C OV2 Trip OP
0x98A4
Ph C OV2 Trip DPO
0x98C1
Ph UV2 Trip PKP
0x98C2
Ph UV2 Trip OP
0x98C4
Ph UV2 Trip DPO
0x98C9
Ph A UV2 Trip PKP
0x98CA
Ph A UV2 Trip OP
0x98CC
Ph A UV2 Trip DPO
0x98D1
Ph B UV2 Trip PKP
0x98D2
Ph B UV2 Trip OP
0x98D4
Ph B UV2 Trip DPO
0x98E1
Ph C UV2 Trip PKP
0x98E2
Ph C UV2 Trip OP
0x98E4
Ph C UV2 Trip DPO
0x9901
S/C Trip PKP
0x9902
S/C Trip OP
0x9904
S/C Trip DPO
0x9941
SPD2 S/C Trip PKP
0x9942
SPD2 S/C Trip OP
0x9944
SPD2 S/C Trip DPO
0x9981
SPD2 U/C Trip PKP
0x9982
SPD2 U/C Trip OP
0x9984
SPD2 U/C Trip DPO
0x9C01
LE 9 Trip PKP
0x9C02
LE 9 Trip OP
0x9C04
LE 9 Trip DPO
0x9C41
LE 10 Trip PKP
0x9C42
LE 10 Trip OP
0x9C44
LE 10 Trip DPO
0x9C81
LE 11 Trip PKP
0x9C82
LE 11 Trip OP
0x9C84
LE 11 Trip DPO
0x9CC1
LE 12 Trip PKP
0x9CC2
LE 12 Trip OP
0x9CC4
LE 12 Trip DPO
0x9D01
LE 13 Trip PKP
0x9D02
LE 13 Trip OP
0x9D04
LE 13 Trip DPO
0x9D41
LE 14 Trip PKP
0x9D42
LE 14 Trip OP
0x9D44
LE 14 Trip DPO
0x9D81
LE 15 Trip PKP
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S1 RELAY SETUP
Code
Type
Definition
0x9D82
LE 15 Trip OP
0x9D84
LE 15 Trip DPO
0x9DC1
LE 16 Trip PKP
0x9DC2
LE 16 Trip OP
0x9DC4
LE 16 Trip DPO
0xA002
Any Alarm
0xA042
Therm Lvl Alrm OP
0xA044
Therm Lvl Alrm DPO
0xA081
Gnd Fault Alrm PKP
0xA082
Gnd Fault Alrm OP
0xA084
Gnd Fault Alrm DPO
0xA141
Under Pwr Alrm PKP
0xA142
Under Pwr Alrm OP
0xA144
Under Pwr Alrm DPO
0xA241
U/CURR Alarm PKP
0xA242
U/CURR Alarm OP
0xA244
U/CURR Alarm DPO
0xA281
UNBAL Alarm PKP
0xA282
UNBAL Alarm OP
0xA284
UNBAL Alarm DPO
0xA2C2
RTD 1 Alarm OP
0xA2C4
RTD 1 Alarm DPO
0xA302
RTD 2 Alarm OP
0xA304
RTD 2 Alarm DPO
0xA342
RTD 3 Alarm OP
0xA344
RTD 3 Alarm DPO
0xA382
RTD 4 Alarm OP
0xA384
RTD 4 Alarm DPO
0xA3C2
RTD 5 Alarm OP
0xA3C4
RTD 5 Alarm DPO
0xA402
RTD 6 Alarm OP
0xA404
RTD 6 Alarm DPO
0xA442
RTD Trouble OP
0xA4C1
LE 1 Alarm PKP
0xA4C2
LE 1 Alarm OP
0xA4C4
LE 1 Alarm DPO
0xA501
LE 2 Alarm PKP
0xA502
LE 2 Alarm OP
0xA504
LE 2 Alarm DPO
0xA541
LE 3 Alarm PKP
0xA542
LE 3 Alarm OP
0xA544
LE 3 Alarm DPO
0xA581
LE 4 Alarm PKP
0xA582
LE 4 Alarm OP
0xA584
LE 4 Alarm DPO
0xA5C1
LE 5 Alarm PKP
0xA5C2
LE 5 Alarm OP
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6–37
S1 RELAY SETUP
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
Code
6–38
Type
Definition
0xA5C4
LE 5 Alarm DPO
0xA601
LE 6 Alarm PKP
0xA602
LE 6 Alarm OP
0xA604
LE 6 Alarm DPO
0xA641
LE 7 Alarm PKP
0xA642
LE 7 Alarm OP
0xA644
LE 7 Alarm DPO
0xA681
LE 8 Alarm PKP
0xA682
LE 8 Alarm OP
0xA684
LE 8 Alarm DPO
0xA6C2
RTD 7 Alarm OP
0xA6C4
RTD 7 Alarm DPO
0xA702
RTD 8 Alarm OP
0xA704
RTD 8 Alarm DPO
0xA742
RTD 9 Alarm OP
0xA744
RTD 9 Alarm DPO
0xA782
RTD 10 Alarm OP
0xA784
RTD 10 Alarm DPO
0xA7C2
RTD 11 Alarm OP
0xA7C4
RTD 11 Alarm DPO
0xA802
RTD 12 Alarm OP
0xA804
RTD 12 Alarm DPO
0xA982
Motor Run Hrs OP
0xAA01
Welded ContactrPKP
0xAA02
Welded Contactr OP
0xAA04
Welded ContactrDPO
0xAA42
SPD SW Not Cnfg OP
0xAA82
SPD SW Fail OP
0xAB01
Load Incr AlarmPKP
0xAB02
Load Incr Alarm OP
0xAB04
Load Incr Alrm DPO
0xABC1
HI Amb Temp PKP
0xABC2
HI Amb Temp OP
0xABC4
HI Amb Temp DPO
0xAC01
LO Amb Temp PKP
0xAC02
LO Amb Temp OP
0xAC04
LO Amb Temp DPO
0xAC42
Self Test Alarm OP
0xACC2
BKRTrpCntrAlrm OP
0xAD02
R1 CoilMonAlrm OP
0xAD42
R2 CoilMonAlrm OP
0xAD81
BKR1 Fail Alrm PKP
0xAD82
BKR1 Fail Alrm OP
0xADC2
BKR Stat Fail OP
0xAF81
Fuse Fail Alrm PKP
0xAF82
Fuse Fail Alrm OP
0xAF84
Fuse Fail Alrm DPO
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S1 RELAY SETUP
Code
Type
Definition
0xAFC2
Ph Revrsl Alarm OP
0xAFC4
Ph Revrsl Alarm DPO
0xB041
Ntrl IOC1 Alrm PKP
0xB042
Ntrl IOC1 Alrm OP
0xB044
Ntrl IOC1 Alrm DPO
0xB342
NtrlDir RevAlm OP
0xB344
NtrlDir RevAlmDPO
0xB3C1
NegSeq OV Alrm PKP
0xB3C2
NegSeq OV Alrm OP
0xB3C4
NegSeq OV Alrm DPO
0xB441
Ph OV1 Alarm PKP
0xB442
Ph OV1 Alarm OP
0xB444
Ph OV1 Alarm DPO
0xB449
Ph A OV1 Alarm PKP
0xB44A
Ph A OV1 Alarm OP
0xB44C
Ph A OV1 Alarm DPO
0xB451
Ph B OV1 Alarm PKP
0xB452
Ph B OV1 Alarm OP
0xB454
Ph B OV1 Alarm DPO
0xB461
Ph C OV1 Alarm PKP
0xB462
Ph C OV1 Alarm OP
0xB464
Ph C OV1 Alarm DPO
0xB481
Ph UV1 Alarm PKP
0xB482
Ph UV1 Alarm OP
0xB484
Ph UV1 Alarm DPO
0xB489
Ph A UV1 Alarm PKP
0xB48A
Ph A UV1 Alarm OP
0xB48C
Ph A UV1 Alarm DPO
0xB491
Ph B UV1 Alarm PKP
0xB492
Ph B UV1 Alarm OP
0xB494
Ph B UV1 Alarm DPO
0xB4A1
Ph C UV1 Alarm PKP
0xB4A2
Ph C UV1 Alarm OP
0xB4A4
Ph C UV1 Alarm DPO
0xB541
UndrFreq1 Alrm PKP
0xB542
UndrFreq1 Alrm OP
0xB544
UndrFreq1 Alrm DPO
0xB581
UndrFreq2 Alrm PKP
0xB582
UndrFreq2 Alrm OP
0xB584
UndrFreq2 Alrm DPO
0xB5C1
OverFreq1 Alrm PKP
0xB5C2
OverFreq1 Alrm OP
0xB5C4
OverFreq1 Alrm DPO
0xB601
OverFreq2 Alrm PKP
0xB602
OverFreq2 Alrm OP
0xB604
OverFreq2 Alrm DPO
0xB881
Ph OV2 Alarm PKP
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6–39
S1 RELAY SETUP
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
Code
6–40
Type
Definition
0xB882
Ph OV2 Alarm OP
0xB884
Ph OV2 Alarm DPO
0xB889
Ph A OV2 Alarm PKP
0xB88A
Ph A OV2 Alarm OP
0xB88C
Ph A OV2 Alarm DPO
0xB891
Ph B OV2 Alarm PKP
0xB892
Ph B OV2 Alarm OP
0xB894
Ph B OV2 Alarm DPO
0xB8A1
Ph C OV2 Alarm PKP
0xB8A2
Ph C OV2 Alarm OP
0xB8A4
Ph C OV2 Alarm DPO
0xB8C1
Ph UV2 Alarm PKP
0xB8C2
Ph UV2 Alarm OP
0xB8C4
Ph UV2 Alarm DPO
0xB8C9
Ph A UV2 Alarm PKP
0xB8CA
Ph A UV2 Alarm OP
0xB8CC
Ph A UV2 Alarm DPO
0xB8D1
Ph B UV2 Alarm PKP
0xB8D2
Ph B UV2 Alarm OP
0xB8D4
Ph B UV2 Alarm DPO
0xB8E1
Ph C UV2 Alarm PKP
0xB8E2
Ph C UV2 Alarm OP
0xB8E4
Ph C UV2 Alarm DPO
0xB901
S/C Alarm PKP
0xB902
S/C Alarm OP
0xB904
S/C Alarm DPO
0xB941
SPD2 S/C Alarm PKP
0xB942
SPD2 S/C Alarm OP
0xB944
SPD2 S/C Alarm DPO
0xB981
SPD2 U/C Alarm PKP
0xB982
SPD2 U/C Alarm OP
0xB984
SPD2 U/C Alarm DPO
0xBC01
LE 9 Alarm PKP
0xBC02
LE 9 Alarm OP
0xBC04
LE 9 Alarm DPO
0xBC41
LE 10 Alarm PKP
0xBC42
LE 10 Alarm OP
0xBC44
LE 10 Alarm DPO
0xBC81
LE 11 Alarm PKP
0xBC82
LE 11 Alarm OP
0xBC84
LE 11 Alarm DPO
0xBCC1
LE 12 Alarm PKP
0xBCC2
LE 12 Alarm OP
0xBCC4
LE 12 Alarm DPO
0xBD01
LE 13 Alarm PKP
0xBD02
LE 13 Alarm OP
0xBD04
LE 13 Alarm DPO
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S1 RELAY SETUP
Code
Type
Definition
0xBD41
LE 14 Alarm PKP
0xBD42
LE 14 Alarm OP
0xBD44
LE 14 Alarm DPO
0xBD81
LE 15 Alarm PKP
0xBD82
LE 15 Alarm OP
0xBD84
LE 15 Alarm DPO
0xBDC1
LE 16 Alarm PKP
0xBDC2
LE 16 Alarm OP
0xBDC4
LE 16 Alarm DPO
0xC002
Any Inhibit
0xC042
Output Relay 3 On
0xC082
Output Relay 4 On
0xC0C2
Output Relay 5 On
0xC102
Output Relay 6 On
0xC142
Self-Test Rly 7 On
0xC182
Output Relay 1 On
0xC1C2
Output Relay 2 On
0xC242
High Speed OP
0xC282
Low Speed OP
0xC3C2
Motor Online
0xC402
Emergency Restart
0xC442
Hot RTD OP
0xC444
Hot RTD DPO
0xC482
Lockout OP
0xC484
Lockout DPO
0xC4C1
LE 1 PKP
0xC4C2
LE 1 OP
0xC4C4
LE 1 DPO
0xC501
LE 2 PKP
0xC502
LE 2 OP
0xC504
LE 2 DPO
0xC541
LE 3 PKP
0xC542
LE 3 OP
0xC544
LE 3 DPO
0xC581
LE 4 PKP
0xC582
LE 4 OP
0xC584
LE 4 DPO
0xC5C1
LE 5 PKP
0xC5C2
LE 5 OP
0xC5C4
LE 5 DPO
0xC601
LE 6 PKP
0xC602
LE 6 OP
0xC604
LE 6 DPO
0xC641
LE 7 PKP
0xC642
LE 7 OP
0xC644
LE 7 DPO
0xC681
LE 8 PKP
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6–41
S1 RELAY SETUP
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
Code
6–42
Type
Definition
0xC682
LE 8 OP
0xC684
LE 8 DPO
0xC902
Open Breaker
0xC942
Close Breaker
0xC742
VFD Bypassed
0xC744
VFD Not Bypassed
0xCA02
52a Contact OP
0xCA42
52b Contact OP
0xCAC2
L/O Rst Closed
0xCCC2
BKR Stat Open
0xCD02
BKR Stat Clsd
0xCE82
Therm Inhibit OP
0xCEC2
Rstrt Inhibit OP
0xCF02
Start/Hr Inhib OP
0xCF42
T-BT-Strt Inhib OP
0xCF81
Fuse Fail InhibPKP
0xCF82
Fuse Fail Inhib OP
0xCFC2
Ph Rev Inhibit OP
0xCFC4
Ph Rev Inhibit DPO
0xD342
Ntrl Dir Rev OP
0xD344
Ntrl Dir Rev DPO
0xDC01
LE 9 PKP
0xDC02
LE 9 OP
0xDC04
LE 9 DPO
0xDC41
LE 10 PKP
0xDC42
LE 10 OP
0xDC44
LE 10 DPO
0xDC81
LE 11 PKP
0xDC82
LE 11 OP
0xDC84
LE 11 DPO
0xDCC1
LE 12 PKP
0xDCC2
LE 12 OP
0xDCC4
LE 12 DPO
0xDD01
LE 13 PKP
0xDD02
LE 13 OP
0xDD04
LE 13 DPO
0xDD41
LE 14 PKP
0xDD42
LE 14 OP
0xDD44
LE 14 DPO
0xDD81
LE 15 PKP
0xDD82
LE 15 OP
0xDD84
LE 15 DPO
0xDDC1
LE 16 PKP
0xDDC2
LE 16 OP
0xDDC4
LE 16 DPO
0xE002
Any Block
0xE042
Therm O/L Blck
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S1 RELAY SETUP
Code
SR3 IEC 61850 GOOSE
details
Type
Definition
0xE082
Gnd Fault BLK
0xE0C2
Accel BLK
0xE142
UndrPower BLK
0xE182
Output Relay 1 BLK
0xE1C2
Output Relay 2 BLK
0xE202
Mech Jam BLK
0xE242
U/CURR BLK
0xE282
UNBAL BLK
0xE2C2
RTD1 BLK OP
0xE302
RTD2 BLK OP
0xE342
RTD3 BLK OP
0xE382
RTD4 BLK OP
0xE3C2
RTD5 BLK OP
0xE402
RTD6 BLK OP
0xE442
RTDTrouble BLK OP
0xE6C2
RTD7 BLK OP
0xE702
RTD8 BLK OP
0xE742
RTD9 BLK OP
0xE782
RTD10 BLK OP
0xE7C2
RTD11 BLK OP
0xE802
RTD12 BLK OP
0xF042
Ntrl IOC1 Block
0xF342
NTRL DIR Rev Block
0xF3C2
NegSeq OV Block
0xF442
Ph OV1 Block
0xF482
Ph UV1 Block
0xF542
UndrFreq1 Block
0xF582
UndrFreq2 Block
0xF5C2
OverFreq1 Block
0xF602
OverFreq2 Block
0xF882
Ph OV2 Block
0xF8C2
Ph UV2 Block
0xF902
S/C BLK
0xF942
SPD2 S/C BLK
0xF982
SPD2 U/C OP
The 339 firmware supports IEC61850 GOOSE communications.
Portions of the IEC61850 standard not pertaining to GOOSE, are not implemented in the
339 relay.
The 339 relay does not support:
•
Manufacturing Message Specification (MMS) standard ISO/IEC 9506
•
the mapping of analogue values to data points in data sets in either the transmit or
receive direction
•
a file system to maintain SCL, ICD or CID files, for IEC61850 GOOSE. As such the
implementation stores GOOSE configuration using MODBUS set points.
Configuration of transmission and reception settings for the GOOSE feature are performed
using EnerVista SR3 Setup Software.
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6–43
S1 RELAY SETUP
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
The 339 firmware accepts GOOSE messages from UR, F650 and UR Plus. The
interoperability with other manufacturers will be guaranteed in almost all cases, by
implementing the reception side with nested structures (one level of nesting) and all the
standard data types.
GOOSE settings changes will take effect only after the 339 relay is re-booted. One setting is
available to Enable/Disable both Transmission and Reception. It is possible to change
these settings from the Front Panel of the relay.
Figure 6-10: EnerVista SR3 GOOSE General Settings
Event recorder
The Event Recorder runs continuously, capturing and storing the last 256 events. All events
are stored in a non-volatile memory where the information is maintained for up to 3 days
in case of lost relay control power.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S1 RELAY SETUP > EVENT RECORDER
PICKUP EVENTS
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
When set to “Enabled”, the event recorder records the events that occur when a
protection element picks up.
DROPOUT EVENTS
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
When set to “Enabled” the event recorder records the dropout state of a protection
element.
6–44
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S1 RELAY SETUP
TRIP EVENTS
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
The trip events include all programmed relay elements set to trip the breaker. The text
“TRIP” followed by the name of the operated element is recorded.
ALARM EVENTS
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
These events include the elements programmed as an “ALARM” or “LATCHED ALARM”
function, which detect power system conditions considered as an alarm.
CONTROL EVENTS
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
If set to “Enabled”, the event recorder records events caused by the performance of the
programmed control elements.
CONTACT INPUTS
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
When set to “Enabled”, the event recorder will record the event, when a contact input
changes its state.
LOGIC ELEMENT
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
When set to “Enabled”, the event recorder records the events, which occur upon state
change of any programmed logic element.
VIRTUAL INPUTS
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
When set to “Enabled”, the event recorder records the events, which occur upon state
changes of any virtual input.
REMOTE INPUTS
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Enabled
When set to “Enabled”, the event recorder records the events, which occur upon state
change of any programmed remote input.
Transient recorder
The Transient Recorder contains waveforms captured at the same sampling rate as the
other relay data at the point of trigger. By default, data is captured for the analog current
and voltage inputs - Ia, Ib, Ic, Ig, Va, Vb, Vc, and Vx when relay is ordered with CTs and VTs,
or only analog current inputs Ia, Ib, Ic, and Ig when relay is ordered without VTs. Triggering
of the transient recorder occurs, when an event is detected, causing a pickup, trip, dropout,
or alarm, any one of which has been "Enabled" to activate the trigger. The transient
recorder trigger may also be activated when any of the selected trigger inputs 1 to 3 is
detected as having “On” status.
The following path is available using the keypad. For instructions on how to use the
keypad, please refer to Chapter 3 - Working with the Keypad.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S1 RELAY SETUP > TRANSIENT RECDR
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6–45
S1 RELAY SETUP
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
BUFFER SETUP
Range: 1 x 192, 3 x 64, 6 x 32
Default: 1 x 192
Each selection from the range is expressed by two numbers; the first identifies the
number of records, whereas the second stands for the number of cycles per record.
TRIGGER MODE
Range: Overwrite, Protected
Default: Overwrite
When the “Overwrite” setting is selected, the new records overwrite the old ones,
meaning the relay will always keep the newest records. In “Protected” mode, the relay
will keep the number of records corresponding to the selected number, only without
overwriting.
TRIGGER POSITION
Range: 0 to 100% in steps of 1%
Default: 20%
This setting indicates the location of the trigger with respect to the selected length of
record. For example at 20% selected trigger position, the length of each record will be
split on 20% pre-trigger data, and 80% post-trigger data.
TRIGGER ON PKP
Range: Off, On
Default: Off
Selection of “Yes” setting enables triggering for the recorder upon Pickup condition
detected from any protection or control element.
TRIGGER ON DPO
Range: Off, On
Default: Off
Selection of “Yes” setting enables triggering for the recorder upon a Dropout condition
detected from any protection or control element.
TRIGGER ON TRIP
Range: Off, On
Default: Off
Selection of “Yes” setting enables triggering for the recorder upon Trip condition
detected from any protection or control element.
TRIGGER ON ALARM
Range: Off, On
Default: Off
Selection of “Yes” setting enables triggering for the recorder upon Alarm condition
detected from any protection or control element.
TRIGGER ON INPUT 1 to 3
Range: Off, Contact Input 1 to 10, Virtual Input 1 to 32, Remote Input 1 to 32, Logic
Element 1 to 16
Default: Off
Selection of input or logic element from the settings range enables triggering input for
the recorder. A record will be triggered if the status of the selected input changes to “On”.
Datalogger
The following setpoints are available:
6–46
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S1 RELAY SETUP
SAMPLE RATE
Range: 1 cycle, 1 second, 1 minute, 1 hour
Default: 1 second
Determines how often data is stored in the data log.
CONTINUOUS MODE
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
Determines whether or not the trigger data is overwritten with new data. Enabled will
overwrite the previous trigger data with new trigger data. When Disabled, the data log
will run until filled with 256 samples. Continuous Mode should be used when the data is
stored externally by a polling system. The sample rate should be chosen to match the
poll rate of the external program.
TRIGGER POSITION
Range: 0 to 100% steps of 1%
Default: 25%
Percentage of the sample buffer used for pretrigger samples.
TRIGGER SOURCE
Range: Command, Logic Element 1 to 8, Any Trip Pickup, Any Trip, Any Trip Dropout, Any
Alarm Pickup, Any Alarm, Any Alarm Dropout, Any Inhibit
Default: Command
Selects a trigger source. Command is always active. Logic Elements can be used to
create combinations of trigger sources.
CHANNEL 1 SOURCE
Range: Disabled, Phase A Current, Phase B Current, Phase C Current, Average Phase
Current, Motor Load, Current Unbalance, Ground Current, System Frequency, Vab, Vbc,
Vca, Van, Vbn, Vcn, Power Factor, Real Power (kW), Reactive Power (kvar), Apparent Power
(kVA), Positive Watthours, Positive Varhours, Hottest Stator RTD, Thermal Capacity Used,
RTD #1, RTD #2, RTD #3, RTD #4, RTD #5, RTD #6, RTD #7, RTD #8, RTD #9, RTD #10, RTD
#11, RTD #12
Default: Disabled
Selects the data to be stored for each sample of the data log channel.
Sources and Defaults for Channels 2 to 10 are the same as those for Channel 1.
NOTE:
NOTE
Front panel
The user can send a message to the display, that will override any normal message by
sending text through Modbus. Refer to the 339 Feeder Protection System Communications
Guide for register details.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S1 RELAY SETUP > FRONT PANEL
FLASH MESSAGE TIME
Range: 1 s to 65535 s
Default: 5 s
Flash messages are status, warning, error, or information messages displayed for
several seconds in response to certain key presses during setting programming. These
messages override any normal messages. The duration of a flash message on the
display can be changed to accommodate different reading rates.
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6–47
S1 RELAY SETUP
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
MESSAGE TIMEOUT
Range: 1 s to 65535 s
Default: 30 s
If the keypad is inactive for a period of time, the relay automatically reverts to a default
message. The inactivity time is modified via this setting to ensure messages remain on
the screen long enough during programming or reading of actual values.
SCREEN SAVER
Range: Off, 1 min to 10000 min
Default: Off
The life of the LCD backlight can be prolonged by enabling the Screen Saver mode.
If the keypad is inactive for the selected period of time, the relay automatically shuts off
the LCD screen. Any activity (keypress, alarm, trip, or target message) will restore screen
messages.
LED STOPPED COLOR
Range: None, Red, Green, Orange
Default: Red
Allows the user to select the color of the LED indicator for Motor Stopped status.
LED STARTING COLOR
Range: None, Red, Green, Orange
Default: Orange
Allows the user to select the color of the LED indicator for Motor Starting status.
LED RUNNING COLOR
Range: None, Red, Green, Orange
Default: Green
Allows the user to select the color of the LED indicator for Motor Running status.
Installation
PATH: SETPOINTS > S1 RELAY SETUP > INSTALLATION
RELAY NAME
Range: Motor Name, Alpha-numeric (18 characters)
Default: Motor Name
The RELAY NAME setting allows the user to uniquely identify a relay. This name will
appear on generated reports. This name is also used to identify specific devices which
are engaged in automatically sending/receiving data over the communications channel.
RELAY STATUS
Range: Not Ready, Ready
Default: Not Ready
Allows the user to activate/deactivate the relay. The relay is not operational when set to
"Not Ready."
VALIDATE RMIO
Range: Yes, No
Default: No
The 339 relay allows remote metering and programming for up to 12 RTDs via a
.CANBUS-based RMIO module. Refer to Chapter 2 - RMIO Installation for details. The
339 will automatically detect the installed RMIO cards when the relay is booted, at which
time the user must send a YES command to validate the RMIO. Otherwise the 339 relay
will issue a RMIO MISMATCH self-test error. It is recommended to power cycle the
339 after validating the RMIO module.
6–48
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S1 RELAY SETUP
Preset statistics
These commands can be used to preset the motor statistic data on new installations or
existing installations where new equipment has been installed.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S1 RELAY SETUP > PRESET STATISTICS
SET MOTOR STARTS
Range: 0 to 50000 in steps of 1
Default: 0
This command presets the number of motor starts.
SET EMERG RESTARTS
Range: 0 to 50000 in steps of 1
Default: 0
This command presets the number of motor emergency restarts.
SET RUNNING HOURS
Range: 0 to 65535 in steps of 1
Default: 0
This command presets the value of motor running hours.
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6–49
S2 SYSTEM SETUP
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S2 System Setup
S2 SYSTEM SETUP
CURRENT SENSING
S2 CURRENT SENSING
VOLTAGE SENSING
PHASE CT PRIMARY
POWER SYSTEM
‫ۂ‬
‫ۂ‬
PHASE CT SECONDARY
MOTOR
GROUND CT TYPE
SWITCHING DEVICE
FLEXCURVE A
S2 VOLTAGE SENSING
FLEXCURVE B
VT CONNECTION
VFD
‫ۂ‬
VT SECONDARY
VT RATIO
S2 POWER SYSTEM
NOMINAL FREQUENCY
‫ۂ‬
SYSTEM ROTATION
S2 MOTOR
MOTOR FLA
‫ۂ‬
MOTOR RATED VOLT
MOTOR RATED POWER
ENABLE 2-SPD MOTOR
HIGH SPEED PH PRIM
HIGH SPEED FLA
HIGH SPD RATED PWR
S2 VFD
HIGH SPEED SWITCH
VFD FUNCTION
LOW SPEED SWITCH
‫ۂ‬
VFD BYPASS SWITCH
S2 SWITCHING DEVICE
Program using
896765A3.cdr
EnerVista Software
SWITCHING DEVICE
‫ۂ‬
52a CONTACT
Program using
52b CONTACT
EnerVista Software
Current sensing
The CT secondary value of 1 or 5 A must be specified at the time of order so that the proper
hardware is installed.
NOTE:
NOTE
The setting GROUND CT PRIMARY is seen only if the GROUND CT TYPE is set to “1A
Secondary” or “5A Secondary”.
NOTE:
NOTE
PATH: SETPOINTS > S2 SYSTEM SETUP > CURRENT SENSING
6–50
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S2 SYSTEM SETUP
PHASE CT PRIMARY
Range: 10 to 1500 A in steps of 1 A
Default: 100 A
The phase CT should be chosen so that the FLA is no less than 50% of the rated phase CT
primary. Ideally, the phase CT primary should be chosen so that the FLA is 100% of the
phase CT primary or slightly less; never more.
PHASE CT SECONDARY
Range: 1 A or 5 A
Default: 5 A
Configurable 1 A or 5 A secondary, available with Phase Current option ‘P0’ installed.
Enter the rated phase CT secondary current of the three-phase current transformers.
GROUND CT TYPE
Range: 50:0.025, 1A Secondary, 5A Secondary, None
Default: 50:0.025
Depending on this setting, the current measured by the Ground Fault Protection element
can be either the Core Balance CT current or the fourth CT input current.
The 339 has an isolating transformer with 1A or 5A Ground CT terminals and CBCT
50:0.025 terminals. Only one ground CT input tap should be used on a given unit. There
are no internal ground connections on the ground current inputs.
For high-resistance grounded systems, sensitive ground current detection is possible if
the Core Balance CT (CBCT) 50:0.025 is used. For example, in mining applications where
earth leakage current must be measured for personnel safety, primary ground current
as low as 0.25A may be detected with the GE Multilin 50:0.025 CT. For these applications,
select the setting GROUND CT TYPE as “50:0.025”.
For solid or low-resistance grounded systems where fault currents may be quite large,
ground sensing is possible with a zero-sequence CT or residually connected phase CTs
as shown in the figure below. For these applications, select the setting GROUND CT TYPE
as “1A secondary” or “5A secondary”. If the connection is residual, the Ground CT
secondary and primary values should be set the same as those of the Phase CT. If
however, the connection is zero-sequence CT, the Ground CT secondary and primary
values must be entered as per the selected CT. The Ground CT should be selected such
that the potential fault current does not exceed 20 times the primary rating. When
relaying class CTs are purchased, this precaution will ensure that the Ground CT does not
saturate under fault conditions.
GROUND CT PRIMARY
Range: 30 TO 1500 A in steps of 1 A
Default: 100 A
Set the Ground CT primary when the setting GROUND CT TYPE is selected as “1A
secondary” or “5A secondary”.
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6–51
S2 SYSTEM SETUP
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
PHASE A CT
A
PHASE B CT
B
PHASE C CT
C
E5
D5
E6
D6
E7
D7
E8
D8
1A/5A COM 1A/5A COM 1A/5A COM 1A/5A COM
PHASE A
PHASE B
PHASE C
GROUND
CURRENT INPUTS
896827.cdr
Voltage sensing
PATH: SETPOINTS > S2 SYSTEM SETUP > VOLTAGE SENSING
VT CONNECTION
Range: Wye, Delta
Default: Wye
The 339 provides three-phase VT inputs. Select “Wye” connection, if phase-neutral
voltages are wired to the relay VT terminals. Select “Delta” connection, if phase-phase
voltages from Delta VT are connected to the three-phase VT terminals. See the VT
connections per the Typical Wiring Diagram in Chapter 2.
VT SECONDARY
Range: 50 V to 240 V
Default: 120 V
This setting defines the voltage across the VT secondary winding when nominal voltage
is applied to the primary. On a source of 13.8kV line-line voltage, with a VT ratio of
14400:120 V delta connection, the voltage to be entered is “115 V”. For a Wye
connection, the voltage to be entered is 115/ √3 = 66 V.
VT RATIO
Range: 1:1 to 300:1
Default: 1:1
This setting defines the VT primary to secondary turns ratio. For a 14400: 120 VT, the
entry would be “120:1” (14400/120 = 120).
Power system
PATH: SETPOINTS > S2 SYSTEM SETUP > POWER SYSTEM
6–52
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S2 SYSTEM SETUP
NOMINAL FREQUENCY
Range: 60 Hz, 50 Hz
Default: 60 Hz
Enter the nominal power system frequency here. This value is used as a default to set
theoptimal digital sampling rate.
SYSTEM ROTATION
Range: ABC, ACB,
Default: ABC
Enter the phase sequence of the power system.
Motor
MOTOR FLA
Range: 15.0 to 1500.0 A in steps of 0.1 A
Default: 100 A
This setting is used to specify the Full Load Amp for normal (Low) Speed.
MOTOR RATED VOLT
Range: 100 to 20000 VAC in steps of 1 V
Default: 3000 V
This setting is used to specify the Rated Voltage of the motor.
MOTOR RATED POWER
Range: 100 to 10000 kW in steps of 1 kW
Default: 3000 kW
This setting is used to specify the Rated Power of the motor at normal (Low) speed.
ENABLE 2-SPD MOTOR
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
This setting is used to enable two-speed motor functionality. When this setting is
selected as Disabled, all two-speed motor functionalities will be disabled, and all other
two-speed motor related settings are hidden.
HI SPEED PRIM
30 to 1500 A in steps of 1 A
Default: 100 A
This setting is used to specify the Phase CT primary for High Speed.
HIGH SPEED FLA
Range: 15.0 to 1500.0 A in steps of 0.1 A
Default: 100.0 A
This setting is used to specify the Full Load Amp for High Speed.
HIGH SPEED RATED PWR
Range: 100 to 10000 kW in steps of 1 kW
Default: 3000 kW
This setting is used to specify the rated power for High Speed.
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6–53
S2 SYSTEM SETUP
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
HIGH SPEED SWITCH
Range: Off, Contact Input 1 to 10, Virtual Input 1 through 32, Logic element 1 through 16,
Remote Input 1 to 32
Default: Off
For use in two speed motor applications only, to monitor the high speed contactor
position. The status of this switch is used by the relay to select between the normal
settings used for low speed operation and the high speed settings, and to ensure that in
high speed operation the relay maintains running status when current draw is very low.
Use a form-a (normally open) auxiliary contact of the high speed (speed 2) contactor.
LOW SPEED SWITCH
Range: Off, Contact Input 1 to 10, Virtual Input 1 through 32, Logic element 1 through 16,
Remote Input 1 to 32
Default: Off
For use in two speed motor applications only, to monitor the low speed contactor
position. The status of this switch is used by the relay to ensure that in low speed
operation the relay maintains running status when current draw is very low. Use a forma (normally open) auxiliary contact of the low speed (speed 1) contactor.
Switching device
52a CONTACT
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
The 52a contact function is permanently assigned to contact input number 1. It in singlespeed applications, when enabled, closure of this contact informs the relay that the
motor is connected to the line (online) and therefore the motor is running. It is
recommended that this contact be connected to a form-a (normally open) auxiliary
contact of the breaker/contactor, to ensure the relay maintains running status when
motor current draw is very low. The 52b contact (see below) has the same function, and
is for use when only a form-b (normally closed) auxiliary contact is available.
In two-speed applications, this contact is intended for monitoring the circuit breaker
where there is a circuit breaker as well as a high speed contactor and a low speed
contactor. When enabled and closed, and when one of the contactors is closed, the relay
maintains running status even when the motor current is very small.
52b CONTACT
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
The 52b contact function is permanently assigned to contact input 2. It performs the
same function as the 52a contact, but with a form-b (normally closed) rather than a
form-a (normally) auxiliary contact of the breaker/contactor.
If both 52a contact and 52b contact are enabled, the relay assumes the motor online if
the 52a contact is closed and the 52b contact is open.
FlexCurves
There are two user-programmable FlexCurves™ available with the 339 system, labeled A
and B.
For details on FlexCurves please refer to S3 Protection/Thermal Protection in this manual.
The Standard Curve and Flexcurves A and B are available for programming under
EnerVista SR3 Setup software.
NOTE:
NOTE
6–54
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S2 SYSTEM SETUP
The following Flexcurve A diagram: Example user-programmed curve shows a userprogrammed IEC Short Inverse curve. The curve in this example was obtained by choosing
the IEC Short Inverse option from the Select Curve setting in the FlexCurve A screen. The
resulting curve can be modified if desired by moving the graph plot points.
Figure 6-11: Example user-programmed curve
VFD
Some Variable Frequency Drives (VFDs), such as pulse width modulated drives, can
generate significant distortion in voltage and introduce unwanted harmonics. However,
distortion due to these harmonics is not as significant in the current as it is in the voltage.
In many cases the functionality of various 339 protection elements can adapt to VFD
motor applications, depending on the system configuration.
The following figure shows two typical VFD motor applications. Possible system
configurations are:
•
motor starts and runs through the VFD
•
motor starts through the VFD, but runs through the bypass switch
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6–55
S2 SYSTEM SETUP
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
Figure 6-12: Typical VFD motor applications with and without a bypass switch
The VFD FUNCTION setting must be enabled in order to ensure proper performance of the
339 relay for motor applications with VFD. In motor applications where the VFD can be
bypassed, status of the bypass switch must be configured as a selected input under
setpoint BYPASS SWITCH.
If FUNCTION is "Enabled" and the "VFD Bypassed" operand is not asserted (i.e. BYPASS
SWITCH is "Open") then the 339 algorithms adopt the following changes:
•
The frequency source will be software calculated from the phase A current. For the
case where this current is not available or system frequency cannot be measured
from the AC signal, then the power system Nominal Frequency is used as a default. All
elements will function properly for frequency range of 40-70 Hz.
•
The frequency elements are inhibited from operating unless the phase A current is
above 10% of nominal. The voltage and power elements work properly if the voltage
waveform is approximately sinusoidal. An unfiltered voltage waveform from a pulse
width modulated drive cannot be measured accurately and it is advisable to block the
voltage elements in this case.
•
The VFD NOT BYPASSED operand is asserted, which could be used to generate a logic
element and block the voltage elements via Block setting of the elements.
•
The voltage and current angles are not measured accurately off the nominal
frequency. Thus neutral directional element is automatically blocked in VFD mode. The
current waveform is approximately sinusoidal and can be measured accurately. All
current elements will function properly with the exception of the neutral directional
element.
•
A filtering algorithm increases the trip and alarm times for the protection elements by
up to 270 ms when the level is close to the threshold. If the level exceeds the threshold
by a significant amount, trip and alarm times will decrease until they match the
programmed delay. The exceptions to this increased time are the short circuit ,
neutral, and ground fault, which continue to trip as per specification.
If FUNCTION is disabled, or is enabled but the "VFD Bypassed" operand is asserted (i.e.
BYPASS SWITCH is "Closed") then the frequency source is switched from current to voltage,
all protection elements and metering work as normal, and the VFD Not Bypassed operand
is de-asserted.
6–56
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S3 PROTECTION
Voltage inputs to the 339 motor protection relay are normally measured at the busbar side
of the VFD where they are substantially sinusoidal. Since the output phase voltages from a
VFD are not sinusoidal and are distorted due to harmonics generated by the VFD, blocking
the voltage elements via the Block setting using the “VFD Not Bypassed” operand is
recommended. On the other hand, when voltages are measured at the motor side of the
VFD, voltages at the motor terminals and relay inputs are same, thus blocking the voltage
elements is not required. In addition, significant distortion in the voltage waveforms is not
always the case and really depends on the VFD type. If the input voltages are substantially
sinusoidal, which can be verified from 339 metering, oscillography, and the data logger,
then blocking the voltage elements is not required.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S2 SYSTEM SETUP > VFD
FUNCTION
Range: Disable, Enabled
Default: Disabled
This setting enables VFD support.
BYPASS SWITCH
Range: Off, Contact Input 1 to 10, Virtual Input 1 to 32, Remote Input 1 to 32, Logic
Element 1 to 16
Default: Off
This setting defines the source used to determine if the motor is powered by the VFD or
directly from the AC source through the bypass switch. The "VFD Bypassed" operand will
be asserted when VFD is bypassed i.e. motor is directly powered by the AC system or the
utility. This operand can be used to generate a Logic Element for blocking voltage based
elements via the Block setting if this operand is not asserted i.e. VFD is not bypassed.
Blocking the voltage based elements via the Block setting of the desired elements is highly
recommended if "VFD Not Bypassed" is asserted
NOTE:
NOTE
S3 Protection
339 protection functions include:
•
Thermal Protection
•
Short Circuit
•
Ground Fault
•
Mechanical Jam
•
Undercurrent
•
Current Unbalance
•
Load Increase
•
Neutral IOC
•
Neutral Directional OC
•
RTD Protection
•
Phase Undervoltage
•
Phase Overvoltage
•
Overfrequency
•
Underfrequency
•
Underpower
•
Voltage Phase Reversal
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6–57
S3 PROTECTION
6–58
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
•
VT Fuse Fail
•
Negative Sequence Overvoltage
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S3 PROTECTION
Figure 6-13: Main Protection menu - 1 of 2
S3 PROTECTION
THERMAL PROTECTION
S3 THERMAL PROTECTION
SHORT CIRCUIT
THERMAL O/L FUNC
▼
MECHANICAL JAM
▼
START PROTECTION
UNDERCURRENT
CURRENT UNBAL
LOAD INCR ALARM
GROUND FAULT
NEUTRAL IOC1
NEUTRAL DIR OC
PHASE UV 1
PHASE UV 2
PHASE OV 1
PHASE OV 2
UNDERFREQUENCY1
UNDERFREQUENCY2
OVERFREQUENCY1
OVERFREQUENCY2
UNDERPOWER
NEGATIVE SEQ OV
PHASE REVERSAL
VT FUSE FAILURE
ACCELERATION
RTD PROTECTION
TWO SPEED MOTOR
NTRL DIR
LOCKED ROTOR CURR
S3 CURRENT UNBAL
SAFE STALL T COLD
UNBAL ALARM FUNC
CURVE MULTIPLIER
▼
THERMAL O/L PKP
UNBAL ALARM PKP
UNBALANCE K FACTOR
UNBAL ALARM DELAY
COOL TIME RUNNING
UNBAL TRIP FUNC
COOL TIME STOPPED
UNBAL TRIP PKP
HOT/COLD RATIO
UNBAL TRIP DELAY
RTD BIAS FUNC
OUTPUT RELAY 4
RTD BIAS MINIMUM
...
RTD BIAS CENTER
BLOCK 3
RTD BIAS MAXIMUM
THERMAL ALARM FUNC
S3 LOAD INCR ALARM
THERMAL ALARM PKP
LOAD INCR FUNC
AUTO RST TCU ≤15%
▼
OUTPUT RELAY 4
LOAD INCR PKP
...
LOAD INCR DELAY
BLOCK 3
OUTPUT RELAY 4
...
BLOCK 3
S3 SHORT CIRCUIT
S3 GROUND FAULT
SHORT CIRCUIT FUNC
▼
GND ALARM FUNC
▼
SHORT CIRCUIT PKP
GND ALARM PKP
SHORT CIRCUIT DELAY
GND ALARM ON RUN
OUTPUT RELAY 4
GND ALARM ON START
...
GND TRIP FUNC
BLOCK 3
GND TRIP PKP
GND TRIP ON RUN
GND TRIP ON START
OUTPUT RELAY 4
...
S3 MECHANICAL JAM
MECH JAM FUNC
▼
MECH JAM PKP
BLOCK 3
MECH JAM DELAY
OUTPUT RELAY 4
S3 NEUTRAL IOC1
...
NTRL IOC1 FUNCTION
BLOCK 3
▼
NTRL IOC1 PKP
NTRL IOC1 DELAY
OUTPUT RELAY 4
...
S3 UNDERCURRENT
U/CURR ALARM FUNC
▼
OUTPUT RELAY 6
BLK U/C ON START
BLOCK 1
U/CURR ALARM PKP
BLOCK 2
U/CURR ALARM DELAY
BLOCK 3
U/CURR TRIP FUNC
U/CURR TRIP PKP
S3 NTRL DIRECTIONAL
NTRL DIR FUNCTION
▼
NTRL DIR POLARIZING
NTRL DIR MTA
MIN POL VOLTAGE
OUTPUT RELAY 3
...
OUTPUT RELAY 6
BLOCK 1
BLOCK 2
BLOCK 3
U/CURR TRIP DELAY
896758A2. cdr
OUTPUT RELAY 4
...
BLOCK 3
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6–59
S3 PROTECTION
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
Figure 6-14: Main Protection menu - 2 of 2
S3 PROTECTION
THERMAL PROTECTION
SHORT CIRCUIT
MECHANICAL JAM
▼
UNDERCURRENT
S3 UNDERPOWER
U/POWER ALARM FUNC
▼
CURRENT UNBAL
BLK U/P ON START
LOAD INCR ALARM
U/POWER ALARM PKP
GROUND FAULT
U/POWER ALARM DLY
NEUTRAL IOC
U/POWER TRIP FUNC
NEUTRAL DIR OC
U/POWER TRIP PKP
PHASE UV
U/POWER TRIP DLY
PHASE OV
OUTPUT RELAY 4
UNDERFREQUENCY
...
OVERFREQUENCY
BLOCK 3
S3 PHASE UV
PH UV FUNC
▼
PH UV PKP
PH UV CURVE
PH UV DELAY
PH UV PHASES
PH UV MIN VOLTAGE
OUTPUT RELAY 4
...
BLOCK 3
UNDERPOWER
NEGATIVE SEQ OV
S3 NEG SEQ OV
PHASE REVERSAL
VT FUSE FAILURE
NEG SEQ OV FUNCTN
▼
ACCELERATION
NEG SEQ OV PKP
RTD PROTECTION
NEG SEQ OV DELAY
TWO SPEED MOTOR
OUTPUT RELAY 4
NTRL DIR
...
OUTPUT RELAY 6
BLOCK 1
S3 PHASE OV
PH OV FUNCTION
S3 NTRL DIRECTIONAL
NTRL DIR FUNCTION
PH OV PKP
PHASE REVERSAL
▼
NTRL DIR MTA
S3 VT FUSE FAIL
VT FUSE FAIL
MIN POL VOLTAGE
OUTPUT RELAY 4
...
BLOCK 3
....
S3 ACCELERATION TIME
ACCEL TIME FUNC
OUTPUT RELAY 6
BLOCK 1
S3 UNDERFREQUENCY
▼
▼
BLOCK 2
ACCELERATION TIMER
BLOCK 3
OUTPUT RELAY 4
...
BLOCK 3
S3 RTD PROTECTION
RTD #1
RTD #2
RTD #3
▼
RTD #4
...
RTD #12
RTD TROUBLE ALARM
RTD #1 ALARM
RTD #1 ALARM TEMP
RTD #1 TRIP
RTD #1 TRIP TEMP
RTD #1 TRIP VOTING
OUTPUT RELAY 4
BLOCK 3
S3 RTD TROUBLE ALARM
RTD TROUBLE ALARM
▼
OUTPUT RELAY 4
OUTPUT RELAY 5
OUTPUT RELAY 6
UNDRFREQ PKP
S3 HIGH SPEED THERMAL
CURVE MULTIPLIER
MIN VOLTAGE
OUTPUT RELAY 4
...
OUTPUT RELAY 4
RTD #1 NAME
PH OV PHASES
UNDRFREQ DELAY
NTRL DIR POLARZNG
▼
PH OV DELAY
UNDRFREQ FUNC
S3 PHASE REVERSAL
RTD #1 APPLICATION
....
▼
BLOCK 2
BLOCK 3
S3 RTD #1
OUTPUT RELAY 6
BLOCK 1
BLOCK 2
BLOCK 3
S3 OVERFREQUENCY
OVERFREQ FUNC
S3 HIGH SPEED S/C
S/ C FUNC
▼
S/C PKP
S/C DELAY
...
BLOCK 3
▼
OVERFREQ PKP
OVERFREQ DELAY
OUTPUT RELAY 4
S3 HIGH SPEED ACCEL T
ACCEL T ON STOPPED
▼
ACCEL T ON LOW SPD
...
OUTPUT RELAY 6
BLOCK 1
BLOCK 2
BLOCK 3
S3 HIGH SPEED U/C
U/CURR ALARM FUNC
▼
BLK U/C ON START
U/CURR ALARM PKP
S3 TWO SPEED MOTOR
896759A2. cdr
U/CURR TRIP FUNC
HIGH SPEED S/C
U/CURR TRIP PKP
HIGH SPEED ACCEL T
U/CURR TRIP DELAY
▼
HIGH SPEED U/CURR
6–60
U/CURR ALARM DELAY
HIGH SPEED THERMAL
...
BLOCK 3
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S3 PROTECTION
Thermal Model
The primary protective function of the 339 motor relay is motor thermal protection.
The 339 thermal protection consists of seven key elements:
•
Start Protection - accounts for the rapid heating that occurs during starting
•
Unbalance Current Biasing - accounts for negative sequence heating
•
Hot/Cold Biasing - accounts for normal temperature rise
•
RTD Biasing - accounts for ambient variation and cooling problems
•
Cooling Rate - accounts for heat dissipation
•
Thermal Protection Reset - controls recovery from thermal trips/lockouts.
Each of these elements is described in detail in the sections that follow.
Total Capacity Used
register (TCU)
339 thermal protection integrates stator and rotor heating into one model. The rate of
motor heating is gauged primarily by measuring the terminal currents. The present value
of the accumulated motor heating is maintained in the Thermal Capacity Used actual
value register.
While the motor’s equivalent current is greater than the thermal overload pickup setting,
the TCU register is updated every 3 cycles using the following equation:
Eq. 1
where:
Time to Trip = Thermal Overload Trip Time in seconds, calculated from the thermal
overload curve when running, or from the start protection when starting. The thermal
overload curve and the start protection are described in the corresponding sections below.
Tsystem = the period in seconds corresponding to the nominal power system frequency.
The 339 thermal protection addresses the two distinct parts of the thermal limit curve: the
motor starting limit, and the running limit. The start protection determines Time to Trip
during motor starting, and the thermal overload curve determines Time to Trip during
motor running.
When the motor is in overload, the motor’s temperature and the Thermal Capacity Used
will be rising. When the thermal capacity used reaches 100%, a trip will occur. The thermal
overload curve and start protection should always be set slightly lower than the thermal
limits provided by the manufacturer. This will ensure that the motor is tripped before the
thermal limit is reached.
When the motor is stopped and is cooling to ambient, the Thermal Capacity Used decays
to zero. If the motor is running normally, the motor temperature will eventually stabilize at
some steady state temperature, and the Thermal Capacity Used moves up or down to
some corresponding intermediate value TCUSS, which accounts for the reduced amount of
thermal capacity left to accommodate transient overloads. While the motor’s equivalent
current is less than the thermal overload pickup setting, the TCU register is updated every 3
cycles using the following equation:
Eq. 2
where:
TCUSS = Steady state TCU corresponding to the running terminal current; zero when
stopped, or when running as described in the hot/cold biasing section below.
Cooling Time Constant = The value of the Cool Time Running setting when running, or the
value of the Cool Time Stopped setting when stopped, expressed in seconds.
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6–61
S3 PROTECTION
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
Tsystem = the period in seconds corresponding to the nominal power system frequency
The TCU register value can also be forced to at least equal the RTD bias value as described
in the RTD Biasing section below.
In the event of a loss of control power to the relay, the thermal capacity will decay for the
duration of the loss of control power based on the stopped motor cooling rate.
Eq. 3
Start protection
If enabled, Start Protection is used to determine the Time to Trip value while the motor
status is "starting," using the formula:
Eq. 4
where:
Ieq is the equivalent motor heating current in per-unit on an FLA base, which will be
discussed in the unbalance biasing section.
ILR is the Locked rotor current in per-unit on an FLA base.
tLRCold is the Safe Stall Time Cold in seconds.
In some applications where the characteristics of the starting thermal damage curve
(locked rotor) and the running thermal damage curves fit together very smoothly, the
thermal overload curve can in these cases provide both starting and running protection, so
start protection is not required. Therefore, the start protection can be disabled or enabled
as required. When start protection is disabled, the thermal overload curve determines time
to trip during both starting and running.
The start protection is disabled by setting setpoint START PROTECTION to OFF or to any
assignable contact input that is off when start protection is not required.
Thermal overload
curves
The thermal overload curves can be either standard or customized. The standard overload
curves are a series of 15 curves with a common curve shape based on typical motor
thermal limit curves. The customized curve (FlexCurve) is used to more closely tailor motor
protection to the thermal limits so the motor may be started successfully and used to its
full potential without compromising protection.
THERMAL OVERLOAD STANDARD CURVE
If the motor starting times are well within the safe stall times, it is recommended that the
339 standard overload curve be used. The standard overload curves are a series of 15
curves, each a multiple from 1 to 15 of a common curve shape based on typical motor
thermal limit curves. The curve gives a Time to Trip for the equivalent motor heating
current, and incorporates hot/cold biasing, and unbalance biasing.
The standard curve is defined by the following equation, which is graphed and tabulated
below. The curve reflects the fact that under overload conditions, heating largely swamps
cooling, and that the heating is due primarily to resistive losses in the stator and rotor
windings, said losses being proportional to the square of the current.
Eq. 5
where:
Time to Trip is the amount of time, in seconds, the relay will take to trip, given that the
motor starts cold and the current is constant.
Curve Multiplier is the value of the Curve Multiplier setpoint.
6–62
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S3 PROTECTION
Ieq is the equivalent motor heating current per-unit on an FLA base. However, the value of
Ieq is limited in this equation, to 8.0, in order to prevent the overload from acting as an
instantaneous element, and responding to short circuits.
For example, a motor with a stall current (also known as locked rotor current) of 8 times its
FLA, with a Curve Multiplier of 7, if stalled from a cold state, would trip in:
Eq. 6
This would respect a Safe Stall Time Cold of 10 seconds.
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6–63
S3 PROTECTION
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
Figure 6-15: Standard Overload Curve Trip Times
STANDARD MOTOR CURVES
8 x FLA
100000
Time To Trip in Seconds
10000
1000
100
x15
10
x1
1.00
0.10
1.00
10
896804A1.CDR
100
Multiples of FLA
6–64
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S3 PROTECTION
Table 6-1: Standard overload curve trip times (in seconds)
MOTOR STANDARD CURVE MULTIPLIERS
CURRE
×1 ×2 ×3 ×4 ×5 ×6
NT
(× FLA)
×7
×8
×9
× 10 × 11 × 12 × 13 × 14 × 15
1.01
435 870 130 174 217 261 304 348 391 435 478 522 565 609 653
3.6 7.2 61
14
68
22
75
29
83
36
90
43
97
51
04
1.05
853. 170 256 341 426 512 597 682 768 853 939 102 110 119 128
71
7.4 1.1 4.9 8.6 2.3 6.0 9.7 3.4 7.1 0.8 45
98
52
06
1.10
416. 833. 125 166 208 250 291 333 375 416 458 500 541 583 625
68
36
0.0 6.7 3.4 0.1 6.8 3.5 0.1 6.8 3.5 0.2 6.9 3.6 0.2
1.20
198. 397. 596. 795. 994. 119 139 159 178 198 218 238 258 278 298
86
72
58
44
30
3.2 2.0 0.9 9.7 8.6 7.5 6.3 5.2 4.1 2.9
1.30
126. 253. 380. 507. 634. 760. 887. 101 114 126 139 152 164 177 190
80
61
41
22
02
82
63
4.4 1.2 8.0 4.8 1.6 8.5 5.3 2.1
1.40
91.1 182. 273. 364. 455. 546. 637. 729. 820. 911. 100 109 118 127 136
4
27
41
55
68
82
96
09
23
37
2.5 3.6 4.8 5.9 7.0
1.50
69.9 139. 209. 279. 349. 419. 489. 559. 629. 699. 769. 839. 909. 979. 104
9
98
97
96
95
94
93
92
91
90
89
88
87
86
9.9
1.75
42.4 84.8 127. 169. 212. 254. 296. 339. 381. 424. 466. 508. 551. 593. 636.
1
3
24
66
07
49
90
32
73
15
56
98
39
81
22
2.00
29.1 58.3 87.4 116. 145. 174. 204. 233. 262. 291. 320. 349. 379. 408. 437.
6
2
7
63
79
95
11
26
42
58
74
90
05
21
37
2.25
21.5 43.0 64.5 86.1 107. 129. 150. 172. 193. 215. 236. 258. 279. 301. 322.
3
6
9
2
65
18
72
25
78
31
84
37
90
43
96
2.50
16.6 33.3 49.9 66.6 83.3 99.9 116. 133. 149. 166. 183. 199. 216. 233. 249.
6
2
8
4
0
6
62
28
94
60
26
92
58
24
90
2.75
13.3 26.6 39.9 53.3 66.6 79.9 93.2 106. 119. 133. 146. 159. 173. 186. 199.
3
5
8
1
4
6
9
62
95
27
60
93
25
58
91
3.00
10.9 21.8 32.8 43.7 54.6 65.5 76.5 87.4 98.3 109. 120. 131. 142. 153. 163.
3
6
0
3
6
9
2
6
9
32
25
19
12
05
98
3.25
9.15 18.2 27.4 36.5 45.7 54.8 64.0 73.1 82.3 91.4 100. 109. 118. 128. 137.
9
4
8
3
7
2
6
1
6
60
75
89
04
18
3.50
7.77 15.5 23.3 31.0 38.8 46.6 54.4 62.1 69.9 77.7 85.5 93.2 101. 108. 116.
5
2
9
7
4
1
9
6
3
1
8
05
83
60
3.75
6.69 13.3 20.0 26.7 33.4 40.1 46.8 53.5 60.2 66.9 73.6 80.3 87.0 93.7 100.
9
8
8
7
7
6
6
5
5
4
4
3
3
42
4.00
5.83 11.6 17.4 23.3 29.1 34.9 40.8 46.6 52.4 58.3 64.1 69.9 75.7 81.6 87.4
6
9
2
5
8
1
4
7
0
3
6
9
2
5
4.25
5.12 10.2 15.3 20.5 25.6 30.7 35.8 41.0 46.1 51.2 56.3 61.5 66.6 71.7 76.8
5
7
0
2
5
7
0
2
5
7
0
2
5
7
4.50
4.54 9.08 13.6 18.1 22.7 27.2 31.8 36.3 40.8 45.4 49.9 54.5 59.0 63.5 68.1
3
7
1
5
0
4
8
2
7
1
5
9
4
4.75
4.06 8.11 12.1 16.2 20.2 24.3 28.3 32.4 36.5 40.5 44.6 48.6 52.7 56.7 60.8
7
2
8
3
9
4
0
5
1
6
2
7
3
5.00
3.64 7.29 10.9 14.5 18.2 21.8 25.5 29.1 32.7 36.4 40.0 43.7 47.3 51.0 54.6
3
7
2
6
0
5
9
3
8
2
6
1
5
5.50
2.99 5.98 8.97 11.9 14.9 17.9 20.9 23.9 26.9 29.8 32.8 35.8 38.8 41.8 44.8
6
5
4
3
1
0
9
8
7
6
5
4
6.00
2.50 5.00 7.49 9.99 12.4 14.9 17.4 19.9 22.4 24.9 27.4 29.9 32.4 34.9 37.4
9
9
9
9
8
8
8
8
8
7
7
6.50
2.12 4.24 6.36 8.48 10.6 12.7 14.8 16.9 19.0 21.2 23.3 25.4 27.5 29.6 31.7
0
2
4
6
8
0
2
4
5
7
9
7.00
1.82 3.64 5.46 7.29 9.11 10.9 12.7 14.5 16.3 18.2 20.0 21.8 23.6 25.5 27.3
3
5
7
9
1
4
6
8
0
2
7.50
1.58 3.16 4.75 6.33 7.91 9.49 11.0 12.6 14.2 15.8 17.4 18.9 20.5 22.1 23.7
8
6
4
2
1
9
7
5
4
8.00
1.39 2.78 4.16 5.55 6.94 8.33 9.71 11.1 12.4 13.8 15.2 16.6 18.0 19.4 20.8
0
9
8
7
5
4
3
2
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6–65
S3 PROTECTION
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
MOTOR STANDARD CURVE MULTIPLIERS
CURRE
×1 ×2 ×3 ×4 ×5 ×6
NT
(× FLA)
×7
×8
×9
× 10 × 11 × 12 × 13 × 14 × 15
10.00
1.39 2.78 4.16 5.55 6.94 8.33 9.71 11.1 12.4 13.8 15.2 16.6 18.0 19.4 20.8
0
9
8
7
5
4
3
2
15.00
1.39 2.78 4.16 5.55 6.94 8.33 9.71 11.1 12.4 13.8 15.2 16.6 18.0 19.4 20.8
0
9
8
7
5
4
3
2
20.00
1.39 2.78 4.16 5.55 6.94 8.33 9.71 11.1 12.4 13.8 15.2 16.6 18.0 19.4 20.8
0
9
8
7
5
4
3
2
Table 6-2: Conversion Between NEMA Curves and 339 Curve Multiplier
NEMA Curve
Class 10
Class 15
Class 20
Class 30
339 Curve Multiplier
4
6
8
12
UNBALANCE BIASING
Unbalanced phase currents, that is to say negative sequence currents, cause rotor heating
in addition to the normal heating caused by positive sequence currents. When the motor is
running, the rotor rotates in the direction of the positive-sequence Magnetomotive Force
(MMF) wave at near synchronous speed. The induced rotor currents are at a frequency
determined by the difference between synchronous speed and rotor speed, typically 2 to 4
Hertz. At these low frequencies the current flows equally in all parts of the rotor bars, right
down to the inside portion of the bars at the bottom of the slots. Negative-sequence stator
current on the other hand causes an MMF wave with a rotation opposite to rotor rotation,
which induces rotor current with a frequency approximately 2 times the line frequency:
100 Hz for a 50 Hz system or 120 Hz for a 60 Hz system. The skin effect at this frequency
restricts the rotor current to the outside portion of the bars at the top of the slots, causing
a significant increase in rotor resistance and therefore significant additional rotor heating.
This extra heating is not accounted for in the thermal limit curves supplied by the motor
manufacturer, as these curves assume only positive sequence currents from a perfectly
balanced supply and balanced motor construction.
To account for this additional heating, the relay allows for the thermal overload curve to be
biased with negative sequence current. This biasing is accomplished by using an
equivalent motor heating current rather than the simple motor terminal current (Iavg). This
equivalent current is calculated according to the equation:
Eq. 7
where:
Ieq = equivalent motor heating current in per-unit on an FLA base
Iavg = average of each motor terminal’s RMS current in per-unit on an FLA base I2 / I1 =
negative sequence to positive sequence current ratio k = value of the Unbalance K Factor
setpoint, which is used to adjust the degree of unbalance biasing.
k may be estimated as:
Eq. 8
where ILR is the locked rotor current in per-unit on an FLA base.
If a k value of 0 is entered, the unbalance biasing is defeated and the overload curve will
time out against the average per-unit motor current.
6–66
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S3 PROTECTION
The figure below shows the recommended motor derating as a function of voltage
unbalance recommended by NEMA (the National Electrical Manufacturers Association). To
illustrate this relay’s unbalance biasing, assume a typical induction motor with an inrush of
6 x FLA and a negative sequence impedance of 0.167. With this impedance, voltage
unbalances of 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5% on the motor terminals will result in current unbalances of
6, 12, 18, 24, and 30% respectively. Based on these assumptions, the derating resulting
from this relay’s unbalance biasing for different values of k is as illustrated in the GE Multilin
curve below. Note that the curve for k = 8 is almost identical to the NEMA derating curve.
1.05
1.05
1.00
1.00
DERATING FACTOR
DERATING FACTOR
Figure 6-16: Motor Derating Factor due to Unbalanced Voltage
0.95
0.90
0.85
0.80
0.95
k=2
0.90
0.85
k=4
0.80
k=6
0.75
0.75
0.70
0.70
k=8
k=10
0
1
2
3
4
PERCENT VOLTAGE UNBALANCE
NEMA
5
0
1
2
3
4
5
PERCENT VOLTAGE UNBALANCE
GE Multilin
896815.CDR
HOT/COLD BIASING
When the motor is running with a constant load below the overload level, the motor will
eventually reach a steady state temperature, which corresponds to a particular steady
state Thermal Capacity Used. As some thermal capacity is used, there is less thermal
capacity left in the motor to cover transient overloads than is available when the motor is
cold. Typically, the extent of this effect is calculated by taking the ratio of the motor’s rated
Safe Stall Time Hot to its rated Safe Stall Time Cold. Safe Stall Time (also known as Locked
Rotor Time) is the time taken with the rotor not turning, for the motor to heat, at an
unacceptable rate, to a temperature beyond which motor damage occurs. “Cold” refers to
starting off with the motor at ambient temperature, “Hot” refers to starting off with the
motor at the temperature reached when running at rated load. The method used by the
thermal overload curve to account for the pre-overload state, is thus known as hot/cold
biasing.
The Hot/Cold Ratio setpoint is determined by the equation shown below:
Eq. 9
where: HCR is the value of the Hot/Cold Ratio setpoint expressed as a fraction of 1.00.
The steady state Thermal Capacity Used is calculated according to the equation:
Eq. 10
where: TCUss is the steady state Thermal Capacity Used expressed as a percentage. Ieq is
the equivalent motor heating current in per-unit on an FLA base, which was discussed in
the unbalance biasing section above.
For example, a motor with a Safe Stall Time Hot of 7 seconds, and a Safe Stall Time Cold of
10 seconds would typically have the Hot/Cold Ratio set to 7/10= 0.70. If the motor current
is 0.8 pu, the steady state Thermal Capacity Used is:
Eq. 11
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6–67
S3 PROTECTION
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
If a Hot/Cold Ratio value of 1 is entered, hot/cold biasing is defeated, and unless RTD
biasing is deployed, the thermal overload curve will operate as if the motor was cold preoverload.
RTD BIASING
The thermal overload curves can operate based solely on measured current and the
assumption of rated ambient and normal motor cooling, as described above. However, if
the ambient temperature is unusually high, or motor cooling is blocked, the motor will have
an un-modelled temperature increase. The RTD biasing feature can correct for this by
forcing the Thermal Capacity Used register up to the value appropriate to the temperature
of the hottest stator RTD. Since RTDs are relatively slow, the rest of the thermal overload is
still required during starting and heavy overload conditions when motor heating is
relatively fast. Thus the RTD bias feature does not prevent the Thermal Capacity Used
value from rising above the value appropriate to the RTD temperature.
The value of the Thermal Capacity Used register appropriate to the RTD temperature is
determined by the straight line segmented curve shown in the figure below. This curve is
characterized by minimum, center and maximum temperature setpoints, and by the hot/
cold ratio setpoint.
Figure 6-17: RTD bias curve
40%
RTD Bias Maximum
60%
RTD Bias Center
RTD Bias Miniumum
80%
20%
(1-HCR)x100%
TCUCenter
0
0
50
100
150
896816.cdr
RDT Bias Minimum, RTD Bias Center, RTD Bias Maximum and HCR are setpoints.
NOTE:
NOTE
If the maximum stator RTD temperature is below the RTD BIAS MINIMUM setting, no
biasing occurs. If the maximum stator RTD temperature is above the RTD BIAS MAXIMUM,
then the thermal memory is fully biased and THERMAL CAPACITY USED is forced to 100%.
At values between the maximum and minimum, the THERMAL CAPACITY USED created by
the overload curve is compared to the RTD Bias Thermal Capacity Used determined by the
hottest stator RTD temperature.
If the RTD Biased Thermal Capacity Used value is higher than the Thermal Overload
Thermal Capacity Used, then that value is used to replace the Thermal Overload Thermal
Capacity Used. If the RTD Biased Thermal Capacity is lower than the Thermal Overload
Thermal Capacity Used, the Thermal Overload curve does not need to be biased by stator
RTD temperature.
6–68
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S3 PROTECTION
Typically, the RTD BIAS MINIMUM is set as 40oC, the RTD BIAS CENTER POINT is set at the
rated motor running temperature, and the RTD BIAS MAXIMUM is set at the stator
insulation rating or slightly higher.
Eq. 12
where:
TCUCenter – the value of the Thermal Capacity Used register when the hottest stator
RTD temperature is equal to the setpoint, RTD Bias – Center T.
THottestStator – the temperature in degrees Celsius of the hottest RTD that is neither
open nor short and is declared to be a stator RTD. If there is no such RTD, use a value
of zero.
TMin – the value of the setpoint, RTD Bias – Minimum T.
TCenter – the value of the setpoint, RTD Bias – Center T.
TMax – the value of the setpoint, RTD Bias – Maximum T.
TCURTDbias – the RTD Biased Thermal Capacity determined by the hottest stator RTD
temperature.
HCR – the setting HOT/COLD SAFE STALL RATIO
Note that the RTD bias feature alone cannot create a trip. If the RTD bias forces Thermal
Capacity Used to 100%, the motor current must be above the overload pickup before an
overload trip occurs.
COOLING RATE
The Thermal Capacity Used value decreases exponentially when the motor equivalent
current (Ieq) is less than the Thermal Overload Pickup setting. This reduction simulates
motor cooling. As a stopped motor normally cools significantly slower than a running
motor, the relay has two cooling time constant setpoints, one is used when the motor is not
in service (stopped, tripped, locked out, etc.), the other is used when the motor is in service
(starting, running). The time constant is, in each case, the time in minutes for the motor’s
temperature to cool by 63% of the difference between the initial temperature and ambient
temperature.
Motor cooling is calculated as:
Eq. 13
where:
TCUused_start: the TCU caused by an overload condition
TCUused_end: the TCU dictated by the hot/cold safe stall ratio when the motor is
running (=0 when the motor is stopped)
t: time in minutes
τ: Cool Time Constant (running or stopped)
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6–69
S3 PROTECTION
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
Ieq: equivalent motor heating current
O/L_PKP: overload pickup setting as a multiple of FLA
HCR: hot/cold safe stall ratio
Figure 6-18: Thermal Protection Cooling Following a Trip at t = 0
THERMAL PROTECTION RESET
Thermal Protection operation is a serious event, and it consequently results in a lockout
that cannot be reset until the motor has cooled, unless an Emergency Restart or a Lockout
Reset is used. An Emergency Restart will reset the motor Thermal Capacity Used from its
current value to 0% so that a hot motor may be restarted. Note that a Lockout Reset does
not reset the Thermal Capacity Used register; if the motor is re-started it may re-trip
quickly. Should process interruption concerns overweigh the probable damage to the
motor that early starting would create, an Emergency Restart can be issued.
A setpoint AUTO RESET TCU≤15% is available to control whether once the motor has
cooled until the Thermal Capacity Used reaches 15% (approximately twice the Cool Time
Constant Stopped setting), the lockout is replaced with a trip that can be manually reset, or
alternatively the condition is fully reset, allowing immediate re-start.
THERMAL CAPACITY ALARM
A Thermal Capacity Alarm will occur when the Thermal Capacity rises above the
programmed THERMAL ALARM PKP level.
Flexcurves
6–70
Flexcurves
Prospective FlexCurves™ can be configured from a selection of standard curves to provide
the best approximate fit, then specific data points can be edited afterwards. Click the
Initialize button to populate the pickup values with the points from the curve specified by
the "Select Curve" setting and the "Multiply" value. These values can then be edited to
create a custom curve. Click on the Clear FlexCurve Data button to reset all pickup values
to zero.
Curve data can be imported from CSV (comma-separated values) files by clicking on the
Open button. Likewise, curve data can be saved in CSV format by clicking the Save button.
CSV is a delimited data format with fields separated by the comma character and records
separated by new lines. Refer to IETF RFC 4180 for additional details.
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S3 PROTECTION
The curve shapes for the two FlexCurves are derived from the following equations.
Eq. 14
7RSHUDWH
7'0î 7IOH[
DW
,
,SLFNXS
ZKHQ
,
,SLFNXS
In the above equations, Toperate represents the operate time in seconds, TDM represents
the multiplier setting, I represents the input current, Ipickup represents the value of the
pickup current setting, Tflex represents the FlexCurve™ time in seconds.
Figure 6-19: Flexcurve™ configuration settings
The following settings are available for each custom Flexcurve™.
Select Curve
Range: Standard Curve, and FlexCurve B (Note: For FlexCurve A, you can select FlexCurve
B as the setpoint, and vice versa for FlexCurve B.)
Default: Standard Curve
This setting specifies a curve to use as a base for a custom FlexCurve™. Must be used
before Initialization is implemented (see Initialization below).
Multiply
Range: 0.01 to 30.00 in steps of 0.01
Default: 1.00
This setting provides selection for Time Dial Multiplier by which the times from the
inverse curve are modified.
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6–71
S3 PROTECTION
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
Initialization
Used after specifying a curve to use as a base for a custom FlexCurve™ (see Select
Curve and Multiply above). When the Initialize FlexCurve button is clicked, the pickup
settings will be populated with values specified by the curve selected in this setting.
1.03 × Pickup, ..., 20.00 × Pickup
Range: 0 to 65535 ms in steps of 1
Default: 0 ms
These settings specify the time to operate at the following pickup levels 1.03 to 20.00.
This data is converted into a continuous curve by linear interpolation between data
points. To enter a custom FlexCurve™, enter the operate time for each selected pickup
point.
Thermal protection
setpoints
PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > THERMAL PROTECTION
THERMAL O/L FUNC
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
START PROTECTION
Range: Off, On, Contact Input 1 to 10, Virtual Input 1 to 32, Remote Input 1 to 32, Logic
Element 1 to 16
Default: Off
By setting the START PROTECTION setpoint to OFF, Start Protection can be disabled.
Thermal protection will therefore go directly to the running condition and the Thermal
Overload Curve will be employed to protect the connected load.
LOCKED ROTOR CURRENT
Range: 2 to 11xFLA in steps of 0.1xFLA
Default: 6xFLA
This is the steady state motor current with the rotor locked, when supplied from a source
at rated voltage and frequency.
SAFE STALL T COLD
Range: 1.0 to 600.0 sec in steps of 0.1 sec
Default: 10.0 sec
This setting is given as the Safe Stall Time Cold.
THERMAL O/L CURVE
Range: Standard, FlexCurve
Default: Standard
When FlexCurve is selected, the 339 relay used motor speed indication to apply
FlexCurve A or FlexCurve B. Flex curve A is active when the motor is running at low
speed. Flex curve B is active when the motor is running at high speed. If two-speed
function is not deployed, only FlexCurve A is active.
CURVE MULTIPLIER
Range: 1 to 15 in steps of 1
Default: 4
Fits the Standard Overload Curve to the thermal characteristics of the protected motor.
THERMAL O/L PKP
Range: 1.01 to 1.25xFLA in steps of 0.01xFLA
Default: 1.01xFLA
The Thermal Overload Pickup setting defines the current level at which the motor is
considered to be overloaded. The Overload Curve is cut off at current values below this
pickup value. Normally, the Thermal Overload Pickup Setting is set slightly above the
6–72
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S3 PROTECTION
motor Service Factor, to account for inherent load measuring errors (CTs and limited
relay accuracy). The typical total inaccuracy factor is 8 to 10%; as such, for motors with
a thermal capability at rated service factor of 1 or 1.15, the Thermal Overload Pickup
level should be set as 1.10 or 1.25, respectively.
The Thermal Capacity Used value decreases exponentially when the motor equivalent
current (Ieq) is less than the Thermal Overload Pickup setting.
UNBALANCE K FACTOR
Range: 0 to 19 in steps of 1
Default: 0
Sets the degree of unbalance biasing used by the Thermal Overload Curve. Zero disables
the unbalance bias.
COOL TIME RUNNING
Range: 1 to 1000 min in steps of 1 min
Default: 15 min
Sets the Cooling Time Constant used by the Thermal Overload Curve when the motor is
in service. Enter the time in minutes for the motor to cool by 63% of the difference
between the initial and ambient temperature when the motor is running at rated speed.
COOL TIME STOPPED
Range: 1 to 1000 min in steps of 1 min
Default: 30 min
Sets the Cooling Time Constant used by the Thermal Overload Curve when the motor is
not in service. Enter the time in minutes for the motor to cool by 63% of the difference
between the initial and ambient temperature when the motor is stopped.
HOT/COLD RATIO
Range: 0.01 to 1.00 in steps of 0.01
Default: 0.85
This setpoint controls the Hot/Cold Bias and RTD Bias features. If the safe stall time hot/
cold cannot be determined from the motor specification, a typical value of 0.85 is
suggested. If a HCR value of 1 is programmed, Hot/Cold Biasing is defeated.
RTD BIAS FUNC
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
Sets to disable or enable RTD Bias function.
RTD BIAS MINIMUM
Range: 0 to 130oC in steps of 1oC
Default: 40oC
Sets the stator RTD temperature appropriate for a Thermal Capacity Used value of zero.
If RTD Bias is to be deployed, enter the rated ambient temperature.
RTD BIAS CENTER
Range: 40 to 155oC in steps of 1oC
Default: 110oC
Sets the stator RTD temperature appropriate for the steady state Thermal Capacity Used
at rated full load motor current. If RTD Bias is to be deployed, enter the rated full load
motor running temperature.
RTD BIAS MAXIMUM
Range: 130 to 250oC in steps of 1oC
Default: 130oC
Sets the stator RTD temperature appropriate for a Thermal Capacity Used value of
100%. If RTD Bias is to be deployed, enter the stator insulation temperature rating.
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6–73
S3 PROTECTION
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
THERMAL ALARM FUNC
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
Sets to enable or disable the Thermal Capacity Alarm function.
THERMAL ALARM PKP
Range: 10% to 100% in steps of 1%
Default: 75%
Sets the amount of the Thermal Capacity Used where the Thermal Capacity Alarm will be
issued.
AUTORESET TCU≤15%
Range: Auto, Manual
Default: Manual
If this Setpoint is set to AUTO, an automatic reset of an overload lockout occurs after the
Thermal Capacity Used has dropped to 15%. When set to MANUAL, the lockout is
replaced with a trip when the motor cools. This trip must be reset by the control panel, a
remote contact, or a communication command, before the motor can be restarted.
OUTPUT RELAY 4 to 6 / OUTPUT RELAY 5 to 6
Range: Do Not Operate, Operate
Default: Do Not Operate
Any assignable output relay can be selected to operate upon Thermal Protection (Start
Protection and Thermal Overload Curve) operation. When the SWITCHING DEVICE is
selected as BREAKER, the assignable output relays will be Output Relay 4~6. When the
SWITCHING DEVICE is selected as CONTACTOR, the assignable output relays will be
Output Relay 5~6.
BLOCK 1 to 3
Range: Off, Contact Input 1 to 10, Virtual Input 1 to 32, Remote Input 1 to 32, Logic
Element 1 to 16
Default: Off
Three blocking inputs are provided for Thermal Protection. When any of the selected
blocking inputs turns ON, Thermal Protection will be blocked.
6–74
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
896LH2.cdr
SETTING
Lockout Reset
Off = 0
INPUTS
Remote Reset Input
Emergency Restart Input
Lockout Reset Input
Keypad Reset
SETTING
Auto Reset TCU £ 15%
= Auto
= Manual
Off = 0
BLOCK 3
Off = 0
BLOCK 2
Off = 0
SETTINGS
BLOCK 1
Off = 0
SETTING
Start Protection
Disabled = 0
Enabled = 1
SETTING
Thermal O/L Function
Running
MOTOR STATUS
Starting
OR
OR
AND
AND
OR
OR
AND
OR
ACTUAL VALUES
Iavg
I1
I2
Hottest Stator RTD
AND
AND
AND
t
I
TCU =100%
TCU > Thermal Alarm PKP
RESET TCU TO 0%
TCU £ 15%
THERMAL MEMORY
MAX STATOR
TC Used RTD =
TC
TC Used =
Ieq ³ O/L PKP
THERMAL OVERLOAD CURVE
Standard curve
Curve Multiplier x 87.4
t(Ieq)=
I2eq - 1
START PROTECTION
tLRcold x I2LR
RUN t(Ieq) =
2
I eq
RUN
Locked Rotor Current
Safe Stall Time - Cold
Thermal O/L PKP
Curve Multiplier
Unbalance K Factor
Hot/Cold Ratio
Cool Time Stopped
Cool Time Running
RTD Bias - Minimum T
RTD Bias - Center T
RTD Bias - Maximum T
Thermal Alarm PKP
SETTINGS
THERMAL PROTECTION
AND
OR
AND
NV
LATCH
R
S
SETTING
Thermal Alarm Func
Disabled = 0
LOGIC OPERAND
Thermal Protection PKP
Any Trip PKP
TARGET MESSAGE
Thermal Protection:
State: Pickup
SETTING
SWITCHING DEVICE
Breaker
Contactor
AND
AND
AND
AND
Output Relay 5
Output Relay 6
LOGIC OPERAND
Thermal LVL Alrm OP
Any Alarm OP
- LED: Lockout
TARGET MESSAGE
Thermal Protection:
State: Operate
LOGIC OPERAND
Thermal Protection OP
Any Trip OP
Lockout OP
Operate
output
relays upon
selection
ASSIGNABLE AUX RELAYS
Output Relay 4
Output Relay 5
Output Relay 6
ASSIGNABLE AUX RELAYS
Operate
output
relays upon
selection
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S3 PROTECTION
Figure 6-20: Thermal Protection logic diagram
6–75
S3 PROTECTION
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
Short circuit
If Short Circuit is enabled, a trip or alarm occurs once the magnitude of any phase current
exceeds the setting S/C PKP for the time specified by the setting S/C DELAY.
A second independent Short Circuit protection element is provided for High Speed. If twospeed functionality is enabled, the 339 relay relies on the motor speed indication to switch
the Short Circuit settings as per the motor running speed, so the main Short Circuit is only
active when the motor is running at low speed, and the High Speed Short Circuit is only
active when the motor is running at high speed. If two-speed functionality is not deployed,
only the main Short Circuit is active, and the High Speed Short Circuit is disabled.
Short Circuit operation is a serious event, and therefore results in a lockout that cannot be
reset unless an Emergency Restart or a Lockout Reset is issued.
NOTE:
NOTE
Warning: care must be taken when turning on this feature. If the interrupting device
(contactor or circuit breaker) is not rated to break the fault current, the function of this
feature should not be programmed as TRIP. Alternatively, this feature may be programmed
as ALARM or LATCHED ALARM and assigned to an auxiliary relay connected to an
upstream device which is capable of breaking the fault current.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > SHORT CIRCUIT
S/C FUNC
Range: Disabled, Latched Alarm, Alarm, Trip
Default: Disabled
The selection of the Latched Alarm, Alarm, or Trip setting enables the Short Circuit
function. If the operating condition is satisfied when Trip is selected as the function, the
“LOCKOUT” LED will be turned on, and the logic operand ANY TRIP OP will be asserted,
which in turn will operate the “TRIP” LED and trip output relay. If Alarm is selected, the
“ALARM” LED will flash upon Short Circuit operation, and will automatically reset when
the activating condition clears. If Latched Alarm is selected, the “ALARM” LED will flash
upon Short Circuit operation, and will stay “ON” after the condition clears, until a reset
command is initiated. The TRIP output relay will not operate if the Latched Alarm or
Alarm function is selected. Any assignable output relays can be selected to operate
when the setting S/C FUNC is selected as Latched Alarm, Alarm, or Trip.
S/C PKP
Range: 1.00 to 20.00xCT in steps of 0.01xCT
Default: 6.00xCT
This setting specifies a pickup threshold for the Short Circuit.
S/C DELAY
Range: 0.00 to 60.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 0.00 s
This setting specifies a time delay for the Short Circuit.
OUTPUT RELAY 4 to 6 / OUTPUT RELAY 5 to 6
Range: Do not operate, Operate
Default: Do not operate
Any assignable output relay can be selected to operate upon Short Circuit operation.
When the SWITCHING DEVICE is selected as BREAKER, the assignable output relays will
be Output Relay 4 to 6. When the SWITCHING DEVICE is selected as CONTACTOR, the
assignable output relays will be Output Relay 5 to 6.
6–76
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S3 PROTECTION
BLOCK 1 to 3
Range: Off, Contact Input 1 to 10, Virtual Input 1 to 32, Remote Input 1 to 32, Logic
Element 1 to 16
Default: Off
Three blocking inputs are provided for the Short Circuit feature. When any of the
selected blocking inputs is on, the Short Circuit function is blocked.
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6–77
6–78
AND
AND
SETTING
OR
SETTING
OR
AND
AND
AND
AND
OR
R
S
OR
LATCH
AND
LOGIC OPERAND
ANY ALARM OP
S/C ALARM OP
Phase Currents
896812.cdr
Phase C current (IC)
Phase B current (IB)
Phase A current (IA)
Off = 0
BLOCK 3:
Off = 0
BLOCK 2:
Off = 0
BLOCK 1:
S3 SHORT CIRCUIT
SETTING
Low Speed
OR
RUN
S/C PKP
IC > PICKUP
IB > PICKUP
IA > PICKUP
S3 SHORT CIRCUIT
tPKP
S/C DELAY
S3 SHORT CIRCUIT
SETTING
Contactor
Breaker
0
SWITCHING DEVICE
S2 SYSTEM SETUP
AND
AND
AND
R
NV
LATCH
OUTPUT RELAY 6
OUTPUT RELAY 5
OUTPUT RELAY 4
Short Circuit Trip
State: Pickup
S/C Alarm
State: Pickup
TARGET MESSAGE
ANY TRIP PKP
S/C TRIP PKP
ANY ALARM PKP
S/C ALARM PKP
LOGIC OPERAND
ASSIGNABLE AUX RELAYS
Operate
Output Relays OUTPUT RELAY 5
Upon
OUTPUT RELAY 6
Selection
Operate
Output Relays
Upon
Selection
ASSIGNABLE AUX RELAYS
LED: Lockout
Short Circuit Trip
State: Operate
TARGET MESSAGE
LOCKOUT OP
Disabled = 0
MOTOR SPEED INDICATION
ANY TRIP OP
Enabled = 0
S
OR
OR
TARGET MESSAGE
S/C Alarm
State: Operate
ANY LATCHED ALARM OP
AND
S/C TRIP OP
OR
AND
Enable 2-spd Motor
SETTING
OR
Off = 0
Reset
Off = 0
AND
OR
S2 MOTOR
Trip
Alarm
Latched Alarm
Disabled = 0
S/C FUNC
S3 SHORT CIRCUIT
SETTING
Lockout Reset
Off = 0
Emergency Restart
S4 CONTROLS
SETTINGS
Reset Input
Lockout Reset Input
Emergency Restart Input
INPUTS
KEYPAD RESET
S3 PROTECTION
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
Figure 6-21: Short Circuit logic diagram
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S3 PROTECTION
Mechanical Jam
A motor load can become constrained (mechanical jam) during starting or running. The
starting current magnitude alone cannot provide a definitive indication of a mechanical
jam, so the starting load jams are detected by monitoring acceleration time and speed.
However, the running current magnitude can indicate load jams. Therefore, the Mechanical
Jam element is specially designed to operate for running load jams. After a motor has
started and reached the running state, a trip or alarm occurs should the magnitude of any
phase current exceed the setting MECH JAM PKP for a period of time specified by the
setting MECH JAM DELAY. The thermal protection element will also operate during
mechanical jams but after a delay when the thermal capacity reaches 100%. Not only
does the Mechanical Jam protect the motor by taking it off-line quicker than the thermal
protection, it may also prevent or limit damage to the driven equipment in the event of a
locked rotor during running.
The Mechanical Jam is armed as long as the motor status is not STARTING. When twospeed functionality is deployed, the 339 will block Mechanical Jam Protection during the
acceleration time from Low Speed to High Speed until the motor current has dropped
below overload pickup level. At that point of time when the motor reached the high speed
running stage, the Mechanical Jam will be enabled with the High Speed FLA.
The MECH JAM PKP level should be set higher than motor loading during normal operation,
but lower than the motor stall level. Normally the delay is set to the minimum time delay or
set so that no nuisance trips occur due to momentary load fluctuations.
Mechanical Jam operation is a serious event, and therefore results in a lockout that cannot
be reset unless an Emergency Restart or a Lockout Reset is issued.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > MECHANICAL JAM
MECH JAM FUNC
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
MECH JAM PKP
Range: 1.01 to 4.50xFLA in steps of 0.01xFLA
Default: 4.50xFLA
This setting defines the excessive current condition that identifies a mechanical jam. As
the element is not armed during motor starting, this threshold can be set below the
starting current.
MECH JAM DELAY
Range: 0.00 to 30.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 0.10 s
This setting specifies the pickup delay for the Mechanical Jam.
OUTPUT RELAY 4 to 6 / OUTPUT RELAY 5 to 6
Range: Do not operate, Operate
Default: Do not operate
Any assignable output relay can be selected to operate upon Mechanical Jam operation.
When the SWITCHING DEVICE is selected as BREAKER, the assignable output relays will
be Output Relay 4 to 6. When the SWITCHING DEVICE is selected as CONTACTOR, the
assignable output relays will be Output Relay 5 to 6.
BLOCK 1 to 3
Range: Off, Contact Input 1 to 10, Virtual Input 1 to 32, Remote Input 1 to 32, Logic
Element 1 to 16
Default: Off
Three blocking inputs are provided for the Mechanical Jam feature. When any of the
selected blocking inputs is on, the Mechanical Jam function is blocked.
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6–79
6–80
Phase Currents
896820.cdr
Phase C current (IC)
Phase B current (IB)
Phase A current (IA)
Off = 0
BLOCK 3:
Off = 0
BLOCK 2:
Off = 0
OR
AND
RUN
IC > PICKUP
IB > PICKUP
IA > PICKUP
MECH JAM PKP
BLOCK 1:
SETTING
S3 MECHANICAL JAM
SETTING
S3 MECHANICAL JAM
Starting
MOTOR STATUS
Enable = 1
Disabled = 0
MECH JAM FUNC
S3 MECHANICAL JAM
SETTING
OR
Off = 0
Reset
Off = 0
Lockout Reset
Off = 0
Emergency Restart
S4 CONTROLS
SETTINGS
Reset Input
Lockout Reset Input
Emergency Restart Input
INPUTS
KEYPAD RESET
SETTING
AND
tPKP
MECH JAM DELAY
S3 MECHANICAL JAM
SETTING
Contactor
Breaker
0
SWITCHING DEVICE
S2 SYSTEM SETUP
AND
AND
AND
OR
AND
AND
OR
AND
AND
AND
NV
LATCH
R
S
LOGIC OPERAND
MECH JAM Trip
State: Pickup
TARGET MESSAGE
ANY TRIP PKP
MECH JAM TRIP PKP
LOGIC OPERAND
ASSIGNABLE AUX RELAYS
Operate
Output Relays OUTPUT RELAY 5
Upon
OUTPUT RELAY 6
Selection
OUTPUT RELAY 4
Operate
Output Relays
OUTPUT RELAY 5
Upon
Selection
OUTPUT RELAY 6
ASSIGNABLE AUX RELAYS
LED: Lockout
MECH JAM Trip
State: Operate
TARGET MESSAGE
LOCKOUT OP
ANY TRIP OP
MECH JAM TRIP OP
S3 PROTECTION
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
Figure 6-22: Mechanical Jam logic diagram
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S3 PROTECTION
Undercurrent
When the motor is in the running state, an alarm will occur if the magnitude of any phase
current falls below the undercurrent alarm pickup level for the time specified by the
undercurrent alarm delay. Furthermore, a trip will occur if the magnitude of any phase
current falls below the undercurrent trip pickup level for the time specified by the
undercurrent trip delay. The alarm and trip pickup levels should be set lower than the
lowest motor loading during normal operations.
For example, if a pump is cooled by the liquid it pumps, loss of load may mean that the
pump overheats. In this case, enable the undercurrent feature. If the motor loading should
never fall below 75% FLA, even for short durations, the Undercurrent Trip Pickup could be
set to “70% FLA” and the Undercurrent Alarm Pickup be set to “75% FLA”. The Undercurrent
Trip Delay and Undercurrent Alarm Delay settings are typically set as quick as possible, i.e.
1.00 second.
The Undercurrent element is active only when the motor is running and is blocked upon
the initiation of a motor start for a period of time defined by the setting BLK U/C ON START.
This block may be used to allow pumps to build up head before the undercurrent element
trips or alarms.
A second independent Undercurrent Protection element is provided for High Speed. If twospeed functionality is enabled, the 339 relay relies on the motor speed indication to switch
the undercurrent settings as per the motor running speed, so the main Undercurrent
Protection element is only active when the motor is running at low speed, and the High
Speed Undercurrent Protection element is only active when the motor is running at high
speed. If two-speed functionality is not deployed, only the main Undercurrent is active, and
the High Speed Undercurrent is disabled.
PATH:SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > UNDERCURRENT
U/CURR ALARM FUNC
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
This setting enables the Undercurrent alarm functionality.
BLK U/C ON START
Range: 0 to 600 s in steps of 1 s
Default: 0 s
This setting specifies the length of time to block the undercurrent function when the
motor is starting. The undercurrent element is active only when the motor is running and
is blocked for a period of time specified by this setting, upon the initiation of a motor
start. A value of 0 s specifies that the feature is not blocked from start.
U/CURR ALARM PKP
Range: 1% to 100% FLA in steps of 1% FLA
Default: 70% FLA
This setting specifies a pickup threshold for the alarm stage. The alarm pickup threshold
should be less than the motor load current during normal operation.
U/CURR ALARM DELAY
Range: 1.00 to 60.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 1.00 s
This setting specifies a time delay for the alarm stage. The time delay should be long
enough to overcome any short lowering of the current (e.g. during system faults).
U/CURR TRIP FUNC
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
This setting enables the Undercurrent trip functionality.
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6–81
S3 PROTECTION
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
U/CURR TRIP PKP
Range: 1% to 100% FLA in steps of 1% FLA
Default: 60% FLA
This setting specifies a pickup threshold for the trip stage. This setting is typically set at a
level less than the corresponding setting for the alarm stage.
U/CURR TRIP DELAY
Range: 1.00 to 60.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 1.00 s
This setting specifies a time delay for the trip stage. The time delay should be long
enough to overcome any short lowering of the current (e.g. during system faults).
OUTPUT RELAY 4 to 6 / OUTPUT RELAY 5 to 6
Range: Do not operate, Operate
Default: Do not operate
Any assignable output relay can be selected to operate upon Undercurrent operation.
When the SWITCHING DEVICE is selected as BREAKER, the assignable output relays will
be Output Relay 4 to 6. When the SWITCHING DEVICE is selected as CONTACTOR, the
assignable output relays will be Output Relay 5 to 6.
To select any assignable output relays to operate upon the Undercurrent Alarm
operation, assign the Logic Operand "UNDERCURRENT ALARM OP" or "Any Alarm OP" to
a Logic Element.
BLOCK 1 to 3
Range: Off, Contact Input 1 to 10, Virtual Input 1 to 32, Remote Input 1 to 32, Logic
Element 1 to 16
Default: Off
Three blocking inputs are provided for the Undercurrent feature. When any of the
selected blocking inputs is on, the Undercurrent function is blocked.
6–82
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
896808.CDR
SETTING
S3 UNDERCURRENT
U/CURR TRIP FUNC
DISABLED = 0
OFF = 0
BLOCK 3
OFF = 0
OFF = 0
BLOCK 2
SETTINGS
S3 UNDERCURRENT
BLOCK 1
Running
MOTOR STATUS
Stopped
MOTOR SPEED INDICATION
LOW SPEED
SETTINGS
S2 MOTOR
ENABLE 2-SPD MOTOR
DISABLED = 0
SETTINGS
S3 UNDERCURRENT
U/CURR ALARM FUNC
ENABLED = 1
DISABLED = 0
ACTUAL VALUE
IA
IB
IC
OR
tBLK
BLK U/C ON START
S3 UNDERCURRENT
SETTINGS
AND
0
OR
AND
AND
AND
RUN
IA_mag < PICKUP
IB_mag < PICKUP
IC_mag < PICKUP
U/CURR TRIP PKP
OR
OR
SETTING
S2 SYSTEM SETUP
SWITCHING DEVICE
Breaker
Contactor
IA_mag < PICKUP
IB_mag < PICKUP
IC_mag < PICKUP
SETTING
S3 UNDERCURRENT
RUN
U/CURR ALARM PKP
SETTINGS
S3 UNDERCURRENT
tPKP
0
Off = 0
Reset
Off = 0
Lockout Reset
Off = 0
Emergency Restart
S4 CONTROLS
SETTINGS
Reset Input
Lockout Reset Input
Emergency Restart Input
INPUTS
KEYPAD RESET
U/CURR TRIP DLY
SETTINGS
S3 UNDERCURRENT
tPKP
U/CURR ALARM DELAY
SETTINGS
S3 UNDERCURRENT
0
AND
AND
AND
AND
ASSIGNABLE AUX RELAYS
AND
OR
ASSIGNABLE AUX RELAYS
Operate
OUTPUT RELAY 5
output relays
upon selection OUTPUT RELAY 6
OUTPUT RELAY 4
Operate
output relays OUTPUT RELAY 5
upon selection
OUTPUT RELAY 6
R
S
LATCH
TARGET MESSAGE
ANY TRIP PKP
U/CURR TRIP OP
ANY TRIP OP
U/CURR TRIP PKP
LOGIC OPERAND
Undercurrent Trip
State: Operate
Undercurrent Trip
State: Pickup
TARGET MESSAGE
ANY ALARM OP
U/CURR ALARM PKP
ANY ALARM PKP
U/CURR ALARM OP
LOGIC OPERAND
Undercurrent Alarm
State: Operate
Undercurrent Alarm
State: Pickup
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S3 PROTECTION
Figure 6-23: Undercurrent logic diagram
6–83
S3 PROTECTION
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
Current unbalance
Unbalance current, also known as negative sequence current or I2, results in
disproportionate rotor heating. If the thermal overload protection’s unbalance bias feature
has been enabled, the thermal overload protection will protect the motor against
unbalance by tripping when the motor’s thermal capacity is exhausted. However, the
current unbalance protection can detect this condition and alarm or trip before the motor
has heated substantially.
For the 339 relay, unbalance is defined as the ratio of negative-sequence to positivesequence current,
Eq. 15
if the motor is operating at a load (Iavg) greater than or equal to FLA.
If the motor Iavg is less than FLA, unbalance is defined as
Eq. 16
This desensitizing is necessary to prevent nuisance alarms when a motor is lightly loaded.
If enabled, a trip and/or alarm occurs once the unbalance level equals or exceeds the set
pickup for the set period of time. If the unbalance level exceeds 40%, or when Iavg ≥ 25%
FLA and current in any one phase is less than the cutoff current, the motor is considered to
be single phasing and a trip occurs within 2 seconds. Single phasing protection is disabled
if the unbalance trip feature is turned “Off”.
When setting the pickup level, note that a 1% voltage unbalance typically translates into a
6% current unbalance. To prevent nuisance trips or alarms, the pickup level should not be
set too low. Also, since short term unbalances are common, a reasonable delay should be
set to avoid nuisance trips or alarms.
Unusually high unbalance levels may be caused by incorrect phase CT wiring.
NOTE:
NOTE
For example, if the supply voltage is normally unbalanced up to 2%, the current unbalance
seen by a typical motor is 2 × 6 = 12%. In this case, set the current unbalance alarm pickup
to “15%” and the current unbalance trip pickup to “20%” to prevent nuisance tripping; 5 or
10 seconds is a reasonable delay.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > CURRENT UNBALANCE
UNBAL ALARM FUNC
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
This setting enables the Current Unbalance Alarm functionality.
UNBAL ALARM PKP
Range: 4% to 40% in steps of 1%
Default: 15%
This setting specifies a pickup threshold for the current unbalance alarm stage.
UNBAL ALARM DELAY
Range: 1.00 to 60.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 1.00 s
This setting specifies a time delay for the alarm stage.
6–84
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S3 PROTECTION
UNBAL TRIP FUNC
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
This setting enables the Current Unbalance Trip functionality.
UNBAL TRIP PKP
Range: 4% to 40% in steps of 1%
Default: 30%
This setting specifies a pickup threshold for the current unbalance trip stage. This setting
should be greater than the corresponding setting for the alarm stage.
UNBAL TRIP DELAY
Range: 1.00 to 60.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 1.00 s
This setting specifies a time delay for the trip stage.
OUTPUT RELAY 4 to 6 / OUTPUT RELAY 5 to 6
Range: Do not operate, Operate
Default: Do not operate
Any assignable output relay can be selected to operate upon Current Unbalance
operation. When the SWITCHING DEVICE is selected as BREAKER, the assignable output
relays will be Output Relay 4 to 6. When the SWITCHING DEVICE is selected as
CONTACTOR, the assignable output relays will be Output Relay 5 to 6.
To select any assignable output relays to operate upon the Unbalance Alarm operation,
assign the Logic Operand "UNBALANCE ALARM OP" or "Any Alarm OP" to a Logic
Element.
BLOCK 1 to 3
Range: Off, Contact Input 1 to 10, Virtual Input 1 to 32, Remote Input 1 to 32, Logic
Element 1 to 16
Default: Off
Three blocking inputs are provided for the Current Unbalance feature. When any of the
selected blocking inputs is on, the Current Unbalance function is blocked.
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6–85
6–86
SETTING
SETTING
Iavg
İ1
İ2
İb
İc
OR
İa
ACTUAL VALUE
Disabled = 0
Enabled = 1
UNBAL TRIP FUNC
S3 CURRENT UNBAL
Off = 0
BLOCK 3:
Off = 0
BLOCK 2:
Off = 0
BLOCK 1:
S3 CURRENT UNBAL
SETTING
Disabled = 0
Enabled = 1
UNBAL ALARM FUNC
S3 CURRENT UNBAL
1
2
= 3 (İa+ a İb + aİc)
Ia + Ib + Ic
3
1
2
= 3 (İa+ aİb + a İc)
=
AND
AND
I2
x 100%
I1
Ic < Cutoff Current
Ib < Cutoff Current
Ia < Cutoff Current
Iavg ³ 25% FLA
I
If Iavg < FLA, UNBAL = avg x I2 x 100%
FLA I1
If Iavg ³ FLA, UNBAL =
SETTING
RUN
RUN
OR
AND
UNBAL > PICKUP
UNBAL £ 40%
UNBAL TRIP PKP
AND
AND
Off = 0
Reset
Off = 0
Lockout Reset
Off = 0
Emergency Restart
S4 CONTROLS
SETTINGS
Reset Input
Lockout Reset Input
Emergency Restart Input
INPUTS
OUTPUT RELAY 6
OUTPUT RELAY 5
SETTING
2s
AND
0
0
AND
0
ASSIGNABLE AUX RELAYS
Operate
Output Relays OUTPUT RELAY 5
Upon
OUTPUT RELAY 6
Selection
Operate
Output Relays
Upon
Selection
OUTPUT RELAY 4
ASSIGNABLE AUX RELAYS
tPKP
UNBAL ALARM DELAY
UNBAL TRIP DELAY
tPKP
SETTING
S3 CURRENT UNBAL
S3 CURRENT UNBAL
KEYPAD RESET
OR
AND
UNBAL ³ PICKUP
UNBAL ALARM PKP
S3 CURRENT UNBAL
Contactor
Breaker
SWITCHING DEVICE
S2 SYSTEM SETUP
SETTING
SETTING
S3 CURRENT UNBAL
AND
OR
OR
R
S
R
S
LATCH
LATCH
TARGET MESSAGE
SINGLE PH TRIP
State: Operate
896823.cdr
TARGET MESSAGE
SINGLE PHASING OP
ANY TRIP PKP
ANY TRIP OP
UNBAL TRIP PKP
UNBAL TRIP OP
LOGIC OPERAND
UNBAL TRIP
State: Pickup
UNBAL TRIP
State: Operate
TARGET MESSAGE
ANY ALARM PKP
UNBAL ALARM PKP
ANY ALARM OP
UNBAL ALARM OP
LOGIC OPERAND
UNBAL ALARM
State: Pickup
UNBAL ALARM
State: Operate
S3 PROTECTION
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
Figure 6-24: Current Unbalance logic diagram
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S3 PROTECTION
Load increase alarm
The Load Increase Alarm is used to alarm abnormal load increases that may indicate
problems with the process. An alarm is enabled only after the acceleration stage is
complete and the motor has entered the running stage. Once enabled, the alarm is
generated when the motor load exceeds the setting LOAD INCR PKP for the time delay
specified by the setting LOAD INCR DELAY, and automatically resets when the current has
subsided.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > LOAD INCR ALARM
LOAD INCR FUNC
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
This setting enables the Load Increase Alarm functionality.
LOAD INCR PKP
Range: 50% to 150% FLA in steps of 1% FLA
Default: 150% FLA
This setting specifies the pickup threshold for the Load Increase Alarm.
LOAD INCR DELAY
Range: 0.00 to 60.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 1.50 s
This setting specifies the time delay for the Load Increase Alarm.
OUTPUT RELAY 4 to 6 / OUTPUT RELAY 5 to 6
Range: Do not operate, Operate
Default: Do not operate
Any assignable output relay can be selected to operate upon Load Increase Alarm
operation. When the SWITCHING DEVICE is selected as BREAKER, the assignable output
relays will be Output Relay 4 to 6. When the SWITCHING DEVICE is selected as
CONTACTOR, the assignable output relays will be Output Relay 5 to 6.
BLOCK 1 to 3
Range: Off, Contact Input 1 to 10, Virtual Input 1 to 32, Remote Input 1 to 32, Logic
Element 1 to 16
Default: Off
Three blocking inputs are provided for the Load Increase Alarm feature. When any of the
selected blocking inputs is on, the Load Increase Alarm function is blocked.
Figure 6-25: Load Increase logic diagram
SETTING
LOAD INCR ALARM
Enabled = 1
Disabled = 0
MOTOR STATUS
Running
AND
SETTING
LOAD INCR PKP
SETTING
RUN
LOAD INCR DELAY
Iavg > Pickup
SETTINGS
BLOCK 1
OFF = 0
BLOCK 2
OFF = 0
BLOCK 3
OFF = 0
tPKP
0
LOGIC OPERAND
LOAD INCR OP
ANY ALARM OP
LOAD INCR PKP
ANY ALARM PKP
TARGET MESSAGE
OR
896818.cdr
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Load Incr Alarm
State: Operate
Load Incr Alarm
State: Pickup
6–87
S3 PROTECTION
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
Ground fault
When motor stator windings become wet or otherwise suffer insulation deterioration, low
magnitude leakage currents often precede complete failure and resultant destructive fault
currents. Ground fault protection provides early detection of such leakage current, so that
the motor can be taken off line in time to limit motor damage.
Depending on the setting S2 SYSTEM SETUP > CURRENT SENSING > GROUND CT TYPE, the
current measured by this element is either the Core Balance CT (CBCT) current, the fourth
CT input current, or the sum of the first three CT inputs’ currents. For high resistance
grounded systems, sensitive ground current detection is possible if the CBCT 50:0.025 input
is used. To use the CBCT 50:0.025 input, select “50:0.025” for the Ground CT Type. On solidly
grounded systems where fault currents may be quite large, the 1A or 5A secondary ground
CT input should be used for either zero-sequence or residual ground sensing. If the
connection is residual, the Ground CT secondary and primary values should be the same
as the phase CT. If, however, the connection is zero-sequence, the Ground CT secondary
and primary values must be entered.
The Ground Fault protection alarms or trips when the ground current magnitude exceeds
the set pickup for the set time.
A ground fault trip is a serious event, and therefore results in a lockout that cannot be reset
unless an Emergency Restart or a Lockout Reset is issued.
Various situations (e.g. contactor bounce) may cause transient ground currents during
motor starting that may exceed the Ground Fault pickup levels for a very short period of
time. The delay can be fine tuned to an application such that it still responds very quickly,
but rides through normal operational disturbances. Normally, the Ground Fault time delays
are set as short as possible, that is, 0.00 seconds. Time to trip may have to be increased if
nuisance tripping occurs.
Special care must be taken when the ground input is wired to the phase CTs in a residual
connection. When a motor starts, the starting current (typically 6 × FLA for an induction
motor) has an asymmetrical or DC component. This momentary DC component will cause
each of the phase CTs to react differently, and cause a net current into the ground input of
the relay. A 20 ms block of the ground fault elements when the motor starts normally
enables the relay to ride through this momentary ground current signal.
NOTE:
NOTE
The settings GND ALARM PKP and GND TRIP PKP are entered in units of ‘xCT’ if the setting
GROUND CT TYPE is programmed as “1A Secondary” or “5A Secondary,” or in units of ‘A’ if
the setting GROUND CT TYPE is programmed as “50:0.025”.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > GROUND FAULT
GND ALARM FUNC
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
This setting enables the Ground Fault Alarm functionality.
GND ALARM PKP
Ground CT Type = 1A Secondary, 5A Secondary:
Range: 0.03 to 1.00xCT in steps of 0.01xCT
Default: 0.10xCT
Ground CT Type = 50:0.025:
Range: 0.50 to 15.00 A in steps of 0.01 A
Default: 10.00 A
This setting specifies the Pickup threshold for the Alarm stage.
6–88
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S3 PROTECTION
GND ALARM ON RUN
Range: 0.00 to 60.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 0.00 s
This setting specifies the amount of time by which motor ground current must exceed
pickup to generate an alarm when the motor is in running condition.
GND ALARM ON START
Range: 0.00 to 60.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 0.00 s
This setting specifies the amount of time by which motor ground current must exceed
pickup to generate an alarm when the motor is in starting condition.
GND TRIP FUNC
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
This setting enables the Ground Fault Trip functionality.
GND TRIP PKP
Ground CT Type = 1A Secondary, 5A Secondary:
Range: 0.03 to 1.00xCT in steps of 0.01xCT
Default: 0.10xCT
Ground CT Type = 50:0.025:
Range: 0.50 to 15.00 A in steps of 0.01 A
Default: 10.00 A
This setting specifies the Pickup threshold for the Trip stage.
GND TRIP ON RUN
Range: 0.00 to 5.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 0.00 s
This setting specifies the amount of time by which motor ground current must exceed
pickup to generate a Trip when the motor is in running condition.
GND TRIP ON START
Range: 0.00 to 10.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 0.00 s
This setting specifies the amount of time by which motor ground current must exceed
pickup to generate a Trip when the motor is in starting condition.
OUTPUT RELAY 4 to 6 / OUTPUT RELAY 5 to 6
Range: Do not operate, Operate
Default: Do not operate
Any assignable output relay can be selected to operate upon Ground Fault operation.
When the SWITCHING DEVICE is selected as BREAKER, the assignable output relays will
be Output Relay 4 to 6. When the SWITCHING DEVICE is selected as CONTACTOR, the
assignable output relays will be Output Relay 5 to 6.
To select any assignable output relays to operate upon the Ground Fault Alarm
operation, assign the Logic Operand "GROUND FAULT ALARM OP" or "Any Alarm OP" to a
Logic Element.
BLOCK 1 to 3
Range: Off, Contact Input 1 to 10, Virtual Input 1 to 32, Remote Input 1 to 32, Logic
Element 1 to 16
Default: Off
Three blocking inputs are provided for the Ground Fault feature. When any of the
selected blocking inputs is on, the Ground Fault function is blocked.
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6–89
6–90
896821.cdr
Enabled = 1
Disabled = 0
SETTINGS
S3 GROUND FAULT
GND TRIP FUNC
OFF = 0
BLOCK 3
OFF = 0
OFF = 0
BLOCK 2
SETTINGS
S3 GROUND FAULT
BLOCK 1
Enabled = 1
Disabled = 0
SETTINGS
S3 GROUND FAULT
GND ALARM FUNC
1 A Secondary
5 A Secondary
50:0.025
SETTINGS
S2 CURRENT SENSING
GROUND CT TYPE
OR
OR
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
SETTING
SETTING
Running
Starting
MOTOR STATUS
Isg > PICKUP
Ig > PICKUP
RUN
RUN
Isg > PICKUP
Ig > PICKUP
GND TRIP PKP
S3 GROUND FAULT
RUN
RUN
GND ALARM PKP
S3 GROUND FAULT
OR
OR
tPKP
AND
AND
SETTING
tPKP
GND TRIP ON RUN
S3 GROUND FAULT
tPKP
GND TRIP ON START
S3 GROUND FAULT
SETTING
GND ALARM ON RUN
SETTING
Contactor
SETTING
S3 GROUND FAULT
tPKP
GND ALARM ON START
SWITCHING DEVICE
Breaker
SETTING
S3 GROUND FAULT
S2 SYSTEM SETUP
AND
AND
Off = 0
Reset
Off = 0
Lockout Reset
Off = 0
Emergency Restart
S4 CONTROLS
SETTINGS
Reset Input
Lockout Reset Input
Emergency Restart Input
INPUTS
KEYPAD RESET
0
0
0
0
AND
AND
AND
OR
OR
AND
OR
AND
OUTPUT RELAY 6
OUTPUT RELAY 5
OUTPUT RELAY 4
ASSIGNABLE AUX RELAYS
Operate
Output Relays OUTPUT RELAY 5
Upon
OUTPUT RELAY 6
Selection
Operate
Output Relays
Upon
Selection
ASSIGNABLE AUX RELAYS
AND
OR
OR
LATCH
NV
LATCH
R
S
R
S
TARGET MESSAGE
ANY TRIP PKP
GND FAULT TRIP OP
ANY TRIP OP
LOCKOUT OP
GND FAULT TRIP PKP
LOGIC OPERAND
Gnd Fault Trip
State: Operate
Gnd Fault Trip
State: Pickup
TARGET MESSAGE
LED: Lockout
ANY ALARM OP
GND FAULT ALM PKP
ANY ALARM PKP
GND FAULT ALARM OP
LOGIC OPERAND
Gnd Fault Alarm
State: Operate
Gnd Fault Alarm
State: Pickup
S3 PROTECTION
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
Figure 6-26: Ground Fault logic diagram
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S3 PROTECTION
Neutral instantaneous overcurrent
The relay has one Instantaneous Overcurrent protection. The settings of this function are
applied to the calculated neutral current for producing pickup and trip flags. The Neutral
IOC pickup flag is asserted, when the neutral current is above the PKP value. The Neutral
IOC operate flag is asserted if the element stays picked up for the time defined by the
Neutral IOC Delay setting. If the pickup time delay is set to 0.00 seconds, the pickup and
operate flags will be asserted at the same time. The element drops from pickup without
operation, if the neutral current drops below 96 to 99% of the pickup value.
The following path is available using the keypad. For instructions on how to use the
keypad, please refer to Chapter 3 - Working with the Keypad.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > NEUTRAL IOC
NTRL IOC1 FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Latched Alarm, Alarm, Trip
Default: Disabled
The selection of the Latched Alarm, Alarm, or Trip setting enables the Neutral IOC
function. The output relay #1 “Trip” will operate if the Neutral IOC function is selected as
Trip, and the neutral current calculated by the relay satisfies the operating condition set
by the settings. The “ALARM” LED will not turn on if the neutral IOC operates when set to
function Trip. The “ALARM” LED will flash upon Neutral IOC operation with the IOC
function selected as Alarm and will self-reset when this operation clears. If Latched
Alarm is selected as an IOC function, the “ALARM” LED will flash during IOC operation
and will stay “ON” after the operating condition clears, until the reset command is
initiated. The output relay #1 “Trip” will not operate if the Latched Alarm or Alarm
setting is selected. Any assignable output relay can be selected to operate when the
Neutral IOC function - Latched Alarm, Alarm, or Trip - is selected.
NTRL IOC PKP
Range: 0.05 to 20 x CT in steps of 0.01 x CT
Default: 1.00 x CT
This setting sets the neutral instantaneous overcurrent pickup level specified as times
CT.
NTRL IOC DELAY
Range: 0.00 to 300 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 0.00 s
This setting provides selection for the pickup time delay, used to delay the protection
operation.
NTRL IOC DIRECTION
Range: Disabled, Forward, Reverse
Default: Disabled
This setting provides control to the Neutral IOC function in terms of permitting operation
upon fault conditions in the selected current flow direction, and blocking it when faults
occur in the opposite direction.
OUTPUT RELAY 4 to 6 / OUTPUT RELAY 5 to 6
Range: Do not operate, Operate
Default: Do not operate
Any assignable output relay can be selected to operate upon Neutral IOC operation.
When the SWITCHING DEVICE is selected as BREAKER, the assignable output relays will
be Output Relay 4 to 6. When the SWITCHING DEVICE is selected as CONTACTOR, the
assignable output relays will be Output Relay 5 to 6.
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6–91
S3 PROTECTION
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
BLOCK 1 to 3
Range: Off, Contact Input 1 to 10, Virtual Input 1 to 32, Remote Input 1 to 32, Logic
Element 1 to 16
Default: Off
Three blocking inputs are provided for the Neutral IOC feature. When any of the selected
blocking inputs is on, the Neutral IOC function is blocked. The available selections for
each block can be any Contact input, Virtual Input, Remote Input, or Logic Element.
6–92
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
SETTING
SETTING
896830A1.cdr
Neutral Current (IN)
Current OK
Current in Reverse
From NEUTRAL DIRECTIONAL
Reverse
Disabled
Forward
NEUTRAL IOC DIRECTION
S3 NEUTRAL IOC
Off = 0
BLOCK 3:
Off = 0
BLOCK 2:
Off = 0
BLOCK 1:
S3 NEUTRAL IOC
Control
Trip
Alarm
Latched Alarm
Disabled = 0
NEUTRAL IOC FUNCTION
S3 NEUTRAL IOC
SETTING
AND
AND
OR
OR
AND
RUN
IN > PICKUP
NEUTRAL IOC PKP
S3 NEUTRAL IOC
SETTING
Off = 0
Reset
Off = 0
Lockout Reset
Off = 0
Emergency Restart
S4 CONTROLS
SETTINGS
Reset Input
Lockout Reset Input
Emergency Restart Input
INPUTS
KEYPAD RESET
SETTING
AND
tPKP
NEUTRAL IOC DELAY
S3 NEUTRAL IOC
SETTING
Contactor
Breaker
0
SWITCHING DEVICE
S2 SYSTEM SETUP
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
OR
R
S
OR
LATCH
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
R
S
OR
OR
LATCH
TARGET MESSAGE
OUTPUT RELAY 6
OUTPUT RELAY 5
OUTPUT RELAY 4
NEUTRAL IOC Trip
State: Pickup
NEUTRAL IOC Alarm
State: Pickup
TARGET MESSAGE
LEI PKP
ANY TRIP PKP
NEUTRAL IOC TRIP PKP
ANY ALARM PKP
NEUTRAL IOC ALARM PKP
LOGIC OPERAND
ASSIGNABLE AUX RELAYS
Operate
OUTPUT RELAY 5
Output Relays
Upon
OUTPUT RELAY 6
Selection
Operate
Output Relays
Upon
Selection
ASSIGNABLE AUX RELAYS
NEUTRAL IOC Trip
State: Operate
TARGET MESSAGE
LEI OP
ANY TRIP OP
NEUTRAL IOC TRIP OP
ANY LATCHED ALARM OP
ANY ALARM OP
NEUTRAL IOC ALARM OP
LOGIC OPERAND
NEUTRAL IOC Alarm
State: Operate
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S3 PROTECTION
Figure 6-27: Neutral Instantaneous Overcurrent logic diagram
6–93
S3 PROTECTION
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
Phase undervoltage
•
Undervoltage Protection: For voltage sensitive loads, such as induction motors, a
drop in voltage will result in an increase in the drawn current, which may cause
dangerous overheating in the motor. The undervoltage protection feature can be used
to either cause a trip or generate an alarm when the voltage drops below a specified
voltage setting for a specified time delay.
•
Permissive Functions: The undervoltage feature may be used to block the functioning
of external devices by operating an output relay, when the voltage falls below the
specified voltage setting. Note that all internal features that are inhibited by an
undervoltage condition, such as underfrequency and overfrequency, have their own
inhibit functions independent of the undervoltage protection features.
•
Source Transfer Schemes: In the event of an undervoltage, a transfer signal may be
generated to transfer a load from its normal source to a standby or emergency power
source.
The undervoltage elements can be programmed to have an inverse time delay
characteristic. The undervoltage delay setpoint defines a family of curves as shown below.
The operating time is given by:
D
1- V/Vpu
T=
Eq. 17
Where:
T = Operating Time
D = Undervoltage Delay setpoint
V = Voltage as a fraction of the nominal VT Secondary Voltage
Vpu = Pickup Level
NOTE:
NOTE
At 0% of pickup, the operating time equals the Undervoltage Delay setpoint.
Blocking the voltage based elements via the Block setting of the desired elements is highly
recommended if "VFD Not Bypassed" is asserted.
Figure 6-28: Inverse time undervoltage curves
D=5.0
20.0
2.0 1.0
18.0
Time (seconds)
16.0
14.0
12.0
10.0
8.0
6.0
4.0
2.0
0.0
0
10
20 30
40
50
60
70
80 90 100 110
% of V pickup
The following path is available using the keypad. For instructions on how to use the
keypad, please refer to Chapter 3 - Working with the Keypad.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > PHASE UV1(2)
6–94
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S3 PROTECTION
PH UV FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Alarm, Latched Alarm, Trip
Default: Disabled
The selection of the Latched Alarm, Alarm, or Trip setting enables the Phase
Undervoltage function. If the operating condition is satisfied when Trip is selected as the
function, the logic operand ANY TRIP OP will be asserted, which in turn will activate the
“TRIP” LED and operate the “Trip” output relay. If Alarm is selected, the “ALARM” LED will
flash upon Phase Undervoltage operation, and will automatically reset when the
activating condition clears. If Latched Alarm is selected, the “ALARM” LED will flash upon
Phase Undervoltage operation, and will stay “ON” after the condition clears, until a reset
command is initiated. The TRIP output relay will not operate if the Latched Alarm or
Alarm function is selected. Any assignable output relays can be selected to operate
when the setting PH UV FUNCTION is selected as Latched Alarm, Alarm, or Trip.
PH UV PKP
Range: 0.00 to 1.25 x VT in steps of 0.01
Default: 0.75 x VT
This setting defines the phase UV pickup level, and it is usually set to a level, below which
the drawn current may cause dangerous motor overheating conditions.
PH UV CURVE
Range: Definite Time, Inverse Time
Default: Inverse Time
This setting selects the type of timing-inverse time/definite time to define the time of
undervoltage operation based on the selected UV time delay, and the actual
undervoltage condition with respect to the selected UV pickup.
PH UV DELAY
Range: 0.1 to 600.0 sec in steps of 0.1 sec
Default: 2.0 s
This setting specifies the time delay used by the selected “PHASE UV CURVE” type of
timing, to calculate the time before UV operation.
PH UV PHASES
Range: Any One, Any Two, All Three
Default: Any One
This setting selects the combination of undervoltage conditions with respect to the
number of phase voltages under the undervoltage pickup setting. Selection of “Any Two”
or “All Three” would effectively rule out the case of single VT fuse failure.
PH UV MIN VOLTAGE
Range: 0.00 to 1.25 x VT in steps of 0.01
Default: 0.30 x VT
The minimum operating voltage level is programmable to prevent undesired UV
operation before voltage becomes available.
OUTPUT RELAY 4 to 6 / OUTPUT RELAY 5 to 6
Range: Do not operate, Operate
Default: Do not operate
Any assignable output relay can be selected to operate upon Phase Undervoltage
operation. When the SWITCHING DEVICE is selected as BREAKER, the assignable output
relays will be Output Relay 4 to 6. When the SWITCHING DEVICE is selected as
CONTACTOR, the assignable output relays will be Output Relay 5 to 6.
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6–95
S3 PROTECTION
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
BLOCK 1/2/3
Range: Off, Contact Input 1 to 10, Virtual Input1 to 32, Remote Input 1 to 32, Logic Element
1 to 16
Default:Off
Three blocking inputs are provided for Phase UV. When any of the selected blocking
inputs is on, the Phase UV function is blocked. The available selections for each block can
be any Contact input, Virtual Input, Remote Input, or Logic Element.
6–96
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
SETTING
Vbc
Vbn
896831.cdr
Vcn or Vca > Minimum
Vbn or Vbc > Minimum
Van or Vab > Minimum
RUN
RUN
AND
PH UV MIN VOLTAGE:
RUN
PICKUP
PICKUP
PICKUP
PH UV DELAY:
PH UV CURVE:
PH UV PICKUP:
Off = 0
Reset
Any Two
All Three
Any Two
Any One
All Three
Contactor
Breaker
SWITCHING DEVICE
S2 SYSTEM SETUP
SETTING
Pickup for
programmed
combination
Operate for
programmed
combination
PH UV PHASES
S3 PHASE UV
Any One
AND
SETTING
AND
AND
OR
S3 PHASE UV
SETTING
AND
SETTING
S3 PHASE UV
AND
Vca
Vab
Van
OR
OR
AND
896831.cdr
Vcn
Delta
Wye
VT CONNECTION
S2 SYSTEM SETUP
Off = 0
BLOCK 3:
Off = 0
BLOCK 2:
Off = 0
BLOCK 1:
S3 PHASE UV
Trip
Alarm
Latched Alarm
Disabled = 0
PH UV FUNCTION
S3 PHASE UV
SETTING
Off = 0
Lockout Reset
Off = 0
Emergency Restart
S4 CONTROLS
SETTINGS
Reset Input
Lockout Reset Input
Emergency Restart Input
INPUTS
KEYPAD RESET
AND
AND
AND
OR
R
S
AND
AND
OR
LATCH
AND
AND
R
S
OR
OR
LOGIC OPERAND
PH UV Trip
State: Pickup
PH UV Alarm
State: Pickup
TARGET MESSAGE
ANY TRIP PKP
PH UV TRIP PKP
ANY ALARM PKP
PH UV ALARM PKP
LOGIC OPERAND
PH UV Trip
State: Operate
TARGET MESSAGE
ANY TRIP OP
PH UV TRIP OP
ANY LATCHED ALARM OP
ANY ALARM OP
PH UV ALARM OP
OUTPUT RELAY 6
OUTPUT RELAY 5
OUTPUT RELAY 4
ASSIGNABLE AUX RELAYS
Operate
Output Relays OUTPUT RELAY 5
Upon
OUTPUT RELAY 6
Selection
Operate
Output Relays
Upon
Selection
ASSIGNABLE AUX RELAYS
LATCH
TARGET MESSAGE
PH UV Alarm
State: Operate
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S3 PROTECTION
Figure 6-29: Phase Undervoltage logic diagram
OR
6–97
S3 PROTECTION
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
Phase overvoltage
An overvoltage on a running motor with a constant load results in decreased current.
However, iron and copper losses increase, causing an increase in motor temperature. The
current overload element will not pickup this condition and provide adequate protection.
Therefore, the overvoltage element may be useful for protecting the motor in the event of
a sustained overvoltage condition. The 339 provides 2 Phase Overvoltage elements. Each
element can be set to either cause a trip or generate an alarm when the input voltage
exceeds the pickup level for a specified time delay. If it is desirable to have an alarm before
a trip occurs, the user can set the function of one Phase Overvoltage element to ALARM,
and the function of the other element to TRIP. For wye-connected VT, the input voltage is
phase-to-ground voltage; for delta-connected VT, the input voltage is phase-to-phase
voltage. The Phase Overvoltage operation can be set for phase combinations including
“Any One”, “Any Two” and “All Three”. If overvoltage tripping is enabled, and the setting PH
OV PHASES is set for “Any One”, a trip will occur once the magnitude of any input voltage
(wye-connected VT: phase-to-ground voltage; delta-connected VT: phase-to-phase
voltage) exceeds the pickup level for a period of time specified by the time delay. On the
other hand, if overvoltage trip is enabled, and the setting PH OV PHASES is set for “All
Three”, a trip will occur only when the magnitudes of all three input voltages exceed the
pickup level for a period of time specified by the time delay.
The following path is available using the keypad. For instructions on how to use the
keypad, please refer to Chapter 3 - Working with the Keypad.
Blocking the voltage based elements via the Block setting of the desired elements is highly
recommended if "VFD Not Bypassed" is asserted.
NOTE:
NOTE
PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > PHASE OV1(2)
PH OV FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Alarm, Latched Alarm, Trip
Default: Disabled
The selection of the Latched Alarm, Alarm, or Trip setting enables the Phase
Overvoltage function. If the operating condition is satisfied when Trip is selected as the
function, the logic operand ANY TRIP OP will be asserted, which in turn will activate the
“TRIP” LED and operate the “Trip” output relay. If Alarm is selected, the “ALARM” LED will
flash upon Phase Overvoltage operation, and will automatically reset when the
activating condition clears. If Latched Alarm is selected, the “ALARM” LED will flash upon
Phase Overvoltage operation, and will stay “ON” after the condition clears, until a reset
command is initiated. The TRIP output relay will not operate if the Latched Alarm or
Alarm function is selected. Any assignable output relays can be selected to operate
when the setting PH OV FUNCTION is selected as Latched Alarm, Alarm, or Trip.
PH OV PKP
Range: 0.00 to 1.25 x VT in steps of 0.01
Default: 1.25 x VT
This setting defines the Phase OV pickup level.
PH OV DELAY
Range: 0.1 to 600.0 sec in steps of 0.1
Default: 2.0 s
This setting specifies the time delay before Phase OV operation.
PH OV PHASES
Range: Any One, Any Two, All Three
Default: All Three
This setting selects the combination of overvoltage conditions with respect to the
number of phase voltages over the overvoltage pickup setting.
6–98
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S3 PROTECTION
OUTPUT RELAY 4 to 6 / OUTPUT RELAY 5 to 6
Range: Do not operate, Operate
Default: Do not operate
Any assignable output relay can be selected to operate upon Phase Overvoltage
operation. When the SWITCHING DEVICE is selected as BREAKER, the assignable output
relays will be Output Relay 4 to 6. When the SWITCHING DEVICE is selected as
CONTACTOR, the assignable output relays will be Output Relay 5 to 6.
BLOCK 1/2/3
Range: Off, Contact Input 1 to 10, Virtual Input 1 to 32, Remote Input 1 to 32, Logic
Element 1 to 16
Default: Off
Three blocking inputs are provided for Phase OV. When any of the selected blocking
inputs is on, the Phase OV function is blocked. The available selections for each block can
be any Contact input, Virtual Input, Remote Input, or Logic Element.
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6–99
SETTING
Vbc
Vbn
896832.cdr
Vca
Vab
Van
896831.cdr
Vcn
Delta
Wye
Phase Voltage Inputs
(associated setpoints)
Off = 0
BLOCK 3:
Off = 0
BLOCK 2:
Off = 0
BLOCK 1:
S3 PHASE OV
Trip
Alarm
Latched Alarm
Disabled = 0
PH OV FUNCTION
S3 PHASE OV
SETTING
OR
OR
AND
Vcn or V ca > PICKUP
RUN
Vbn or Vbc > PICKUP
RUN
Van or Vab > PICKUP
RUN
PH OV DELAY:
PH OV PICKUP:
S3 PHASE OV
SETTING
Operate for
programmed
combination
PH OV PHASES
S3 PHASE OV
All Three
Any Two
Any One
SETTING
Off = 0
Reset
Off = 0
Lockout Reset
Off = 0
Emergency Restart
S4 CONTROLS
SETTINGS
Lockout Reset Input
Emergency Restart Input
Reset Input
6–100
INPUTS
KEYPAD RESET
PH OV DELAY
Contactor
Breaker
SWITCHING DEVICE
S2 SYSTEM SETUP
SETTING
tPKP
AND
SETTING
AND
S3 PHASE OV
AND
AND
AND
AND
OR
R
S
AND
AND
OR
LATCH
AND
AND
R
S
OR
OR
LOGIC OPERAND
PH OV Trip
State: Pickup
PH OV Alarm
State: Pickup
TARGET MESSAGE
ANY TRIP PKP
PH OV TRIP PKP
ANY ALARM PKP
PH OV ALARM PKP
LOGIC OPERAND
PH OV Trip
State: Operate
TARGET MESSAGE
ANY TRIP OP
PH OV TRIP OP
ANY LATCHED ALARM OP
ANY ALARM OP
PH OV ALARM OP
OUTPUT RELAY 6
OUTPUT RELAY 5
OUTPUT RELAY 4
ASSIGNABLE AUX RELAYS
Operate
Output Relays OUTPUT RELAY 5
Upon
OUTPUT RELAY 6
Selection
Operate
Output Relays
Upon
Selection
ASSIGNABLE AUX RELAYS
LATCH
TARGET MESSAGE
PH OV Alarm
State: Operate
S3 PROTECTION
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
Figure 6-30: Phase Overvoltage logic diagram
OR
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S3 PROTECTION
Underfrequency
The 339 provides 2 Underfrequency Protection elements. Each element can be set to either
cause a trip or generate an alarm when the frequency of the input voltage (wye-connected
VT: VAN; delta-connected VT: VAB) drops below the pickup level for a specified time delay. If
it is desirable to have an alarm before a trip occurs, the user can set the function of one
Underfrequency element to ALARM, and the function of another element to TRIP.
The Underfrequency element is blocked VAN is below the set MIN VOLTAGE. This setting
may be used to prevent nuisance alarms or trips when the bus is not energized. If a dead
source is desirable to be considered as a fault condition, set this setting to “0.00xVT”.
This feature may be useful for load shedding applications on large motors. It could also be
used to load shed an entire feeder if the trip was assigned to an upstream breaker.
Underfrequency can also be used to detect loss of power to a synchronous motor. Due to
motor generation, sustained voltage may prevent quick detection of power loss. Therefore,
to quickly detect the loss of system power, the decaying frequency of the generated
voltage as the motor slows can be used.
The following path is available using the keypad. For instructions on how to use the
keypad, please refer to Chapter 3 - Working with the Keypad.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > UNDER-FREQUENCY1(2)
NOTE:
NOTE
When "VFD Not Bypassed" is asserted, frequency source is software calculated from the
phase A current. The underfrequency element is inhibited from operating unless this
current is above 10% of nominal.
UNDRFREQ 1(2) FUNC
Range: Disabled, Alarm, Latched Alarm, Trip
Default: Disabled
The selection of the Latched Alarm, Alarm, or Trip setting enables the Underfrequency
function. If the operating condition is satisfied when Trip is selected as the function, the
logic operand ANY TRIP OP will be asserted, which in turn will activate the “TRIP” LED and
operate the “Trip” output relay. If Alarm is selected, the “ALARM” LED will flash upon
Underfrequency operation, and will automatically reset when the activating condition
clears. If Latched Alarm is selected, the "ALARM” LED will flash upon Underfrequency
operation, and will stay “ON” after the condition clears, until a reset command is
initiated. The TRIP output relay will not operate if the Latched Alarm or Alarm function is
selected. Any assignable output relays can be selected to operate when the setting
UNDRFREQ FUNC is selected as Latched Alarm, Alarm, or Trip.
UNDERFREQ PKP
Range: 40.00 to 70.00 Hz in steps of 0.01 Hz
Default: 59.00 Hz
This setting defines the Underfrequency pickup level; it is usually set to a frequency level
considered dangerous for the stability of the system.
UNDRFREQ DELAY
Range: 0.1 to 600.0 sec in steps of 0.1 sec
Default: 2.0 s
This setting specifies the time delay before Underfrequency operation.
MIN VOLTAGE
Range: 0.00 to 1.25 x VT in steps of 0.01 x VT
Default: 0.70 x VT
The minimum operating voltage level is programmable to prevent undesired
Underfrequency operation before voltage VAN becomes available, such as on faults
cleared by downstream protection or fuses. This setting is not used in VFD mode.
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6–101
S3 PROTECTION
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
OUTPUT RELAY 4 to 6 / OUTPUT RELAY 5 to 6
Range: Do not operate, Operate
Default: Do not operate
Any assignable output relay can be selected to operate upon Underfrequency operation.
When the SWITCHING DEVICE is selected as BREAKER, the assignable output relays will
be Output Relay 4 to 6. When the SWITCHING DEVICE is selected as CONTACTOR, the
assignable output relays will be Output Relay 5 to 6.
BLOCK 1 to 3
Range: Off, Contact Input 1 to 10, Virtual Input 1 to 32, Remote Input 1 to 32, Logic
Element 1 to 16
Default: Off
Three blocking inputs are provided for the Underfrequency feature. When any of the
selected blocking inputs is on, the Underfrequency function is blocked. The available
selections for each block can be any Contact input, Virtual Input, Remote Input, or Logic
Element.
6–102
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
SETTING
Vab
Van
896833.cdr
Delta
Wye
Phase Voltage Inputs
(associated setpoints)
Off = 0
BLOCK 3:
Off = 0
BLOCK 2:
Off = 0
BLOCK 1:
S3 UNDERFREQUENCY
Trip
Alarm
Latched Alarm
Disabled = 0
UNDRFREQ FUNC
S3 UNDERFREQUENCY
SETTING
OR
SETTING
f=0
Wye-connected VT: Van
Delta-connected VT: Vab
Frequency Measurement
Van > Minimum
MIN VOLTAGE
S3 UNDERFREQUENCY
OR
AND
RUN
f < PICKUP
UNDRFREQ PICKUP:
S3 UNDERFREQUENCY
SETTING
SETTING
Contactor
Breaker
SWITCHING DEVICE
S2 SYSTEM SETUP
tPKP
UNDRFREQ DELAY
S3 UNDERFREQUENCY
SETTING
Off = 0
Reset
Off = 0
Lockout Reset
Off = 0
Emergency Restart
S4 CONTROLS
SETTINGS
Reset Input
Lockout Reset Input
Emergency Restart Input
INPUTS
KEYPAD RESET
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
OR
R
S
AND
AND
OR
LATCH
AND
AND
R
S
OR
OR
LOGIC OPERAND
UNDRFREQ Trip
State: Pickup
UNDRFREQ Alarm
State: Pickup
TARGET MESSAGE
ANY TRIP PKP
UNDRFREQ TRIP PKP
ANY ALARM PKP
UNDRFREQ ALARM PKP
LOGIC OPERAND
UNDRFREQ Trip
State: Operate
TARGET MESSAGE
ANY TRIP OP
UNDRFREQ TRIP OP
ANY LATCHED ALARM OP
ANY ALARM OP
UNDRFREQ ALARM OP
OUTPUT RELAY 6
OUTPUT RELAY 5
OUTPUT RELAY 4
ASSIGNABLE AUX RELAYS
Operate
Output Relays OUTPUT RELAY 5
Upon
OUTPUT RELAY 6
Selection
Operate
Output Relays
Upon
Selection
ASSIGNABLE AUX RELAYS
LATCH
TARGET MESSAGE
UNDRFREQ Alarm
State: Operate
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S3 PROTECTION
Figure 6-31: Underfrequency logic diagram
6–103
S3 PROTECTION
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
Overfrequency
The 339 provides 2 Overfrequency Protection elements. Each element can be set to either
cause a trip or generate an alarm when the frequency of the input voltage (wye-connected
VT: Van; delta-connected VT: Vab) exceeds the pickup level for a specified time delay. If it is
desirable to have an alarm before a trip occurs, the user can set the function of one
Overfrequency element to ALARM, and the function of the other element to TRIP.
This feature may be useful for load shedding applications on large motors. It could also be
used to load shed an entire feeder if the trip was assigned to an upstream breaker.
The overfrequency feature is inhibited from operating unless the phase A voltage is above
30% of nominal. When the supply source is energized, the overfrequency delay timer will
only be allowed to time when the 30% threshold is exceeded and the frequency is above
the programmed pickup level. In the same way, when an overfrequency condition starts
the overfrequency delay timer and the phase A voltage falls below the 30% threshold
before the timer has expired, the element will reset without operating.
The following path is available using the keypad. For instructions on how to use the
keypad, please refer to Chapter 3 - Working with the Keypad.
NOTE:
NOTE
When "VFD Not Bypassed" is asserted, frequency source is software calculated from the
phase A current. The overfrequency element is inhibited from operating unless this current
is above 10% of nominal. A minium voltage is not required.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > OVER-FREQUENCY1(2)
OVERFREQ FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Alarm, Latched Alarm, Trip
Default: Disabled
The selection of Latched Alarm, Alarm, or Trip setting enables the Overfrequency
Function. If the operating condition is satisfied when Trip is selected as the function, the
logic operand ANY TRIP OP will be asserted, which in turn will activate the “TRIP” LED and
operate the “Trip” output relay. If Alarm is selected, the “ALARM” LED will flash upon
overfrequency operation, and will automatically reset when the activating condition
clears. If Latched Alarm is selected, the “ALARM” LED will flash upon overfrequency
operation, and will stay “ON” after the condition clears, until a reset command is
initiated. The TRIP output relay will not operate if the Latched Alarm or Alarm function is
selected. Any assignable output relays can be selected to operate when the setting
OVERFREQ FUNC is selected as Latched Alarm, Alarm, or Trip.
OVERFREQ PKP
Range: 40.00 to 70.00 Hz in steps of 0.01
Default: 60.50 Hz
This setting defines the Overfrequency pickup level, and it is usually set to a frequency
level considered dangerous for the stability of the system.
OVERFREQ DELAY
Range: 0.1 to 600.0 s in steps of 0.1
Default: 2.0 s
This setting specifies the time delay before overfrequency operation.
OUTPUT RELAY 4 to 6 / OUTPUT RELAY 5 to 6
Range: Do not operate, Operate
Default: Do not operate
Any assignable output relay can be selected to operate upon Overfrequency operation.
When the SWITCHING DEVICE is selected as BREAKER, the assignable output relays will
be Output Relay 4 to 6. When the SWITCHING DEVICE is selected as CONTACTOR, the
assignable output relays will be Output Relay 5 to 6.
6–104
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S3 PROTECTION
BLOCK 1 to 3
Range: Off, Contact Input 1 to 10, Virtual Input 1 to 32, Remote Input 1 to 32, Logic
Element 1 to 16
Default: Off
Three blocking inputs are provided for the Overfrequency feature. When any of the
selected blocking inputs is on, the Overfrequency function is blocked. The available
selections for each block can be any Contact input, Virtual Input, Remote Input, or Logic
Element.
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6–105
6–106
SETTING
Vab
Van
896836.cdr
Delta
Wye
Phase Voltage Inputs
(associated setpoints)
Off = 0
BLOCK 3:
Off = 0
BLOCK 2:
Off = 0
BLOCK 1:
S3 OVERFREQUENCY
Trip
Alarm
Latched Alarm
Disabled = 0
OVERFREQ FUNC
S3 OVERFREQUENCY
SETTING
OR
Van < 0.3 x VT
Wye-connected VT: Van
Delta-connected VT: Vab
Frequency Measurement
OR
AND
SETTING
RUN
f > PICKUP
OVERFREQ PICKUP:
S3 OVERFREQUENCY
SETTING
Contactor
Breaker
SWITCHING DEVICE
S2 SYSTEM SETUP
tPKP
OVERFREQ DELAY
S3 OVERFREQUENCY
SETTING
Off = 0
Reset
Off = 0
Lockout Reset
Off = 0
Emergency Restart
S4 CONTROLS
SETTINGS
Reset Input
Lockout Reset Input
Emergency Restart Input
INPUTS
KEYPAD RESET
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
OR
R
S
AND
AND
OR
LATCH
AND
AND
R
S
OR
OR
LOGIC OPERAND
OVERFREQ Trip
State: Pickup
OVERFREQ Alarm
State: Pickup
TARGET MESSAGE
ANY TRIP PKP
OVERFREQ TRIP PKP
ANY ALARM PKP
OVERFREQ ALARM PKP
LOGIC OPERAND
OVERFREQ Trip
State: Operate
TARGET MESSAGE
ANY TRIP OP
OVERFREQ TRIP OP
ANY LATCHED ALARM OP
ANY ALARM OP
OVERFREQ ALARM OP
OUTPUT RELAY 6
OUTPUT RELAY 5
OUTPUT RELAY 4
ASSIGNABLE AUX RELAYS
Operate
Output Relays OUTPUT RELAY 5
Upon
OUTPUT RELAY 6
Selection
Operate
Output Relays
Upon
Selection
ASSIGNABLE AUX RELAYS
LATCH
TARGET MESSAGE
OVERFREQ Alarm
State: Operate
S3 PROTECTION
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
Figure 6-32: Overfrequency logic diagram
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S3 PROTECTION
Underpower
The Underpower element responds to total three-phase real power measured from the
phase currents and voltages.
When the motor is in the running state, a trip or/and alarm will occur once the magnitude
of three-phase real power falls below the pickup level for a period of time specified by the
Delay. The pickup levels are based on Motor Nameplate Rated Power (MNR) and should be
set lower than the lowest motor loading during normal operations.
For example, underpower may be used to detect loss of load conditions. Loss of load
conditions will not always cause a significant loss of current. Power is a more accurate
representation of loading and may be used for more sensitive detection of load loss or
pump cavitations. This may be especially useful for detecting process related problems.
The Underpower element is blocked if the VT Fuse Fail element is active; indicating which
valid voltage inputs are not available due to fuse failure.
NOTE:
NOTE
NOTE:
NOTE
A Block Underpower on Start feature is available to the user. The Block Underpower
element is active only when the motor is running and is blocked upon the initiation of a
motor start for a period of time defined by the setting BLK U/P ON START. This block may be
used to allow pumps to build up head before the underpower element trips or alarms.
Blocking this unit via the Block setting is highly recommended if "VFD Not Bypassed" is
asserted.
NOTE:
NOTE
PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > UNDERPOWER
U/POWER ALARM FUNC
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
This setting enables the Underpower Alarm functionality.
BLK U/P ON START
Range: 0 to 60 s in steps of 1 s
Default: 0 s
This setting specifies the length of time to block the underpower function when motor is
starting. The underpower element is active only when the motor is running and is
blocked upon the initiation of a motor start for a period of time specified by this setting.
A value of 0 specifies that the feature is not blocked from start.
U/POWER ALARM PKP
Range: 1% to 100% MNR
Default: 70% MNR
This setting specifies a pickup threshold for the Alarm stage. The alarm pickup threshold
should be less than the motor load during normal operation.
U/POWER ALARM DLY
Range: 0.1 to 60.0 s in steps of 0.1 s
Default: 0.1 s
This setting specifies a time delay for the alarm stage. The time delay should be long
enough to overcome any short lowering of the load (e.g. during system faults).
U/POWER TRIP FUNC
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
This setting enables the Underpower Trip functionality.
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6–107
S3 PROTECTION
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
U/POWER TRIP PKP
Range: 1% to 100% MNR
Default: 60% MNR
This setting specifies a pickup threshold for the trip stage. This setting is typically set at a
level less than the corresponding setting for the alarm stage.
U/POWER TRIP DLY
Range: 0.1 to 60.0 s in steps of 0.1 s
Default: 0.1 s
This setting specifies a time delay for the trip stage. The time delay should be long
enough to overcome any short lowering of the load (e.g. during system faults).
OUTPUT RELAY 4 to 6 / OUTPUT RELAY 5 to 6
Range: Do Not Operate, Operate
Default: Do Not Operate
Any assignable output relay can be selected to operate upon underpower operation.
When the SWITCHING DEVICE is selected as BREAKER, the assignable output relays will
be Output Relay 4 to 6. When the SWITCHING DEVICE is selected as CONTACTOR, the
assignable output relays will be Output Relay 5 to 6.
To select any assignable output relays to operate upon the Underpower Alarm
operation, assign the Logic Operand "UNDERPOWER ALARM OP" or "Any Alarm OP" to a
Logic Element.
BLOCK 1 to 3
Range: Off, Contact Input 1 to 10, Virtual Input 1 to 32, Remote Input 1 to 32, Logic
Element 1 to 16
Default: Off
There are three blocking inputs provided for the underpower feature. When any of the
selected blocking inputs is on, the underpower function is blocked.
6–108
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Vbc
Vca
Delta
Vab
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
896822.CDR
SETTING
S3 UNDERPOWER
U/POWER TRIP FUNC
ENABLED = 1
DISABLED = 0
OFF = 0
BLOCK 3
OFF = 0
OFF = 0
BLOCK 2
SETTINGS
S3 UNDERPOWER
BLOCK 1
Running
MOTOR STATUS
Stopped
LOGIC OPERAND
Fuse Failure
SETTINGS
S3 UNDERPOWER
U/POWER ALARM FUNC
ENABLED = 1
DISABLED = 0
ACTUAL VALUE
IA
IB
IC
Vbn
Vcn
VT CONNECTION
Wye
Van
SETTINGS
S2 VOLTAGE SENSING
OR
tBLK
BLK U/P ON START
S3 UNDERPOWER
SETTINGS
0
AND
AND
AND
P3ph < Pickup
Pop < Pickup
Pop = Pa + Pb + Pc
U/POWER TRIP PKP
RUN
SETTING
S2 SYSTEM SETUP
SWITCHING DEVICE
Breaker
Contactor
P3ph = Pa + Pb + Pc
SETTING
S3 UNDERPOWER
RUN
SETTINGS
S3 UNDERPOWER
U/POWER ALARM PICKUP
INPUTS
KEYPAD RESET
Off = 0
Reset
Off = 0
Lockout Reset
Off = 0
Emergency Restart
S4 CONTROLS
SETTINGS
Reset Input
Lockout Reset Input
Emergency Restart Input
tPKP
U/POWER TRIP DLY
SETTINGS
S3 UNDERPOWER
tPKP
U/POWER ALARM DELAY
SETTINGS
S3 UNDERPOWER
0
0
AND
AND
AND
AND
ASSIGNABLE AUX RELAYS
AND
OR
ASSIGNABLE AUX RELAYS
Operate
OUTPUT RELAY 5
output relays
upon selection OUTPUT RELAY 6
OUTPUT RELAY 4
Operate
output relays OUTPUT RELAY 5
upon selection
OUTPUT RELAY 6
S
R
LATCH
TARGET MESSAGE
ANY TRIP PKP
U/POWER TRIP OP
ANY TRIP OP
U/POWER TRIP PKP
LOGIC OPERAND
Underpower Trip
State: Operate
Underpower Trip
State: Pickup
TARGET MESSAGE
ANY ALARM OP
U/POWER ALARM PKP
ANY ALARM PKP
U/POWER ALARM OP
LOGIC OPERAND
Underpower Alarm
State: Operate
Underpower Alarm
State: Pickup
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S3 PROTECTION
Figure 6-33: Underpower logic diagram
6–109
S3 PROTECTION
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
Negative sequence overvoltage
The relay has one Negative Sequence Overvoltage element. The negative sequence
overvoltage may be used to detect the loss of one, or two phases of the source, a reversed
voltage phase sequence, or non-system voltage conditions.
The following path is available using the keypad. For instructions on how to use the
keypad, please refer to Chapter 3 - Working with the Keypad.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > NEGATIVE SEQ OV
NEG SEQ OV FUNCTN
Range: Disabled, Alarm, Latched Alarm, Trip
Default: Disabled
The selection of the Latched Alarm, Alarm, or Trip setting enables the Negative
Sequence OV function. The output relay #1 “Trip” will operate, if the function is selected
as a Trip and the negative sequence voltage computed by the relay is above the NEG
SEQ OV PKP setting for a time greater than the selected NEG SEQ OV DELAY time. The
“ALARM” LED will not turn on if the neg. sequence OV function is set to Trip. The “ALARM”
LED will flash upon an OV operating condition with the neg. sequence OV function
selected as Alarm, and will self-reset, when the operating condition clears. If Latched
Alarm is selected as a Neg. Seq. OV function, the “ALARM” LED will flash during the OV
condition, and will stay “ON” after the condition clears, until the reset command is
initiated. The output relay #1 “Trip” will not operate if the Latched Alarm or Alarm
setting is selected. Any or all of the output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate when
the NEG SEQ OV FUNCTN is selected as Latched Alarm, Alarm, or Trip.
NEG SEQ OV PKP
Range: 0.00 to 1.25 x VT in steps of 0.01
Default: 0.30 x VT
This setting defines the negative sequence OV pickup level.
NEG SEQ OV DELAY
Range: 0.1 to 600.0 sec in steps of 0.1 sec
Default: 2.0 s
This setting specifies the time delay before negative sequence OV operation.
OUTPUT RELAY 4 to 6 / OUTPUT RELAY 5 to 6
Range: Do not operate, Operate
Default: Do not operate
Any assignable output relay can be selected to operate upon Negative Sequence
Overvoltage operation. When the SWITCHING DEVICE is selected as BREAKER, the
assignable output relays will be Output Relay 4 to 6. When the SWITCHING DEVICE is
selected as CONTACTOR, the assignable output relays will be Output Relay 5 to 6.
BLOCK 1/2/3
Range: Off, Contact Input 1 to 10, Virtual Input 1 to 32, Remote Input 1 to 32, Logic
Element 1 to 16
Default: Off
Three blocking inputs are provided for Negative Sequence Overvoltage. When any of the
selected blocking inputs is on, the NEG SEQ OV function is blocked. The available
selections for each block can be any Contact input, Virtual Input, Remote Input, or Logic
Element.
6–110
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
OR
AND
896835.cdr
896831.cdr
Vcn
Vca
Vbc
Vab
Van
Vbn
Delta
Wye
Phase Voltage Inputs
(associated setpoints)
Off = 0
BLOCK 3:
Off = 0
BLOCK 2:
RUN
V2 > PICKUP
NEG SEQ OV PKP:
Off = 0
BLOCK 1:
SETTING
S3 NEGATIVE SEQ OV
SETTING
OR
S3 NEGATIVE SEQ OV
Trip
Alarm
Latched Alarm
Disabled = 0
NEG SEQ OV FUNCTN
S3 NEGATIVE SEQ OV
SETTING
SETTING
Contactor
Breaker
SWITCHING DEVICE
S2 SYSTEM SETUP
tPKP
NEG SEQ OV DELAY
S3 NEGATIVE SEQ OV
SETTING
Off = 0
Reset
Off = 0
Lockout Reset
Off = 0
Emergency Restart
S4 CONTROLS
SETTINGS
Reset Input
Lockout Reset Input
Emergency Restart Input
INPUTS
KEYPAD RESET
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
OR
R
S
AND
AND
OR
LATCH
AND
AND
R
S
OR
OR
LOGIC OPERAND
NEG SEQ OV Trip
State: Pickup
NEG SEQ OV Alarm
State: Pickup
TARGET MESSAGE
ANY TRIP PKP
NEG SEQ OV TRIP PKP
ANY ALARM PKP
NEG SEQ OV ALARM PKP
LOGIC OPERAND
NEG SEQ OV Trip
State: Operate
TARGET MESSAGE
ANY TRIP OP
NEG SEQ OV TRIP OP
ANY LATCHED ALARM OP
ANY ALARM OP
NEG SEQ OV ALARM OP
OUTPUT RELAY 6
OUTPUT RELAY 5
OUTPUT RELAY 4
ASSIGNABLE AUX RELAYS
Operate
Output Relays OUTPUT RELAY 5
Upon
OUTPUT RELAY 6
Selection
Operate
Output Relays
Upon
Selection
ASSIGNABLE AUX RELAYS
LATCH
TARGET MESSAGE
NEG SEQ OV Alarm
State: Operate
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S3 PROTECTION
Figure 6-34: Negative Sequence Overvoltage logic diagram
6–111
S3 PROTECTION
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
Phase reversal
The 339 can detect the phase rotation of the three phase voltages. When all three Phase to
Phase Voltages (Vab, Vbc and Vca) are greater than 50% of the Motor Rated Voltage, if the
phase rotation of the three phase voltages is not the same as the Supply Rotation setpoint,
and there is no fuse failure, either an alarm or a trip and a Start Inhibit will occur within
100ms.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > PHASE REVERSAL
PHASE REVERSAL
Range: Disabled, Alarm, Trip
Default: Disabled
Sets the Phase Reversal action.
Figure 6-35: Phase Reversal Protection logic diagram
SETTING
Supply Rotation
Vab
Vbc
Vca
Phase Reversed
LOGIC OPERAND
Fuse Fail
AND
0.1 s
AND
0
TARGET MESSAGE
PH Reversal Alarm
State: Operate
ACTUAL VALUE
PH Reversal Trip
State: Operate
Vab > 50% x Rated
Vbc > 50% x Rated
LOGIC OPERAND
PH Reversal Alarm
Any Alarm Op
AND
Vca > 50% x Rated
AND
S
LATCH
R
SETTING
Phase Reversal
= Disabled
= Alarm
= Trip
LOGIC OPERAND
PH Reversal Trip
Any Trip Op
Set Dominant
AND
MOTOR STATUS
Running
LOGIC OPERAND
PH Rvrsl Inhibit
Any Start Inhibit
KEYPAD RESET
INPUTS
Emergency Restart Input
OR
AND
Lockout Reset Input
Reset Input
AND
AND
SETTINGS
S4 CONTROLS
Emergency Restart
Off = 0
Lockout Reset
Off = 0
896838.cdr
Reset
Off = 0
VT fuse fail
If one or two of the three phase to phase voltages drops to less than 70% of nominal, and
at the same time any of the three voltages is greater than 85%, either an alarm or a trip
and Start Inhibit will occur after a 1 second delay. The 70% threshold allows for the
possibility that the voltage downstream from a blown fuse is pulled up above zero by
devices connected between the open fuse and another phase.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > VT FUSE FAILURE
FUSE FAIL FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Alarm, Trip
Default: Trip
Sets the Fuse Fail action.
6–112
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S3 PROTECTION
Figure 6-36: Fuse Fail Protection logic diagram
VOLTAGE INPUTS
Vab < 70%
Vbc < 70%
Vca < 70%
1s
AND
VOLTAGE INPUTS
Vab > 85%
Vbc > 85%
Vca > 85%
LOGIC OPERAND
Fuse Fail
OR
0
AND
LOGIC OPERAND
Fuse Fail Alarm OP
Any Alarm OP
OR
TARGET MESSAGE
Fuse Fail Alarm
State: Operate
Fuse Fail Trip
State: Operate
AND
S
LATCH
R
SETTING
Fuse Fail Function
= Disabled
= Alarm
= Trip
LOGIC OPERAND
Fuse Fail Trip OP
Any Trip OP
Set Dominant
AND
MOTOR STATUS
Running
LOGIC OPERAND
Fuse Fail Inhibit
Any Start Inhibit
KEYPAD RESET
INPUTS
Emergency Restart Input
Lockout Reset Input
Reset Input
OR
AND
AND
AND
SETTINGS
S4 CONTROLS
Emergency Restart
Off = 0
Lockout Reset
Off = 0
Reset
896837.cdr
Off = 0
Acceleration protection
The thermal model protects the motor under both starting and overload conditions. The
acceleration timer trip may be used to complement this protection. For example, if the
motor always starts in 2 seconds, but the safe stall time is 8 seconds, there is no point
letting the motor remain in a stall condition for the 7 or 8 seconds it would take for the
thermal model to operate. Furthermore, the starting torque applied to the driven
equipment for that period of time could cause severe damage.
If enabled, the Acceleration Protection will trip if the motor stays in the starting state and
does not reach the running state by the set acceleration time. Detection of starting and
running is as described in the motor status section of this manual. For two speed motor
applications, separate timer settings are provided for accelerating from stopped to low
speed, for accelerating from stopped to high speed, and for accelerating from low speed to
high speed.
If the acceleration time of the motor is variable, this feature should be set just beyond the
longest acceleration time.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > ACCELERATION
ACCEL TIME FUNC
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
Enables Acceleration Protection tripping.
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6–113
S3 PROTECTION
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
ACCELERATION TIMER
Range: 1.0 to 250.0 s in steps of 0.1 s
Default: 10 s
In single-speed motor applications, sets the maximum acceleration time before tripping.
In two speed motor applications, sets the maximum acceleration time before tripping
when low speed starting from a stopped condition.
OUTPUT RELAY 4 to 6 / OUTPUT RELAY 5 to 6
Range: Do Not Operate, Operate
Default: Do Not Operate
Any assignable output relay can be selected to operate upon Acceleration Trip
operation. When the SWITCHING DEVICE is selected as BREAKER, the assignable output
relays will be Output Relay 4 to 6. When the SWITCHING DEVICE is selected as
CONTACTOR, the assignable output relays will be Output Relay 5 to 6.
BLOCK 1 to 3
Range: Off, Contact Input 1 to 10, Virtual Input 1 to 32, Remote Input 1 to 32, Logic
Element 1 to 16
Default: Off
Three blocking inputs are provided for the Acceleration feature. When any of the
selected blocking inputs is ON, the Acceleration function is blocked.
TWO-SPEED MOTOR APPLICATION
PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > TWO SPEED MOTOR > HIGH SPEED ACCEL T
ACCEL T ON STOPPED
Range: 1.0 to 250.0 s in steps of 0.1 s
Default: 10.0 s
When a two-speed motor starts directly at high speed, this setting specifies the
maximum acceleration time before tripping.
ACCEL T ON LOW SPD
Range: 1.0 to 250.0 s in steps of 0.1 s
Default: 10.0 s
When a two-speed motor is switched from a low-to-high speed, this setting specifies the
maximum acceleration time before tripping.
6–114
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S3 PROTECTION
Figure 6-37: Acceleration logic diagram
SYSTEM SETUP SETTING
Switching Device
= Breaker
ACCELERATION SETTINGS
Acceleration Timer Function
ACCELERATION SETTING
Output Relay 4
= Enabled
AND
CONTACT OUTPUT
Output Relay 4
AND
CONTACT OUTPUT
Output Relay 5
AND
CONTACT OUTPUT
Output Relay 6
= Enabled
Block 1
AND
Block 2
OR
Block 3
ACCELERATION SETTING
Output Relay 5
= Enabled
LOGIC OPERANDS
Starting
OR
Running
AND
0
ACCELERATION SETTING
Output Relay 6
D
1s
= Enabled
LATCH
Clk
MOTOR SETTING
Enable Two Speed Motor
= Enabled
TARGET MESSAGE
Acceleration Trip
AND
CONTACT INPUT OPERAND
High Speed Switch
ACCELERATION SETTING
tpu = ACCELERATION TIMER
AND
LOGIC OPERAND
Acceleration Protection Op
tpu
0
Any Trip Op
2 SPD MOTOR SETTING
tpu = ACCEL T ON STOPPED
AND
tpu
0
OR
S
NV
LATCH
R
2 SPD MOTOR SETTING
Set Dominant
tpu = ACCEL T ON LOW SPD
AND
tpu
0
CONTACT INPUT OPERAND
Remote Reset
KEYPAD OPERAND
Reset
OR
896810.cdr
RTD protection
The 339 has two methods of supporting RTD inputs.
As an option, a CANBUS-based RMIO module can be installed on the 339, which can
monitor up to 12 RTDs. With the RMIO option, the RTD protection setpoints can be seen
only if the 339 has the RMIO module installed and validated. If, for some reason,
communications with the RMIO module are lost or interrupted, the 339 will issue an RMIO
MISMATCH self-test error indicating the failure. This feature is useful as it ensures that the
remote RTDs are being continuously monitored.
Alternatively, the INPUT/OUTPUT option ‘R’ can be selected from the Order Codes, an
option which provides 3 internal RTDs. The 339 does not support both Internal RTDs and
RMIO RTDs simultaneously.
The RTD type supported is 100 Ohm Platinum. Each of these may be configured to have a
trip temperature as well as an alarm temperature. The alarm temperature is normally set
slightly above the normal running temperature. The trip temperature is normally set at the
insulation rating. Trip Voting has been added for extra security in the event of RTD
malfunction. If enabled, a second RTD must also exceed the trip temperature of the RTD
being checked before a trip will be issued. If the RTD is chosen to vote with itself, the voting
feature is disabled.
Each RTD may also be configured as being of application type Stator, Bearing, Ambient or
Other. The table below - RTD Temperature vs Resistance - lists RTD resistance versus
temperature. RTDs configured as Stator type are also used by the thermal model for
determining the RTD Bias.
If for some reason, communications with the RMIO module are lost or interrupted, the
339 will issue an RMIO MISMATCH self-test error indicating the failure. This feature is useful
as it ensures that the remote RTDs are being continuously monitored.
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6–115
S3 PROTECTION
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > RTD PROTECTION > RTD #1(12)
RTD #1 to 12 APPLICATION
Range: None, Stator, Bearing, Ambient, Other
Default: None
Sets the application type.
RTD #1 to 12 NAME
Range: 1 to 18 characters
Default: RTD 1(12)
Sets the RTD programmable name.
RTD #1 to 12 ALARM
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
This setting enables the RTD #1 to 12 Alarm functionality.
RTD #1 to 12 ALARM TEMP
Range: 1oC to 250oC in steps of 1oC
Default: 130oC
Sets the Alarm temperature.
RTD #1 to 12 TRIP
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
This setting enables the RTD #1 to 12 Trip functionality.
RTD #1 to 12 TRIP TEMP
Range: 1oC to 250oC in steps of 1oC
Default: 155oC
Sets the Trip temperature.
RTD #1 to 12 TRIP VOTING
Range: Off, RTD #1 to 12
Default: Off
Sets the redundant RTD that must also exceed this RTD’s trip temperature for a trip to
occur.
OUTPUT RELAYS
Range: Do Not Operate, Operate
Default: Do Not Operate
6–116
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S3 PROTECTION
NOTE:
NOTE
The availability of assignable Output Relay setpoints is dependent on the Order Code
options and the SWITCHING DEVICE setpoint. Refer to section S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS >
OUTPUT RELAYS for more information.
Any assignable output relay can be selected to operate upon RTD Trip operation. When
the SWITCHING DEVICE is selected as BREAKER, the assignable output relays will be
Output Relay 4 to 6. When the SWITCHING DEVICE is selected as CONTACTOR, the
assignable output relays will be Output Relay 5 to 6.
To select any assignable output relays to operate upon the RTD #1 to 12 Alarm
operation, assign the Logic Operand “RTD #1 to 12 ALARM OP” or “Any Alarm OP” to a
Logic Element.
e.g. With the following setup, output relay 5 will operate upon the operation of any RTD
or alarm.
S3 RTD #1
RTD #1 APPLICATION
Stator
▼
S4 LOGIC ELEMENT 1
LOGIC E 1 NAME
Alarm Operation
▼
RTD #1 NAME
LOGIC E1 FUNCTION
RTD1
Enabled
RTD #1 ALARM
LOGIC E1 ASSERTED
Enabled
On
RTD #1 ALARM TEMP
TRIGGER SOURCE 1
130°C
Any Alarm OP
RTD #1 TRIP
TRIGGER SOURCE 2
Disabled
Off
RTD #1 TRIP TEMP
TRIGGER SOURCE 3
155°C
Off
RTD #1 TRIP VOTING
PICKUP TIME DELAY
Off
0 ms
OUTPUT RELAY 4
DROPOUT TIME DELAY
Do Not Operate
0 ms
OUTPUT RELAY 5
OUTPUT RELAY 4
Do Not Operate
Do Not Operate
OUTPUT RELAY 6
OUTPUT RELAY 5
Do Not Operate
Operate
BLOCK 1
OUTPUT RELAY 6
Off
Do Not Operate
BLOCK 2
BLOCK 1
Off
Off
BLOCK 3
BLOCK 2
Off
Off
BLOCK 3
896802.cdr
Off
BLOCK 1 to 3
Range: Off, Any Contact Input, Virtual Input, Remote Input, or Logic Element
Default: Off
Three blocking inputs are provided for RTD Protection. When any of the selected blocking
inputs is on, both RTD Alarm and Trip functionalities are blocked.
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6–117
6–118
896828A2.cdr
RTD #12
RTD #11
RTD #10
RTD #3
RTD #2
RTD #1
Setting = RTD #1
Setting = Off
OFF
OR
OR
AND
AND
Logic is shown for RTD #1; other RTDs are similar.
#12
#11
#10
#3
#2
#1
SETTING
S3 RTD PROTECTION
RTD #1 Trip Voting
Off = 0
BLOCK 3
Off = 0
BLOCK 2
Off = 0
BLOCK 1
SETTINGS
S3 RTD PROTECTION
Disabled = 0
Enabled = 1
RTD #1 Trip
Disabled = 0
Enabled = 1
SETTING
S3 RTD PROTECTION
RTD #1 Alarm
RUN
T > Trip Temp
T > Alarm Temp
T
Off = 0
Remote Reset
Off = 0
Lockout Reset
Off = 0
Emergency Restart
S4 CONTROLS
SETTINGS
Remote Reset Input
Lockout Reset Input
Emergency Restart Input
INPUTS
KEYPAD RESET
T > Trip Temp
T > 250oC
RTD #1 Trip Temp
SETTING
S3 RTD PROTECTION
T
RUN
o
T > 250 C
RTD #1 Alarm Temp
RTD #1 Trip Temp
SETTINGS
S3 RTD PROTECTION
AND
AND
OR
AND
AND
AND
AND
OR
R
LATCH
S
ASSIGNABLE AUX RELAYS
TARGET MESSAGE
RTD #1 Alarm
State: Operate
RTD #1 Trip
State: Trip
LOGIC OPERAND
RTD #1 Alarm OP
Any Alarm OP
RTD #1 Trip OP
Any Trip OP
Operate output
relays upon selection
S3 PROTECTION
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
Figure 6-38: RTD Protection logic diagram
THE RTD TROUBLE ALARM
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S3 PROTECTION
All RTDs that are programmed with either an alarm or a trip are monitored for sensor
failure. When the measured temperature is greater than 250ºC or less than -50ºC, the RTD
is declared failed and a common RTD trouble alarm is issued.
RTD TROUBLE ALARM
Range: Disable, Enable
Default: Disable
This setting enables the RTD Trouble Alarm functionality.
OUTPUT RELAYS
Range: Do Not Operate, Operate
Default: Do Not Operate
NOTE:
NOTE
The availability of assignable Output Relay setpoints is dependent on the Order Code
options and the SWITCHING DEVICE setpoint. Refer to section S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS >
OUTPUT RELAYS for more information.
Any assignable output relay can be selected to operate upon RTD Trouble Alarm
operation. When the SWITCHING DEVICE is selected as BREAKER, the assignable output
relays will be Output Relay 4 to 6. When the SWITCHING DEVICE is selected as
CONTACTOR, the assignable output relays will be Output Relay 5 to 6.
BLOCK 1 to 3
Range: Off, Any Contact Input, Virtual Input, Remote Input, or Logic Element Element 1 to
16
Default: Off
Three blocking inputs are provided for RTD Trouble Alarm. When any of the selected
blocking inputs is on, both RTD Trouble Alarm functionality is blocked.
Table 6-3: RTD Temperature vs Resistance
100 Ω Pt (DIN 43760)
Temperature
o
C
o
F
–50
–58
80.31
–40
–40
84.27
–30
–22
88.22
–20
–4
92.16
–10
14
96.09
0
32
100.00
10
50
103.90
20
68
107.79
30
86
111.67
40
104
115.54
50
122
119.39
60
140
123.24
70
158
127.07
80
176
130.89
90
194
134.70
100
212
138.50
110
230
142.29
120
248
146.06
130
266
149.82
140
284
153.58
150
302
157.32
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6–119
S3 PROTECTION
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
100 Ω Pt (DIN 43760)
Temperature
o
o
160
320
161.04
170
338
164.76
180
356
168.47
190
374
172.46
200
392
175.84
210
410
179.51
220
428
183.17
230
446
186.82
240
464
190.45
250
482
194.08
C
6–120
F
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S3 PROTECTION
896829A2.cdr
OR
T12 > 250 C
T12 < -50oC
T12
o
RTD #12 Temp T12
From other RTDs
T1 < -50oC
T1 > 250oC
T1
RTD #12 Temp
ACTUAL VALUE
RTD #1 Temp
Off = 0
BLOCK 3
Off = 0
BLOCK 2
Off = 0
SETTINGS
S3 RTD TROUBLE ALARM
BLOCK 1
Disabled = 0
Enabled = 1
SETTING
S3 RTD TROUBLE ALARM
RTD TROUBLE ALARM
OR
AND
RUN
RTD #1 Temp T1
RTD TROUBLE ALARM
OR
From other RTDs
OR
TARGET MESSAGE
RTD Trouble Alarm
State: Operate
LOGIC OPERAND
RTD Trouble Alarm OP
Any Alarm OP
Operate output
relays upon selection
ASSIGNABLE AUX RELAYS
Figure 6-39: RTD Trouble Alarm logic diagram
Two-speed motor
Two-speed motors have two windings wound into one stator. These motors rely on
contactors to accomplish speed changes by altering the winding configurations. The
339 motor relay provides a complete set of protective functions for each speed.
The 339 motor relay provides proper protection for a two-speed motor where there are
two different full-load values. The 339 algorithm integrates the heating at each speed into
one thermal model using a common Thermal Capacity Used Register for both high and low
speeds.
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6–121
S3 PROTECTION
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
In the figure below, contactor L and H are interlocked so that only one contactor can be
energized to select either low speed or high speed. This figure shows the AC connections
for a two-speed motor where CTs connected to low and high speed are paralleled, such
that the 339 relay can measure the motor current when the motor is running at either low
or high speed, and it will switch CT Primary and motor FLA settings as per the motor
running speed. This function is accomplished by detecting the input status from the motor
speed switches.
Figure 6-40: Two-speed motor connections
A B C
52
L
T1
H
L
T2
H
L
T3
MOTOR
H
T4
H
T5
H
T6
E5 D5 E6 D6 E7 D7
IA
IA
IB
IB
IC
IC
CURRENT INPUTS
C1 52a (C1 #1)
C3
L
H
ASSIGNABLE
INPUTS
C2 52b (C1 #2)
C10
C11 COMMON
896LH.CDR
+
CONTACT INPUTS
52a
339
Motor Protection System
-
DC
If the two-speed motor feature is enabled, the setting HIGH SPEED SWITCH specifies a
contact input to monitor the high speed contact position, and the setting LOW SPEED
SWITCH specifies another contact input to monitor the low speed contact position. It is
recommended to monitor both high and low speed switches, but using only one of them is
also acceptable. When the motor speed is indicated as HIGH SPEED, the relay uses the high
speed settings. When the motor speed is indicated as LOW SPEED, the relay uses the same
settings as those used for single speed operation. The logic for motor speed indication is
shown in the table below.
6–122
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S3 PROTECTION
Setting
Speed Switch Inputs
ENABLE 2-SPD
MOTOR
High Speed
Switch
Low Speed
Switch
Enable
Configured
Configured
High Speed
S2
Closed
Open
High Speed
Closed
Low Speed
Open
Open
Alarm: SPD
SW Fail
Not Configured Closed
Not Configured Configured
Closed
N/A
High Speed
Open
N/A
Low Speed
N/A
Closed
Low Speed
N/A
Open
High Speed
N/A
Alarm: SPD
SW Not
Config
Not Configured Not Configured N/A
Disable
Motor
Speed
Indication
Open
Closed
Configured
Low Speed
S1
Two-speed functionality is not enabled.
The two-speed motor feature is enabled with the setting S2 SYSTEM SETUP > MOTOR >
ENABLE 2-SPD MOTOR. When the two-speed feature is enabled, the 339 provides the
second independent Short Circuit and Undercurrent elements for High Speed, and adjusts
the thermal overload curve and acceleration timer as per the high speed motor
characteristics.
Two-speed motor
setup
PATH: SETPOINTS > S2 SYSTEM SETUP > MOTOR
ENABLE 2-SPD MOTOR
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
This setting is used to enable two-speed motor functionality. When this setting is
selected as Disabled, all two-speed motor functionalities will be disabled, and all other
two-speed motor-related settings are hidden.
HIGH-SPEED PH PRIM
Range: 10 to 1500 A in steps of 1 A
Default: 100 A
This setting is used to specify the Phase CT primary for High Speed.
HIGH-SPEED FLA
Range: 15.0 to 1500.0 A in steps of 0.1 A
Default: 100.0 A
This setting is used to specify the Full Load Amps for High Speed.
HIGH-SPEED RATED PWR
Range: 100 to 10000 KW in steps of 1 KW
Default: 3000 KW
This setting is used to specify the rated power for High Speed.
HIGH SPEED SWITCH
Range: Off, Contact Input 1 to 10, Virtual Input 1 to 32, Remote Input 1 to 32, Logic
Element 1 to 16
Default: Off
If the two-speed motor functionality is used, this setting specifies a contact input to
indicate the motor high speed.
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6–123
S3 PROTECTION
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
LOW SPEED SWITCH
Range: Off, Contact Input 1 to 10, Virtual Input 1 to 32, Remote Input 1 to 32, Logic
Element 1 to 8
Default: Off
If the two-speed motor functionality is used, this setting specifies a contact input to
indicate the motor low speed.
High speed thermal
protection
When the two-speed functionality is enabled, the 339 will switch settings between S3
PROTECTION > THERMAL PROTECTION and S3 PROTECTION > TWO SPEED MOTOR > HIGH
SPEED THERMAL to ensure proper parameters are applied to each speed. The motor
thermal characteristics for high and low speed can be different, so separate FLA and curve
selections are provided for high speed operation. In applications where the motor has the
same thermal characteristics for both low and high speed, set the high speed Thermal O/L
Curve to be the same as the main settings.
For a single speed motor where the two-speed functionality is disabled, the 339 will apply
S3 PROTECTION > THERMAL PROTECTION settings to protect the motor.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > TWO SPEED MOTOR > HIGH SPEED THERMAL
CURVE MULTIPLIER
Range: 1 to 15 in steps of 1
Default: 4
This setting is used to fit a standard overload curve to the thermal characteristics of the
protected motor when it is running at High Speed.
High speed short
circuit settings
When two-speed functionality is enabled, a second independent Short Circuit element is
provided for High Speed. When the motor is running at high speed and any phase current
exceeds the high speed short circuit pickup level for the high speed short circuit time delay,
the high speed short circuit protection will be activated. In cases where the switching
device is a contactor, which is not designed to cut off fault current, the function of short
circuit can be set as either Latched Alarm or Alarm, so the assigned auxiliary output relay
will be activated and signal an upstream breaker to trip.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > TWO SPEED MOTOR > HIGH SPEED S/C
S/C FUNC
Range: Disabled, Latched Alarm, Alarm, Trip
Default: Disabled
The selection of the Latched Alarm, Alarm or Trip setting enables the High Speed Short
Circuit function. If the operating condition is satisfied when Trip is selected as the
function, the “LOCKOUT” LED will be turned on, and the logic operand ANY TRIP OP will be
asserted, which in turn will operate the “TRIP” LED and the trip output relay. If Alarm is
selected, the “ALARM” LED will flash upon the short circuit protection operation, and will
automatically reset when the activating condition clears. If Latched Alarm is selected,
the “ALARM” LED will flash upon short circuit protection operation, and will stay “ON”
after the condition clears, until a Reset command is initiated. The TRIP output relay will
not operate if the Latched Alarm or Alarm function is selected. Any assignable output
relays can be selected to operate when the setting S/C FUNC is selected as Latched
Alarm, Alarm, or Trip.
S/C PKP
Range: 1.00 to 20.00xCT in steps of 0.01xCT
Default: 6.00xCT
This setting specifies a pickup threshold for the High Speed Short Circuit function.
6–124
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S3 PROTECTION
S/C DELAY
Range: 0.00 to 60.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 0.00 s
This setting specifies a time delay for the High Speed Short Circuit function.
OUTPUT RELAY 4 to 6 / OUTPUT RELAY 5 to 6
Range: Do Not Operate, Operate
Default: Do Not Operate
Any assignable output relay can be selected to operate upon High Speed Short Circuit
operation. When the SWITCHING DEVICE is selected as BREAKER, the assignable output
relays will be Output Relay 4 to 6. When the SWITCHING DEVICE is selected as
CONTACTOR, the assignable output relays will be Output Relay 5 to 6.
BLOCK 1 to 3
Range: Off, Contact Input 1 to 10, Virtual Input 1 to 32, Remote Input 1 to 32, Logic
Element 1 to 16
Default: Off
Three blocking inputs are provided for the High Speed Short Circuit function. When any
of the selected blocking inputs is on, the high speed Short Circuit is blocked.
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6–125
6–126
SETTING
AND
OR
AND
SETTING
OR
OR
AND
AND
AND
AND
OR
R
S
OR
LATCH
AND
OR
OR
TARGET MESSAGE
ANY ALARM OP
SPD2 S/C ALARM OP
LOGIC OPERAND
SPD2 S/C Alarm
State: Operate
Phase Currents
896819.cdr
Phase C current (IC)
Phase B current (IB)
Phase A current (IA)
Off = 0
BLOCK 3:
Off = 0
BLOCK 2:
RUN
IC > PICKUP
IB > PICKUP
IA > PICKUP
S/C PKP
Off = 0
S3 HIGH SPEED S/C
S3 HIGH SPEED S/C
BLOCK 1:
SETTING
High Speed
tPKP
S/C DELAY
S3 HIGH SPEED S/C
SETTING
Contactor
Breaker
0
SWITCHING DEVICE
S2 SYSTEM SETUP
AND
AND
AND
R
NV
LATCH
OUTPUT RELAY 6
OUTPUT RELAY 5
OUTPUT RELAY 4
SPD2 S/C Trip
State: Pickup
SPD2 S/C Alarm
State: Pickup
TARGET MESSAGE
ANY TRIP PKP
SPD2 S/C TRIP PKP
ANY ALARM PKP
SPD2 S/C ALARM PKP
LOGIC OPERAND
ASSIGNABLE AUX RELAYS
Operate
Output Relays OUTPUT RELAY 5
Upon
OUTPUT RELAY 6
Selection
Operate
Output Relays
Upon
Selection
ASSIGNABLE AUX RELAYS
LED: Lockout
SPD2 S/C Trip
State: Operate
TARGET MESSAGE
LOCKOUT OP
Disabled = 0
MOTOR SPEED INDICATION
ANY TRIP OP
Enabled = 1
S
ANY LATCHED ALARM OP
AND
SPD2 S/C TRIP OP
SETTING
AND
Enable 2-spd Motor
SETTING
OR
Off = 0
Reset
AND
OR
S2 MOTOR
Trip
Alarm
Latched Alarm
Disabled = 0
S/C FUNC
S3 HIGH SPEED S/C
Off = 0
Lockout Reset
Off = 0
Emergency Restart
S4 CONTROLS
SETTINGS
Reset Input
Lockout Reset Input
Emergency Restart Input
INPUTS
KEYPAD RESET
S3 PROTECTION
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
Figure 6-41: High Speed Short Circuit logic diagram
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S3 PROTECTION
High speed
acceleration
When two-speed functionality is enabled, the main acceleration timer is used for low
speed starting (a start in low speed from a stopped condition). Two additional acceleration
timers are provided for high speed starting. One timer is for a start in high speed from a
stopped condition, another timer is for the transition from low speed to high speed.
Selection of acceleration timers is as described in the Acceleration section of this manual.
High speed
undercurrent
If two-speed functionality is enabled, the 339 relay relies on the motor speed indication to
switch the undercurrent settings as per the motor running speed, so the main
Undercurrent Protection element is only active when the motor is running at low speed,
and the High Speed Undercurrent Protection element is only active when the motor is
running at high speed. If two-speed functionality is not deployed, only the main Short
Circuit is active, and the High Speed Short Circuit is disabled.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > TWO SPEED MOTOR > HIGH SPEED U/CURR
U/CURR ALARM FUNC
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
This setting is used to enable the High Speed Undercurrent Alarm function.
BLK U/C ON START
Range: 0 to 600 s in steps of 1 s
Default: 0 s
This setting is used to specify a time delay to block undercurrent function when the
motor is starting to High Speed. If this setting is programmed as 0, the undercurrent
function will not be blocked from start.
U/CURR ALARM PKP
Range: 0.10 to 0.95xFLA in steps of 0.01xFLA
Default: 0.70xFLA
This setting specifies a pickup threshold for the Alarm stage. This threshold should be set
lower than motor load current during normal operation.
U/CURR ALARM DELAY
Range: 1.00 to 60.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 1.00 s
This setting specifies a time delay for the Alarm stage. This time delay should be set long
enough to overcome short lowering of the current such as during system faults.
U/CURR TRIP FUNC
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
This setting is used to enable the High Speed Undercurrent Trip function.
U/CURR TRIP PKP
Range: 0.10 to 0.95xFLA in steps of 0.01xFLA
Default: 0.60xFLA
This setting specifies a pickup threshold for the Trip stage. This threshold should be set
lower than the threshold for the Alarm stage.
U/CURR TRIP DELAY
Range: 1.00 to 60.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 1.00 s
This setting specifies a time delay for the Trip stage. This time delay should be set long
enough to overcome short lowering of the current such as during system faults.
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6–127
S3 PROTECTION
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
OUTPUT RELAY 4 to 6 / OUTPUT RELAY 5 to 6
Range: Do Not Operate, Operate
Default: Do Not Operate
Any assignable output relay can be selected to operate upon High Speed Undercurrent
operation. When the SWITCHING DEVICE is selected as BREAKER, the assignable output
relays will be Output Relay 4 to 6. When the SWITCHING DEVICE is selected as
CONTACTOR, the assignable output relays will be Output Relay 5 to 6.
To select any assignable output relays to operate upon the Undercurrent Alarm
operation, assign the Logic Operand "UNDERCURRENT ALARM OP" or "Any Alarm OP" to
a Logic Element.
BLOCK 1 to 3
Range: Off, Contact Input 1 to 10, Virtual Input 1 to 32, Remote Input 1 to 32, Logic
Element 1 to 16
Default: Off
Three blocking inputs are provided for the High Speed Undercurrent function. When any
of the selected blocking inputs is on, the High Speed Undercurrent is blocked.
6–128
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
896817.CDR
S3 HIGH SPEED U/CURR
U/CURR TRIP FUNC
ENABLED = 1
DISABLED = 0
SETTING
OFF = 0
BLOCK 3
OFF = 0
OFF = 0
BLOCK 2
SETTINGS
S3 HIGH SPEED U/CURR
BLOCK 1
Running
MOTOR STATUS
Stopped
MOTOR SPEED INDICATION
HIGH SPEED
SETTINGS
S2 MOTOR
ENABLE 2-SPD MOTOR
DISABLED = 0
SETTINGS
S3 HIGH SPEED U/CURR
U/CURR ALARM FUNC
ENABLED = 1
DISABLED = 0
ACTUAL VALUE
IA
IB
IC
OR
tBLK
BLK U/C ON START
S3 HIGH SPEED U/CURR
SETTINGS
AND
0
AND
AND
AND
RUN
IA_mag < PICKUP
IB_mag < PICKUP
IC_mag < PICKUP
U/CURR TRIP PKP
OR
OR
SETTING
S2 SYSTEM SETUP
SWITCHING DEVICE
Breaker
Contactor
IA_mag < PICKUP
IB_mag < PICKUP
IC_mag < PICKUP
SETTING
S3 HIGH SPEED U/CURR
RUN
U/CURR ALARM PKP
SETTINGS
S3 HIGH SPEED U/CURR
tPKP
0
Off = 0
Reset
Off = 0
Lockout Reset
Off = 0
Emergency Restart
S4 CONTROLS
SETTINGS
Reset Input
Lockout Reset Input
Emergency Restart Input
INPUTS
KEYPAD RESET
U/CURR TRIP DELAY
SETTINGS
S3 HIGH SPEED U/CURR
tPKP
U/CURR ALARM DELAY
SETTINGS
S3 HIGH SPEED U/CURR
0
AND
AND
AND
AND
ASSIGNABLE AUX RELAYS
AND
OR
ASSIGNABLE AUX RELAYS
Operate
OUTPUT RELAY 5
output relays
upon selection OUTPUT RELAY 6
OUTPUT RELAY 4
Operate
output relays OUTPUT RELAY 5
upon selection
OUTPUT RELAY 6
R
S
LATCH
TARGET MESSAGE
ANY TRIP PKP
SPD2 U/C TRIP OP
ANY TRIP OP
SPD2 U/C TRIP PKP
LOGIC OPERAND
SPD2 U/C Trip
State: Pickup
SPD2 U/C Trip
State: Operate
TARGET MESSAGE
ANY ALARM OP
SPD2 U/C ALARM PKP
ANY ALARM PKP
SPD2 U/C ALARM OP
LOGIC OPERAND
SPD2 U/C Alarm
State: Pickup
SPD2 U/C Alarm
State: Operate
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S3 PROTECTION
Figure 6-42: High Speed Undercurrent logic diagram
6–129
S3 PROTECTION
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
Neutral directional overcurrent
The Neutral Directional element is used to discriminate between faults that occur in the
forward direction, and faults that occur in the reverse direction. The Neutral Directional
element can be used either individually for control or alarm by energizing the auxiliary
output relays, or as a part of the Neutral Time, or Instantaneous, over-current elements to
define the tripping direction. (See the setup for Neutral TOC, and Neutral IOC elements.)
The polarizing signal for the Neutral Directional element can be set to be either voltage
(zero sequence voltage), current (measured ground current), or dual (both).
The polarizing voltage for the Neutral directional element is calculated as follows:
Eq. 18
Please note that the phase VT inputs must be connected in Wye.
When “Voltage” polarization is selected, the direction is determined by comparing the
angle between the operating current and the voltage, and the set MTA angle. In cases
where the voltage drops below the setting of the minimum polarizing voltage, the neutral
directional element defaults to the Forward direction.
When “Current” polarizing is selected, the direction of the neutral current is determined
with reference to the direction of the measured ground current . The fault is detected in the
Forward direction when the ground current typically flowing from the ground point into the
neutral current is within ± 90° of the polarizing current. Otherwise the direction is detected
as Reverse. The neutral direction defaults to Forward if the polarizing ground current drops
below 5% of the ground CT.
The diagram below shows the regions for detection of neutral current Forward and
Reverse directions with respect to the zero sequence voltage and the selected Maximum
Torque Angle (MTA).
The Neutral Directional element is blocked in VFD mode.
NOTE:
NOTE
6–130
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S3 PROTECTION
When “Dual” polarizing is selected, the Reverse direction is declared if both directional
comparators - the one based on the zero sequence polarizing voltage, and the other based
on measured ground polarizing current - declare Reverse direction. If the direction from
one of the comparators declares Forward direction and the other declares Reverse
direction, the element will declare Forward direction. If the polarizing voltage falls below
the set minimum voltage, the direction declared depends on the polarizing ground current,
assuming the measured ground current is above some 5% CTg. The same rule applies if
the ground current falls below 5% CTg. In this case the direction is determined using the
polarizing zero sequence voltage, assuming it is above the set minimum voltage from the
settings menu.
The following table shows the operating current, and the polarizing signals, used for
directional control:
Table 6-4: Neutral directional characteristics
Quantity
Operating Current
Polarizing Voltage (VT
Connection: Wye)
Polarizing Current
Neutral
3Io = Ia + Ib + Ic
-Vo = -(Va + Vb + Vc)/3
Ig
The following path is available using the keypad. For instructions on how to use the
keypad, please refer to Chapter 3 - Working with the Keypad.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S3 PROTECTION > NTRL DIR
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6–131
S3 PROTECTION
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
NTRL DIR FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Latched Alarm, Alarm, Control
Default: Disabled
When an Alarm function is selected, the alarm LED will flash upon detection of Reverse
direction, and will drop out when the direction changes to Forward. When Latched
Alarm is selected, the alarm LED will flash upon detection of Reverse direction, and will
stay lit (latched) after the direction changes to Forward. The alarm LED can be reset, by
issuing a Reset command. Detection of Reverse direction when the Control function is
selected, does not trigger the alarm LED.
NTRL DIR POLARIZING
Range: Voltage, Current, Dual
Default: Voltage
This setting specifies the voltage polarizing signal for the detection of Forward and
Reverse directions.
NTRL DIR MTA
Range: 0° to 359° Lead in steps of 1°
Default: 315°
This setting sets the Maximum Torque Angle (MTA), for the Neutral Directional element to
define the regions of Forward and Reverse directions. For Voltage polarizing, enter the
maximum torque angle by which the operating current leads the polarizing voltage. This
is the angle of maximum sensitivity.
MIN POL VOLTAGE
Range: 0.05 to 1.25 x VT in steps of 0.01
Default: 0.05 x VT
This setting affects only cases where voltage or dual polarizing is selected. The minimum
zero sequence voltage level must be selected to prevent operation due to normal
system unbalances, or voltage transformer errors. Set the minimum zero sequence
voltage level to 2% of VT for well balanced systems, and 1% of VT accuracy. For systems
with high resistance grounding or floating neutrals, this setting can be as high as 20%.
The default of 5% of VT is appropriate for most solidly grounded systems.
OUTPUT RELAY 3 to 6
Range: Do not operate, Operate
Default: Do not operate
Any or all of the output relays 3 to 6 can be selected to operate upon Neutral Directional
operation. The selection of relay outputs operation is available no matter whether
Latched Alarm, Alarm, or Trip function is selected.
BLOCK 1/2/3
Range: Off, Contact Input 1 to 10, Virtual Input 1 to 32, Remote Input 1 to 32, Logic
Element 1 to 16
Default: Off
Three blocking inputs are provided in the Neutral Directional menu. One blocking input
going “high” is enough to block the function. The selection for each block can be Contact
input, Virtual Input, Remote Input, or Logic Element.
6–132
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
SETPOINTS
SETPOINT
OR
SETPOINT
AND
FWD
3I_0
-3V_0
Current Polarization
RUN
Voltage Polarization
REV
RUN
REV
REV
Contactor
Breaker
OR
Neutral Current (In)
Ig > 0.05 x CT
OR
Ground current (Ig)
OR
|V0| >MINIMUM
MIN POL VOLTAGE:
SETPOINT
NTRL DIR MTA
SETPOINT
SWITCHING DEVICE
AND
Zero Sequence Voltage (-V0)
Voltage
Dual
OR
Current
NTRL DIR POLARIZING:
Off = 0
BLOCK 3:
Off = 0
BLOCK 2:
Off = 0
In > 0.05 x CT
NTRL DIR REVERSE
(Message)
LED: ALARM
Direction OK
898017A2.cdr
REVERSE
(To Neutral TOC and Neutral IOC )
Operate
OUTPUT RELAY 5
output relays
upon
OUTPUT RELAY 6
selection
ASSIGNABLE AUX RELAYS
OUTPUT RELAY 4
Operate
output relays
OUTPUT RELAY 5
upon
selection
OUTPUT RELAY 6
ASSIGNABLE AUX RELAYS
Ntrl Dir Reverse
(Event Recorder, Transient Recorder)
R
LATCH
S
OR
BLOCK 1:
Control
Alarm
Latched Alarm
AND
Disabled = 0
NTRL DIR FUNCTION:
SETPOINT
RESET
Command
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S3 PROTECTION
Figure 6-43: Neutral Directional logic diagram
AND
AND
AND
AND
NAND
XOR
AND
AND
6–133
S4 CONTROL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S4 Control
Figure 6-44: Controls with BREAKER menu
S4 CONTROLS
VIRTUAL INPUTS
S4 VIRTUAL INPUTS
LOGIC ELEMENTS
BREAKER CONTROL
VIRTUAL INPUT 1
▼
▼
VIRTUAL INPUT 2
BREAKER FAIL
...
START INHIBIT
VIRTUAL INPUT 32
EMERGENCY RESTART
LOCKOUT RESET
S4 LOGIC ELEMENTS
RESET
LOGIC ELEMENT 1
LOGIC ELEMENT 2
LOGIC ELEMENT 3
▼
S4 LOGIC ELEMENT 1
LOGIC E1 NAME
▼
LOGIC E1 FUNCTION
LOGIC ELEMENT 4
LOGIC E1 ASSERTED
...
TRIGGER SOURCE 1
LOGIC ELEMENT 16[8]
TRIGGER SOURCE 2
TRIGGER SOURCE 3
S4 BREAKER CONTROL
LOCAL MODE
▼
TRIGGER LOGIC
PICKUP TIME DELAY
DROPOUT TIME DELAY
REMOTE OPEN
OUTPUT RELAY 4
REMOTE CLOSE
OUTPUT RELAY 5
KEYPAD BKR OPEN
OUTPUT RELAY 6
KEYPAD BKR CLOSE
BLOCK 1
BLOCK 2
S4 BREAKER FAIL
BF FUNCTION
BLOCK 3
BLOCK LOGIC
▼
BF CURRENT
BF EXT INITIATE
BF TIME DELAY 1
BF TIME DELAY 2
OUTPUT RELAY 4
OUTPUT RELAY 5
OUTPUT RELAY 6
S4 START INHIBIT
THERMAL INHIBIT
▼
STARTS/HOUR LIMIT
TIME BETWEEN STARTS
RESTART INHIBIT
S4 EMERGENCY RESTART
EMERGENCY RESTART
S4 LOCKOUT RESET
LOCKOUT RESET
896767A1. cdr
6–134
S4 RESET
RESET
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S4 CONTROL
Figure 6-45: Controls with CONTACTOR menu
S4 CONTROLS
VIRTUAL INPUTS
S4 VIRTUAL INPUTS
LOGIC ELEMENTS
WELDED CONTACTOR
VIRTUAL INPUT 1
▼
▼
VIRTUAL INPUT 2
START INHIBIT
...
EMERGENCY RESTART
VIRTUAL INPUT 32
LOCKOUT RESET
RESET
S4 LOGIC ELEMENTS
LOGIC ELEMENT 1
LOGIC ELEMENT 2
LOGIC ELEMENT 3
▼
S4 LOGIC ELEMENT 1
LOGIC E 1 NAME
▼
LOGIC E1 FUNCTION
LOGIC ELEMENT 4
LOGIC E1 ASSERTED
...
TRIGGER SOURCE 1
LOGIC ELEMENT 8
TRIGGER SOURCE 2
TRIGGER SOURCE 3
S4 WELDED CONTACTOR
WELDED CONT FUNC
PICKUP TIME DELAY
DROPOUT TIME DELAY
OUTPUT RELAY 5
▼
WELDED CURRENT
OUTPUT RELAY 6
WELDED EXT INI
BLOCK 1
WELDED TIME DELAY 1
BLOCK 2
WELDED TIME DELAY 2
BLOCK 3
OUTPUT RELAY 5
OUTPUT RELAY 6
S4 START INHIBIT
THERMAL INHIBIT
▼
STARTS/HOUR LIMIT
TIME BETWEEN STARTS
RESTART INHIBIT
S4 EMERGENCY RESTART
EMERGENCY RESTART
S4 LOCKOUT RESET
LOCKOUT RESET
S4 RESET
RESET
896798. cdr
Virtual inputs
There are 32 virtual inputs that can be individually programmed to respond to input
commands entered via the relay keypad, or by using communication protocols.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S4 CONTROLS > VIRTUAL INPUTS
VIRTUAL INPUT 1
Range: Off, On
Default: Off
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6–135
S4 CONTROL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
The state of each virtual input can be controlled under SETPOINTS > S4 CONTROL >
VIRTUAL INPUTS menu. For this purpose, each of the virtual inputs selected for control need
be “Enabled” under SETPOINTS > S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS > VIRTUAL INPUTS, and its type “SelfReset” or “Latched” specified.
If Self-Reset type was selected, entering “On” command will lead to a pulse of one
protection pass. To prolong the time of the virtual input pulse, one can assign it as a trigger
source to a Logic Element with a dropout timer set to the desired pulse time. If “Latched”
type is selected, the state of the virtual input will be latched, upon entering “On” command.
Refer to the logic diagram below for more details.
Figure 6-46: Virtual inputs scheme logic
SETPOINT
V INPUT FUNCTION
Disabled = 0
Enabled = 1
AND
S
“Virtual Input 1 to ON = 1"
LATCH
ACTUAL VALUES
“Virtual Input 1 to OFF = 0"
AND
V INPUT 1 NAME:
(Operand)
R
OR
V Input 1 Status
SETPOINT
Latched
Self-Reset
AND
V INPUT 1 TYPE
896774.cdr
Logic elements
The 339 relay has 16 Logic Elements available to build simple logic using the state of any
programmed contact, virtual, or remote input, or from the output operand of a protection,
or control element. Changing the state of any of the assigned inputs used as trigger
sources, will change the state of the Logic Element, unless a blocking input is present. The
logic provides for assigning up to three triggering inputs in an “OR” gate for Logic Element
operation, and up to three blocking inputs in an “OR” gate for defining the block signal.
Pickup and dropout timers are available for delaying Logic Element operation and dropout respectively. In addition, the user can define whether to use the “ON”, or “OFF” state of
the programmed element by selecting ASSERTED: “On” or “Off”.
Referring to the Logic Element logic diagram below, the Logic Element can be set to one of
four functions: Control, Alarm, Latched Alarm, or Trip. The Trip output relay will be
triggered when Trip is selected as a function, and the Logic element operates. Output relay
#1 (Trip) will not be triggered during Logic Element operation if Alarm, Latched Alarm, or
Control is selected.
The “PICKUP” LED will turn on upon a Logic Element pickup condition except when the
Logic Element function is selected as Control.
The “ALARM” LED will turn on upon Logic Element operation if the Logic Element function
selected is either Alarm, or Latched Alarm.
The “TRIP” LED will turn on upon Logic Element operation if the Logic Element function is
selected as Trip.
The option to trigger auxiliary output relays is provided for any of the selected Logic
Element functions.
6–136
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S4 CONTROL
The following path is available using the keypad. For instructions on how to use the
keypad, please refer to Chapter 3 - Working with the Keypad.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S4 CONTROLS > S4 LOGIC ELEMENTS
LE1(16) FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Control, Alarm, Latched Alarm, Trip
Default: Disabled
This setting defines the use of the Logic Element. When Trip is selected as a function, the
Logic Element will trigger Output Relay # 1 (Trip) upon operation.
LE1(16) ASSERTED
Range: On, Off
Default: Off
This setting defines the Logic Element state “On” or “Off” to be used as an output. The
asserted “On” selection provides an output “high” when the LE is "On". If asserted “Off” is
selected, then the LE output will be “high”, when the LE is “Off”.
TRIGGER SOURCE 1, 2, 3
Range: Off, Any input from the list of inputs
Default: Off
Each of the three trigger sources is configurable by allowing the assigning of an input
selected from a list of inputs. This input can be a contact input, a virtual input, a remote
input, or an output flag from a protection, or control element.
TRIGGER LOGIC
Range: OR, AND
Default: OR
This setting defines trigger source operation as either “OR” or “AND”. When set to “OR”
any of the inputs will trigger the Logic Element. When set to “AND” all three sources must
be asserted before the Logic Element is triggered.
PKP TIME DELAY
Range: 0 to 60000 ms in steps of 1 ms
Default: 0 ms
This setting specifies the pickup time delay before Logic Element operation.
DPO TIME DELAY
Range: 0 to 60000 ms in steps of 1 ms
Default: 0 ms
This setting specifies the time delay from a reset timer that starts upon expiry of the
pickup time delay and prolongs the operation of the Logic Element until this time expires.
BLOCK 1, 2, 3
Range: Off, Any input from the list of inputs
Default: Off
Each of the three blocks is configurable by allowing the assigning of an input selected
from a list of inputs. This input can be a contact input, a virtual input, a remote input, or
an output flag from a protection, or control element, as well as an input from any of the
other seven logic inputs.
BLOCK LOGIC
Range: OR, AND
Default: OR
This setting defines block source operation as either “OR” or “AND”. When set to “OR” any
of the inputs will block the Logic Element. When set to “AND” all three sources must be
asserted before the Logic Element is blocked.
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6–137
S4 CONTROL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
OUTPUT RELAYS 4 to 6 / OUTPUT RELAYS 5 to 6
Range: Do not operate, Operate
Default: Do not operate
Any assignable output relay can be selected to operate upon a Logic Element operating
condition. When the SWITCHING DEVICE is selected as BREAKER, the assignable output
relays will be Output Relays 4 to 6. When the SWITCHING DEVICE is selected as
CONTACTOR, the assignable output relays will be Output Relays 5 to 6. The selection of
auxiliary relay outputs is available no matter whether the Control, Alarm, Latched
Alarm, or Trip function is selected.
6–138
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
SETTING
896840A1.cdr
Off = 0
BLOCK 3:
Off = 0
BLOCK 2:
Off = 0
BLOCK 1:
OR
AND
Logic diagram is shown for Logic Element 1.
All other Logic Elements display the same logic.
S4 LOGIC ELEMENT 1
SETTING
AND
OR
TRIGGER LOGIC
Trip
Alarm
Latched Alarm
Disabled = 0
LOGIC EL FUNCTION
S4 LOGIC ELEMENT 1
SETTING
SETTING
AND
SETTING
tPKP
PICKUP TIME DELAY
DROPOUT TIME DELAY
Trigger Source 3
Off
S4 LOGIC ELEMENT 1
SETTING
= OFF
= ON
LE 1 ASSERTED STATE
Off
Trigger Source 2
Off
Trigger Source 1
AND
OR
TRIGGER LOGIC
Contactor
tDPO
Breaker
SETTING
SWITCHING DEVICE
RUN
S2 SYSTEM SETUP
AND
S4 LOGIC ELEMENT 1
SETTING
Off = 0
Reset
Off = 0
Lockout Reset
Off = 0
Emergency Restart
S4 CONTROLS
SETTINGS
Reset Input
Lockout Reset Input
Emergency Restart Input
INPUTS
KEYPAD RESET
AND
AND
AND
OR
AND
AND
AND
OR
R
S
OR
LATCH
AND
AND
AND
AND
R
S
OR
OR
LATCH
TARGET MESSAGE
OUTPUT RELAY 6
OUTPUT RELAY 5
OUTPUT RELAY 4
LOGIC E1 Trip
State: Pickup
LOGIC E1 Alarm
State: Pickup
TARGET MESSAGE
ANY TRIP PKP
LE1 TRIP PKP
ANY ALARM PKP
LE1 ALARM PKP
LOGIC OPERAND
ASSIGNABLE AUX RELAYS
Operate
OUTPUT RELAY 5
Output Relays
Upon
OUTPUT RELAY 6
Selection
Operate
Output Relays
Upon
Selection
ASSIGNABLE AUX RELAYS
LOGIC E1 Trip
State: Operate
TARGET MESSAGE
ANY TRIP OP
LE1 TRIP OP
ANY LATCHED ALARM OP
ANY ALARM OP
LE1 ALARM OP
LOGIC OPERAND
LOGIC E1 Alarm
State: Operate
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S4 CONTROL
Figure 6-47: Logic Element logic diagram
6–139
S4 CONTROL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
The following table, from the 339 Communications Guide, shows the list of available Logic
Inputs.
6–140
Code
Type
FC134C
unsigned 16 bits
Definition
Logic Element Trigger
0
Off
0x0040
Contact IN 1 On
0x0041
Contact IN 2 On
0x0042
Contact IN 3 On
0x0043
Contact IN 4 On
0x0044
Contact IN 5 On
0x0045
Contact IN 6 On
0x0046
Contact IN 7 On
0x0047
Contact IN 8 On
0x0048
Contact IN 9 On
0x0049
Contact IN 10 On
0x0060
Contact IN 1 Off
0x0061
Contact IN 2 Off
0x0062
Contact IN 3 Off
0x0063
Contact IN 4 Off
0x0064
Contact IN 5 Off
0x0065
Contact IN 6 Off
0x0066
Contact IN 7 Off
0x0067
Contact IN 8 Off
0x0068
Contact IN 9 Off
0x0069
Contact IN 10 Off
0x0080
Virtual IN 1 On
0x0081
Virtual IN 2 On
0x0082
Virtual IN 3 On
0x0083
Virtual IN 4 On
0x0084
Virtual IN 5 On
0x0085
Virtual IN 6 On
0x0086
Virtual IN 7 On
0x0087
Virtual IN 8 On
0x0088
Virtual IN 9 On
0x0089
Virtual IN 10 On
0x008A
Virtual IN 11 On
0x008B
Virtual IN 12 On
0x008C
Virtual IN 13 On
0x008D
Virtual IN 14 On
0x008E
Virtual IN 15 On
0x008F
Virtual IN 16 On
0x0090
Virtual IN 17 On
0x0091
Virtual IN 18 On
0x0092
Virtual IN 19 On
0x0093
Virtual IN 20 On
0x0094
Virtual IN 21 On
0x0095
Virtual IN 22 On
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S4 CONTROL
Code
Type
Definition
0x0096
Virtual IN 23 On
0x0097
Virtual IN 24 On
0x0098
Virtual IN 25 On
0x0099
Virtual IN 26 On
0x009A
Virtual IN 27 On
0x009B
Virtual IN 28 On
0x009C
Virtual IN 29 On
0x009D
Virtual IN 30 On
0x009E
Virtual IN 31 On
0x009F
Virtual IN 32 On
0x00A0
Virtual IN 1 Off
0x00A1
Virtual IN 2 Off
0x00A2
Virtual IN 3 Off
0x00A3
Virtual IN 4 Off
0x00A4
Virtual IN 5 Off
0x00A5
Virtual IN 6 Off
0x00A6
Virtual IN 7 Off
0x00A7
Virtual IN 8 Off
0x00A8
Virtual IN 9 Off
0x00A9
Virtual IN 10 Off
0x00AA
Virtual IN 11 Off
0x00AB
Virtual IN 12 Off
0x00AC
Virtual IN 13 Off
0x00AD
Virtual IN 14 Off
0x00AE
Virtual IN 15 Off
0x00AF
Virtual IN 16 Off
0x00B0
Virtual IN 17 Off
0x00B1
Virtual IN 18 Off
0x00B2
Virtual IN 19 Off
0x00B3
Virtual IN 20 Off
0x00B4
Virtual IN 21 Off
0x00B5
Virtual IN 22 Off
0x00B6
Virtual IN 23 Off
0x00B7
Virtual IN 24 Off
0x00B8
Virtual IN 25 Off
0x00B9
Virtual IN 26 Off
0x00BA
Virtual IN 27 Off
0x00BB
Virtual IN 28 Off
0x00BC
Virtual IN 29 Off
0x00BD
Virtual IN 30 Off
0x00BE
Virtual IN 31 Off
0x00BF
Virtual IN 32 Off
0x01C0
Remote IN 1 On
0x01C1
Remote IN 2 On
0x01C2
Remote IN 3 On
0x01C3
Remote IN 4 On
0x01C4
Remote IN 5 On
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6–141
S4 CONTROL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
Code
6–142
Type
Definition
0x01C5
Remote IN 6 On
0x01C6
Remote IN 7 On
0x01C7
Remote IN 8 On
0x01C8
Remote IN 9 On
0x01C9
Remote IN 10 On
0x01CA
Remote IN 11 On
0x01CB
Remote IN 12 On
0x01CC
Remote IN 13 On
0x01CD
Remote IN 14 On
0x01CE
Remote IN 15 On
0x01CF
Remote IN 16 On
0x01D0
Remote IN 17 On
0x01D1
Remote IN 18 On
0x01D2
Remote IN 19 On
0x01D3
Remote IN 20 On
0x01D4
Remote IN 21 On
0x01D5
Remote IN 22 On
0x01D6
Remote IN 23 On
0x01D7
Remote IN 24 On
0x01D8
Remote IN 25 On
0x01D9
Remote IN 26 On
0x01DA
Remote IN 27 On
0x01DB
Remote IN 28 On
0x01DC
Remote IN 29 On
0x01DD
Remote IN 30 On
0x01DE
Remote IN 31 On
0x01DF
Remote IN 32 On
0x01E0
Remote IN 1 Off
0x01E1
Remote IN 2 Off
0x01E2
Remote IN 3 Off
0x01E3
Remote IN 4 Off
0x01E4
Remote IN 5 Off
0x01E5
Remote IN 6 Off
0x01E6
Remote IN 7 Off
0x01E7
Remote IN 8 Off
0x01E8
Remote IN 9 Off
0x01E9
Remote IN 10 Off
0x01EA
Remote IN 11 Off
0x01EB
Remote IN 12 Off
0x01EC
Remote IN 13 Off
0x01ED
Remote IN 14 Off
0x01EE
Remote IN 15 Off
0x01EF
Remote IN 16 Off
0x01F0
Remote IN 17 Off
0x01F1
Remote IN 18 Off
0x01F2
Remote IN 19 Off
0x01F3
Remote IN 20 Off
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S4 CONTROL
Code
Type
Definition
0x01F4
Remote IN 21 Off
0x01F5
Remote IN 22 Off
0x01F6
Remote IN 23 Off
0x01F7
Remote IN 24 Off
0x01F8
Remote IN 25 Off
0x01F9
Remote IN 26 Off
0x01FA
Remote IN 27 Off
0x01FB
Remote IN 28 Off
0x01FC
Remote IN 29 Off
0x01FD
Remote IN 30 Off
0x01FE
Remote IN 31 Off
0x01FF
Remote IN 32 Off
0x8002
Any Trip
0x8041
Therm O/L Trip PKP
0x8042
Therm O/L Trip OP
0x8044
Therm O/L Trip DPO
0x8081
GF Trip PKP
0x8082
GF Trip OP
0x8084
GF Trip DPO
0x80C2
Accel Trip OP
0x8141
Under Pwr Trip PKP
0x8142
Under Pwr Trip OP
0x8144
Under Pwr Trip DPO
0x8181
Single PH Trip PKP
0x8182
Single PH Trip OP
0x8184
Single PH Trip DPO
0x8201
Mech Jam Trip PKP
0x8202
Mech Jam Trip OP
0x8204
Mech Jam Trip DPO
0x8241
U/CURR Trip PKP
0x8242
U/CURR Trip OP
0x8244
U/CURR Trip DPO
0x8281
UNBAL Trip PKP
0x8282
UNBAL Trip OP
0x8284
UNBAL Trip DPO
0x82C2
RTD 1 Trip OP
0x82C4
RTD 1 Trip DPO
0x8302
RTD 2 Trip OP
0x8304
RTD 2 Trip DPO
0x8342
RTD 3 Trip OP
0x8344
RTD 3 Trip DPO
0x8382
RTD 4 Trip OP
0x8384
RTD 4 Trip DPO
0x83C2
RTD 5 Trip OP
0x83C4
RTD 5 Trip DPO
0x8402
RTD 6 Trip OP
0x8404
RTD 6 Trip DPO
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6–143
S4 CONTROL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
Code
6–144
Type
Definition
0x84C1
LE 1 Trip PKP
0x84C2
LE 1 Trip OP
0x84C4
LE 1 Trip DPO
0x8501
LE 2 Trip PKP
0x8502
LE 2 Trip OP
0x8504
LE 2 Trip DPO
0x8541
LE 3 Trip PKP
0x8542
LE 3 Trip OP
0x8544
LE 3 Trip DPO
0x8581
LE 4 Trip PKP
0x8582
LE 4 Trip OP
0x8584
LE 4 Trip DPO
0x85C1
LE 5 Trip PKP
0x85C2
LE 5 Trip OP
0x85C4
LE 5 Trip DPO
0x8601
LE 6 Trip PKP
0x8602
LE 6 Trip OP
0x8604
LE 6 Trip DPO
0x8641
LE 7 Trip PKP
0x8642
LE 7 Trip OP
0x8644
LE 7 Trip DPO
0x8681
LE 8 Trip PKP
0x8682
LE 8 Trip OP
0x8684
LE 8 Trip DPO
0x86C2
RTD 7 Trip OP
0x86C4
RTD 7 Trip DPO
0x8702
RTD 8 Trip OP
0x8704
RTD 8 Trip DPO
0x8742
RTD 9 Trip OP
0x8744
RTD 9 Trip DPO
0x8782
RTD 10 Trip OP
0x8784
RTD 10 Trip DPO
0x87C2
RTD 11 Trip OP
0x87C4
RTD 11 Trip DPO
0x8802
RTD 12 Trip OP
0x8804
RTD 12 Trip DPO
0x8F81
Fuse Fail Trip PKP
0x8F82
Fuse Fail Trip OP
0x8F84
Fuse Fail Trip DPO
0x8FC2
Ph Revrsl Trip OP
0x8FC4
Ph Revrsl Trip DPO
0x9041
Ntrl IOC1 Trip PKP
0x9042
Ntrl IOC1 Trip OP
0x9044
Ntrl IOC1 Trip DPO
0x93C1
NegSeq OV Trp PKP
0x93C2
NegSeq OV Trp OP
0x93C4
NegSeq OV Trp DPO
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S4 CONTROL
Code
Type
Definition
0x9441
Ph OV1 Trip PKP
0x9442
Ph OV1 Trip OP
0x9444
Ph OV1 Trip DPO
0x9481
Ph UV1 Trip PKP
0x9482
Ph UV1 Trip OP
0x9484
Ph UV1 Trip DPO
0x9541
UndrFreq1 Trip PKP
0x9542
UndrFreq1 Trip OP
0x9544
UndrFreq1 Trip DPO
0x9581
UndrFreq2 Trip PKP
0x9582
UndrFreq2 Trip OP
0x9584
UndrFreq2 Trip DPO
0x95C1
OverFreq1 Trip PKP
0x95C2
OverFreq1 Trip OP
0x95C4
OverFreq1 Trip DPO
0x9601
OverFreq2 Trip PKP
0x9602
OverFreq2 Trip OP
0x9604
OverFreq2 Trip DPO
0x9881
Ph OV2 Trip PKP
0x9882
Ph OV2 Trip OP
0x9884
Ph OV2 Trip DPO
0x98C1
Ph UV2 Trip PKP
0x98C2
Ph UV2 Trip OP
0x98C4
Ph UV2 Trip DPO
0x9901
S/C Trip PKP
0x9902
S/C Trip OP
0x9904
S/C Trip DPO
0x9941
SPD2 S/C Trip PKP
0x9942
SPD2 S/C Trip OP
0x9944
SPD2 S/C Trip DPO
0x9981
SPD2 U/C Trip PKP
0x9982
SPD2 U/C Trip OP
0x9984
SPD2 U/C Trip DPO
0x9C01
LE 9 Trip PKP
0x9C02
LE 9 Trip OP
0x9C04
LE 9 Trip DPO
0x9C41
LE 10 Trip PKP
0x9C42
LE 10 Trip OP
0x9C44
LE 10 Trip DPO
0x9C81
LE 11 Trip PKP
0x9C82
LE 11 Trip OP
0x9C84
LE 11 Trip DPO
0x9CC1
LE 12 Trip PKP
0x9CC2
LE 12 Trip OP
0x9CC4
LE 12 Trip DPO
0x9D01
LE 13 Trip PKP
0x9D02
LE 13 Trip OP
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6–145
S4 CONTROL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
Code
6–146
Type
Definition
0x9D04
LE 13 Trip DPO
0x9D41
LE 14 Trip PKP
0x9D42
LE 14 Trip OP
0x9D44
LE 14 Trip DPO
0x9D81
LE 15 Trip PKP
0x9D82
LE 15 Trip OP
0x9D84
LE 15 Trip DPO
0x9DC1
LE 16 Trip PKP
0x9DC2
LE 16 Trip OP
0x9DC4
LE 16 Trip DPO
0xA002
Any Alarm
0xA042
Therm Lvl Alrm OP
0xA044
Therm Lvl Alrm DPO
0xA081
Gnd Fault Alrm PKP
0xA082
Gnd Fault Alrm OP
0xA084
Gnd Fault Alrm DPO
0xA141
Under Pwr Alrm PKP
0xA142
Under Pwr Alrm OP
0xA144
Under Pwr Alrm DPO
0xA241
U/CURR Alarm PKP
0xA242
U/CURR Alarm OP
0xA244
U/CURR Alarm DPO
0xA281
UNBAL Alarm PKP
0xA282
UNBAL Alarm OP
0xA284
UNBAL Alarm DPO
0xA2C2
RTD 1 Alarm OP
0xA2C4
RTD 1 Alarm DPO
0xA302
RTD 2 Alarm OP
0xA304
RTD 2 Alarm DPO
0xA342
RTD 3 Alarm OP
0xA344
RTD 3 Alarm DPO
0xA382
RTD 4 Alarm OP
0xA384
RTD 4 Alarm DPO
0xA3C2
RTD 5 Alarm OP
0xA3C4
RTD 5 Alarm DPO
0xA402
RTD 6 Alarm OP
0xA404
RTD 6 Alarm DPO
0xA442
RTD Trouble OP
0xA4C1
LE 1 Alarm PKP
0xA4C2
LE 1 Alarm OP
0xA4C4
LE 1 Alarm DPO
0xA501
LE 2 Alarm PKP
0xA502
LE 2 Alarm OP
0xA504
LE 2 Alarm DPO
0xA541
LE 3 Alarm PKP
0xA542
LE 3 Alarm OP
0xA544
LE 3 Alarm DPO
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S4 CONTROL
Code
Type
Definition
0xA581
LE 4 Alarm PKP
0xA582
LE 4 Alarm OP
0xA584
LE 4 Alarm DPO
0xA5C1
LE 5 Alarm PKP
0xA5C2
LE 5 Alarm OP
0xA5C4
LE 5 Alarm DPO
0xA601
LE 6 Alarm PKP
0xA602
LE 6 Alarm OP
0xA604
LE 6 Alarm DPO
0xA641
LE 7 Alarm PKP
0xA642
LE 7 Alarm OP
0xA644
LE 7 Alarm DPO
0xA681
LE 8 Alarm PKP
0xA682
LE 8 Alarm OP
0xA684
LE 8 Alarm DPO
0xA6C2
RTD 7 Alarm OP
0xA6C4
RTD 7 Alarm DPO
0xA702
RTD 8 Alarm OP
0xA704
RTD 8 Alarm DPO
0xA742
RTD 9 Alarm OP
0xA744
RTD 9 Alarm DPO
0xA782
RTD 10 Alarm OP
0xA784
RTD 10 Alarm DPO
0xA7C2
RTD 11 Alarm OP
0xA7C4
RTD 11 Alarm DPO
0xA802
RTD 12 Alarm OP
0xA804
RTD 12 Alarm DPO
0xA982
Motor Run Hrs OP
0xAA01
Welded ContactrPKP
0xAA02
Welded Contactr OP
0xAA04
Welded ContactrDPO
0xAA42
SPD SW Not Cnfg OP
0xAA82
SPD SW Fail OP
0xAB01
Load Incr Alrm PKP
0xAB02
Load Incr Alrm OP
0xAB04
Load Incr Alrm DPO
0xABC1
HI Amb Temp PKP
0xABC2
HI Amb Temp OP
0xABC4
HI Amb Temp DPO
0xAC01
LO Amb Temp PKP
0xAC02
LO Amb Temp OP
0xAC04
LO Amb Temp DPO
0xAC42
Self Test Alarm OP
0xACC2
BKRTrpCntrAlrm OP
0xAD02
R1 CoilMonAlrm OP
0xAD42
R2 CoilMonAlrm OP
0xAD81
BKR1 Fail Alrm PKP
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6–147
S4 CONTROL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
Code
6–148
Type
Definition
0xAD82
BKR1 Fail Alrm OP
0xADC2
BKR Stat Fail OP
0xAF81
Fuse Fail Alrm PKP
0xAF82
Fuse Fail Alrm OP
0xAF84
Fuse Fail Alrm DPO
0xAFC2
Ph Revrsl Alarm OP
0xAFC4
Ph Revrsl Alarm DPO
0xB041
Ntrl IOC1 Alrm PKP
0xB042
Ntrl IOC1 Alrm OP
0xB044
Ntrl IOC1 Alrm DPO
0xB342
NtrlDir RevAlm OP
0xB344
NtrlDir RevAlmDPO
0xB3C1
NegSeq OV Alrm PKP
0xB3C2
NegSeq OV Alrm OP
0xB3C4
NegSeq OV Alrm DPO
0xB441
Ph OV1 Alarm PKP
0xB442
Ph OV1 Alarm OP
0xB444
Ph OV1 Alarm DPO
0xB481
Ph UV1 Alarm PKP
0xB482
Ph UV1 Alarm OP
0xB484
Ph UV1 Alarm DPO
0xB541
UndrFreq1 Alrm PKP
0xB542
UndrFreq1 Alrm OP
0xB544
UndrFreq1 Alrm DPO
0xB581
UndrFreq2 Alrm PKP
0xB582
UndrFreq2 Alrm OP
0xB584
UndrFreq2 Alrm DPO
0xB5C1
OverFreq1 Alrm PKP
0xB5C2
OverFreq1 Alrm OP
0xB5C4
OverFreq1 Alrm DPO
0xB601
OverFreq2 Alrm PKP
0xB602
OverFreq2 Alrm OP
0xB604
OverFreq2 Alrm DPO
0xB881
Ph OV2 Alarm PKP
0xB882
Ph OV2 Alarm OP
0xB884
Ph OV2 Alarm DPO
0xB8C1
Ph UV2 Alarm PKP
0xB8C2
Ph UV2 Alarm OP
0xB8C4
Ph UV2 Alarm DPO
0xB901
S/C Alarm PKP
0xB902
S/C Alarm OP
0xB904
S/C Alarm DPO
0xB941
SPD2 S/C Alarm PKP
0xB942
SPD2 S/C Alarm OP
0xB944
SPD2 S/C Alarm DPO
0xB981
SPD2 U/C Alarm PKP
0xB982
SPD2 U/C Alarm OP
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S4 CONTROL
Code
Type
Definition
0xB984
SPD2 U/C Alarm DPO
0xBC01
LE 9 Alarm PKP
0xBC02
LE 9 Alarm OP
0xBC04
LE 9 Alarm DPO
0xBC41
LE 10 Alarm PKP
0xBC42
LE 10 Alarm OP
0xBC44
LE 10 Alarm DPO
0xBC81
LE 11 Alarm PKP
0xBC82
LE 11 Alarm OP
0xBC84
LE 11 Alarm DPO
0xBCC1
LE 12 Alarm PKP
0xBCC2
LE 12 Alarm OP
0xBCC4
LE 12 Alarm DPO
0xBD01
LE 13 Alarm PKP
0xBD02
LE 13 Alarm OP
0xBD04
LE 13 Alarm DPO
0xBD41
LE 14 Alarm PKP
0xBD42
LE 14 Alarm OP
0xBD44
LE 14 Alarm DPO
0xBD81
LE 15 Alarm PKP
0xBD82
LE 15 Alarm OP
0xBD84
LE 15 Alarm DPO
0xBDC1
LE 16 Alarm PKP
0xBDC2
LE 16 Alarm OP
0xBDC4
LE 16 Alarm DPO
0xC002
Any Inhibit
0xC042
Output Relay 3 On
0xC082
Output Relay 4 On
0xC0C2
Output Relay 5 On
0xC102
Output Relay 6 On
0xC142
Self-Test Rly 7 On
0xC182
Output Relay 1 On
0xC1C2
Output Relay 2 On
0xC242
High Speed OP
0xC282
Low Speed OP
0xC3C2
Motor Online
0xC402
Emergency Restart
0xC442
Hot RTD OP
0xC444
Hot RTD DPO
0xC482
Lockout OP
0xC484
Lockout DPO
0xC4C1
LE 1 PKP
0xC4C2
LE 1 OP
0xC4C4
LE 1 DPO
0xC501
LE 2 PKP
0xC502
LE 2 OP
0xC504
LE 2 DPO
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6–149
S4 CONTROL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
Code
6–150
Type
Definition
0xC541
LE 3 PKP
0xC542
LE 3 OP
0xC544
LE 3 DPO
0xC581
LE 4 PKP
0xC582
LE 4 OP
0xC584
LE 4 DPO
0xC5C1
LE 5 PKP
0xC5C2
LE 5 OP
0xC5C4
LE 5 DPO
0xC601
LE 6 PKP
0xC602
LE 6 OP
0xC604
LE 6 DPO
0xC641
LE 7 PKP
0xC642
LE 7 OP
0xC644
LE 7 DPO
0xC681
LE 8 PKP
0xC682
LE 8 OP
0xC684
LE 8 DPO
0xC902
Open Breaker
0xC942
Close Breaker
0xC742
VFD Bypassed
0xC744
VFD Not Bypassed
0xCA02
52a Contact OP
0xCA42
52b Contact OP
0xCAC2
L/O Rst Closed
0xCCC2
BKR Stat Open
0xCD02
BKR Stat Clsd
0xCE82
Therm Inhibit OP
0xCEC2
Rstrt Inhibit OP
0xCF02
Start/Hr Inhib OP
0xCF42
T-BT-Strt Inhib OP
0xCF81
Fuse Fail InhibPKP
0xCF82
Fuse Fail Inhib OP
0xCFC2
Ph Rev Inhibit OP
0xCFC4
Ph Rev Inhibit DPO
0xD342
Ntrl Dir Rev OP
0xD344
Ntrl Dir Rev DPO
0xDC01
LE 9 PKP
0xDC02
LE 9 OP
0xDC04
LE 9 DPO
0xDC41
LE 10 PKP
0xDC42
LE 10 OP
0xDC44
LE 10 DPO
0xDC81
LE 11 PKP
0xDC82
LE 11 OP
0xDC84
LE 11 DPO
0xDCC1
LE 12 PKP
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S4 CONTROL
Code
Type
Definition
0xDCC2
LE 12 OP
0xDCC4
LE 12 DPO
0xDD01
LE 13 PKP
0xDD02
LE 13 OP
0xDD04
LE 13 DPO
0xDD41
LE 14 PKP
0xDD42
LE 14 OP
0xDD44
LE 14 DPO
0xDD81
LE 15 PKP
0xDD82
LE 15 OP
0xDD84
LE 15 DPO
0xDDC1
LE 16 PKP
0xDDC2
LE 16 OP
0xDDC4
LE 16 DPO
0xE002
Any Block
0xE042
Therm O/L Blck OP
0xE082
Gnd Fault BLK
0xE0C2
Accel BLK
0xE142
UndrPower BLK
0xE182
Output Relay 1 BLK
0xE1C2
Output Relay 2 BLK
0xE202
Mech Jam BLK
0xE242
U/CURR BLK
0xE282
UNBAL BLK
0xE2C2
RTD1 BLK OP
0xE302
RTD2 BLK OP
0xE342
RTD3 BLK OP
0xE382
RTD4 BLK OP
0xE3C2
RTD5 BLK OP
0xE402
RTD6 BLK OP
0xE442
RTDTrouble BLK OP
0xE6C2
RTD7 BLK OP
0xE702
RTD8 BLK OP
0xE742
RTD9 BLK OP
0xE782
RTD10 BLK OP
0xE7C2
RTD11 BLK OP
0xE802
RTD12 BLK OP
0xF042
Ntrl IOC1 Block
0xF342
NTRL DIR Rev Block
0xF3C2
NegSeq OV Block
0xF442
Ph OV1 Block
0xF482
Ph UV1 Block
0xF542
UndrFreq1 Block
0xF582
UndrFreq2 Block
0xF5C2
OverFreq1 Block
0xF602
OverFreq2 Block
0xF882
Ph OV2 Block
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6–151
S4 CONTROL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
Code
Type
Definition
0xF8C2
Ph UV2 Block
0xF902
S/C BLK
0xF942
SPD2 S/C BLK
0xF982
SPD2 U/C BLK OP
Breaker failure / Welded contactor
The Breaker Failure or Welded Contactor function monitors the phase currents, after a trip
command from the protection elements is initiated, or a logic operand programmed as BF
EXT INITIATE / WELDED EXT INI is asserted. The external initiating logic operand can be a
Contact Input, a Virtual Input, a Remote Input, or an output from a Logic Element. If any
phase current is above the set current level after the programmed time delay, a BREAKER
FAILURE will be declared when BREAKER was chosen for SWITCHING DEVICE, or a WELDED
CONTACTOR will be declared when CONTACTOR was chosen for SWITCHING DEVICE, and
the selected output relays will be activated. The time delay should be set slightly longer
than the breaker or contactor operating time.
To provide user flexibility, the 339 has included two programmable timers for the Breaker
Failure / Welded Contactor function. The timers can be used singularly or in combination
with each other. BF/Welded Time Delay 1 starts counting down once a trip condition is
recognized or the programmed logic operand is asserted. BF/Welded Time Delay 2 does
not begin counting down until BF/Welded Time Delay 1 has expired and one of the phase
currents is above the setting BF/Welded Current. If one of the delays is not required, simply
program the unwanted timer to its minimum value.
When the switching device is selected as CONTACTOR, this feature is displayed as WELDED
CONTACTOR.
NOTE:
NOTE
The following path is available using the keypad. For instructions on how to use the
keypad, please refer to Chapter 3 - Working with the Keypad.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S4 CONTROLS > BREAKER FAIL (WELDED CONTACTOR)
BF FUNCTION / WELDED CONT FUNC
Range: Disabled, Alarm, Latched Alarm
Default: Disabled
This setting enables the Breaker failure or Welded Contactor functionality. If the
operating condition is satisfied when ALARM is selected as the function, the LED
“ALARM” will flash upon the activating condition, and will automatically reset when the
condition clears. If Latched Alarm is selected, the LED “ALARM” will flash upon the
activating condition, and will stay “ON” after the condition clears, until a reset command
is initiated. Any assignable output relays can be selected to operate when this function is
enabled.
BF CURRENT / WELDED CURRENT
Range: 0.05 to 20.00 x CT in steps of 0.01
Default: 1.00 x CT
This setting specifies the current level monitored by the Breaker Failure / Welded
Contactor logic. Program this setting to a current level that can detect the lowest
expected fault current on the protected breaker/contactor.
6–152
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S4 CONTROL
BF EXT INITIATE / WELDED EXT INI
Range: Off, Contact Input 1 to 10, Virtual Input 1 to 32, Remote Input 1 to 32, Logic
Element 1 to 16
Default: Off
This setting allows the user to select a logic operand to externally initiate the Breaker
Failure / Welded Contactor logic.
BF TIME DELAY 1 / WELDED TIME DELAY 1
Range: 0.03 to 1.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 0.10 s
This timer starts when breaker trip command is issued from any of the protection
elements, or a programmed external initiating logic operand is asserted.
BF TIME DELAY 2 / WELDED TIME DELAY 2
Range: 0.00 to 1.00 s in steps of 0.01 s
Default: 0.00 s
This timer does not start until a trip command is recognized, timer BF / WELDED TIME
DELAY1 has expired, and at least one of the phase currents is above the setting BF /
WELDED CURRENT.
OUTPUT RELAY 4 to 6 / OUTPUT RELAY 5 to 6
Range: Do not operate, Operate
Default: Do not operate
Any assignable output relay can be selected to operate upon Breaker Failure / Welded
Contactor operation. When the SWITCHING DEVICE is selected as BREAKER, the
assignable output relays will be Output Relay 4 to 6. When the SWITCHING DEVICE is
selected as CONTACTOR, the assignable output relays will be Output Relay 5 to 6.
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6–153
6–154
SETTING
INPUT
BF/WELDED EXT INITIATE INPUT
Off = 0
BF EXT INITIATE/WELDED EXT INI
TRIP
AND
OR
Ic > PICKUP
Phase C Current (Ic)
SETTING
tPKP
AND
SETTING
0
OR
tPKP
BF/WELDED TIME DELAY2
0
AND
R
S
LATCH
Contactor
Off = 0
AND
Breaker
Reset
SETTING
SWITCHING DEVICE
BF/WELDED TIME DELAY1
Ib > PICKUP
Phase B Current (Ib)
RUN
BF/ WELDED CURRENT
SETTING
Ia > PICKUP
OR
Phase A Current (Ia)
From Protection Operation
Alarm
Latched Alarm
Disabled = 0
BF FUNCTION/WELDED CONT FUNC
SETTING
AND
OR
S2 SYSTEM SETUP
AND
Off = 0
AND
Lockout Reset
Off = 0
Emergency Restart
S4 CONTROLS
SETTINGS
Reset Input
Lockout Reset Input
Emergency Restart Input
INPUTS
KEYPAD RESET
OR
OR
AND
AND
AND
AND
AND
TARGET MESSAGE
ANY LATCHED ALARM OP
ANY ALARM OP
BF ALARM OP
WELDED ALARM OP
LOGIC OPERAND
WELDED CONTACTOR
State: Operate
BREAKER FAILURE
State: Operate
OUTPUT RELAY 6
OUTPUT RELAY 5
OUTPUT RELAY 4
TARGET MESSAGE
OUTPUT RELAY 6
896824.cdr
WELDED ALARM PKP
BF ALARM PKP
LOGIC OPERAND
WELDED CONTACTOR
State: Pickup
BREAKER FAILURE
State: Pickup
Upon
Selection
ASSIGNABLE AUX RELAYS
Operate
Output Relays OUTPUT RELAY 5
Operate
Output Relays
Upon
Selection
ASSIGNABLE AUX RELAYS
AND
AND
AND
S4 CONTROL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
Figure 6-48: Breaker Failure / Welded Contactor logic diagram
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S4 CONTROL
Start inhibit
Thermal Start Inhibit
This function is provided to inhibit starting of a motor if there is insufficient thermal
capacity available for a successful start. The motor start inhibit logic algorithm is defined
by the Thermal Inhibit setpoint. If this setpoint is set to “0”, starts are inhibited until thermal
capacity used decays to a level of 15%. If this setpoint is set greater than zero, starts are
inhibited while the available thermal capacity is less than the learned thermal capacity
used at start.
The margin should be set to zero if the load varies for different starts.
NOTE:
NOTE
The learned thermal capacity used at start is the largest thermal capacity used value
calculated by the thermal model from the last five successful starts, plus a settable margin.
The margin is a percentage of this largest of five. A successful motor start is one in which
the motor reaches the Running state. See the Start/Stop section of this manual for a
description of Running state logic. When the motor information is reset, a value of 85% is
used for the learned thermal capacity used until displaced by 5 subsequent successful
starts. This 85% default requires the thermal capacity used to decay to the same 15% level
required when the margin setting is zero.
For example, if the thermal capacity used for the last 5 starts is 24, 23, 27, 26 and 20%
respectively, and the set margin is 25%, the learned starting capacity used at start is
Maximum(24%+23%+27%+26%+20%) x (1+25%/100%) = 34%. If the motor stops with a
thermal capacity used of 90%, a start inhibit will be issued until the motor cools to 100% 34% = 66%. If the stopped cool time constant is set to 30 minutes, the inhibit time will be:
Eq. 19
If instead the set margin is zero, the inhibit time will be:
Eq. 20
Starts per Hour Inhibit
This element defines the number of start attempts allowed in any 60 minutes interval.
Once the set number of starts has occurred in the last 60 minutes, start controls are
inhibited until the oldest start contributing to the inhibit is more than 60 minutes old.
This element assumes a motor start is occurring when the relay measures the transition of
no motor current to some value of motor current. At this point, one of the Starts/Hour
timers is loaded with 60 minutes. Even unsuccessful start attempts will be logged as starts
for this feature. Once the motor is stopped, the number of starts within the past hour is
compared to the number of starts allowable. If the two numbers are the same, the Start
Inhibit Output Relay will be activated to block the motor start. If a block occurs, the lockout
time will be equal to the longest time elapsed since a start within the past hour, subtracted
from one hour.
For example, if STARTS/HOUR LIMIT is programmed at “2”:
•
One start occurs at T = 0 minutes
•
A second start occurs at T = 17 minutes
•
The motor is stopped at T = 33 minutes
•
A block occurs
•
The lockout time would be 1 hour – 33minutes = 27 minutes
Time Between Starts Inhibit
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6–155
S4 CONTROL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
This function enforces a settable minimum time duration between two successive start
attempts. A time delay is initiated with every start attempt, and a restart is not allowed
until the specified interval has lapsed. This timer feature may be useful in enforcing the
duty limits of starting resistors or starting autotransformers. It may also be used to restrict
jogging.
This element assumes a motor start is occurring when the relay measures the transition of
no motor current to some value of motor current. At this point, the Time Between Starts
timer is loaded with the entered time. Even unsuccessful start attempts will be logged as
starts for this feature. Once the motor is stopped, if the time elapsed since the most recent
start is less than the TIME BETWEEN START setting, the Start Inhibit Output Relay will be
activated to block the motor start. If a block occurs, the lockout time will be equal to the
time elapsed since the most recent start subtracted from the TIME BETWEEN START setting.
For example, if TIME BETWEEN START is programmed as 25 min:
•
A start occurs at T = 0 minutes
•
The motor is stopped at T = 12 minutes
•
A block occurs
•
The lockout time would be 25 minutes – 12 minutes = 13 minutes
Restart Inhibit
The Restart Inhibit feature may be used to ensure that a certain amount of time passes
between the time a motor is stopped and the restarting of that motor. This timer feature
may be very useful for some process applications or motor considerations. If a motor is on
a down-hole pump, after the motor stops, the liquid may fall back down the pipe and spin
the rotor backwards. It would be very undesirable to start the motor at this time.
This element assumes a motor stop is occurring when the relay measures the transition of
some value of motor current to no motor current.
NOTE:
NOTE
For each of these features, non-volatile memory is used to make it behave as if it
continues to operate while control power is lost.
NOTE:
NOTE
THERMAL INHIBIT
Range: OFF, 0 to 25% in steps of 1%
Default: 10%
OFF disables thermal start inhibits. 0% causes starts to be inhibited until the value of
thermal capacity used calculated by the thermal model drops to 15% or less. Setting
values in the range of 1 to 25% specify the margin to be included in the calculation of
the learned thermal capacity used at start, and cause starts to be inhibited until the
value of thermal capacity used drops to the learned thermal capacity used at start or
less.
STARTS/HOUR LIMIT
Range: OFF, 1 to 5 in steps of 1
Default: OFF
Sets the number of starts in the last 60 minutes at which count start control is inhibited.
OFF defeats this feature.
TIME BETWEEN STARTS
Range: OFF, 1 to 3600 s in steps of 1 s
Default: OFF
Sets the amount of time following a start before the next start control is permitted to
prevent restart attempts in quick succession (jogging). OFF defeats this feature.
6–156
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S4 CONTROL
RESTART INHIBIT
Range: OFF, 1 to 50000 s in steps of 1 s
Default: OFF
Sets the amount of time following a stop before a start control is permitted. OFF defeats
this feature.
OUTPUT RELAY 3
Range: Operate, Do Not Operate
Default: Operate
Only shown if INPUT/OUTPUT option ‘R’ is installed and SWITCHING DEVICE is
programmed as CONTACTOR.
This output relay can be selected to operate while any Start Inhibit is active. This setpoint
is available only with 339 INPUT/OUTPUT option ‘R’, and when the SWITCHING DEVICE is
selected as CONTACTOR, otherwise Output Relay 3 will be automatically assigned for
Start Inhibits. If this output relay is programmed to OPERATE, it is recommended that the
OUTPUT TYPE be programmed to SELF-RESET in S5 OUTPUT RELAYS > RLY3 AUXILIARY.
Refer to the S5 OUTPUT RELAYS section for details on Start Inhibit relay wiring and logic
diagrams.
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6–157
S4 CONTROL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
Figure 6-49: Start Inhibit, Starts per Hour, Time Between Starts, and Restart Inhibit
logic diagram
Edge Triggered
Sample & Holds
(Non-Volatile)
MOTOR STATUS
Running
Starting
Clk
In
ACTUAL VALUE
Thermal Capacity Used
-
Clk
Clk
In
+
Clk
In
Preset
Clk
In
Preset
Clk
In
Preset
In
Preset
Preset
Select
Largest
Value
COMMAND
Clear Learned TCU
Presets latches to 85%
SETTING
m = Thermal Inhibit
setting = OFF
setting = 0%
TCin
LOGIC OPERAND
AND
Tcin + m/100 x Tcin
*saturates at 100%
THERMAL INHIBIT
TClearned
85%
TCU
TClearned > 100% - TCU
ACTUAL VALUE
Learned TCU
THERMAL INHIBIT
SETTING
Starts/Hour Limit
STARTS/HOUR COUNTER
setting = OFF
LOGIC OPERAND
Counter ≥ setting
AND
STARTS/HR INHIBIT
ACTUAL VALUE
STARTS/HR INHIBIT
SETTING
tdo = Time Between Starts
LOGIC OPERAND
setting = OFF
Iavg
Iavg > Current Cutoff Level
AND
0
TIME-BTWN-STARTS INHIBIT
tdo
ACTUAL VALUE
TIME-BTWN-STARTS INHIBIT
SETTING
tdo = Restart Inhibit
setting = OFF
LOGIC OPERAND
AND
0
RESTART INHIBIT
tdo
ACTUAL VALUE
RESTART INHIBIT
LOGIC OPERAND
THERMAL INHIBIT
STARTS/HR INHIBIT
TIME-BTWN-STARTS INHIBIT
RESTART INHIBIT
FUSE FAIL INHIBIT
PH REVERSAL INHIBIT
OR
LED: Start Inhibit
Operate Output Relay 3 (Start Inhibit)
896834.cdr
Emergency restart
EMERGENCY RESTART
Range: Off, Contact Input 1 to 10, Virtual Input 1 through 32, Logic element 1 through 16,
Remote Input 1 to 32
Default: Off
6–158
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S4 CONTROL
All relay protection is defeated while the Emergency Restart contact input is closed.
CAUTION:
Emergency restart is for use in situations where continuation of the process driven by
the motor is more important than protecting the motor itself. Closing this contact input
discharges the thermal capacity used register to zero, resets the Starts/Hour Block
count, resets the Time Between Starts Block timer, and resets all trips and alarms so that
a hot motor may be restarted. Therefore, while the Emergency Restart contact input
terminals are shorted, the trip output relay will remain in its normal non-trip state. As the
name implies, this feature should only be used in an emergency – using it otherwise
defeats the purpose of the relay, namely, protecting the motor.
Lockout reset
LOCKOUT RESET
Range: Off, Contact Input 1 to 10, Virtual Input 1 through 32, Logic element 1 through 16,
Remote Input 1 to 32
Default: Off
Closing this contact input resets any lockouts, as well as any trips or latched alarms
provided that the condition that caused the lockout, alarm or trip is no longer present. If
there is a lockout time pending, the start inhibit output will not reset until the lockout
time has expired.
Reset
RESET
Range: Off, Contact Input 1 to 10, Virtual Input 1 through 32, Logic element 1 through 16,
Remote Input 1 to 32
Default: Off
Reset allows a pushbutton or other device located external to the relay to perform the
same functions as the reset pushbutton on the relay faceplate. Closing this contact input
resets any trips or latched alarms provided that the condition that caused the alarm or
trip is no longer present. Lockouts and start inhibits are also reset if the lockout reset
setting is Off.
Breaker control
The Breaker Control menu is designed to trip and close the breaker from the relay either
remotely (LOCAL MODE setting set to "OFF," or the selected contact input deselected) or
locally (the input from the LOCAL MODE setpoint asserted). While in LOCAL MODE, the
REMOTE OPEN and CLOSE setpoints are not active.
The Breaker Control feature is available only when the SWITCHING DEVICE is selected as
BREAKER.
NOTE:
NOTE
The following path is available using the keypad. For instructions on how to use the
keypad, please refer to Chapter 3 - Working with the Keypad.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S4 CONTROLS > BREAKER CONTROL
LOCAL MODE
Range: Off, Contact Input 1 to 10, Virtual Input 1 to 32, Remote Input 1 to 32, Logic
Elements 1 to 16
Default: Off
The LOCAL MODE setting places the relay in local mode. The relay is in Remote Mode, if
not forced into Local Mode by this setpoint (i.e. LOCAL MODE set to "OFF," or the selected
input de-asserted).
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6–159
S4 CONTROL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
REMOTE OPEN
Range: Off, Contact Input 1 to 10, Virtual Input 1 to 32, Remote Input 1 to 32, Logic
Elements 1 to 16
Default: Off
This setting specifies the input which when asserted, initiates a trip (output relay #1 TRIP
energized) and opens the breaker.
REMOTE CLOSE
Range: Off, Contact Input 1 to 10, Virtual Input 1 to 32, Remote Input 1 to 32, Logic
Elements 1 to 16
Default: Off
This setting specifies the input which when asserted, initiates a close (output relay #2
CLOSE energized) and closes the breaker.
KEYPAD BKR OPEN
Range: Yes, No
Default: No
This setting provides flexibility to the user to open the breaker from the keypad. Selecting
“Yes” will introduce a pulse of 100ms to the "trip" output relay. The setting is active, when
the selected input under LOCAL MODE setpoint is asserted.
KEYPAD BKR CLOSE
Range: Yes, No
Default: No
This setting provides flexibility to the user to close the breaker from the keypad. Selecting
“Yes” will introduce a pulse of 100ms to the "close" output relay. The setting is active,
when the selected input under LOCAL MODE setpoint is asserted.
By default, the breaker control mode is set to "Remote" ( LOCAL MODE set to "OFF"). In this
mode, only the REMOTE OPEN and REMOTE CLOSE setpoints are active. The rest of the
setpoints with exception of the RESET setpoint are deactivated, regardless of the status of
their selected inputs.
Local Mode is set if the input for the LOCAL MODE setpoint is asserted. In this mode, the
REMOTE OPEN and REMOTE CLOSE setpoints are deactivated, regardless of the status of
their selected inputs. Breaker Open and Breaker Close commands from the KEYPAD BKR
OPEN and KEYPAD BKR CLOSE setpoints will be active, if the breaker operation is set to
Local Mode (i.e. the selected input under the LOCAL MODE setpoint asserted).
6–160
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
S5 Inputs/Outputs
Figure 6-50: Inputs/Outputs option “E” with BREAKER menu
S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
CONTACT INPUTS
OUTPUT RELAYS
VIRTUAL INPUTS
S5 CONTACT INPUTS
SELECT DC VOLTAGE
▼
52a CONTACT
S5 CONTACT INPUT 1
52b CONTACT
DEBOUNCE TIME
CONTACT INPUT 3
CONTACT INPUT 4
...
CONTACT INPUT 10
S5 CONTACT INPUT 10
DEBOUNCE TIME
S5 OUTPUT RELAYS
RLY1 TRIP
RLY2 CLOSE
RLY3 START INHIBIT
▼
S5 RLY1 TRIP
RLY1 SEAL-IN
▼
BLOCK BKR TRIP
RLY4 AUXILIARY
RLY5 AUXILIARY
RLY6 AUXILIARY
S5 RLY2 CLOSE
RLY2 SEAL-IN
▼
S5 VIRTUAL INPUTS
BLOCK BKR CLOSE
VIRTUAL INPUT 1
VIRTUAL INPUT 2
VIRTUAL INPUT 3
▼
S5 RLY4 AUXILIARY
OUTPUT TYPE
VIRTUAL INPUT 4
...
VIRTUAL INPUT 32
S5 RLY5 AUXILIARY
OUTPUT TYPE
S5 RLY6 AUXILIARY
OUTPUT TYPE
S5 VIRTUAL INPUT 1
VI 1 NAME
▼
NOTE: When SWITCHING DEVICE is selected as BREAKER:
ST
1. 1 output relay (Seal-In) - TRIP
ND
2. 2 output relay (Seal-In) - CLOSE
RD
3. 3 output relay (Self-Reset) - Start Inhibit
TH
TH
4. 4 to 6 output relay (Self-Reset or Latched) - Configurable Auxiliary Relays
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
VI 1 FUNCTION
VI 1 TYPE
896768A1.cdr
6–161
S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
Figure 6-51: Inputs/Outputs with BREAKER & I/O option ‘R’ menu
S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
CONTACT INPUTS
OUTPUT RELAYS
VIRTUAL INPUTS
S5 CONTACT INPUTS
SELECT DC VOLTAGE
▼
52a CONTACT
S5 CONTACT INPUT 1
52b CONTACT
DEBOUNCE TIME
CONTACT INPUT 3
CONTACT INPUT 4
...
CONTACT INPUT 10
S5 CONTACT INPUT 10
DEBOUNCE TIME
S5 OUTPUT RELAYS
RLY1 TRIP
RLY2 CLOSE
RLY3 START INHIBIT
S5 RLY1 TRIP
RLY1 SEAL-IN
▼
BLOCK BKR TRIP
S5 VIRTUAL INPUTS
VIRTUAL INPUT 1
VIRTUAL INPUT 2
VIRTUAL INPUT 3
▼
S5 RLY2 CLOSE
RLY2 SEAL-IN
▼
BLOCK BKR CLOSE
VIRTUAL INPUT 4
...
VIRTUAL INPUT 32
S5 VIRTUAL INPUT 1
VI 1 NAME
▼
VI 1 FUNCTION
VI 1 TYPE
NOTE: When SWITCHING DEVICE is selected as BREAKER - INPUT/OUTPUT OPTION ‘R’:
ST
1. 1 output relay (Seal-In) - TRIP
ND
2. 2 output relay (Seal-In) - CLOSE
RD
3. 3 output relay (Self-Reset) - Start Inhibit
6–162
896701.cdr
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
Figure 6-52: Inputs/Outputs option “E” with CONTACTOR menu
S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
CONTACT INPUTS
OUTPUT RELAYS
VIRTUAL INPUTS
S5 CONTACT INPUTS
SELECT DC VOLTAGE
▼
52a CONTACT
S5 CONTACT INPUT 1
52b CONTACT
DEBOUNCE TIME
CONTACT INPUT 3
CONTACT INPUT 4
...
CONTACT INPUT 10
S5 CONTACT INPUT 10
DEBOUNCE TIME
S5 OUTPUT RELAYS
RLY3 START INHIBIT
▼
S5 RLY3 START INHIBIT
RELAY OPERATION
RLY4 TRIP
RLY5 AUXILIARY
RLY6 AUXILIARY
S5 RLY4 TRIP
RELAY OPERATION
S5 RLY5 AUXILIARY
S5 VIRTUAL INPUTS
VIRTUAL INPUT 1
VIRTUAL INPUT 2
RELAY OPERATION
▼
OUTPUT TYPE
VIRTUAL INPUT 3
▼
VIRTUAL INPUT 4
...
VIRTUAL INPUT 32
S5 RLY6 AUXILIARY
RELAY OPERATION
▼
OUTPUT TYPE
S5 VIRTUAL INPUT 1
VI 1 NAME
▼
VI 1 FUNCTION
VI 1 TYPE
NOTE: When SWITCHING DEVICE is selected as CONTACTOR:
ST
1. 1 output relay (Seal-In) - Not Used
ND
2. 2 output relay (Seal-In) - Not Used
RD
3. 3 output relay (Self-Reset) - Start Inhibit
TH
4. 4 output relay ( Latched) - TRIP
TH
TH
5. 5 to 6 output relay (Self-Reset or Latched) - Configurable Auxiliary Relays
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
896769.cdr
6–163
S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
Figure 6-53: Inputs/Outputs with CONTACTOR & I/O option ‘R’ menu
S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
CONTACT INPUTS
OUTPUT RELAYS
VIRTUAL INPUTS
S5 CONTACT INPUTS
SELECT DC VOLTAGE
▼
52a CONTACT
S5 CONTACT INPUT 1
52b CONTACT
DEBOUNCE TIME
CONTACT INPUT 3
CONTACT INPUT 4
...
CONTACT INPUT 10
S5 CONTACT INPUT 10
DEBOUNCE TIME
S5 OUTPUT RELAYS
RLY1 TRIP
▼
S5 RLY1 TRIP
RELAY OPERATION
RLY2 ALARM
RLY3 AUXILIARY
S5 RLY2 ALARM
RELAY OPERATION
S5 VIRTUAL INPUTS
OUTPUT TYPE
VIRTUAL INPUT 1
VIRTUAL INPUT 2
VIRTUAL INPUT 3
▼
S5 RLY5 AUXILIARY
RELAY OPERATION
VIRTUAL INPUT 4
OUTPUT TYPE
...
VIRTUAL INPUT 32
S5 VIRTUAL INPUT 1
VI 1 NAME
▼
VI 1 FUNCTION
VI 1 TYPE
NOTE: When SWITCHING DEVICE is selected as CONTACTOR - INPUT/OUTPUT OPTION ‘R’:
ST
1. 1 output relay (Latched) - TRIP
ND
2. 2 output relay (Self-reset or Latched) - ALARM
RD
3. 3 output relay (Self-Reset or Latched) - CONFIGURABLE AUXILIARY RELAY
896702.cdr
Contact inputs
The 339 relay is equipped with ten (10) contact inputs, which can be used to provide a
variety of functions such as for circuit breaker control, external trips, blocking of protection
elements, etc. All contact inputs are wet type contacts (refer to the 339 typical wiring
diagram) that require an external DC voltage source. The voltage threshold (17V, 33V, 84V,
166V) is selectable, and it applies for all ten contact inputs.
The contact inputs are either open or closed with a programmable debounce time to
prevent false operation from induced voltage. Because of de-bouncing, momentary
contacts must have a minimum dwell time greater than half power frequency cycle. The
debounce time is adjustable by the user.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS > CONTACT INPUTS
SELECT DC VOLTAGE
Range: 17 V, 33 V, 84 V, 166 V
Default: 84 V
CONTACT INPUT 1
Range: Eighteen Characters
Default: 52a Contact
6–164
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
CONTACT INPUT 2
Range: Eighteen Characters
Default: 52b Contact
CONTACT INPUT X [3 to 10]
Range: Eighteen Characters
Default: Input X
DEBOUNCE TIME
↘
CONTACT INPUT X [1 TO 10]
Range: 1 to 64 ms in steps of 1 ms
Default: 2 ms
Each of the contact inputs can be named to reflect the function it represents within the
application. Up to 18 alpha-numeric characters are available for names.
The debounce time is used to discriminate between oscillating inputs. The state will be
recognized if the input is maintained for a period consisting of the protection pass plus the
debounce setting.
NOTE:
NOTE
Contact Input 1 and Contact Input 2 are named by the factory as 52a and 52b respectively
and are used for monitoring the breaker open/close state when wired to the breakers
auxiliary contacts 52a and 52b.
Output relays - Input/Output “E”
The 339 relay is equipped with seven electromechanical output relays: 2 form A relays
(Relay 1 and Relay 2), and 5 form C relays (Relays 3 to 7). Depending on the setting S2
SYSTEM SETUP > SWITCHING DEVICE, these output relays function differently per the
application of BREAKER and CONTACTOR.
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6–165
S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
Figure 6-54: Relay trip
SETTINGS
Locally open breaker (relay keypad)
RELAY 1 TRIP
Remote open breaker
BLOCK RLY1 TRIP
OR
Off = 0
Operate Output Relay 1
(Breaker Trip)
AND
Input
AND
Block Trip Input
SETTING
RELAY 1 TRIP
SEAL-IN TIME
0
AND
t
SETTING
SYSTEM SETUP
SWITCHING DEVICE
Breaker
Contactor
AND
S
LATCH
Operate Output Relay 4 (Contactor Trip)
R
LOGIC OPERAND
S
Any Trip OP
LATCH
LED: Trip
R
KEYPAD RESET
INPUTS
Emergency Restart Input
Lockout Reset Input
OR
AND
AND
Remote Reset Input
AND
SETTINGS
S4 CONTROLS
Emergency Restart
Off = 0
Lockout Reset
Off = 0
Remote Reset
Off = 0
LOGIC OPERAND
ANY TRIP PKP
ANY ALARM PKP
ANY ALARM OP
ANY LATCHED ALARM OP
ANY START INHIBIT
OR
LED: Pickup
OR
LED: Alarm
LED: Start Inhibit
operate Output Relay 3
Output Relays Breaker - Input/
Output “E”
6–166
896825.cdr
When the setting S2 SYSTEM SETUP > SWITCHING DEVICE is selected as BREAKER, the seven
output relays function as:
Output Relay 1: Breaker Trip
Output Relay 2: Breaker Close
Output Relay 3: Start Inhibit
Output Relays 4 to 6: Auxiliary Relays
Output Relay 7: Critical Failure
There are four special purpose relays: Breaker Trip, Breaker Close, Start Inhibit, and Critical
Failure. These relays have fixed operating characteristics:
Breaker Trip: Seal-in
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
Breaker Close: Seal-in
Start Inhibit: Self-reset
Critical Failure: Self-reset
The user can configure an Auxiliary Relay as either latched or self-reset. Logic diagrams for
each Output Relay are provided for detailed explanation of their operation.
Operation of the BREAKER TRIP and BREAKER CLOSE relays is controlled by the state of the
circuit breaker as monitored by a 52a or 52b contact.
•
The Trip and Close relays reset after the breaker is detected in a state corresponding
to the command. When a relay feature sends a command to one of these special
relays, it will remain operational until the requested change of breaker state is
confirmed by a breaker auxiliary contact and the initiating condition has reset.
•
If the initiating feature resets, but the breaker does not change state, the output relay
will be reset after a default interval of 2 seconds.
•
If neither of the breaker auxiliary contacts, 52a nor 52b, is programmed to a logic
input, the Trip Relay is de-energized after either the delay programmed in the Breaker
Failure feature, or a default interval of 100 ms after the initiating input resets. The
Close Relay is de-energized after 200 ms.
•
If a delay is programmed for the Trip or Close contact seal-in time, then this delay is
added to the reset time. Note that the default setting for the seal-in time is 40 ms.
52a Contact
Configured
52b Contact
Configured
Relay Operation
Yes
Yes
Trip Relay remains operational until 52b indicates an
open breaker. Close Relay remains operational until 52a
indicates a closed breaker.
Yes
No
Trip Relay remains operational until 52a indicates an
open breaker. Close Relay remains operational until 52a
indicates a closed breaker.
No
Yes
Trip Relay remains operational until 52b indicates an
open breaker. Close Relay remains operational until 52b
indicates a closed breaker.
No
No
Trip Relay operates until either the Breaker Failure delay
expires (if the Breaker Failure element is enabled), or 100
ms after the feature causing the trip resets. Close Relay
operates for 200 ms.
Output Relay 1 "Breaker Trip" - Input/Output “E”
The following path is available using the keypad. For instructions on how to use the
keypad, please refer to Chapter 3 - Working with the Keypad.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS > OUTPUT RELAYS > RLY 1 TRIP
SEAL IN TIME
Range: 0.00 to 9.99 s in steps of 0.01
Default: 0.04 s
This setting defines the time to be added to the reset time of the Relay 1 Trip output, thus
extending its pulse width. This is useful for those applications where the 52 contacts
reporting the breaker state are faster than the 52 contacts that are responsible for
interrupting the coil current.
BLOCK RLY 1 TRIP
Range: Off, Contact Input 1 to 10, Virtual Input 1 to 32, Remote Input 1 to 32, Logic
Elements 1 to 16
Default: Off
This setting defines a block to the Trip Output relay. When the selected input is asserted,
the Trip Output relay will be blocked.
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6–167
6–168
SETPOINT (BREAKER)
OR
RESET (Input) S4 Control
SETPOINT (BF)
Alarm
Latched Alarm
Disabled = 0
BF FUNCTION :
RUN
tRST
SETPOINT (BF)
100 ms
timer
TRIP
2 sec
Timer
BF TIME DELAYS
RUN
timed reset
No feedback
change
OR
RESET (Communications)
LED: TRIP
Trip request
OR
RESET (Relay Keypad)
Remote Open
Local Open (Relay Keypad)
AND
TRIP (Protection Controls)
Relay Status (Ready = 1)
At least one
contact
programmed
Breaker Open
OR
(Selected Input, ON = 1)
AND
Off = 0
BLOCK BKR TRIP
SETPOINT
52a contact (Breaker Close = 1)
AND
Contact input
52a CONTACT
SETPOINT (BREAKER)
52b contact (Breaker Open = 1)
Contact input
52b CONTACT
SETPOINT
tRST
Trip Output Seal-In Time
896775.cdr
TRIP
To Breaker Failure
TRIP
Operate Output Relay 1
(TRIP)
LED: TRIP
S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
Figure 6-55: Relay 1 "TRIP" logic diagram
OR
AND
AND
OR
OR
AND
OR
OR
OR
AND
OR
OR
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
Output Relay 2 "Breaker Close" - Input/Output “E”
PATH: SETPOINTS > S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS > OUTPUT RELAYS > RLY 2 CLOSE
SEAL IN TIME
Range: 0.00 to 9.99 s in steps of 0.01
Default: 0.04 s
This setting defines the time to be added to the reset time of the Relay 2 Close output,
thus extending its pulse width. This is useful for those applications where the 52 contacts
reporting the breaker state are faster than the 52 contacts that are responsible for
interrupting the coil current.
BLOCK RLY 2 CLOSE
Range: Off, Contact Input 1 to 10, Virtual Input 1 to 32, Remote Input 1 to 32, Logic
Elements 1 to 16
Default: Off
This setting defines a block to the Close Output relay. When the selected input is
asserted, the Close Output relay will be blocked. The block function can be useful for
breaker maintenance purposes.
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6–169
6–170
SETPOINT (BREAKER)
Breaker Failure
Remote Close
Close request
OR
Local Close (Relay Keypad)
AND
Relay Status (Ready = 1)
(Selected Input, ON = 1)
Off = 0
BLOCK BKR CLOSE
AND
At least one
contact
programmed
Breaker Closed
Timed reset
No feedback
Change
RUN
RUN
200 ms
Timer
CLOSE
2 sec
Timer
OR
SETPOINT
52b contact (Breaker Open = 1)
AND
Contact input
52b CONTACT
SETPOINT (BREAKER)
52a contact (Breaker Closed = 1)
Contact input
52a CONTACT
SETPOINT
tRST
Close Output Seal-In Time
CLOSE
896776.cdr
Operate Output Relay 2
(CLOSE)
S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
Figure 6-56: Relay 2 "CLOSE" logic diagram
OR
AND
AND
OR
OR
OR
AND
OR
AND
OR
OR
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
Output Relay 3 Start Inhibit - Input/Output “E”
There are no user-programmable setpoints associated with the START INHIBIT relay. If
there is a lockout time, the START INHIBIT relay prevents or inhibits the start of the motor
based on the MOTOR LOCKOUT TIME. The operation of this output relay is always self-reset,
so it will automatically reset when all lockout timers expire. This relay should be wired in
series with the start pushbutton to prevent motor starting.
Figure 6-57: Breaker: Wiring for Start Inhibit
Control Power
Start
Start Inhibit
Output Relay 3 52b
Close
Coil
896841.cdr
Auxiliary Output Relays 4 to 6 - Input/Output “E”
When the setting S2 SYSTEM SETUP\SWITCHING DEVICE is selected BREAKER, there are 3
auxiliary output relays (Output Relay 4 to 6) available for customer specific requirements.
Each auxiliary relay can be selected as either Self-reset, or Latched. If the Self-Reset type
is selected, the output relay will be energized as long as the element is in operating mode
and will reset when the element drops out. If the Latched type is selected, the output relay
will stay energized, after the element dropout, and will be de-energized upon the reset
command. If an auxiliary output is only required while the activating condition is present,
select Self-Reset. Once an activating condition disappears, the auxiliary relay returns to
the non-active state and the associated message automatically clears. To ensure all
auxiliary function conditions are acknowledged, select Latched.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS > OUTPUT RELAYS > RLY 4(6) AUXILIARY
OUTPUT TYPE
Range: Self Reset, Latched
Default: Self Reset
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6–171
S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
896777.cdr
Operate Aux
Output Relay (4 to 6)
Message & Event Recorder
Figure 6-58: Auxiliary relays
OR
OR
AND
AND
AND
AND
From Maintenance Feature
From Control Feature
From Protection Feature
Assigned Aux Outputs:
Relay Status (Ready = 1)
Self-Reset
Latched
RELAY (4 to 6) AUXILIARY
OUTPUT TYPE
SETPOINT
OR
RESET (Input)
S4 Control
RESET (Communications)
RESET (Relay Keypad)
OR
Critical Failure Relay #7 - Input/Output “E”
The 339 relay is also equipped with one output relay (# 7 - “Critical Failure Relay”) for failsafe indication. There are no user-programmable setpoints associated with this output
relay. The logic for this relay is shown below.
The Critical Failure Relay (Output Relay 7) is a form C contact (refer to the Typical Wiring
Diagram) with one Normally Open, and one Normally Closed contact (no control power).
Output Relay 7 is energized or de-energized (state change) depending on the following
conditions:
1.
6–172
Output Relay 7 will be de-energized, if the relay is not in IN-SERVICE mode or the
control power is not applied to the relay
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
2.
Output Relay 7 will be energized when the control power is applied to the relay and
the relay is in IN-SERVICE mode.
3.
Output Relay 7 will stay de-energized, when the control power is applied, if the relay
was not programmed as “Ready”, or upon major self-test failure during relay boot-up.
4.
Output Relay 7 will change state from energized to de-energized if the 339 relay
experiences any major self-test failure.
LED: IN SERVICE
LED: TROUBLE
898778.CDR
De-energize Output Relay #7
(Critical Failure Relay)
In Service
To Output Relays 1 to 6
Figure 6-59: Output relay 7: Critical Failure Relay
(Not Ready = 1)
ANY MAJOR ERROR
(Forces the Relay into “Not Ready” state)
ANY MAJOR ERROR
Message & Event Recorder
OR
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Message & Event Recorder
Major Error XX
See all major errors listed in the
table below
.
.
.
.
.
.
Major Error 2
Message & Event Recorder
Message & Event Recorder
Major Error 1
S1 SETPOINTS / S1 RELAY SETUP / S1 INSTALLATION / RELAY STATUS
OR
6–173
S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
Output Relays Contactor - Input/
Output “E”
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
When the setting S2 SYSTEM SETUP > SWITCHING DEVICE is selected as CONTACTOR, the
seven output relays function as:
Output Relay 1: Not Used
Output Relay 2: Not Used
Output Relay 3: Start Inhibit
Output Relay 4: Contactor Trip
Output Relays 5 to 6: Auxiliary Relays
Output Relay 7: Critical Failure
There are three special purpose relays: Start Inhibit, Contactor Trip, and Critical Failure.
These relays have fixed operating characteristics:
Start Inhibit: Self-reset
Contactor Trip: Latched
Critical Failure: Self-reset, Failsafe
The user can configure an Auxiliary Relay as either Latched or Self-reset.
Output Relays 1 to 6 can be programmed to be in either Non-failsafe or Failsafe operation
mode.
Non-failsafe: the relay coil is not energized in its non-active state. Loss of control
power will cause the relay to remain in the non-active state; i.e. a non-failsafe trip
relay will not cause a trip on loss of control power.
Failsafe: the relay coil is energized in its non-active state. Loss of control power will
cause the relay to go into its active state; i.e. a failsafe trip relay will cause a trip on
loss of control power.
Output Relay 1 "Not Used" - Input/Output “E”
When the setting S2 SYSTEM SETUP > SWITCHING DEVICE is selected as CONTACTOR, this
output relay is not used.
Output Relay 2 "Not Used" - Input/Output “E”
When the setting S2 SYSTEM SETUP > SWITCHING DEVICE is selected as CONTACTOR, this
output relay is not used.
Output Relay 3 Start Inhibit - Input/Output “E”
The Start Inhibit relay (Output Relay 3) is a form C contact with one Normally Open and one
Normally Close contacts. This relay can be programmed as either Non-failsafe or Failsafe
operation mode. Wiring of the Start Inhibit relay contacts will depend on the user’s
selection of operation mode. If Non-failsafe operation is selected, wire the Normally Close
contact of Start Inhibit output relay to the contactor control circuit; if Fail-safe operation is
selected, wire the Normally Open contact to the control circuit.
The following path is available using the keypad. For instructions on how to use the
keypad, please refer to Chapter 3 - Working with the Keypad.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS > OUTPUT RELAYS > RLY 3 START INHIB
RELAY OPERATION
Range: Non-Failsafe, Failsafe
Default: Non-failsafe
Output Relay 4 Contactor Trip - Input/Output “E”
When the setting S2 SYSTEM > SWITCHING DEVICE is selected as CONTACTOR, a protection
trip is always issued as a latched operation. The Trip relay (Output Relay 4) can be
programmed as either Non-failsafe or Failsafe operation mode. Wiring of the Trip relay
contacts will depend on this configuration. For maximum motor protection, program the
trip relay to be failsafe and wire the contactor to the Normally Open trip relay terminals,
referring to Figure 40, below. When control power is lost to the 339 , the contactor will trip
to ensure maximum protection. If process considerations are more important than
protection, program non-failsafe and wire the contactor to the Normally Close trip relay
terminals, referring to Figure 39 below. When control power to the 339 is lost, no protection
6–174
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
is available and the motor will continue to run. This has the advantage that the process will
not shut down, however the motor may be damaged if a fault develops under these
conditions.
The following path is available using the keypad. For instructions on how to use the
keypad, please refer to Chapter 3 - Working with the Keypad.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS > OUTPUT RELAYS > RLY 3 START INHIB
RELAY OPERATION
Range: Non-Failsafe, Failsafe
Default: Non-failsafe
Figure 6-60: Contactor: Wiring for Start Inhibit and Trip (Non-failsafe)
Control Power
Motor Seal-in
Contact
START INHIBIT
(Output Relay 3:
Non-fail safe)
START
STOP
TRIP
(Output Relay 4:
Non-fail safe)
Close
Coil
896842.cdr
Figure 6-61: Contactor: Wiring for Start Inhibit and Trip (Failsafe)
Control Power
Motor Seal-in
Contact
START INHIBIT
(Output Relay 3:
Fail safe)
START
STOP
TRIP
(Output Relay 4:
Fail safe)
Close
Coil
896843.cdr
Auxiliary Output Relays 5 to 6 - Input/Output “E”
When the setting S2 SYSTEM SETUP > SWITCHING DEVICE is selected CONTACTOR, there are
2 output relays (Output Relay 5 to 6) available for customer specific requirement. Each
auxiliary relay can be selected as either Self-Reset or Latched. If the Self-Reset type is
selected, the output relay will be energized as long as the element is in operating mode
and will reset when the element drops out. If the Latched type is selected, the output relay
will stay energized, after the element dropout, and will be de-energized upon the reset
command. Each auxiliary relay can also be selected as either Non-Failsafe, or Failsafe. If
an output is required when the 339 is not operational due to a loss of control power, select
Failsafe auxiliary operation, otherwise, choose Non-Failsafe.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS > OUTPUT RELAYS > RLY 5(6) AUXILIARY
RELAY OPERATION
Range: Non-failsafe, Failsafe
Default: Non-failsafe
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6–175
S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
OUTPUT TYPE
Range: Self Reset, Latched
Default: Self Reset
896789.cdr
Operate Aux
Output Relay (5 to 6)
Message & Event Recorder
Figure 6-62: Auxiliary relays
OR
OR
AND
AND
AND
AND
From Maintenance Feature
From Control Feature
From Protection Feature
Assigned Aux Outputs:
Relay Status (Ready = 1)
Self-Reset
Latched
RELAY (5 to 6) AUXILIARY
OUTPUT TYPE
SETPOINT
OR
RESET (Input)
S4 Control
RESET (Communications)
RESET (Relay Keypad)
OR
Critical Failure Relay #7 - Input/Output “E”
When the SWITCHING DEVICE is selected as contactor, the Critical Failure Relay behaves in
the same way as when the SWITCHING DEVICE is selected as BREAKER.
6–176
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
Output relays Input/Output “R”
The 339 relay with INPUT/OUTPUT option ‘R’ is equipped with four electromechanical
output relays: 3 form C relays (Relay 1, Relay 3, Relay 4), and 1 form A relay (Relay 2).
Depending on the setting S2 SYSTEM SETUP > SWITCHING DEVICE, these output relays
function differently with respect to the application of BREAKER and CONTACTOR.
Figure 6-63: Trip and Start Inhibit Output Relay Logic – INPUT/OUTPUT Option ‘R’
SETTINGS
Locally open breaker (relay keypad)
RELAY 1 TRIP
Remote open breaker
BLOCK RLY1 TRIP
OR
Off = 0
Operate Output Relay 1
(Breaker Trip)
AND
Input
AND
Block Trip Input
SETTING
RELAY 1 TRIP
SEAL-IN TIME
0
AND
t
SETTING
SYSTEM SETUP
SWITCHING DEVICE
Breaker
Contactor
AND
S
LATCH
Operate Output Relay 1 (Contactor Trip)
R
LOGIC OPERAND
S
Any Trip OP
LED: Trip
LATCH
R
KEYPAD RESET
INPUTS
Emergency Restart Input
Lockout Reset Input
OR
AND
AND
Remote Reset Input
AND
SETTINGS
S4 CONTROLS
Emergency Restart
Off = 0
Lockout Reset
Off = 0
Remote Reset
Off = 0
LOGIC OPERAND
ANY TRIP PKP
ANY ALARM PKP
ANY ALARM OP
ANY LATCHED ALARM OP
ANY START INHIBIT
SETTINGS
OR
LED: Pickup
OR
LED: Alarm
AND
LED: Start Inhibit
AND
OR
AND
S4 START INHIBIT
Operate Output Relay 3
(Start Inhibit)
OUTPUT RELAY 3
Operate = 1
SETTINGS
S5 RLY3 AUXILIARY
AND
S
LATCH
R
OUTPUT TYPE
Self-Reset
Latched
896847.cdr
Output Relays Breaker - Input/
Output “R”
When the setting S2 SYSTEM SETUP > SWITCHING DEVICE is selected as BREAKER, the four
output relays function as:
Output Relay 1: Breaker Trip
Output Relay 2: Breaker Close
Output Relay 3: Start Inhibit
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6–177
S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
Output Relay 4: Critical Failure
These four special purpose relays have fixed operating characteristics:
Breaker Trip: Seal-in
Breaker Close: Seal-in
Start Inhibit: Non-failsafe, Self-reset
Critical Failure: Failsafe, Self-reset
There are no configurable Auxiliary Relays in this case. Logic diagrams for each Output
Relay are provided for detailed explanation of their operation.
The logic of the BREAKER TRIP, BREAKER CLOSE, START INHIBIT, and CRITICAL FAILURE
relays with INPUT/OUTPUT Option ‘R’ is the same as for the other INPUT/OUTPUT options
(Option ‘E’), with the exception that the CRITICAL FAILURE relay is assigned to Output Relay
4 instead of Output Relay 7, as shown below.
Output Relay 1 "Breaker Trip" - Input/Output “R”
The following path is available using the keypad. For instructions on how to use the
keypad, please refer to Chapter 3 - Working with the Keypad.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS > OUTPUT RELAYS > RLY 1 TRIP
SEAL IN TIME
Range: 0.00 to 9.99 s in steps of 0.01
Default: 0.04 s
This setting defines the time to be added to the reset time of the Relay 1 Trip output, thus
extending its pulse width. This is useful for those applications where the 52 contacts
reporting the breaker state are faster than the 52 contacts that are responsible for
interrupting the coil current.
BLOCK RLY 1 TRIP
Range: Off, Contact Input 1 to 10, Virtual Input 1 to 32, Remote Input 1 to 32, Logic
Elements 1 to 16
Default: Off
This setting defines a block to the Trip Output relay. When the selected input is asserted,
the Trip Output relay will be blocked.
6–178
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
SETPOINT (BREAKER)
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
OR
RESET (Input) S4 Control
SETPOINT (BF)
Alarm
Latched Alarm
Disabled = 0
BF FUNCTION :
RUN
tRST
SETPOINT (BF)
100 ms
timer
TRIP
2 sec
Timer
BF TIME DELAYS
RUN
timed reset
No feedback
change
OR
RESET (Communications)
LED: TRIP
OR
RESET (Relay Keypad)
Remote Open
Local Open (Relay Keypad)
Trip request
AND
TRIP (Protection Controls)
Relay Status (Ready = 1)
At least one
contact
programmed
Breaker Open
OR
(Selected Input, ON = 1)
AND
Off = 0
BLOCK BKR TRIP
SETPOINT
52a contact (Breaker Close = 1)
AND
Contact input
52a CONTACT
SETPOINT (BREAKER)
52b contact (Breaker Open = 1)
Contact input
52b CONTACT
SETPOINT
tRST
Trip Output Seal-In Time
896775.cdr
TRIP
To Breaker Failure
TRIP
Operate Output Relay 1
(TRIP)
LED: TRIP
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
Figure 6-64: Relay 1 "TRIP" logic diagram
OR
AND
AND
OR
OR
AND
OR
OR
OR
AND
OR
OR
6–179
S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
Output Relay 2 "Breaker Close" - Input/Output “R”
PATH: SETPOINTS > S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS > OUTPUT RELAYS > RLY 2 CLOSE
SEAL IN TIME
Range: 0.00 to 9.99 s in steps of 0.01
Default: 0.04 s
This setting defines the time to be added to the reset time of the Relay 2 Close output,
thus extending its pulse width. This is useful for those applications where the 52 contacts
reporting the breaker state are faster than the 52 contacts that are responsible for
interrupting the coil current.
BLOCK RLY 2 CLOSE
Range: Off, Contact Input 1 to 10, Virtual Input 1 to 32, Remote Input 1 to 32, Logic
Elements 1 to 16
Default: Off
This setting defines a block to the Close Output relay. When the selected input is
asserted, the Close Output relay will be blocked. The block function can be useful for
breaker maintenance purposes.
6–180
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
SETPOINT (BREAKER)
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Breaker Failure
Remote Close
Local Close (Relay Keypad)
OR
Close request
AND
Relay Status (Ready = 1)
(Selected Input, ON = 1)
Off = 0
BLOCK BKR CLOSE
AND
At least one
contact
programmed
Breaker Closed
Timed reset
No feedback
Change
RUN
RUN
200 ms
Timer
CLOSE
2 sec
Timer
OR
SETPOINT
52b contact (Breaker Open = 1)
AND
Contact input
52b CONTACT
SETPOINT (BREAKER)
52a contact (Breaker Closed = 1)
Contact input
52a CONTACT
SETPOINT
tRST
Close Output Seal-In Time
CLOSE
896776.cdr
Operate Output Relay 2
(CLOSE)
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
Figure 6-65: Relay 2 "CLOSE" logic diagram
OR
AND
AND
OR
OR
OR
AND
OR
AND
OR
OR
6–181
S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
Output Relay 3 Start Inhibit - Input/Output “R”
There are no user-programmable setpoints associated with the START INHIBIT relay. If
there is a lockout time, the START INHIBIT relay prevents or inhibits the start of the motor
based on the MOTOR LOCKOUT TIME. The operation of this output relay is always self-reset,
so it will automatically reset when all lockout timers expire. This relay should be wired in
series with the start pushbutton to prevent motor starting.
Figure 6-66: Breaker: Wiring for Start Inhibit
Control Power
Start
Start Inhibit
Output Relay 3 52b
Close
Coil
896841.cdr
Critical Failure Relay 4 - Input/Output “R”
The 339 relay is also equipped with one output relay (#4 - “Critical Failure Relay”) for failsafe indication. There are no user-programmable setpoints associated with this output
relay. The logic for this relay is shown below.
The Critical Failure Relay (Output Relay 4) is a form C contact (refer to the Typical Wiring
Diagram) with one Normally Open, and one Normally Closed contact (no control power).
Output Relay 4 is energized or de-energized (state change) depending on the following
conditions:
6–182
1.
Output Relay 4 will be de-energized, if the relay is not in IN-SERVICE mode or the
control power is not applied to the relay
2.
Output Relay 4 will be energized when the control power is applied to the relay and
the relay is in IN-SERVICE mode.
3.
Output Relay 4 will stay de-energized, when the control power is applied, if the relay
was not programmed as “Ready”, or upon major self-test failure during relay boot-up.
4.
Output Relay 4 will change state from energized to de-energized if the 339 relay
experiences any major self-test failure.
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Output Relays Contactor - Input/
Output “R”
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Major Error XX
.
.
.
.
.
.
Major Error 2
Major Error 1
Message & Event Recorder
See all major errors listed in the
table below
Message & Event Recorder
Message & Event Recorder
S1 SETPOINTS / S1 RELAY SETUP / S1 INSTALLATION / RELAY STATUS
ANY MAJOR ERROR
Message & Event Recorder
ANY MAJOR ERROR
(Forces the Relay into “Not Ready” state)
(Not Ready = 1)
LED: TROUBLE
LED: IN SERVICE
898778.CDR
De-energize Output Relay #7
(Critical Failure Relay)
In Service
To Output Relays 1 to 6
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
Figure 6-67: Output Relay 4: Critical Failure Relay
OR
OR
When the setting S2 SYSTEM SETUP > SWITCHING DEVICE is selected as CONTACTOR, the
four output relays function as:
Output Relay 1: Contactor Trip
Output Relay 2: Alarm
Output Relay 3: Auxiliary
Output Relay 4: Critical Failure
6–183
S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
There are three special purpose relays: Contactor Trip, Alarm, and Critical Failure. These
relays have fixed operating characteristics:
Contactor Trip: Failsafe or Non-Failsafe, Latched
Alarm: Failsafe or Non-Failsafe, Latched or Self-reset
Critical Failure: Failsafe, Self-reset
The user can configure the Auxiliary Relay as either Latched or Self-reset, and to be in
either Non-failsafe or Failsafe operation mode. Note that the Auxiliary Relay is defaulted to
operate when a Start Inhibit is active. This is selectable with setting S4 CONTROLS > START
INHIBIT > OUTPUT RELAY 3.
Output Relay 1 Contactor Trip - Input/Output “R”
When the setting S2 SYSTEM SETUP > SWITCHING DEVICE is selected as CONTACTOR, a
protection trip is always issued as a latched operation. The Trip Relay (Output Relay 1) can
be programmed to operate in either Non-failsafe or Failsafe mode. Wiring of the Trip
Relay contacts will depend on this configuration. For maximum motor protection, program
the Trip Relay to be Failsafe and wire the contactor to the Normally Open trip relay
terminals (see figure below). When control power is lost to the 339 , the contactor will trip
to ensure maximum protection. If process considerations are more important than
protection, program Non-Failsafe and wire the contactor to the Normally Closed trip relay
terminals (see figure below). When control power to the 339 is lost, no protection is
available and the motor will continue to run. Although this has the advantage that the
process will not shut down, the motor may be damaged if a fault develops under these
conditions.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS > OUTPUT RELAYS > RLY 1 TRIP
RELAY OPERATION
Range: Non-Failsafe, Failsafe
Default: Non-Failsafe
Figure 6-68: Contactor: Wiring for Start Inhibit and Trip (Non-failsafe) – INPUT/OUTPUT
Option ‘R’
Control Power
Motor Seal-in
Contact
START INHIBIT
(Output Relay 3:
Non-fail safe)
START
STOP
TRIP
(Output Relay 1:
Non-fail safe)
Close
Coil
896848.cdr
6–184
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
Figure 6-69: Contactor: Wiring for Start Inhibit and Trip (Failsafe) – INPUT/OUTPUT
Option ‘R’
Control Power
Motor Seal-in
Contact
START INHIBIT
(Output Relay 3:
Fail safe)
START
STOP
TRIP
(Output Relay 1:
Fail safe)
Close
Coil
896849A1.cdr
Output Relay 2 Alarm - Input/Output “R”
Any Alarm condition will activate the Form-A ALARM relay. The ALARM relay is selectable
for either Non-Failsafe or Failsafe operation. If an alarm indication is required only while
an alarm is present, select Unlatched. With the Unlatched output type, once an alarm
condition is cleared, the alarm and associated message automatically clear. To ensure all
alarms are acknowledged, select Latched. If an alarm condition is no longer present, the
Latched Alarm relay can be cleared only by a Reset command.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS > OUTPUT RELAYS > RLY 2 ALARM
RELAY OPERATION
Range: Non-Failsafe, Failsafe
Default: Non-Failsafe
OUTPUT TYPE
Range: Self-Reset, Latched
Default: Self-Reset
Auxiliary Output Relay 3 - Input/Output “R”
When the setting S2 SYSTEMS SETUP > SWITCHING DEVICE is selected as CONTACTOR,
there is one output relay (Output Relay 3) available for customer-specific requirements. The
Auxiliary relay can be selected as either Self-Reset or Latched. If the Self-Reset output
type is selected, this relay will be energized as long as the element is in operating mode
and will reset when the element drops out. If the Latched type is selected, the output relay
will stay energized after the element dropout, and will be de-energized upon the Reset
command. The Auxiliary relay can also be selected as either Non-Failsafe or Failsafe. If an
output is required when the 339 is not operational due to a loss of control power, select
Failsafe operation, otherwise choose Non-Failsafe. Note that the Auxiliary relay is
defaulted to operate when a Start Inhibit is active, this is selectable with setting S4
CONTROLS > START INHIBIT > OUTPUT RELAY 3. If the Auxiliary relay is to be controlled by
the Start Inhibit feature, it is recommended that the Output Type be set to Self-Reset.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS > OUTPUT RELAYS > RLY 3 AUXILIARY
RELAY OPERATION
Range: Non-Failsafe, Failsafe
Default: Non-Failsafe
OUTPUT TYPE
Range: Self-Reset, Latched
Default: Self-Reset
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
6–185
S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
896700.cdr
Operate Aux
Output Relay 3
Message & Event Recorder
Figure 6-70: Contactor: Auxiliary Relay Logic – INPUT/OUTPUT Option ‘R’
OR
OR
AND
AND
AND
AND
From Maintenance Feature
From Control Feature
From Protection Feature
Assigned Aux Output:
Relay Status (Ready = 1)
Self-Reset
Latched
RELAY 3 AUXILIARY
OUTPUT TYPE
SETPOINT
OR
RESET (Input)
S4 Control
RESET (Communications)
RESET (Relay Keypad)
OR
Critical Failure Relay 4 - Input/Output “R”
When the SWITCHING DEVICE is selected as CONTACTOR, the Critical Failure Relay behaves
in the same way as when the SWITCHING DEVICE is selected as BREAKER.
Virtual inputs
There are 32 virtual inputs that can be individually programmed to respond to input
commands entered via the relay keypad, or by using communication protocols.
Virtual input programming begins with enabling the Virtual Input Function, and selecting
the Virtual Input Type Self-Reset or Latched under SETPOINTS > S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS >
VIRTUAL INPUTS. Next, the user can assign a command On/Off to the enabled Virtual Input
6–186
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
under SETPOINTS > S4 CONTROLS > VIRTUAL INPUTS. Referring to the Virtual Inputs logic
diagram below, a Virtual Input type can be selected to be either Self-Reset, or Latched.
When Self-Reset is selected and the “On” command is executed, the virtual input is
evaluated as a pulse at a rate of one protection pass. To prolong the time of the virtual
input pulse, one can assign it as a trigger source to a logic element with a dropout timer
set to the desired pulse time. Selecting the Latched type, will latch the virtual input state,
when the “On” command is executed.
The following path is available using the keypad. For instructions on how to use the
keypad, please refer to Chapter 3 - Working with the Keypad.
PATH: SETPOINTS > S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS > VIRTUAL INPUTS
VI x NAME
Range: 18 Characters
Default: Virtual IN x
This setting defines a programmable name for the Virtual Input.
VI x FUNCTION
Range: Disabled/Enabled
Default: Disabled
The Virtual Input is enabled and ready to be triggered when set to Enabled.
VI x TYPE
Range: Self-Reset, Latched
Default: Self-reset
When the Self-Reset type is selected, the Virtual Input will be evaluated for one
protection pass only, upon “On” initiation and it will reset. When the Latched type is
selected, the virtual input will keep the state “On” until reset command “Off” is initiated.
See also the Virtual Inputs section under S4 CONTROLS, on how to trigger a virtual input
signal state.
NOTE:
NOTE
The "On" state of the Virtual Input will not be retained in the case of cycling of the relay
control power supply.
NOTE:
NOTE
Figure 6-71: Virtual Inputs Scheme logic
SETPOINT
V INPUT FUNCTION
Disabled = 0
Enabled = 1
AND
S
“Virtual Input 1 to ON = 1"
LATCH
ACTUAL VALUES
“Virtual Input 1 to OFF = 0"
AND
V INPUT 1 NAME:
(Operand)
R
OR
V Input 1 Status
SETPOINT
Latched
Self-Reset
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
AND
V INPUT 1 TYPE
896774.cdr
6–187
S5 INPUTS/OUTPUTS
6–188
CHAPTER 6: SETPOINTS
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE
Grid Solutions
339 Motor Protection System
Chapter 7: Maintenance
Maintenance
Information about the relay and the breaker can be obtained through the features
included in the Maintenance page.
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
7–1
CHAPTER 7: MAINTENANCE
Figure 7-1: Main Maintenance menu - BREAKER condition
MAINTENANCE
M1 RELAY INFO
M2 MOTOR MAINTEN
M3 BKR MAINTENANCE
▼
M1 RELAY INFO
RELAY NAME
▼
ORDER CODE
M4 BKR MONITOR
RMIO
M5 RELAY MAINTENANCE
MAIN FIRMWARE REV
M6 FACTORY SERVICE
MAIN BUILD DATE
MAIN BUILD TIME
MAIN BOOT REVISION
MAIN BOOT DATE
MAIN BOOT TIME
COMM FIRMWARE REV
COMM BUILD DATE
COMM BUILD TIME
COMM BOOT REVISION
COMM BOOT DATE
M3 TRIP COIL
RLY1 COIL FUNCTION
▼
COMM BOOT TIME
RLY1 COIL DELAY
SERIAL NUMBER
ETHERNET MAC ADR
FPGA VERSION
BYPASS BKR STATUS
OUTPUT RELAY 4
OUTPUT RELAY 5
RMIO SLOT C REV
OUTPUT RELAY 6
RMIO SLOT D REV
RMIO SLOT E REV
RMIO SLOT F REV
M3 CLOSE COIL
RMIO SLOT G REV
RLY2 COIL FUNCTION
▼
RMIO SLOT H REV
RMIO SLOT I REV
RLY2 COIL DELAY
RMIO SLOT J REV
BYPASS BKR STATUS
OUTPUT RELAY 4
OUTPUT RELAY 5
M2 MOTOR MAINTEN
RUNNING TIME ALARM
OUTPUT RELAY 6
▼
RUNNING HOURS
M3 BKR TRIP COUNTER
OUTPUT RELAY 4
TRIP COUNT FUNC
OUTPUT RELAY 5
▼
OUTPUT RELAY 6
INITIAL TRIPS
M3 BKR MAINTENANCE
TRIP COIL
TRIP COUNTER LIMIT
OUTPUT RELAY 4
OUTPUT RELAY 5
CLOSE COIL
OUTPUT RELAY 6
BKR TRIP COUNTER
▼
M3 RESET COUNTERS
RESET COUNTERS
RST BKR TRIP COUNT
M4 BKR MONITOR
RELAY1 COIL
M5 AMBIENT TEMP
▼
AMBIENT TEMP
RELAY2 COIL
▼
BKR TRIP COUNTER
HI ALARM LEVEL
M5 RELAY MAINTENANCE
AMBIENT TEMP
896761A1.cdr
7–2
HYSTERESIS LEVEL
TIME DELAY
M6 FACTORY SERVICE
ENTER FACT. PSWD
LOW ALARM LEVEL
OUTPUT RELAY 4
OUTPUT RELAY 5
OUTPUT RELAY 6
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 7: MAINTENANCE
M1 RELAY INFORMATION
Figure 7-2: Main Maintenance menu - CONTACTOR condition
MAINTENANCE
M1 RELAY INFO
M2 MOTOR MAINTEN
M5 RELAY MAINT
▼
M1 RELAY INFO
RELAY NAME
▼
ORDER CODE
M6 FACTORY SERVICE
RMIO
MAIN FIRMWARE REV
MAIN BUILD DATE
MAIN BUILD TIME
MAIN BOOT REVISION
MAIN BOOT DATE
MAIN BOOT TIME
COMM FIRMWARE REV
COMM BUILD DATE
COMM BUILD TIME
COMM BOOT REVISION
COMM BOOT DATE
COMM BOOT TIME
SERIAL NUMBER
ETHERNET MAC ADR
FPGA VERSION
RMIO SLOT C REV
RMIO SLOT D REV
RMIO SLOT E REV
RMIO SLOT F REV
RMIO SLOT G REV
RMIO SLOT H REV
RMIO SLOT I REV
RMIO SLOT J REV
M3 MOTOR MAINTEN
RUNNING TIME ALARM
▼
RUNNING HOURS
OUTPUT RELAY 5
OUTPUT RELAY 6
M5 RELAY MAINT
AMBIENT TEMP
M6 FACTORY SERVICE
896770A2.cdr
ENTER FACT. PSWD
M1 Relay information
PATH: MAINTENANCE > M1 RELAY INFO
RELAY NAME
Range: alpha-numeric name of up to 18 characters
Default: Motor Name
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
7–3
M1 RELAY INFORMATION
CHAPTER 7: MAINTENANCE
ORDER CODE
339-EP5G5HESNP2EDN
This screen shows the relay Order Code.
RMIO
Range: G, GG, GGG, GGGG
Displays the validated RMIO. This value will be seen only if the RMIO module is installed.
MAIN FIRMWARE REVISION
1.41
This screen shows the relay Main Firmware Revision.
MAIN BUILD DATE
Aug 16 2010
This screen shows the relay Main Firmware Build Date.
MAIN BUILD TIME
16:32:38
This screen shows the relay Main Firmware Build Time.
MAIN BOOT REVISION
1.20
This screen shows the relay Main Boot Code Revision.
MAIN BOOT DATE
Dec 11 2009
This screen shows the relay Main Boot Code Build Date.
MAIN BOOT TIME
10:44:54
This screen shows the relay Main Boot Code Build Time.
COMM FIRMWARE REVISION
1.41
This screen shows the relay Comm Code Revision.
COMM BUILD DATE
Aug 16 2010
This screen shows the relay Comm Code Build Date.
COMM BUILD TIME
17:51:38
This screen shows the relay Comm Code Build Time.
COMM BOOT REVISION
1.20
This screen shows the relay Comm Boot Code Revision.
COMM BOOT TIME
11:47:17
This screen shows the relay Comm Boot Code Build Time.
SERIAL NUMBER
ML0A08M00133
Each 339 relay has a unique serial number.
ETHERNET MAC ADR
00:A0F4:00:0B:78
This screen shows the Ethernet MAC Address of the relay.
7–4
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 7: MAINTENANCE
M2 MOTOR MAINTENANCE
FPGA VERSION
1.00
This screen shows the FPGA Version.
RMIO SLOT C REV
1.75
RMIO SLOT D REV
1.75
RMIO SLOT E REV
1.75
RMIO SLOT F REV
1.75
RMIO SLOT G REV
1.75
RMIO SLOT H REV
1.75
RMIO SLOT I REV
1.75
RMIO SLOT J REV
1.75
M2 Motor maintenance
PATH: MAINTENANCE > M2 MOTOR MAINTEN
When the motor running time exceeds the setting RUNNING HOURS, a "Motor Running Hrs
Alarm” is generated, and this alarm can be assigned to any available auxiliary output
relays. To clear the counter for “Motor Running Hours”, use the command “S1 RELAY SETUP
/ PRESET STATISTICS / SET RUNNING HOURS” to preset this value to 0.
RUNNING TIME ALARM
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
This setting enables the Motor Running Time Alarm functionality. If this feature is not
required, set this setting to Disabled.
RUNNING HOURS
Range: 0 to 65535 hrs in steps of 1 hr
Default: 0 hrs
This setting specifies a motor running time above which an alarm should be issued.
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
7–5
M3 BREAKER MAINTENANCE
CHAPTER 7: MAINTENANCE
OUTPUT RELAY 4 to 6 / OUTPUT RELAY 5 to 6
Range: Do Not Operate, Operate
Default: Do Not Operate
Any assignable output relay can be selected to operate upon Motor Running Time Alarm
operation. When the SWITCHING DEVICE is selected as BREAKER, the assignable output
relays will be Output Relay 4 to 6. When the SWITCHING DEVICE is selected as
CONTACTOR, the assignable output relays will be Output Relay 5 to 6.
M3 Breaker maintenance
M3 Breaker Maintenance and associated functions are available only when the switching
device is set to BREAKER.
NOTE:
NOTE
Trip coil
The Trip coil monitoring is performed by a built-in voltage monitor on the Form A output
relay: #1 Trip. The voltage monitor is connected across the Form A contact, and effectively
the relay detects healthy current through the circuit. To do that, an external jumper must
be made between terminals “A2” and “A3” for Trip coil monitoring.
As long as the current through the Voltage Monitor is above the threshold of the trickle
currents (see Technical Specification for Form A output relays), the circuit integrity for the
Trip coil is effectively normal. If the Trip coil circuit gets disconnected, or if in general a high
resistance is detected in the circuitry, a Relay 1 Coil Monitor alarm will be set and the
“ALARM” and “MAINTENANCE” LEDs will be ON.
The Coil Monitor feature is not available with 339 INPUT/OUTPUT option ‘R’. Refer to the
Order Codes section to determine if this feature is supported.
NOTE:
NOTE
.
Example 1: The figure below shows the connections of the breaker trip coil to the relay’s
trip output relay for voltage monitoring of the trip circuit.
To monitor the trip coil circuit integrity, use the relay terminals “A2” and “B3” to connect the
Trip coil, and provide a jumper between terminals “A2” and “A3” (voltage monitor).
NOTE:
NOTE
Figure 7-3: Trip Coil circuit with voltage monitoring
DC +
Output Relay 1 (TRIP)
External
jumper
A2
B3
V
A3
52a
contact
Trip
Coil
896779.cdr
DC -
7–6
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 7: MAINTENANCE
M3 BREAKER MAINTENANCE
Example 2: Some applications require that the Trip coil be monitored continuously,
regardless of the breaker position (open or closed). This can be achieved by connecting a
suitable resistor (see the table) across breaker auxiliary contact 52a in the trip circuit. With
such connections, the trickle current will be maintained by the resistor when the breaker is
open. For these applications the setting for “BYPASS BKR STATUS” should be set to
ENABLED.
Figure 7-4: Trip circuit with continuous monitoring
DC +
Trip - form A contacts
External
jumper
A2
B3
V
A3
52a contact
R
By-pass
resistor
Trip
Coil
DC -
896780.cdr
The following path is available using the keypad. For instructions on how to use the
keypad, please refer to Chapter 3 - Working with the Keypad.
PATH: MAINTENANCE > M3 BKR MAINTENANCE > TRIP COIL
RLY1 COIL FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Alarm, Latched Alarm
Default: Disabled
Selecting Alarm, or Latched Alarm, enables the Trip Coil Monitor monitoring function. The
“ALARM” and “MAINTENANCE” LEDs will light up upon detection of a trip coil circuitry
problem. The “ALARM” LED will flash upon Trip Coil Monitor operating condition, with the
Trip Coil Monitor function selected as Alarm, and will self-reset, when the condition
clears. If Latched Alarm is selected, the “ALARM” LED will flash during the Trip Coil
Monitor condition, and will stay “ON” after the condition clears, until the reset command
is initiated. Any or all of output relays 4 to 6 can be selected to operate when the Trip Coil
Monitor function is selected as Alarm, or Latched Alarm.
RLY1 COIL DELAY
Range: 1 to 10 sec in steps of 1 sec
Default: 5 s
This setting defines the Trip Coil Monitor Delay, before targets appear on the display,
“ALARM” and “MAINTENANCE” LEDs light up on the front panel, and selected output
relays operate.
BYPASS BKR STATUS
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
Set the “BYPASS BKR STATUS” to Enabled when a by-pass resistor is connected across
the breaker auxiliary contact for continuous Trip circuit integrity monitoring. The circuits
will be monitored regardless of breaker position. When “BYPASS BKR STATUS” is set to
Disabled, monitoring of the trip coil will be blocked when the breaker is open.
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
7–7
M3 BREAKER MAINTENANCE
CHAPTER 7: MAINTENANCE
OUTPUT RELAY 4 to 6
Range: Do not operate, Operate
Default: Do not operate
Any, or all, of output relays 4 to 6 can be selected to operate upon detection of Trip Coil,
or a Trip coil circuitry problem. The selection of the relay outputs operation is available
no matter whether the Alarm, or Latched Alarm, function is selected.
7–8
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
SETPOINT
Trip Coil current above
threshold
Disable = 0
Enabled = 1
BYPASS BKR STATUS
SETPOINT
52a/b INPUTS
Breaker Closed
Trip
SETPOINT
tPKP
Message
Rly 1 Coil Mn Alrm
State: Pickup
RLY1 COIL DELAY:
LED: MAINTENANCE
Transient Recorder
Event Recorder
OUTPUT RELAY 6
OUTPUT RELAY 5
OUTPUT RELAY 4
SETPOINT:
Operate
output relays
upon
selection
R
LATCH
S
OR
From output relay 1 TRIP
Alarm
Latched Alarm
AND
Disabled = 0
RLY1 COIL FUNCTION:
RESET
Command
896784.cdr
Rly 1 Coil Mn Alrm
State: Operate
Message
LED: ALARM
CHAPTER 7: MAINTENANCE
M3 BREAKER MAINTENANCE
Figure 7-5: Trip Coil Monitoring logic diagram
AND
AND
OR
AND
OR
7–9
M3 BREAKER MAINTENANCE
CHAPTER 7: MAINTENANCE
Close coil
Close coil monitoring is performed by a built-in voltage monitor on the Form A output relay:
#2 Close. The voltage monitor is connected across the Form A contact, and effectively the
relay detects healthy current through the circuit. To do that, an external jumper should be
made between terminals “B4”, and “B5” for Close coil monitoring.
As long as the current through the Voltage Monitor is above the threshold of the trickle
currents (see Technical Specification for Form A output relays), the circuit integrity for the
Close coil is effectively normal. If the Close coil circuit gets disconnected, or if in general a
high resistance is detected in the circuitry, a Relay 2 Coil Monitor Alarm will be set and the
“ALARM” and “MAINTENANCE” LEDs will be on.
The Coil Monitor feature is not available with 339 INPUT/OUTPUT option ‘R’. Refer to the
Order Code section to determine if this feature is supported
NOTE:
NOTE
Example 1: The figure below shows the connection of the breaker close coil to the relay’s
close output relay for voltage monitoring of the close circuit.
To monitor the close coil circuit integrity, use the relay terminals “B4” and “A4” to connect
the Close coil, and provide a jumper between terminals “B4” and “B5” (voltage monitor).
NOTE:
NOTE
Figure 7-6: Close Coil circuit with voltage monitoring
DC +
Output Relay 2 (CLOSE)
External
jumper
B4
A4
V
B5
52b
contact
Close
Coil
896785.cdr
DC -
Example 2: Some applications require that the Close Coil be monitored continuously,
regardless of the breaker position (open or closed). This can be achieved by connecting a
suitable resistor (see the table) across breaker auxiliary contact 52b in the Close circuit.
With such connections, the trickle current will be maintained by the resistor when the
breaker is closed. For these applications the setting for “BYPASS BKR STATUS” should be set
to ENABLED.
7–10
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 7: MAINTENANCE
M3 BREAKER MAINTENANCE
Figure 7-7: Close Coil circuit with continuous monitoring
DC +
Close - form A contacts
External
jumper
B4
A4
V
B5
R
52b contact
By-pass
resistor
Close
Coil
DC -
896786.cdr
The following path is available using the keypad. For instructions on how to use the
keypad, please refer to Chapter 3 - Working with the Keypad.
PATH: MAINTENANCE > M3 BKR MAINTENANCE > CLOSE COIL
RLY2 COIL FUNCTION
Range: Disabled, Alarm, Latched Alarm
Default: Disabled
Selecting Alarm, or Latched Alarm, enables the Close Coil Monitor monitoring function.
The “ALARM” and “MAINTENANCE” LEDs will light up upon detection of a close coil
circuitry problem. The “ALARM” LED will flash upon a Close Coil Monitor operating
condition, with the Close Coil Monitor function selected as Alarm, and will self-reset,
when the condition clears. If Latched Alarm is selected, the “ALARM” LED will flash during
the Close Coil Monitor condition, and will stay “ON” after the condition clears, until the
reset command is initiated. Any or all of output relays 4 to 6 can be selected to operate
when the Close Coil Monitor function is selected as Alarm, or Latched Alarm.
RLY2 COIL DELAY
Range: 1 to 10 sec in steps of 1 sec
Default: 5 s
This setting defines the Close Coil Monitor Delay, before targets appear on the display,
“ALARM” and “MAINTENANCE” LEDs light up on the front panel, and selected output
relays operate.
BYPASS BKR STATUS
Range: Disabled, Enabled
Default: Disabled
Set the “BYPASS BKR STATUS” to Enabled when a by-pass resistor is connected across
the breaker auxiliary contact for continuous Close circuit integrity monitoring. The
circuits will be monitored regardless of breaker position. When “BYPASS BKR STATUS” is
set to Disabled, monitoring of the close coil will be blocked when the breaker is closed.
OUTPUT RELAY 4 to 6
Range: Do not operate, Operate
Default: Do not operate
Any, or all, of output relays 4 to 6 can be selected to operate upon detection of a Close
coil circuitry problem. The selection of the relay outputs operation is available no matter
whether the Alarm, or Latched Alarm, function is selected.
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
7–11
7–12
SETPOINT
Close Coil current
above threshold
Disable = 0
Enabled = 1
BYPASS BKR STATUS
SETPOINT
52a/b INPUTS
Breaker Open
Close
SETPOINT
tPKP
Message
Rly2 Coil Mn Alrm
State: Pickup
RLY2 COIL DELAY:
LED: MAINTENANCE
LATCH
OUTPUT RELAY 6
OUTPUT RELAY 5
896787.cdr
Transient Recorder
Event Recorder
Message
LED: ALARM
Rly2 Coil Mn Alrm
State: Operate
OUTPUT RELAY 4
SETPOINT:
Operate
output relays
upon
selection
R
S
OR
From output relay 2 CLOSE
Alarm
Latched Alarm
AND
Disabled = 0
RLY2 COIL FUNCTN:
RESET
Command
M3 BREAKER MAINTENANCE
CHAPTER 7: MAINTENANCE
Figure 7-8: Close coil monitoring logic diagram
AND
AND
OR
AND
OR
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 7: MAINTENANCE
M3 BREAKER MAINTENANCE
Breaker trip counter
When the total number of breaker trips detected reaches the TRIP COUNTER LIMIT
setpoint, an output will occur.
The following path is available using the keypad. For instructions on how to use the
keypad, please refer to Chapter 3 - Working with the Keypad.
PATH: MAINTENANCE > M3 BKR MAINTENANCE > BKR TRIP COUNTER
TRIP COUNT FUNC
Range: Disabled, Alarm, Latched Alarm
Default: Disabled
The selection of the Latched Alarm, or Alarm setting enables the BKR Trip Counter
function. The “ALARM” LED will turn on when the Total breaker trips reaches the TRIP
COUNTER LIMIT setting. The “ALARM” LED will flash when the BKR Trip Counter reaches
the TRIP COUNTER LIMIT setting with function selected as Alarm, and will reset, when the
trip counter is reset. The “ALARM” LED will latch when Latched Alarm is selected, until
the counter is reset, and the Reset command is initiated.
Any or all of output relays 4 to 6 can be selected to operate when the number of breaker
trips reaches the “TRIP COUNTER LIMIT,” regardless of the selected trip counter function.
INITIAL TRIPS
Range: 0 to 10000 in steps of 1
Default: 0
This setting defines the number of breaker trips, that occurred before enabling the
breaker trip counter for breaker monitoring.
TRIP COUNTER LIMIT
Range: 1 to 10000 trips in steps of 1
Default: 1 trip
This setting defines the limit number for breaker trips. The BKR TRIP COUNTER will
operate and produce an output if the number of breaker trips reaches the set limit.
OUTPUT RELAY 4 to 6
Range: Do not operate, Operate
Default: Do not operate
Any, or all, of output relays 4 to 6 can be selected to operate, upon the BKR TRIP
COUNTER condition.
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
7–13
7–14
SETPOINT
Yes
No = 0
RST BKR TRIP COUNT
SETPOINT
BKR CLOSE
REMOTE/LOCAL BKR OPEN CMD
Trip command
Set to Zero
Increment
Counter
Breaker
Initial Trips
Counter = Initial trips
+ new trips
BKR TRIP COUNTER
ACTUAL VALUES
SETPOINT
RUN
Reset Trip Counter
EVENT RECORDER
TOTAL = LIMIT
TRIP COUNTER LIMIT
LATCH
OUTPUT RELAY 3
SETPOINT
LED: ALARM
896788A1.cdr
Transient Recorder
Event Recorder
Trip Counter OP
Trip Counter PKP
Message
Operate
OUTPUT RELAY 4
output relays
upon
OUTPUT RELAY 5
selection
OUTPUT RELAY 6
R
S
OR
INITIAL TRIPS
Alarm
Latched Alarm
Disabled = 0
AND
TRIP COUNTER FUNC
SETPOINT
RESET
Command
M3 BREAKER MAINTENANCE
CHAPTER 7: MAINTENANCE
Figure 7-9: BKR Trip Counter logic diagram
AND
OR
OR
AND
Reset counters
This command clears the Trip Counters.
PATH: MAINTENANCE > M3 RESET COUNTERS > RESET BKR TRIP COUNT
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHAPTER 7: MAINTENANCE
M4 BREAKER MONITOR
RST BKR TRIP COUNT
Range: No, Yes
Default: No
Entering a "Yes" command will clear the Trip Counters, and an event - "Reset Trip
Counter" - will be recorded
M4 Breaker monitor
The status of the breaker trip and close coils, as well as the trip and close circuits, can be
monitored under MAINTENANCE > M4 BKR MONITOR. In the case where a breaker coil or
circuit fails, the relay will display the message "Unhealthy" for the corresponding coil.
Further information on the breaker is provided under BKR TRIP COUNTER, which displays
the number of trips. The counter can be reset under M3 RESET COUNTERS > RST BKR TRIP
COUNT set to "Yes".
PATH: MAINTENANCE > M4 BKR MONITOR
RELAY1 COIL
Healthy
Range: Healthy, Unhealthy
RELAY2 COIL
Healthy
Range: Healthy, Unhealthy
BKR TRIP COUNTER
5
Range: 0 to 50000 trips
M5 Relay maintenance
Ambient temperature
The SR3 has a temperature monitor feature that measures the ambient temperature
around the chassis of the relay. The relay extrapolates the ambient temperature from an
internal temperature sensor inside the product. This feature can be used to signal the
customer that the product is being subjected to temperatures that can degrade the
product life and proper action should be initiated. For example the air conditioning,
heating or ventilation system should be checked.
The purpose of the feature is to measure the immediate temperature around the product.
There are several factors that can alter the measurement that need to be considered for
the application of this feature.
•
Any forced air flow or obstructions that can interrupt even distribution of the ambient
temperature.
•
Installation of the relay should be for normal operation (CT, VT, inputs, outputs).
PATH: MAINTENANCE > M5 RELAY MAINTENANCE > AMBIENT TEMP
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
7–15
M5 RELAY MAINTENANCE
CHAPTER 7: MAINTENANCE
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE
Range: Disabled, Alarm, Latched Alarm
Default: Disabled
This setting enables the ambient temperature functionality. If the operating condition is
satisfied when Alarm is selected as the function, the “ALARM” LED will flash upon the
activating condition, and will automatically reset when the condition clears. If Latched
Alarm is selected, the LED “ALARM” will flash upon the activating condition, and will stay
“ON” after the condition clears, until a reset command is initiated. Any assignable output
relays can be selected to operate when this function is enabled.
HI ALARM LEVEL
Range: 20°C to 80°C in steps of 1°C
Default: 60°C
This setting specifies the temperature level monitored by the Ambient Temperature
Alarm high logic. The alarm will occur when the temperature remains above this level.
LOW ALARM LEVEL
Range: -40°C to 20°C in steps of 1°C
Default: 10°C
This setting specifies the temperature level monitored by the Ambient Temperature
Alarm low logic. The alarm will occur when the temperature remains below this level.
HYSTERESIS LEVEL
Range: 2°C to 10°C in steps of 1°C
Default: 2°C
This setting allows the user to select the dropout level for the feature.
TIME DELAY
Range: 1 to 60 min in steps of 1 min
Default: 1 min
This timer starts when either the high or low level thresholds have exceeded their
respective levels.
OUTPUT RELAY 4 to 6 / OUTPUT RELAY 5 to 6
Range: Do Not Operate, Operate
Default: Do Not Operate
Any assignable output relay can be selected to operate upon Ambient Temperature
Alarm operation. When the SWITCHING DEVICE is selected as BREAKER, the assignable
output relays will be Output Relay 4 to 6. When the SWITCHING DEVICE is selected as
CONTACTOR, the assignable output relays will be Output Relay 5 to 6.
7–16
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
896845.cdr
Latched Alarm
Alarm
SETTING
AMB TEMP ALARM
Disabled = 0
Off = 0
Off = 0
Remote Reset
Off = 0
Lockout Reset
Emergency Restart
SETTINGS
S4 CONTROLS
RUN
RUN
AND
AND
T < Low Temp
T > High Temp
Hi Alarm Level
Low Alarm Level
SETTINGS
AMB TEMP ALARM
Emergency Restart Input
Lockout Reset Input
Remote Reset Input
INPUTS
KEYPAD RESET
OR
AND
OR
OR
SETTING
TIME DELAY
RUN
tRST
Breaker
Contactor
AND
AND
SETTING
S2 SYSTEM SETUP
SWITCHING DEVICE
AND
AND
R
LATCH
S
R
LATCH
S
AND
AND
Output Relay 5
Output Relay 6
OR
OR
Operate
output
relays upon
selection
Amb Temp LO Alarm
State: Operate
Amb Temp LO Alarm
State: Pickup
TARGET MESSAGE
Amb Temp LO Alarm OP
Any Alarm OP
Amb Temp LO Alarm PKP
LOGIC OPERAND
Amb Temp HI Alarm
State: Operate
Amb Temp HI Alarm
State: Pickup
TARGET MESSAGE
Amb Temp HI Alarm OP
Any Alarm OP
Amb Temp HI Alarm PKP
LOGIC OPERAND
Output Relay 6
Output Relay 5
Output Relay 3
Output Relay 4
ASSIGNABLE AUX RELAYS
Operate
output
relays upon
selection
ASSIGNABLE AUX RELAYS
Output Relay 6
Output Relay 4
Output Relay 5
ASSIGNABLE AUX RELAYS
Operate
output
relays upon
selection
CHAPTER 7: MAINTENANCE
M5 RELAY MAINTENANCE
Figure 7-10: Ambient Temperature Alarm logic diagram
7–17
M6 FACTORY SERVICE
CHAPTER 7: MAINTENANCE
M6 Factory service
This feature is reserved for use by GE Multilin personnel for testing and calibration
purposes.
General maintenance
The 339 requires minimal maintenance. As a microprocessor-based relay, its
characteristics do not change over time. The expected service life of a 339 is 20 years
when the environment and electrical conditions are within stated specifications.
While the 339 performs continual self-tests, it is recommended that maintenance be
scheduled with other system maintenance. This maintenance can involve in-service, outof-service, or unscheduled maintenance.
In-service maintenance
1.
Visual verification of the analog values integrity, such as voltage and current (in
comparison to other devices on the corresponding system).
2.
Visual verification of active alarms, relay display messages, and LED indications.
3.
Visual inspection for any damage, corrosion, dust, or loose wires.
4.
Event recorder file download with further events analysis.
Out-of-service maintenance
FASTPATH:
1.
Check wiring connections for firmness.
2.
Analog values (currents, voltages, RTDs, analog inputs) injection test and metering
accuracy verification. Calibrated test equipment is required.
3.
Protection elements setting verification (analog values injection or visual verification
of setting file entries against relay settings schedule).
4.
Contact inputs and outputs verification. This test can be conducted by direct change
of state forcing or as part of the system functional testing.
5.
Visual inspection for any damage, corrosion, or dust.
6.
Event recorder file download with further events analysis.
To avoid deterioration of electrolytic capacitors, power up units that are stored in a deenergized state once per year, for one hour continuously.
Unscheduled maintenance (system interruption)
•
7–18
View the event recorder and oscillography for correct operation of inputs, outputs, and
elements.
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
GE
Grid Solutions
339 Motor Protection System
Appendix
Appendix
Warranty
For products shipped as of 1 October 2013, GE warrants most of its GE manufactured
products for 10 years. For warranty details including any limitations and disclaimers, see
our Terms and Conditions at https://www.gegridsolutions.com/multilin/warranty.htm
For products shipped before 1 October 2013, the standard 24-month warranty applies.
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
A–1
REPAIRS
Repairs
The firmware and software can be upgraded without return of the device to the factory.
For issues not solved by troubleshooting, the process to return the device to the factory for
repair is as follows:
•
Contact a GE Grid Solutions Technical Support Center. Contact information is found in
the first chapter.
•
Obtain a Return Materials Authorization (RMA) number from the Technical Support
Center.
•
Verify that the RMA and Commercial Invoice received have the correct information.
•
Tightly pack the unit in a box with bubble wrap, foam material, or styrofoam inserts or
packaging peanuts to cushion the item(s). You may also use double boxing whereby
you place the box in a larger box that contains at least 5 cm of cushioning material.
•
Ship the unit by courier or freight forwarder, along with the Commercial Invoice and
RMA, to the factory.
Customers are responsible for shipping costs to the factory, regardless of whether the
unit is under warranty.
•
Fax a copy of the shipping information to the GE Grid Solutions service department.
Use the detailed return procedure outlined at
https://www.gegridsolutions.com/multilin/support/ret_proc.htm
The current warranty and return information are outlined at
https://www.gegridsolutions.com/multilin/warranty.htm
A–2
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHANGE NOTES
Change notes
Manual Revision history
Table 1: Revision History
MANUAL P/N
RELEASE DATE
1601-9103-A1
12 February 2010
1601-9103-A2
16 February 2010
1601-9103-A3
6 December 2010
1601-9103-A6
9 December 2011
1601-9103-A7
29 February 2012
1601-9103-A8
18 September 2012
1601-9103-A9
13 June 2013
1601-9103-AA
10 July 2013
1601-9103-AB
26 August 2014
1601-9103-AC
26 February 2015
1601-9103-AD
31 September 2015
1601-9103-AE
17 December 2015
Table 2: Major Updates for 339-AE
Page Number
CHANGES
Changed manual revision number to AE
Changed branding to Grid Solutions
Updated logos
Chapter 1
Specifications, Data capture, updated Clock Accuracy
Specifications, Power Supply:
- Added Fuse rating
Specifications, Controls, Breaker Failure: added Reset Time
Specifications, Testing and certification:
- Added EAC certification
- Added Country of origin, Date of manufacture,
Declaration of Conformity
- Updated Dielectric voltage withstand test levels
Specifications, Environmental: added Noise rating
Chapter 3
Added Upgrading the software
Updated Downloading and saving setpoint files
Added Uninstalling files and clearing data
Chapter 7
Added General maintenance
Table 3: Major Updates for 339-AD
Page Number
CHANGES
Manual revision number to AD, 339 revision to 1.7
Chapter 2
Updated installation drawings; added adaptor plate.
Chapter 3
Added Flexcurve Editor section.
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
A–3
CHANGE NOTES
Table 3: Major Updates for 339-AD
Page Number
CHANGES
Chapter 6
Added VFD section and related notes.
Added Flexcurves section.
General
Minor Corrections
Table 4: Major Updates for 339-AC
Page Number
CHANGES
Manual revision number to AC
Chapter 6
Added description to specify which curve the relay uses in the
Thermal O/L Curve setting
General
Minor Corrections
Table 5: Major Updates for 339-AB
Page Number
CHANGES
Manual revision number to AB and 339 revision number to 1.5x
Chapter 1
Added note to specifications
Chapter 3
Updated hardware and software requirements.
Chapter 3
Replaced image for Transient Recorder Viewer window with
updated image.
General
Minor Corrections
Table 6: Major Updates for 339-AA
Page Number
CHANGES
Manual revision number to AA
Chapter 2
Update RTD wiring and Motor protection system figures
Chapter 6
Update Main communications menu figure
Chapter 6
Clarify SR3 IEC 61850 GOOSE details
General
Minor Corrections
Table 7: Major Updates for 339-A9
Page Number
CHANGES
Manual revision number to A9
Chapter 1
Update Type Tests table
General
Minor Corrections
Table 8: Major Updates for 339-A8
Page Number
CHANGES
Manual revision number to A8
Chapter 1
A–4
Add Case design option N (relay with non-drawout design)
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
CHANGE NOTES
Table 8: Major Updates for 339-A8
Page Number
CHANGES
Chapter 2
Add dimensions, mounting and wiring for non-drawout unit
General
Minor Corrections
Table 9: Major Updates for 339-A7
Page Number
CHANGES
Manual revision number to A7
Chapter 2
Change Control Power parameters
Table 10: Major Updates for 339-A6
Page Number
CHANGES
Manual revision number to A6
General
Add support for Input/Output option "R"
General
Add support for additional safety/protection elements
Table 11: Major Updates for 339-A4 and A5
Page Number
CHANGES
Incremental changes and revisions
Table 12: Major Updates for 339-A3
Page Number
CHANGES
Manual revision number from A2 to A3
Chapter 1
Add Comm Option 3E to Order Code Table
Chapter 7
Add Ambient Temp section (Ch 7 - Maintenance)
General
Increase number of Logic Elements to 16
General
Minor Corrections
Table 13: Major Updates for 339-A2
Page Number
CHANGES
Manual revision number from A1 to A2
General
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Minor Corrections
A–5
CHANGE NOTES
A–6
339 MOTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM – INSTRUCTION MANUAL
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising